502-1198 Engineering Report 09Mar06 Rev A 3 dB SC Singlemode Fiber Optic Buildout Attenuators 1. SCOPE This report covers testing performed by Telcordia Technologies Inc. on Tyco Electronics 3 dB SC Singlemode Fiber Optic Buildout Attenuators to the requirements of Telcordia GR-910-CORE, Generic Requirements for Fiber Optic Attenuators. A summary of this testing is shown below. A full record of the testing (Telcordia Test DA-1543) begins on page 2. Summary: 3 dB Attenuators Attenuation Tolerance Spec: Performance Criteria 4-1 R Meet optical & damage criteria FAIL 4-2 R Controlled Environment PASS 4-3 CR Uncontrolled Environment 4-4 R Non-operating Environment: (See below) PASS PASS 4-5 R (lo temp, hi temp, hi rel humid) PASS 4-6 R Humidity/Condensation PASS 4-7 R Water Immersion PASS 4-8 R Vibration PASS Side Pull (during) 4-11 R Side Pull (after) )IL @ 1625 )IL @ 1625 )IL @ all 4 )IL @ 1550, 1625 )IL @ all 4 )IL @ all 4 4-12 R Cable retention 4-13 R Durability PASS 4-16 R Impact PASS 4-17 CR Optical bandpass PASS 4-18 CO Optical bandpass PASS 4-19 CR Optical bandpass PASS 4-20 R Comments 0.5 dB )IL 0.5 dB Optical bandpass i1.04: 0.56 dB i1.06: 0.66 dB i1.10: 1.29/1.82/2.04/1.53 dB i1.06: 0.64/0.84 dB i1.10: 1.23/1.82/2.04/1.54 dB i1.09: 1.73/2.17/2.19/2.19 dB PASS 4-21 CR Change in Attenuation FAIL (See above) 4-22 CR Change in Attenuation FAIL (See above) 4-23 CR Attenuation Tolerance PASS 4-24 CR Attenuation Tolerance PASS 4-25 R Attenuation increments/range PASS 4-29 CO Attenuation increments/range PASS 4-30 R Reflectance (</= -40 dB) 4-31 CR Reflectance (</= -55 dB) 4-33 R PASS PASS PDL PASS 4-34 CR PDL PASS 4-35 CR PDL PASS 4-36 CR PMD 4-37 R PASS Damage PASS Note: During failure analysis Tyco internally re-tested 3 dB samples that failed Side Pull (after) and Cable Retention. No failures were reproduced. See Test Report G912-008 for more information. (c)2006 Tyco Electronics Corporation Harrisburg, PA All International Rights Reserved * Trademark | Indicates change 1 of 335 502-1198 Rev A LOC B Telcordia Test Report No. DA-1543 Issue 1, Revision 4 Page 1 of 334 Test Location: Piscataway, NJ Report Format: Verizon Format: Client Format: Other Format: Features, Functions & Performance Analysis Test Report for Tyco Electronics 3-dB SC Singlemode Fiber Optic Buildout Attenuators Prepared For: Tyco Electronics Corporation Prepared By: Telcordia Technologies, Inc. Issued: February 3, 2005 Prepared By: Christopher Hood Approved By: Rudi Schubert Reviewed By: Osman Gebizlioglu Telcordia Technologies, Inc. Confidential -- Restricted Access This document and the confidential information it contains shall be distributed, routed or made available solely to authorized persons having a need to know within Telcordia, except with written permission of Telcordia. 502-1198 Rev A Confidential -- Restricted Access Tyco Electronics 3-dB SC Singlemode Fiber Optic Buildout Attenuators Copyright Page DA-1543 Issue 1, Revision 4 February 3, 2005 TP-910 Test Report for Tyco Electronics 3-dB SC Singlemode Fiber Optic Buildout Attenuators This document was prepared by: Telcordia Technologies Fiber, Transport, and Synchronization Technologies Group For more information, contact Telcordia Technologies at 1.800.521.2673 (from the USA and Canada) or +1.732.699.5800 (all others), or visit our Web site at: http://www.telcordia.com. Copyright (c) 2005 Telcordia Technologies, Inc. All rights reserved. This document may not be reproduced without the express written permission of Telcordia Technologies, and any reproduction without written authorization is an infringement of copyright. Telcordia Contacts Administrative Technical Rudi Schubert Director Telcordia Technologies, Inc. One Telcordia Drive, RRC-4D656 Piscataway, NJ 08854-4157 + 1.732.699.3460 Osman S. Gebizlioglu Program Manager Telcordia Technologies, Inc. One Telcordia Drive, RRC-4D655 Piscataway, NJ 08854-4157 + 1.732.699.3378 Supplier Contacts David Fisher Manager, Product Assurance/ Fiber Optics Test Lab Fiber Optics Business Unit Tyco Electronics Corporation P.O. Box 3608 M.S. 258-29 Harrisburg, PA. 17105-3608 + 1.717.986.5501 + 1.717.986.3244 david.fisher@tycoelectronics.com Christina Bennett Product Engineer Fiber Optics Business Unit Tyco Electronics Corporation P.O. Box 3608 M.S. 258-05 Harrisburg, PA. 17105-3608 + 1.717.986.3142 + 1.717.986.5965 christina.bennett@tycoelectronics.com Telcordia Technologies, Inc. Confidential -- Restricted Access See confidentiality restrictions on title page. ii 502-1198 Rev A DA-1543 Issue 1, Revision 4 February 3, 2005 Confidential -- Restricted Access Tyco Electronics 3-dB SC Singlemode Fiber Optic Buildout Attenuators Trademark Acknowledgments Telcordia is a trademark of Telcordia Technologies, Inc. All other brand or product names are trademarks of their respective companies or organizations. Telcordia Technologies, Inc. Confidential -- Restricted Access See confidentiality restrictions on title page. 502-1198 Rev A iii Confidential -- Restricted Access Tyco Electronics 3-dB SC Singlemode Fiber Optic Buildout Attenuators DA-1543 Issue 1, Revision 4 February 3, 2005 Telcordia Technologies, Inc. Confidential -- Restricted Access See confidentiality restrictions on title page. iv 502-1198 Rev A DA-1543 Issue 1, Revision 4 February 3, 2005 Confidential -- Restricted Access Tyco Electronics 3-dB SC Singlemode Fiber Optic Buildout Attenuators Contents Contents 1.0 Administrative Data (not from GR-910) 1.1 1.2 1.3 1.4 1.5 Description of Test Item(s) (not from GR-910) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Part Number(s) and Serial Number(s) of Test Item(s) (not from GR-910) Location(s) of Manufacturing (not from GR-910) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Test/Evaluation Location(s) and Dates (not from GR-910) . . . . . . . . References (not from GR-910) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-1 1-1 1-1 1-2 1-2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-1 2-1 2-3 2-4 2-5 2-6 2-6 2-6 2-6 2-6 2-8 3.1 Documentation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.1.1 General Documentation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.1.1.1 Criteria - General Documentation (heading not from GR-910) . . 3.1.1.2 Test Method (not from GR-910) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.1.1.3 Test Flowchart (not from GR-910) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.1.1.4 Test Configuration and Conditions (not from GR-910) . . . . . . 3.1.1.5 Test Apparatus (not from GR-910) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.1.1.6 Summary of Test Results (not from GR-910) . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.1.2 Workcenter Information Package . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.2 Marking, Packaging and Shipping . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.2.1 Criteria - Marking, Packaging and Shipping (heading not from GR-910) 3.2.2 Test Method (not from GR-910) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.2.3 Test Flowchart (not from GR-910) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.2.4 Test Configuration and Conditions (not from GR-910) . . . . . . . . . 3.2.5 Test Apparatus (not from GR-910) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.2.6 Summary of Test Results (not from GR-910) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.3 Physical Design Criteria . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.3.1 Optical Fiber . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.3.1.1 Criteria - Optical Fiber (heading not from GR-910) . . . . . . . . 3.3.1.2 Test Method (not from GR-910) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.3.1.3 Test Flowchart (not from GR-910) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-1 3-1 3-1 3-3 3-5 3-5 3-5 3-5 3-6 3-6 3-6 3-7 3-9 3-10 3-10 3-10 3-10 3-10 3-11 3-11 3-13 2.0 General Information 2.1 General Product Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.2 Attenuator Technology . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.3 Attenuator Applications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.3.1 Environmental Conditions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.4 Recommended Methods and Procedures (not from GR-910) 2.5 Test Equipment (not from GR-910) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.6 Optical Data Guidelines (not from GR-910) . . . . . . . . . . 2.6.1 Acquisition of Optical Data (not from GR-910) . . . . 2.6.2 Analysis of Optical Data (not from GR-910) . . . . . 2.7 Test Sequence and Schedule (not from GR-910) . . . . . . . 2.8 Test Samples . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.0 General and Design Criteria Telcordia Technologies, Inc. Confidential -- Restricted Access See confidentiality restrictions on title page. 502-1198 Rev A v Confidential -- Restricted Access Tyco Electronics 3-dB SC Singlemode Fiber Optic Buildout Attenuators Contents DA-1543 Issue 1, Revision 4 February 3, 2005 3.3.1.4 Test Configuration and Conditions (not from GR-910) . . 3.3.1.5 Test Apparatus (not from GR-910) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.3.1.6 Summary of Test Results (not from GR-910) . . . . . . . . 3.3.2 Optical Connectors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.3.2.1 Criteria - Optical Connectors (heading not from GR-910) . 3.3.2.2 Test Method (not from GR-910) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.3.2.3 Test Flowchart (not from GR-910) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.3.2.4 Test Configuration and Conditions (not from GR-910) . . 3.3.2.5 Test Apparatus (not from GR-910) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.3.2.6 Summary of Test Results (not from GR-910) . . . . . . . . 3.3.3 Cleanability . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.3.3.1 Criteria - Cleanability (heading not from GR-910) . . . . . 3.3.3.2 Test Method (not from GR-910) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.3.3.3 Test Flowchart (not from GR-910) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.3.3.4 Test Configuration and Conditions (not from GR-910) . . 3.3.3.5 Test Apparatus (not from GR-910) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.3.3.6 Summary of Test Results (not from GR-910) . . . . . . . . 3.3.4 Intermateability . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.3.4.1 Criteria - Intermateability (heading not from GR-910) . . . 3.3.4.2 Test Method (not from GR-910) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.3.4.3 Test Flowchart (not from GR-910) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.3.4.4 Test Configuration and Conditions (not from GR-910) . . 3.3.4.5 Test Apparatus (not from GR-910) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.3.4.6 Summary of Test Results (not from GR-910) . . . . . . . . 3.3.5 Materials . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.3.5.1 Toxicity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.3.5.2 Corrosion Resistance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.3.5.3 Dissimilar Metals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.3.5.4 Fungus Resistance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.3.5.5 Flammability . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.3.5.6 Test Method (not from GR-910) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.3.5.7 Test Flowchart (not from GR-910) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.3.5.8 Test Configuration and Conditions (not from GR-910) . . 3.3.5.9 Test Apparatus (not from GR-910) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.3.5.10 Summary of Test Results (not from GR-910) . . . . . . . 3.3.6 Safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.3.6.1 Criteria - Safety (heading not from GR-910) . . . . . . . . 3.3.6.2 Test Method (not from GR-910) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.3.6.3 Test Flowchart (not from GR-910) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.3.6.4 Test Configuration and Conditions (not from GR-910) . . 3.3.6.5 Test Apparatus (not from GR-910) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.3.6.6 Summary of Test Results (not from GR-910) . . . . . . . . 3.3.7 Mounting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.3.7.1 Criteria - Mounting (heading not from GR-910) . . . . . . 3.3.7.2 Test Method (not from GR-910) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.3.7.3 Test Flowchart (not from GR-910) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.3.7.4 Test Configuration and Conditions (not from GR-910) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-14 3-14 3-14 3-14 3-14 3-15 3-16 3-16 3-16 3-17 3-17 3-17 3-17 3-18 3-19 3-19 3-19 3-19 3-20 3-20 3-21 3-21 3-21 3-21 3-22 3-22 3-22 3-22 3-23 3-23 3-23 3-25 3-25 3-25 3-26 3-27 3-27 3-27 3-28 3-29 3-29 3-29 3-29 3-30 3-30 3-31 3-32 Telcordia Technologies, Inc. Confidential -- Restricted Access See confidentiality restrictions on title page. vi 502-1198 Rev A DA-1543 Issue 1, Revision 4 February 3, 2005 Confidential -- Restricted Access Tyco Electronics 3-dB SC Singlemode Fiber Optic Buildout Attenuators Contents 3.3.7.5 Test Apparatus (not from GR-910) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.3.7.6 Summary of Test Results (not from GR-910) . . . . . . . . . 3.3.8 Index Matching . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.3.8.1 Criteria - Index Matching (heading not from GR-910) . . . . 3.3.8.2 Test Method (not from GR-910) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.3.8.3 Test Flowchart (not from GR-910) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.3.8.4 Test Configuration and Conditions (not from GR-910) . . . 3.3.8.5 Test Apparatus (not from GR-910) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.3.8.6 Summary of Test Results (not from GR-910) . . . . . . . . . 3.3.9 Change of Attenuation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.3.9.1 Criteria - Change of Attenuation (heading not from GR-910) 3.3.9.2 Test Method (not from GR-910) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.3.9.3 Test Flowchart (not from GR-910) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.3.9.4 Test Configuration and Conditions (not from GR-910) . . . 3.3.9.5 Test Apparatus (not from GR-910) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.3.9.6 Summary of Test Results (not from GR-910) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-32 3-32 3-33 3-33 3-33 3-34 3-34 3-34 3-35 3-35 3-35 3-35 3-37 3-38 3-38 3-38 4.1 Environmental and Mechanical Criteria . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.1.1 Controlled Operating Environment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.1.1.1 Criteria - Controlled Operating Environment (heading not from GR-910) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.1.1.2 Test Method (not from GR-910) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.1.1.3 Test Flowchart (not from GR-910) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.1.1.4 Test Configuration and Conditions (not from GR-910) . . . . . . . 4.1.1.5 Test Apparatus (not from GR-910) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.1.1.6 Summary of Test Results (not from GR-910) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.1.2 Uncontrolled Operating Environment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.1.2.1 Criteria - Uncontrolled Operating Environment (heading not from GR-910) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.1.2.2 Test Method (not from GR-910) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.1.2.3 Test Flowchart (not from GR-910) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.1.2.4 Test Configuration and Conditions (not from GR-910) . . . . . . . 4.1.2.5 Test Apparatus (not from GR-910) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.1.2.6 Summary of Test Results (not from GR-910) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.1.3 Non-Operating Environment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.1.3.1 Criteria - Non-Operating Environment (heading not from GR-910) 4.1.3.2 Test Method (not from GR-910) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.1.3.2.1 Low-Temperature Exposure and Thermal Shock . . . . . . . 4.1.3.2.2 High-Temperature Exposure and Thermal Shock . . . . . . . 4.1.3.2.3 High Relative Humidity Exposure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.1.3.3 Test Flowchart (not from GR-910) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.1.3.4 Test Configuration and Conditions (not from GR-910) . . . . . . . 4.1.3.4.1 Low-Temperature Exposure and Thermal Shock . . . . . . . 4.1.3.4.2 High-Temperature Exposure and Thermal Shock . . . . . . . 4.1.3.4.3 High Relative Humidity Exposure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-2 4-3 4.0 Performance Criteria 4-3 4-3 4-5 4-6 4-8 4-9 4-15 4-15 4-15 4-17 4-18 4-20 4-20 4-26 4-26 4-27 4-27 4-28 4-29 4-31 4-32 4-32 4-33 4-34 Telcordia Technologies, Inc. Confidential -- Restricted Access See confidentiality restrictions on title page. 502-1198 Rev A vii Confidential -- Restricted Access Tyco Electronics 3-dB SC Singlemode Fiber Optic Buildout Attenuators Contents DA-1543 Issue 1, Revision 4 February 3, 2005 4.1.3.5 Test Apparatus (not from GR-910) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.1.3.6 Summary of Test Results (not from GR-910) . . . . . . . . . . 4.1.4 Humidity/Condensation Cycling Test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.1.4.1 Criteria - Humidity/Condensation Cycling (heading not from GR-910) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.1.4.2 Test Method (not from GR-910) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.1.4.3 Test Flowchart (not from GR-910) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.1.4.4 Test Configuration and Conditions (not from GR-910) . . . . 4.1.4.5 Test Apparatus (not from GR-910) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.1.4.6 Summary of Test Results (not from GR-910) . . . . . . . . . . 4.1.5 Water Immersion . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.1.5.1 Criteria - Water Immersion (heading not from GR-910) . . . . 4.1.5.2 Test Method (not from GR-910) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.1.5.3 Test Flowchart (not from GR-910) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.1.5.4 Test Configuration and Conditions (not from GR-910) . . . . 4.1.5.5 Test Apparatus (not from GR-910) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.1.5.6 Summary of Test Results (not from GR-910) . . . . . . . . . . 4.1.6 Vibration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.1.6.1 Criteria - Vibration (heading not from GR-910) . . . . . . . . 4.1.6.2 Test Method (not from GR-910) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.1.6.3 Test Flowchart (not from GR-910) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.1.6.4 Test Configuration and Conditions (not from GR-910) . . . . 4.1.6.5 Test Apparatus (not from GR-910) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.1.6.6 Summary of Test Results (not from GR-910) . . . . . . . . . . 4.1.7 Flex Test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.1.7.1 Criteria - Flex (heading not from GR-910) . . . . . . . . . . . 4.1.7.2 Test Method (not from GR-910) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.1.7.3 Test Flowchart (not from GR-910) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.1.7.4 Test Configuration and Conditions (not from GR-910) . . . . 4.1.7.5 Test Apparatus (not from GR-910) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.1.7.6 Summary of Test Results (not from GR-910) . . . . . . . . . . 4.1.8 Twist Test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.1.8.1 Criteria - Twist (heading not from GR-910) . . . . . . . . . . . 4.1.8.2 Test Method (not from GR-910) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.1.8.3 Test Flowchart (not from GR-910) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.1.8.4 Test Configuration and Conditions (not from GR-910) . . . . 4.1.8.5 Test Apparatus (not from GR-910) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.1.8.6 Summary of Test Results (not from GR-910) . . . . . . . . . . 4.1.9 Side Pull Load . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.1.9.1 Criteria - Side Pull Load (heading not from GR-910) . . . . . 4.1.9.2 Test Method (not from GR-910) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.1.9.3 Test Flowchart (not from GR-910) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.1.9.4 Test Configuration and Conditions (Not from GR-910) . . . . 4.1.9.5 Test Apparatus (not from GR-910) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.1.9.6 Summary of Test Results (not from GR-910) . . . . . . . . . . 4.1.10 Cable Retention . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.1.10.1 Criteria - Cable Retention (heading not from GR-910) . . . . . . . 4-36 . . . 4-36 . . . 4-45 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-45 . 4-45 . 4-46 . 4-47 . 4-48 . 4-49 . 4-55 . 4-55 . 4-56 . 4-57 . 4-58 . 4-59 . 4-60 . 4-66 . 4-66 . 4-66 . 4-67 . 4-68 . 4-69 . 4-70 . 4-73 . 4-73 . 4-74 . 4-75 . 4-76 . 4-79 . 4-80 . 4-80 . 4-80 . 4-80 . 4-82 . 4-83 . 4-86 . 4-87 . 4-87 . 4-87 . 4-87 . 4-89 . 4-90 . 4-93 . 4-94 4-102 4-102 Telcordia Technologies, Inc. Confidential -- Restricted Access See confidentiality restrictions on title page. viii 502-1198 Rev A DA-1543 Issue 1, Revision 4 February 3, 2005 Confidential -- Restricted Access Tyco Electronics 3-dB SC Singlemode Fiber Optic Buildout Attenuators Contents 4.1.10.2 Test Method (not from GR-910) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.1.10.3 Test Flowchart (not from GR-910) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.1.10.4 Test Configuration and Conditions (not from GR-910) . . 4.1.10.5 Test Apparatus (not from GR-910) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.1.10.6 Summary of Test Results (not from GR-910) . . . . . . . . 4.1.11 Durability . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.1.11.1 Criteria - Durability (heading not from GR-910) . . . . . . 4.1.11.2 Test Method (not from GR-910) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.1.11.3 Test Flowchart (Not from GR-910) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.1.11.4 Test Configuration and Conditions (not from GR-910) . . 4.1.11.5 Test Apparatus (not from GR-910) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.1.11.6 Summary of Test Results (not from GR-910) . . . . . . . . 4.1.12 Impact Test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.1.12.1 Criteria - Impact (heading not from GR-910) . . . . . . . . 4.1.12.2 Test Method (not from GR-910) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.1.12.3 Test Flowchart (not from GR-910) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.1.12.4 Test Configuration and Conditions (not from GR-910) . . 4.1.12.5 Test Apparatus (not from GR-910) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.1.12.6 Summary of Test Results (not from GR-910) . . . . . . . . 4.2 Optical Criteria . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.2.1 Optical Bandpass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.2.1.1 Criteria - Optical Bandpass (heading not from GR-910) . . . 4.2.1.2 Test Method (not from GR-910) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.2.1.3 Test Flowchart (not from GR-910) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.2.1.4 Test Configuration and Conditions (not from GR-910) . . . 4.2.1.5 Test Apparatus (not from GR-910) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.2.1.6 Summary of Test Results (not from GR-910) . . . . . . . . . 4.2.2 Change in Attenuation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.2.2.1 Criteria - Change in Attenuation (heading not from GR-910) 4.2.2.2 Test Method (not from GR-910) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.2.2.3 Test Flowchart (not from GR-910) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.2.2.4 Test Configuration and Conditions (not from GR-910) . . . 4.2.2.5 Test Apparatus (not from GR-910) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.2.2.6 Summary of Test Results (not from GR-910) . . . . . . . . . 4.2.3 Attenuation Tolerance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.2.3.1 Criteria - Attenuation Tolerance (heading not from GR-910) 4.2.3.2 Test Method (not from GR-910) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.2.3.3 Test Flowchart (not from GR-910) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.2.3.4 Test Configuration and Conditions (not from GR-910) . . . 4.2.3.5 Test Apparatus (not from GR-910) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.2.3.6 Summary of Test Results (not from GR-910) . . . . . . . . . 4.2.4 Attenuation Increments and Range . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.2.4.1 Criteria - Attenuation Increments and Range (heading not from GR-910) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.2.4.2 Test Method (not from GR-910) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.2.4.3 Test Flowchart (not from GR-910) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.2.4.4 Test Configuration and Conditions (not from GR-910) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-102 4-103 4-104 4-107 4-108 4-111 4-111 4-112 4-114 4-115 4-117 4-117 4-121 4-121 4-121 4-123 4-124 4-124 4-125 4-128 4-129 4-129 4-130 4-132 4-133 4-136 4-136 4-137 4-137 4-138 4-138 4-138 4-141 4-141 4-142 4-143 4-143 4-143 4-143 4-146 4-147 4-148 . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-148 4-149 4-149 4-149 Telcordia Technologies, Inc. Confidential -- Restricted Access See confidentiality restrictions on title page. 502-1198 Rev A ix Confidential -- Restricted Access DA-1543 Issue 1, Revision 4 February 3, 2005 Tyco Electronics 3-dB SC Singlemode Fiber Optic Buildout Attenuators Contents 4.2.4.5 Test Apparatus (not from GR-910) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.2.4.6 Summary of Test Results (not from GR-910) . . . . . . . . 4.2.5 Reflectance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.2.5.1 Criteria - Reflectance (heading not from GR-910) . . . . . 4.2.5.2 Test Method (not from GR-910) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.2.5.3 Test Flowchart (not from GR-910) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.2.5.4 Test Configuration and Conditions (not from GR-910) . . 4.2.5.5 Test Apparatus (not from GR-910) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.2.5.6 Summary of Test Results (not from GR-910) . . . . . . . . 4.2.6 Polarization-Dependent Loss (PDL) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.2.6.1 Criteria - Polarization-Dependent Loss (heading not from GR-910) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.2.6.2 Test Method (not from GR-910) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.2.6.3 Test Flowchart (not from GR-910) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.2.6.4 Test Configuration and Conditions (not from GR-910) . . 4.2.6.5 Test Apparatus (not from GR-910) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.2.6.6 Summary of Test Results (not from GR-910) . . . . . . . . 4.2.7 Polarization-Mode Dispersion (PMD) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.2.7.1 Criteria - Polarization Mode Dispersion (heading not from GR-910) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.2.7.2 Test Method (not from GR-910) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.2.7.3 Test Flowchart (not from GR-910) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.2.7.4 Test Configuration and Conditions (not from GR-910) . . 4.2.7.5 Test Apparatus (not from GR-910) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.2.7.6 Summary of Test Results (not from GR-910) . . . . . . . . 4.2.8 Damage Criteria . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.2.8.1 Criteria - Damage (heading not from GR-910) . . . . . . . 4.2.8.2 Test Method (not from GR-910) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.2.8.3 Test Flowchart (not from GR-910) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.2.8.4 Test Configuration and Conditions (not from GR-910) . . 4.2.8.5 Test Apparatus (not from GR-910) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.2.8.6 Summary of Test Results (not from GR-910) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-152 4-152 4-153 4-153 4-154 4-154 4-154 4-155 4-156 4-157 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-157 4-158 4-160 4-163 4-165 4-165 4-166 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-166 4-167 4-168 4-169 4-170 4-170 4-171 4-172 4-172 4-172 4-172 4-172 4-172 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.0 Performance Verification/Test Procedures 5.1 Environmental and Mechanical Testing . . . 5.1.1 Controlled Operating Environment . 5.1.2 Uncontrolled Operating Environment 5.1.3 Non-Operating Environment . . . . . 5.1.4 Humidity/Condensation Cycling Test 5.1.5 Water Immersion . . . . . . . . . . . 5.1.6 Vibration Test . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.1.7 Flex Test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.1.8 Twist Test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.1.9 Side Pull . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.1.10 Cable Retention . . . . . . . . . . . 5.1.11 Durability . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-2 5-3 5-4 5-5 5-5 5-6 5-6 5-7 5-7 5-8 5-8 5-9 Telcordia Technologies, Inc. Confidential -- Restricted Access See confidentiality restrictions on title page. x 502-1198 Rev A DA-1543 Issue 1, Revision 4 February 3, 2005 Confidential -- Restricted Access Tyco Electronics 3-dB SC Singlemode Fiber Optic Buildout Attenuators Contents 5.1.12 Impact Test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.2 Optical Testing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.2.1 Optical Bandpass . . . . . . . . . . . 5.2.2 Change in Attenuation . . . . . . . . 5.2.3 Attenuation Tolerance . . . . . . . . 5.2.4 Attenuation Increments and Range . 5.2.5 Reflectance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.2.6 Polarization-Dependent Loss (PDL) . 5.2.7 Polarization-Mode Dispersion (PMD) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-9 5-10 5-10 5-12 5-14 5-14 5-14 5-14 5-16 Structure and Format . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Component Type Character . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Fiber Type and Operating Wavelength Region Character Cable Type Character . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Attenuation Value Characters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Application Character . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Configuration Characters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Example . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-1 6-3 6-4 6-4 6-5 6-5 6-5 6-6 7.1 Reliability Assurance Requirements Philosophy . . . . . . . . . . . 7.2 Overview of Reliability Assurance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.3 Qualification Criteria . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.3.0.1 Criteria (heading not from GR-910) . . . . . . . . . . . 7.3.0.2 Test Method (not from GR-910) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.3.0.3 Test Flowchart (not from GR-910) . . . . . . . . . . . 7.3.0.4 Test Configuration and Conditions (not from GR-910) 7.3.0.5 Test Apparatus (not from GR-910) . . . . . . . . . . . 7.3.0.6 Summary of Test Results (not from GR-910) . . . . . . 7.3.1 Characterization . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.3.1.1 Criteria (heading not from GR-910) . . . . . . . . . . . 7.3.1.2 Test Method (not from GR-910) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.3.1.3 Test Flowchart (not from GR-910) . . . . . . . . . . . 7.3.1.4 Test Configuration and Conditions (not from GR-910) 7.3.1.5 Test Apparatus (not from GR-910) . . . . . . . . . . . 7.3.1.6 Summary of Test Results (not from GR-1221) . . . . . 7.3.2 Reliability Tests . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.3.2.1 Criteria (heading not from GR-910) . . . . . . . . . . . 7.3.2.2 Test Method (not from GR-910) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.3.2.3 Test Flowchart (not from GR-910) . . . . . . . . . . . 7.3.2.4 Test Configuration and Conditions (not from GR-910) 7.3.2.5 Test Apparatus (not from GR-910) . . . . . . . . . . . 7.3.2.6 Summary of Test Results (not from GR-910) . . . . . . 7.3.3 Failure Rate Prediction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.3.3.1 Criteria (heading not from GR-910) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-1 7-1 7-3 7-3 7-3 7-3 7-4 7-4 7-4 7-4 7-4 7-5 7-6 7-6 7-6 7-7 7-7 7-7 7-11 7-12 7-12 7-13 7-13 7-13 7-14 6.0 Passive Optical Component Code (POCC) 6.1 6.2 6.3 6.4 6.5 6.6 6.7 6.8 7.0 Reliability and Quality Assurance Program Telcordia Technologies, Inc. Confidential -- Restricted Access See confidentiality restrictions on title page. 502-1198 Rev A xi Confidential -- Restricted Access Tyco Electronics 3-dB SC Singlemode Fiber Optic Buildout Attenuators Contents DA-1543 Issue 1, Revision 4 February 3, 2005 7.3.3.2 Test Method (not from GR-910) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.3.3.3 Test Flowchart (not from GR-910) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.3.3.4 Test Configuration and Conditions (not from GR-910) . . . . 7.3.3.5 Test Apparatus (not from GR-910) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.3.3.6 Summary of Test Results (not from GR-910) . . . . . . . . . . 7.3.4 Optical Adhesives . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.3.5 Quality Assurance and Lot Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.3.5.1 Visual Inspection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.3.5.1.1 Criteria (heading not from GR-910) . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.3.5.1.2 Test Method (not from GR-910) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.3.5.1.3 Test Flowchart (not from GR-1221) . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.3.5.1.4 Test Configuration and Conditions (not from GR-1221) 7.3.5.1.5 Test Apparatus (not from GR-1221) . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.3.5.1.6 Summary of Test Results (not from GR-1221) . . . . . . 7.3.5.2 Optical Testing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.3.5.2.1 Criteria (heading not from GR-910) . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.3.5.2.2 Test Method (not from GR-910) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.3.5.2.3 Test Flowchart (not from GR-910) . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.3.5.2.4 Test Configuration and Conditions (not from GR-910) . 7.3.5.2.5 Test Apparatus (not from GR-910) . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.3.5.2.6 Summary of Test Results (not from GR-910) . . . . . . . 7.3.5.3 Stress Screening . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.3.5.3.1 Criteria (heading not from GR-910) . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.3.5.3.2 Test Method (not from GR-910) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.3.5.3.3 Test Flowchart (not from GR-910) . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.3.5.3.4 Test Configuration and Conditions (not from GR-910) . 7.3.5.3.5 Test Apparatus (not from GR-910) . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.3.5.3.6 Summary of Test Results (not from GR-910) . . . . . . . 7.3.6 Optical Adhesives . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.3.7 Optical Connectors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.3.8 Optical Fiber . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.4 Quality and Reliability Criteria . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.4.0.1 Criteria (heading not from GR-910) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.4.0.2 Test Method (not from GR-910) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.4.0.3 Test Flowchart (not from GR-910) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.4.0.4 Test Configuration and Conditions (not from GR-910) . . . . 7.4.0.5 Test Apparatus (not from GR-910) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.4.0.6 Summary of Test Results (not from GR-910) . . . . . . . . . . 7.4.1 Reliability Assurance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.4.1.1 Criteria (heading not from GR-910) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.4.1.2 Test Method (not from GR-910) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.4.1.3 Test Flowchart (not from GR-910) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.4.1.4 Test Configuration and Conditions (not from GR-910) . . . . 7.4.1.5 Test Apparatus (not from GR-910) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.4.1.6 Summary of Test Results (not from GR-910) . . . . . . . . . . 7.4.2 Quality Technology Program . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.4.2.1 Criteria (heading not from GR-910) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-17 7-18 7-19 7-19 7-19 7-19 7-20 7-20 7-20 7-20 7-21 7-21 7-21 7-22 7-22 7-22 7-22 7-23 7-24 7-24 7-24 7-25 7-25 7-25 7-26 7-27 7-27 7-27 7-28 7-28 7-28 7-28 7-28 7-29 7-30 7-30 7-30 7-31 7-31 7-31 7-32 7-32 7-32 7-32 7-32 7-33 7-33 Telcordia Technologies, Inc. Confidential -- Restricted Access See confidentiality restrictions on title page. xii 502-1198 Rev A DA-1543 Issue 1, Revision 4 February 3, 2005 7.4.2.2 7.4.2.3 7.4.2.4 7.4.2.5 7.4.2.6 Confidential -- Restricted Access Tyco Electronics 3-dB SC Singlemode Fiber Optic Buildout Attenuators Contents Test Method (not from GR-910) . . . . . . . . . . . . . Test Flowchart (not from GR-910) . . . . . . . . . . . Test Configuration and Conditions (not from GR-910) Test Apparatus (not from GR-910) . . . . . . . . . . . Summary of Test Results (not from GR-910) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-34 7-34 7-34 7-34 7-34 Telcordia Technologies, Inc. Confidential -- Restricted Access See confidentiality restrictions on title page. 502-1198 Rev A xiii Confidential -- Restricted Access Tyco Electronics 3-dB SC Singlemode Fiber Optic Buildout Attenuators Contents DA-1543 Issue 1, Revision 4 February 3, 2005 Telcordia Technologies, Inc. Confidential -- Restricted Access See confidentiality restrictions on title page. xiv 502-1198 Rev A DA-1543 Issue 1, Revision 4 February 3, 2005 Confidential -- Restricted Access Tyco Electronics 3-dB SC Singlemode Fiber Optic Buildout Attenuators List of Tables List of Tables TP-910 Table ES-1 TP-910 Table 1-1 TP-910 Table 2-1 GR-910 Table 4-1 GR-910 Table 4-2 TP-910 Table 4-1 TP-910 Table 4-2 GR-910 Table 4-3 GR-910 Table 5-1 GR-910 Table 5-2 GR-910 Table 6-1 GR-910 Table 6-2 GR-910 Table 6-3 GR-910 Table 6-4 GR-910 Table 6-5 GR-910 Table 6-6 GR-910 Table 6-7 GR-910 Table 7-1 Detailed Summary of Proposed Fiber Optic Attenuator Test Plan Criteria and Conformance Status . . . . . . . . Sample Name and Serial Number of Tested Samples, Hot Spares . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Testing Sequences and Estimated Durations . . . . . . . Summary of Attenuator Performance Criteria and Test Sequence . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Tensile Loads for Mechanical Tests . . . . . . . . . . . . Number of Turns for Twist Test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Side Pull Tensile Loading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Optical Bandpass Criteria . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Number of Turns for Twist Test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Side Pull Tensile Loading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Passive Optical Component Manufacturer Code POCC . POCC Character Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . POCC Character S1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . POCC Character S2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . POCC Character S3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . POCC Character S8 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . POCC Interpretation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Test Matrix for Demonstrating Acceleration Factors [Relative Humidity as a Function of Temperature and Absolute Humidity] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ES-5 . . 1-1 . . 2-7 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-1 . 4-3 . 4-83 . 4-90 4-129 . 5-8 . 5-8 . 6-2 . 6-3 . 6-4 . 6-4 . 6-5 . 6-5 . 6-6 . . 7-10 Telcordia Technologies, Inc. Confidential -- Restricted Access See confidentiality restrictions on title page. 502-1198 Rev A xv Confidential -- Restricted Access Tyco Electronics 3-dB SC Singlemode Fiber Optic Buildout Attenuators List of Tables DA-1543 Issue 1, Revision 4 February 3, 2005 Telcordia Technologies, Inc. Confidential -- Restricted Access See confidentiality restrictions on title page. xvi 502-1198 Rev A DA-1543 Issue 1, Revision 4 February 3, 2005 Confidential -- Restricted Access Tyco Electronics 3-dB SC Singlemode Fiber Optic Buildout Attenuators List of Figures List of Figures List of Figures TP-910 Figure PS-1 TP-910 Figure PS-2 GR-910 Figure 2-1 GR-910 Figure 2-2 GR-910 Figure 2-3 GR-910 Figure 2-4 TP-910 Figure 3-1 TP-910 Figure 3-2 TP-910 Figure 3-3 TP-910 Figure 3-4 TP-910 Figure 3-5 TP-910 Figure 3-6 TP-910 Figure 3-7 TP-910 Figure 3-8 TP-910 Figure 3-9 TP-910 Figure 3-10 TP-910 Figure 3-11 TP-910 Figure 4-1 TP-910 Figure 4-2 TP-910 Figure 4-3 TP-910 Figure 4-4 TP-910 Figure 4-5 TP-910 Figure 4-6 TP-910 Figure 4-7 TP-910 Figure 4-8 TP-910 Figure 4-9 TP-910 Figure 4-10 TP-910 Figure 4-11 Program Initiation Flowchart . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . PS-2 High-Level Flowchart for Service Life and General Requirements Evaluation/Test Program . . . . . . . . . . PS-4 The a) Fixed and b) Variable Attenuator Components . . . 2-1 Attenuator Types a) Connector Receptacle, b) Optical Pad, c) Patchcord . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-2 Optical Transmission Using a Variable Attenuator. . . . . . 2-4 Central Wavelength Variation of Uncontrolled Optical Source . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-5 Test Flowchart - General Documentation (not from GR-910) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-5 Test Flowchart - Marking, Packaging and Shipping (not from GR-910) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-9 Test Flowchart - Optical Fiber Physical Design (not from GR-910) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-13 Test Flowchart - Optical Connectors (not from GR-910) . . 3-16 Test Flowchart - Cleanability (not from GR-910) . . . . . . 3-18 Test Flowchart - Intermateability (not from GR-910) . . . . 3-21 Test Flowchart - Materials (not from GR-910) . . . . . . . . 3-25 Test Flowchart - Safety (not from GR-910) . . . . . . . . . . 3-28 Test Flowchart - Mounting (not from GR-910) . . . . . . . . 3-31 Test Flowchart - Index Matching (not from GR-910) . . . . 3-34 Test Flowchart - Change in Attenuation (not from GR-910) 3-37 Test Flowchart - Controlled Operating Environment Test (not from GR-910) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-5 Operating Temperature and Humidity Test . . . . . . . . . . 4-6 Transmission Measurement Facility . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-7 Change in Attenuation at 1310 nm during Controlled Operating Environment test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-10 Change in Attenuation at 1490 nm during Controlled Operating Environment test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-11 Change in Attenuation at 1550 nm during Controlled Operating Environment test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-11 Change in Attenuation at 1625 nm during Controlled Operating Environment test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-12 Insertion Loss at 1310 nm during Controlled Operating Environment test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-12 Insertion Loss at 1490 nm during Controlled Operating Environment test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-13 Insertion Loss at 1550 nm during Controlled Operating Environment test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-13 Insertion Loss at 1625 nm during Controlled Operating Environment test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-14 Telcordia Technologies, Inc. Confidential -- Restricted Access See confidentiality restrictions on title page. 502-1198 Rev A xvii Confidential -- Restricted Access Tyco Electronics 3-dB SC Singlemode Fiber Optic Buildout Attenuators List of Figures TP-910 Figure 4-12 TP-910 Figure 4-13 TP-910 Figure 4-14 TP-910 Figure 4-15 TP-910 Figure 4-16 TP-910 Figure 4-17 TP-910 Figure 4-18 TP-910 Figure 4-19 TP-910 Figure 4-20 TP-910 Figure 4-21 TP-910 Figure 4-22 TP-910 Figure 4-23 TP-910 Figure 4-24 TP-910 Figure 4-25 TP-910 Figure 4-26 TP-910 Figure 4-27 TP-910 Figure 4-28 TP-910 Figure 4-29 TP-910 Figure 4-30 TP-910 Figure 4-31 TP-910 Figure 4-32 TP-910 Figure 4-33 TP-910 Figure 4-34 TP-910 Figure 4-35 TP-910 Figure 4-36 TP-910 Figure 4-37 DA-1543 Issue 1, Revision 4 February 3, 2005 Reflectance at 1310 nm, 1490 nm, 1550 nm and 1625 nm during Controlled Operating Environment test . . . . . . Test Flowchart - Uncontrolled Operating Environment Test (not from GR-910) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Uncontrolled Environment Temperature Profile . . . . . . Transmission Measurement Facility . . . . . . . . . . . . . Change in Attenuation at 1310 nm during Uncontrolled Operating Environment test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Change in Attenuation at 1490 nm during Uncontrolled Operating Environment test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Change in Attenuation at 1550 nm during Uncontrolled Operating Environment test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Change in Attenuation at 1625 nm during Uncontrolled Operating Environment test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Insertion Loss at 1310 nm during Uncontrolled Operating Environment test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Insertion Loss at 1490 nm during Uncontrolled Operating Environment test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Insertion Loss at 1550 nm during Uncontrolled Operating Environment test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Insertion Loss at 1625 nm during Uncontrolled Operating Environment test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Reflectance at 1310 nm, 1490 nm, 1550 nm and 1625 nm during Uncontrolled Operating Environment test . . . . . Low-Temperature Exposure and Thermal Shock . . . . . High-Temperature Exposure and Thermal Shock . . . . . High Relative Humidity Exposure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Test Flowchart - Non-Operating Environment Test (not from GR-910) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Low-Temperature Exposure and Thermal Shock . . . . . High-Temperature Exposure and Thermal Shock . . . . . High Relative Humidity Exposure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Transmission Measurement Facility . . . . . . . . . . . . . Change in Attenuation at 1310 nm, 1490 nm, 1550 nm and 1625 nm after Low Temperature Exposure and Thermal Shock test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Insertion Loss at 1310 nm, 1490 nm, 1550 nm and 1625 nm after Low Temperature Exposure and Thermal Shock test Reflectance at 1310 nm, 1490 nm, 1550 nm and 1625 nm after Low Temperature Exposure and Thermal Shock test Change in Attenuation at 1310 nm, 1490 nm, 1550 nm and 1625 nm after High Temperature Exposure and Thermal Shock test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Insertion Loss at 1310 nm, 1490 nm, 1550 nm and 1625 nm after High Temperature Exposure and Thermal Shock test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-14 . 4-17 . 4-18 . 4-19 . 4-22 . 4-22 . 4-23 . 4-23 . 4-24 . 4-24 . 4-25 . 4-25 . . . . 4-26 4-28 4-29 4-30 . . . . . 4-31 4-32 4-33 4-34 4-35 . 4-38 . 4-38 . 4-39 . 4-40 . 4-41 Telcordia Technologies, Inc. Confidential -- Restricted Access See confidentiality restrictions on title page. xviii 502-1198 Rev A DA-1543 Issue 1, Revision 4 February 3, 2005 TP-910 Figure 4-38 TP-910 Figure 4-39 TP-910 Figure 4-40 TP-910 Figure 4-41 TP-910 Figure 4-42 TP-910 Figure 4-43 TP-910 Figure 4-44 TP-910 Figure 4-45 TP-910 Figure 4-46 TP-910 Figure 4-47 TP-910 Figure 4-48 TP-910 Figure 4-49 TP-910 Figure 4-50 TP-910 Figure 4-51 TP-910 Figure 4-52 TP-910 Figure 4-53 TP-910 Figure 4-54 TP-910 Figure 4-55 TP-910 Figure 4-56 TP-910 Figure 4-57 TP-910 Figure 4-58 TP-910 Figure 4-59 TP-910 Figure 4-60 TP-910 Figure 4-61 TP-910 Figure 4-62 TP-910 Figure 4-63 TP-910 Figure 4-64 TP-910 Figure 4-65 Confidential -- Restricted Access Tyco Electronics 3-dB SC Singlemode Fiber Optic Buildout Attenuators List of Figures Reflectance at 1310 nm, 1490 nm, 1550 nm and 1625 nm after High Temperature Exposure and Thermal Shock test . 4-41 Change in Attenuation at 1310 nm, 1490 nm, 1550 nm and 1625 nm after High Relative Humidity Exposure test . . . . 4-43 Insertion Loss at 1310 nm, 1490 nm, 1550 nm and 1625 nm after High Relative Humidity Exposure test . . . . . . . . . 4-44 Reflectance at 1310 nm, 1490 nm, 1550 nm and 1625 nm after High Relative Humidity Exposure test . . . . . . . . . 4-44 Test Flowchart - Humidity/Condensation Cycling Test (not from GR-910) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-46 Transmission Measurement Facility . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-47 Change in Attenuation at 1310 nm during Humidity/ Condensation Cycling test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-51 Change in Attenuation at 1490 nm during Humidity/ Condensation Cycling test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-51 Change in Attenuation at 1550 nm during Humidity/ Condensation Cycling test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-52 Change in Attenuation at 1625 nm during Humidity/ Condensation Cycling test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-52 Insertion Loss at 1310 nm during Humidity/Condensation Cycling test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-53 Insertion Loss at 1490 nm during Humidity/Condensation Cycling test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-53 Insertion Loss at 1550 nm during Humidity/Condensation Cycling test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-54 Insertion Loss at 1625 nm during Humidity/Condensation Cycling test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-54 Reflectance at 1310 nm, 1490 nm, 1550 nm and 1625 nm during Humidity/Condensation Cycling test . . . . . . . . . 4-55 Test Flowchart - Water Immersion Test (not from GR-910) 4-57 Transmission Measurement Facility . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-58 Change in Attenuation at 1310 nm during Water Immersion test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-61 Change in Attenuation at 1490 nm during Water Immersion test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-62 Change in Attenuation at 1550 nm during Water Immersion test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-62 Change in Attenuation at 1625 nm during Water Immersion test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-63 Insertion Loss at 1310 nm during Water Immersion test . . 4-63 Insertion Loss at 1490 nm during Water Immersion test . . 4-64 Insertion Loss at 1550 nm during Water Immersion test . . 4-64 Insertion Loss at 1625 nm during Water Immersion test . . 4-65 Reflectance at 1310 nm, 1490 nm, 1550 nm and 1625 nm during Water Immersion test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-65 Test Flowchart - Vibration Test (not from GR-910) . . . . . 4-67 Transmission Measurement Facility . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-68 Telcordia Technologies, Inc. Confidential -- Restricted Access See confidentiality restrictions on title page. 502-1198 Rev A xix Confidential -- Restricted Access Tyco Electronics 3-dB SC Singlemode Fiber Optic Buildout Attenuators List of Figures TP-910 Figure 4-66 TP-910 Figure 4-67 TP-910 Figure 4-68 TP-910 Figure 4-69 TP-910 Figure 4-70 TP-910 Figure 4-71 TP-910 Figure 4-72 TP-910 Figure 4-73 TP-910 Figure 4-74 TP-910 Figure 4-75 TP-910 Figure 4-76 TP-910 Figure 4-77 TP-910 Figure 4-78 TP-910 Figure 4-79 TP-910 Figure 4-80 TP-910 Figure 4-81 TP-910 Figure 4-82 TP-910 Figure 4-83 TP-910 Figure 4-84 TP-910 Figure 4-85 TP-910 Figure 4-86 TP-910 Figure 4-87 TP-910 Figure 4-88 TP-910 Figure 4-89 TP-910 Figure 4-90 TP-910 Figure 4-91 TP-910 Figure 4-92 TP-910 Figure 4-93 DA-1543 Issue 1, Revision 4 February 3, 2005 Change in Attenuation at 1310 nm, 1490 nm, 1550 nm and 1625 nm after Vibration test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Insertion Loss at 1310 nm, 1490 nm, 1550 nm and 1625 nm after Vibration test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Reflectance at 1310 nm, 1490 nm, 1550 nm and 1625 nm after Vibration test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Test Flowchart - Fiber Flex Test (not from GR-910) . . . . Mechanical Test Facility for Flex, Twist, Side Pull and Cable Retention Tests . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Transmission Measurement Facility . . . . . . . . . . . . . Test Flowchart - Fiber Twist Test (not from GR-910) . . . Mechanical Test Facility for Flex, Twist, Side Pull and Cable Retention Tests . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Transmission Measurement Facility . . . . . . . . . . . . . Test Flowchart - Fiber Side Pull Test (not from GR-910) . Mechanical Test Facility for Flex, Twist, Side Pull and Cable Retention Tests . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Transmission Measurement Facility . . . . . . . . . . . . . Change in Attenuation at 1310 nm, 1490 nm, 1550 nm and 1625 nm during Side Pull test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Insertion Loss at 1310 nm, 1490 nm, 1550 nm and 1625 nm during Side Pull test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Reflectance at 1310 nm, 1490 nm, 1550 nm and 1625 nm during Side Pull test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Change in Attenuation at 1310 nm, 1490 nm, 1550 nm and 1625 nm after Side Pull test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Insertion Loss at 1310 nm, 1490 nm, 1550 nm and 1625 nm after Side Pull test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Reflectance at 1310 nm, 1490 nm, 1550 nm and 1625 nm after Side Pull test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Test Flowchart - Cable Retention Test (not from GR-910) Mechanical Test Facility for Flex, Twist, Side Pull and Cable Retention Tests . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Transmission Measurement Facility . . . . . . . . . . . . . Change in Attenuation at 1310 nm, 1490 nm, 1550 nm and 1625 nm after Cable Retention test . . . . . . . . . . . Insertion Loss at 1310 nm, 1490 nm, 1550 nm and 1625 nm after Cable Retention test . . . . . . . . . . . . . Reflectance at 1310 nm, 1490 nm, 1550 nm and 1625 nm after Cable Retention test . . . . . . . . . . . . . Test Flowchart - Durability Test (not from GR-910) . . . . Transmission Measurement Facility . . . . . . . . . . . . . Change in Attenuation at 1310 nm, 1490 nm, 1550 nm and 1625 nm after Durability test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Insertion Loss at 1310 nm, 1490 nm, 1550 nm and 1625 nm after Durability test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-71 . 4-72 . 4-72 . 4-75 . 4-77 . 4-78 . 4-82 . 4-84 . 4-85 . 4-89 . 4-91 . 4-92 . 4-96 . 4-97 . 4-97 4-100 4-101 4-101 4-103 4-105 4-106 4-110 4-110 4-111 4-114 4-116 4-119 4-120 Telcordia Technologies, Inc. Confidential -- Restricted Access See confidentiality restrictions on title page. xx 502-1198 Rev A DA-1543 Issue 1, Revision 4 February 3, 2005 TP-910 Figure 4-94 TP-910 Figure 4-95 TP-910 Figure 4-96 TP-910 Figure 4-97 TP-910 Figure 4-98 TP-910 Figure 4-99 TP-910 Figure 4-100 TP-910 Figure 4-101 TP-910 Figure 4-102 TP-910 Figure 4-103 TP-910 Figure 4-104 TP-910 Figure 4-105 TP-910 Figure 4-106 TP-910 Figure 4-107 TP-910 Figure 4-108 TP-910 Figure 4-109 TP-910 Figure 4-110 TP-910 Figure 4-111 TP-910 Figure 4-112 TP-910 Figure 4-113 TP-910 Figure 4-114 TP-910 Figure 4-115 TP-910 Figure 4-116 TP-910 Figure 4-117 TP-910 Figure 4-118 TP-910 Figure 4-119 TP-910 Figure 4-120 TP-910 Figure 4-121 TP-910 Figure 4-122 GR-910 Figure 5-1 GR-910 Figure 5-2 Confidential -- Restricted Access Tyco Electronics 3-dB SC Singlemode Fiber Optic Buildout Attenuators List of Figures Reflectance at 1310 nm, 1490 nm, 1550 nm and 1625 nm after Durability test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Test Flowchart - Impact Test (not from GR-910) . . . . . Change in Attenuation at 1310 nm, 1490 nm, 1550 nm and 1625 nm after Impact test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Insertion Loss at 1310 nm, 1490 nm, 1550 nm and 1625 nm after Impact test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Reflectance at 1310 nm, 1490 nm, 1550 nm and 1625 nm after Impact test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Test Flowchart - General Optical Bandpass Test (not from GR-910) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Reference Test Configurations for General Optical Bandpass (not from GR-910) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Through-DUT Test Configurations for General Optical Bandpass (not from GR-910) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 dB Attenuator Optical Bandpass Spectra . . . . . . . . Spectral Attenuation Measurements from 1250 nm to 1650 nm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Attenuation Loss Measurement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Transmission Measurement Facility . . . . . . . . . . . . Baseline Insertion Loss Measurements at 1310 nm, 1490 nm, 1550 nm and 1625 nm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Attenuation Loss Measurement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Transmission Measurement Facility . . . . . . . . . . . . Baseline Insertion Loss Measurements at 1310 nm, 1490 nm, 1550 nm and 1625 nm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Attenuation Loss Measurement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Transmission Measurement Facility . . . . . . . . . . . . Transmission Measurement Facility . . . . . . . . . . . . Baseline Reflectance Measurements at 1310 nm, 1490 nm, 1550 nm and 1625 nm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Test Flowchart - PDL Test (not from GR-910) . . . . . . Reference Configuration for PDL Tests (not from GR-910) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Through-DUT Configuration for PDL Tests (not from GR-910) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Configuration for Measuring Polarization Dependent Loss . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Polarization-Dependent Loss (PDL) at 1310 nm, 1490 nm, 1550 nm and 1625 nm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Test Flowchart - PMD (not from GR-910) . . . . . . . . . Reference Configuration for PMD Tests (not from GR-910) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Configuration for PMD Tests (not from GR-910) . . . . . Polarization-Mode Dispersion (PMD) measurements . . Transmission Measurement Facility . . . . . . . . . . . . Controlled Operating Environment Temperature Profile . 4-120 . 4-123 . 4-127 . 4-127 . 4-128 . 4-133 . 4-134 . 4-134 . 4-135 . 4-137 . 4-138 . 4-140 . 4-142 . 4-144 . 4-145 . . . . 4-148 4-149 4-151 4-154 . 4-157 . 4-163 . 4-164 . 4-164 . 4-164 . 4-166 . 4-169 . . . . . 4-169 4-170 4-171 . 5-2 . 5-4 Telcordia Technologies, Inc. Confidential -- Restricted Access See confidentiality restrictions on title page. 502-1198 Rev A xxi Confidential -- Restricted Access Tyco Electronics 3-dB SC Singlemode Fiber Optic Buildout Attenuators List of Figures GR-910 Figure 5-3 GR-910 Figure 5-4 GR-910 Figure 5-5 GR-910 Figure 5-6 GR-910 Figure 5-7 GR-910 Figure 5-8 GR-910 Figure 7-1 TP-910 Figure 7-1 TP-910 Figure 7-2 TP-910 Figure 7-3 TP-910 Figure 7-4 TP-910 Figure 7-5 TP-910 Figure 7-6 TP-910 Figure 7-7 DA-1543 Issue 1, Revision 4 February 3, 2005 Uncontrolled Environment Temperature Profile . . . . . . . Humidity/Condensation Temperature Profile . . . . . . . . 3 dB Attenuator Optical Bandpass Spectra . . . . . . . . . . Attenuation Loss Measurement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Configuration for Measuring Polarization Dependent Loss . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Mechanical Test Facility for Flex, Twist, Side Pull and Cable Retention Tests . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Elements of a Comprehensive Reliability Assurance Program . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Test Flowchart - Character Test (not from GR-910) . . . . . Test Flowchart - Reliability Test (not from GR-910) . . . . . Test Flowchart - Failure Rate Prediction Test (not from GR-910) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Test Flowchart - Visual Inspection Test (not from GR-910) . Test Flowchart - Optical Test (not from GR-910) . . . . . . Test Flowchart - Stress Screening Test (not from GR-910) . Test Flowchart - Quality and Reliability Test (not from GR-910) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-5 5-6 5-12 5-13 5-15 5-16 7-3 7-6 7-12 7-18 7-21 7-23 7-26 7-30 Telcordia Technologies, Inc. Confidential -- Restricted Access See confidentiality restrictions on title page. xxii 502-1198 Rev A DA-1543 Issue 1, Revision 4 February 3, 2005 Confidential -- Restricted Access Tyco Electronics 3-dB SC Singlemode Fiber Optic Buildout Attenuators Test Plan and Analysis Report Notice Of Disclaimer Test Plan and Analysis Report Notice Of Disclaimer This Test Report document is published by Telcordia Technologies, and it is based on Test Plan document TP-910 which served as a template for this test report on Tyco Electronics 3-dB SC Singlemode Fiber Optic Buildout Attenuators. The test plan includes criteria and test methods, which are, in Telcordia's view, acceptable to determine product conformance with GR-910-CORE criteria. The test plan was also developed to be in accordance with the Verizon Passive Fiber Optic Component (PFOC) Program guidelines. The generic requirements contained in the Test Plan document TP-910 are taken from Issue 2 of Telcordia Technologies GR-910-CORE. Telcordia reserves the right to revise the GR-910-CORE document for any reason (consistent with applicable provisions of the Telecommunications Act of 1996 and applicable FCC rules). The test plan and the test report are not to be construed as a suggestion to anyone to modify or change any product or service, nor does the test plan and the test report represent any commitment by anyone, including but not limited to Telcordia, to purchase, manufacture, or sell any product with the described characteristics. The test plan document has been developed based on the publicly available GR-910-CORE document and Verizon PFOC program guidelines. Readers are specifically advised that any entity may have needs, specifications, or requirements different from the generic descriptions herein. Therefore, anyone wishing to know any entity's needs, specifications, or requirements should communicate directly with that entity. The sufficiency, accuracy or utility of information excerpted and incorporated into the Test Plan document from GR-910-CORE, or other referenced documents are subject to any limitations or local conditions as stated within disclaimers provided in those subject reference documents. IN NO EVENT IS THIS INFORMATION INTENDED TO REPLACE FEDERAL, STATE, LOCAL, OR OTHER APPLICABLE CODES, LAWS, OR REGULATIONS. SPECIFIC APPLICATIONS WILL CONTAIN VARIABLES UNKNOWN TO OR BEYOND THE CONTROL OF TELCORDIA. Nothing contained herein shall be construed as conferring by implication, estoppel, or otherwise any license or right under any patent, whether or not the use of any information herein necessarily employs an invention of any existing or later issued patent. For general information about this or any other Telcordia documents, please contact: Telcordia Technologies Customer Service Piscataway, New Jersey 08854-4156 +1.800.521.2673 (US and Canada) +1.732.699.5800 (worldwide) +1.732.336.2559 (FAX) http://www.telcordia.com Telcordia Technologies, Inc. Confidential -- Restricted Access See confidentiality restrictions on title page. 502-1198 Rev A xxiii Confidential -- Restricted Access Tyco Electronics 3-dB SC Singlemode Fiber Optic Buildout Attenuators Test Plan and Analysis Report Notice Of Disclaimer DA-1543 Issue 1, Revision 4 February 3, 2005 Telcordia Technologies, Inc. Confidential -- Restricted Access See confidentiality restrictions on title page. xxiv 502-1198 Rev A DA-1543 Issue 1, Revision 4 February 3, 2005 Confidential -- Restricted Access Tyco Electronics 3-dB SC Singlemode Fiber Optic Buildout Attenuators Executive Summary Executive Summary THE TEST PROGRAM WAS CONDUCTED AND THE TEST REPORT WAS PREPARED BY TELCORDIA UNDER THE AUSPICES OF VERIZON'S PASSIVE FIBER OPTIC COMPONENTS (PFOC) PROGRAM Manufacturer: Tyco Electronics Corporation Location of Manufacturer: Shanghai, 200131, China Location of Test Laboratory: Piscataway, NJ, 08854, USA Product Name: 3-dB SC Singlemode Fiber Optic Buildout Attenuators Product Part Number: 209250-3 Product Description: Buildout attenuators are 2 port, bidirectional components without integral optical fiber leads. These attenuators were manufactured to an attenuation tolerance of 3 0.5 dB and 55 dB return loss. Introduction The purpose of this test program is to determine if the specified Tyco Electronics Corporation product(s) could meet the general, mechanical, environmental, and optical requirements specified herein and continue to perform the intended inservice functions. A test program based upon this document is to be used by Tyco Electronics Corporation clients such as Regional Bell Operating Companies (RBOCs), Internet Service Providers (ISPs), Incumbent Local Exchange Carriers (ILECs), Competitive Local Exchange Carriers (CLECs), and large service providers as evidence of conformance to the Telcordia GR-910-CORE, Generic Requirements for Fiber Optic Attenuators. All test equipment used for this program was checked before testing to assure that it was in calibration, and that the parameters to be measured were appropriate for the range on the measuring instrument. Calibration is performed and checked on a routine basis using standards traceable to the National Institute of Standards and Technology (NIST). Calibration of equipment is performed in accordance with the Telcordia Quality Program and satisfies the requirements of ISO 17025 and ANSI/NCSL Z540-1. Declaration of Conformance: This is to declare that the product tested under this program did not conform with the applicable general, mechanical, environmental, and optical requirements Telcordia Technologies, Inc. Confidential -- Restricted Access See confidentiality restrictions on title page. 502-1198 Rev A ES-1 Confidential -- Restricted Access Tyco Electronics 3-dB SC Singlemode Fiber Optic Buildout Attenuators Executive Summary DA-1543 Issue 1, Revision 4 February 3, 2005 specified in GR-910-CORE, Issue 2, Generic Requirements for Fiber Optic Attenuators. This conformance declaration is based upon agreed, less stringent criteria requirements of GR-910 CR4-21 [58], GR-910 CR4-22 [59], GR-910 CR4-23 [60] and GR-910 CR4-24 [61]. The following is a summary of how these requirements were used to determine the conformance of this product. A detailed summary of how the product performed against this less stringent criteria, as well as the more stringent criteria, is presented in Section 4 of this test report. GR-910 CR4-21 [58] states that for all digital applications the maximum or minimum change in attenuation before, during, or after, any or all environmental or mechanical tests shall be 0.5 dB or 0.15A, whichever is less. The test results of this product were required to meet the 0.5 dB change in attenuation criteria in this test program. GR-910 CR4-22 [59] states that for all AM video applications the maximum or minimum change in attenuation before, during, or after, any or all environmental or mechanical tests shall be 0.5 dB or 0.10A, whichever is less. The test results of this product were required to meet the 0.5 dB change in attenuation criteria in this test program. GR-910 CR4-23 [60] states that for attenuators intended for use in digital applications, the attenuation tolerance shall not exceed 0.15V. The test results of this product were required to meet an attenuation tolerance of 0.5V as the criteria in this test program. GR-910 CR4-24 [61] states that for attenuators intended for use in AM video applications, the attenuation tolerance shall not exceed 0.10V. The test results of this product were required to meet an attenuation tolerance of 0.5V as the criteria in this test program. Schedule: The overall GR-910-CORE program is estimated to take between 12 and 14 weeks to complete from receipt of the order to delivery of the final test report for a single product. The initial planning and customer documentation generation phase will typically take 1 to 2 weeks. The product evaluation and testing, as well as the assessment of the reliability assurance program, is estimated to take 8 to 10 weeks. Upon completion of all tests, inspections, and the assessment, an estimated period of one (1) week will be required to review, analyze, and compile the results and another two (2) weeks to complete the final report. Time savings can be realized through parallel data review, analysis and report writing, as well as by extending work shifts. Estimated program time assumes timely availability of appropriate customer samples and timely response to any requests for information or sample problem resolution by the supplier. Telcordia Technologies, Inc. Confidential -- Restricted Access See confidentiality restrictions on title page. ES-2 502-1198 Rev A DA-1543 Issue 1, Revision 4 February 3, 2005 Confidential -- Restricted Access Tyco Electronics 3-dB SC Singlemode Fiber Optic Buildout Attenuators Executive Summary NOTE: FOR A MULTI-PORT DEVICE, ALL THE PORTS MUST BE SUBJECTED TO OPTICAL, ENVIRONMENTAL AND MECHANICAL TEST. Supplier Responsibility: 1. The supplier shall provide all samples and specialized tools/cleaning kits for use with their products that may be necessary to perform the evaluation. 2. The supplier shall supply all necessary documentation and specific information related to the product(s) to be evaluated. 3. The supplier shall supply a list of all components used in the product(s) including part numbers, manufacturer, and product specifications. 4. The supplier shall provide all cabling, jumpers, and accessories required to perform the tests. 5. The supplier shall identify a single point of contact to address issues and provide timely resolution of any issues or problems which arise during the test program Requirements Terminology: The following requirements terminology is used throughout this document. * Requirement -- Feature or function that, in the Telcordia view, is necessary to satisfy the needs of a typical Network Operator. Failure to meet a requirement may cause application restrictions, result in improper functioning of the product, or hinder operations. A Requirement contains the words shall or must and is flagged by the letter "R." * Conditional Requirement -- Feature or function that, in the Telcordia view, is necessary in specific Network Operator applications. If a Network Operator identifies a Conditional Requirement as necessary, it shall be treated as a requirement for the application(s). Conditions that may cause the Conditional Requirement to apply include, but are not limited to, certain Network Operator application environments, network elements, or other requirements, etc. A Conditional Requirement is flagged by the letters "CR." * Objective -- Feature or function that, in the Telcordia view, is desirable and may be required by a Network Operator. An Objective represents a goal to be achieved. An Objective may be reclassified as a Requirement at a specified date. An objective is flagged by the letter "O" and includes the word should. * Conditional Objective -- Feature or function that, in the Telcordia view, is desirable in specific Network Operator applications and may be required by a Network Operator. It represents a goal to be achieved in the specified Condition(s). If a Client Company identifies a Conditional Objective as Telcordia Technologies, Inc. Confidential -- Restricted Access See confidentiality restrictions on title page. 502-1198 Rev A ES-3 Confidential -- Restricted Access Tyco Electronics 3-dB SC Singlemode Fiber Optic Buildout Attenuators Executive Summary DA-1543 Issue 1, Revision 4 February 3, 2005 necessary, it shall be treated as a requirement for the application(s). A Conditional Objective is flagged by the letters "CO." * Condition -- The circumstances that, in the Telcordia view, will cause a Conditional Requirement or Conditional Objective to apply. A Condition is flagged by the letters "Cn." Criteria Checklist: TP-910 Table ES-1 lists all of the included criteria and indicates the method used to determine conformance. The reliability criteria are also listed since this is a requirement of some RBOCs. Criteria which were met are indicated by a "PASS". Criteria not met by one or more samples are indicated by a "FAIL". The designation "ND" means that the product's conformance could not be determined. The designation "NA" means that the criterion is not applicable to the product tested. Conformance or nonconformance is determined using the following methodology: Verify, Analyze, Inspect, and Test, individually or in combination. These methods are defined as: * Verify - Verify by a review of the documentation that the information or accessories specified by the criteria were supplied or are available from the manufacturer * Analyze - Draw conclusions based on vendor-supplied product information, test data, and other information as to the conformance or nonconformance of the product to the criteria * Inspect - Visually inspect the product to determine conformance or nonconformance to the criteria * Test - Measure quantitatively product features or performance to determine conformance or nonconformance to the criteria. Terminology for Results: The following terminology for results are used to define the conformance status of the data being reported. * PASS - The product is considered to have conformed to the specified criteria, in this analysis. * FAIL - The product did not conform to the specified criteria, in this analysis. * Not Determined (ND) - It was not determined whether the product conformed or did not conform to the specified criteria, either because the product was not tested for the criteria or the test results (as noted) were inconclusive. * Not Applicable (NA) - The criteria were not relevant to the analyzed product. Telcordia Technologies, Inc. Confidential -- Restricted Access See confidentiality restrictions on title page. ES-4 502-1198 Rev A DA-1543 Issue 1, Revision 4 February 3, 2005 Confidential -- Restricted Access Tyco Electronics 3-dB SC Singlemode Fiber Optic Buildout Attenuators Executive Summary TP-910 Table ES-1 Detailed Summary of Proposed Fiber Optic Attenuator Test Plan Criteria and Conformance Status GR-910 Req. # [Abs. #] (Sec. #) V E R I F Y Item A N A L Y Z E I N S P E C T T E S T Results (Pass/ Fail/ NA/ ND) Comment General Documentation R3-1 [1] (3.1.1) On request, the supplier shall provide a complete set of documentation that includes: *Product Description *Performance Specifications *Installation Instructions *Operating Instructions *Maintenance *Ordering Information *Testing and troubleshooting procedure *Repair instructions and contact for repair service *Storage and transportation instructions X PASS Marking, Packaging, and Shipping O3-2 [2] (3.2) Buffering and jacket color for single-mode attenuators should be yellow. X NA No jacketing is used on this product. O3-3 [3] (3.2) Buffering and jacket color for multimode attenuators should be orange. X NA No jacketing is used on this product. O3-4 [4] (3.2) The POCC should appear on the attenuator housing, including the manufacturer serial number (if applicable). X PASS R3-5 [5] (3.2) Attenuators designed to comply with specific applications (such as those indicated by CR in this document) shall be labeled to clearly distinguish them from other products that they may resemble. X PASS R3-6 [6] (3.2) The packaged part(s) shall be clearly labeled, with parts and names consistent with those given in the product instructions, in a manner consistent with the requirements of SR-NWT-2759, A View of Packaging, Packing, Palletization, and Marking Requirements. X PASS Telcordia Technologies, Inc. Confidential -- Restricted Access See confidentiality restrictions on title page. 502-1198 Rev A ES-5 Confidential -- Restricted Access DA-1543 Issue 1, Revision 4 February 3, 2005 Tyco Electronics 3-dB SC Singlemode Fiber Optic Buildout Attenuators Executive Summary TP-910 Table ES-1 Detailed Summary of Proposed Fiber Optic Attenuator Test Plan Criteria and Conformance Status (Continued) V E R I F Y A N A L Y Z E I N S P E C T T E S T Results GR-910 Req. # [Abs. #] (Sec. #) Item R3-7 [7] (3.2) All required assembly components (e. g., tools, instructions and materials) shall be shipped together. X PASS R3-8 [8] (3.2) The packaging shall be adequate to ensure that the attenuators will not be damaged under normal handling, shipping and storage in reasonably dry, unheated quarters. X PASS R3-9 [9] (3.2) Attenuators shall be packaged and shipped with dust caps or other dust impermeable packaging material. X PASS O3-10 [10] (3.2) The packaging materials should be recyclable. X PASS O3-11 [11] (3.2) The information necessary to identify the product should be bar coded. X PASS ND (Pass/ Fail/ NA/ ND) Comment Optical Fiber Physical Design Criteria R3-12 [12] (3.3.1) All fiber and fiber cable used in attenuators shall meet the criteria in GR-409-CORE, Generic Requirements for Premises Fiber Cable. Attenuators intended for use in outside plant environments shall meet the outdoor requirements in GR-409-CORE. X R3-13 [13] (3.3.1) The length of individual, unconnectorized fiber leads shall be 1 meter to provide sufficient slack for splicing. X X NA CR3-14 [14] (3.3.1) For attenuators intended to serve as interconnects or cross-connects between the outside plant (OSP) panel and the network equipment, the length of individual connectorized fiber pigtails should be 2 meters. X X NA Optical Connector Physical Design R3-15 [15] (3.3.2) Any single-mode optical connectors and/or connector interfaces used in the construction of the attenuator shall meet the criteria in GR-326-CORE, Generic Requirements for Optical Fiber Connectors. X ND Telcordia Technologies, Inc. Confidential -- Restricted Access See confidentiality restrictions on title page. ES-6 502-1198 Rev A DA-1543 Issue 1, Revision 4 February 3, 2005 Confidential -- Restricted Access Tyco Electronics 3-dB SC Singlemode Fiber Optic Buildout Attenuators Executive Summary TP-910 Table ES-1 Detailed Summary of Proposed Fiber Optic Attenuator Test Plan Criteria and Conformance Status (Continued) GR-910 Req. # [Abs. #] (Sec. #) V E R I F Y Item A N A L Y Z E I N S P E C T T E S T Results (Pass/ Fail/ NA/ ND) Comment Cleanability R3-16 [16] (3.3.3) Attenuators with accessible attenuation elements shall not be damaged nor change attenuation value when cleaned according to manufacturers' instructions. X X PASS R3-17 [17] (3.3.3) Suppliers shall specify cleaning instructions and materials for cleaning attenuators. X PASS R3-18 [18] (3.3.3) Cleaning procedures shall meet all applicable safety requirements. X PASS Intermateability - Attenuator connectors, connector interfaces, and couplings shall meet the Intermateability requirements describe in GR-326-CORE. X ND R3-20 [19] (3.3.5.1) All attenuator materials with which personnel may come in contact shall be non-toxic, and shall not present any environmental hazards as defined by applicable federal or state laws and regulations or current industry standards. Where the suggested use of certain materials by the manufacturer may pose hazardous conditions, the manufacturer shall provide the necessary instructions for the handling and use of such materials. X PASS R3-21 [20] (3.3.5.2) Attenuators containing metallic materials shall show no significant signs of corrosion on metallic surfaces or components nor exhibit a malfunction of any mechanical features following a 7- day exposure to a salt fog spray in accordance with ASTM B117. Attenuators shall be placed inside the salt fog chamber during the test. The analysis for the degree of rusting on painted metal surfaces shall be made in accordance with ASTM D610. A rust grade of 9 or better is required, exclusive of any surface scratches or nicks noted prior to testing. X X ND Intermateability R3-19 [75] (3.3.4) Materials Telcordia Technologies, Inc. Confidential -- Restricted Access See confidentiality restrictions on title page. 502-1198 Rev A ES-7 Confidential -- Restricted Access DA-1543 Issue 1, Revision 4 February 3, 2005 Tyco Electronics 3-dB SC Singlemode Fiber Optic Buildout Attenuators Executive Summary TP-910 Table ES-1 Detailed Summary of Proposed Fiber Optic Attenuator Test Plan Criteria and Conformance Status (Continued) V E R I F Y A N A L Y Z E I N S P E C T T E S T Results GR-910 Req. # [Abs. #] (Sec. #) Item R3-22 [21] (3.3.5.3) The attenuator design shall ensure that no galvanic corrosion will occur when dissimilar metals are used in its construction. X ND R3-23 [22] (3.3.5.4) Exposed polymeric materials used in the attenuator design shall not support fungus growth per ASTM-G21. A rating of zero (0) is required. X X ND O3-24 [23] (3.3.5.5) Exposed plastic materials shall have an oxygen index of at least 28% as determined by actual test in accordance with ASTM D-2863 and GR-63-CORE, Section 4.2.3, Use of FireResistant Materials, Components, Wiring and Cable. X X ND R3-25 [24] (3.3.5.5) Exposed plastic materials shall not sustain combustion when an open flame source is removed, such that they possess a rating of 94V-1 when tested according to the Vertical Burning Test for Classifying Material, Underwriters Laboratories publication UL94, Tests for Flammability of Plastic Materials for Parts in Devices and Appliances, or GR-63-CORE, Section 5.2.4, Telcordia Needle Flame Test. Manufacturers may be requested to provide material samples of appropriate size for testing. X X ND R3-26 [25] (3.3.6) The supplier shall provide written warning of precautions for use of the product. X ND R3-27 [76] (3.3.6) Radiation Hazard - The instructions that describe the procedures for cleaning attenuators shall indicate the possible hazard due to the presence of invisible (infrared) radiation when examining connectors with the naked eye or using a microscope. The instruction shall also contain ordering information for an IR indicator card (Edmund Scientific part #53-031 or equivalent) to allow visualization of invisible IR light. X ND (Pass/ Fail/ NA/ ND) Comment Safety Telcordia Technologies, Inc. Confidential -- Restricted Access See confidentiality restrictions on title page. ES-8 502-1198 Rev A DA-1543 Issue 1, Revision 4 February 3, 2005 Confidential -- Restricted Access Tyco Electronics 3-dB SC Singlemode Fiber Optic Buildout Attenuators Executive Summary TP-910 Table ES-1 Detailed Summary of Proposed Fiber Optic Attenuator Test Plan Criteria and Conformance Status (Continued) GR-910 Req. # [Abs. #] (Sec. #) R3-28 [77] (3.3.6) V E R I F Y Item A N A L Y Z E I N S P E C T T E S T Results (Pass/ Fail/ NA/ ND) Cleaning Materials - The instructions that describe the procedures for cleaning the attenuators shall contain the following information regarding any materials that are used for cleaning that may be considered hazardous to health or to the environment: *Warning as to the toxicity hazard *Instructions for handling and use *Instructions for disposal. X PASS R3-29 [26] (3.3.7) Fiber optic attenuators shall be provided with a means to be installed in Central Offices and Remote Sites. X X PASS O3-30 [27] (3.3.7) Attenuators should be capable of being mounted on standard 23-inch relay racks, cabinets, pedestals, splice trays, splice organizers and splice closures or other protective enclosures. X X PASS R3-31 [28] (3.3.7) Variable attenuators shall be mounted in such a way that the adjustment mechanism is easily recognizable and accessible to craft personnel. X X NA Verizon Requirement Customer shall provide their recommended chassis/cabinet/housing with the mountable device for vibration and shock test. If devices need to be spliced then provide documentation on the mounting procedure. X X NA R3-32 [29] (3.3.7.1) Attenuators deployed in an uncontrolled environment shall have a protective enclosure to restrict water intrusion into the attenuator housing package. X X ND R3-33 [30] (3.3.7.1) Installed attenuators shall be easily accessible for operations and maintenance support. X X PASS Comment Material Safety Data Sheet #7237 for Isopropyl Alcohol 99% is available upon request. Mounting Telcordia Technologies, Inc. Confidential -- Restricted Access See confidentiality restrictions on title page. 502-1198 Rev A ES-9 Confidential -- Restricted Access DA-1543 Issue 1, Revision 4 February 3, 2005 Tyco Electronics 3-dB SC Singlemode Fiber Optic Buildout Attenuators Executive Summary TP-910 Table ES-1 Detailed Summary of Proposed Fiber Optic Attenuator Test Plan Criteria and Conformance Status (Continued) GR-910 Req. # [Abs. #] (Sec. #) V E R I F Y Item A N A L Y Z E I N S P E C T T E S T Results (Pass/ Fail/ NA/ ND) Comment Index Matching R3-34 [31] (3.3.8) Application of index-matching materials shall not be required for use of the attenuator. X PASS NA Change of Attenuation CR3-35 [32] (3.3.9) It shall be possible to vary the attenuation of a variable attenuator after it is installed in a transmission system. X R3-36 [33] (3.3.9) It shall not be necessary to access both sides of the distributing frame, nor remove screws or other mounting hardware. X R3-37 [34] (3.3.9) It shall not be necessary to re-splice fibers for attenuators other than those designed to be spliced to a fiber. X X PASS PASS Performance Criteria - Environments R4-1 [39] (4.1.1) Attenuators shall meet optical criteria and damage criteria described in Section 4.2. X FAIL Based on 0.5 dB change in attenuation criteria for both digital and AM video applications as well as an attenuation tolerance of 0.5V for both digital and AM video applications. Refer to Section 4 for sample performance. Telcordia Technologies, Inc. Confidential -- Restricted Access See confidentiality restrictions on title page. ES-10 502-1198 Rev A DA-1543 Issue 1, Revision 4 February 3, 2005 Confidential -- Restricted Access Tyco Electronics 3-dB SC Singlemode Fiber Optic Buildout Attenuators Executive Summary TP-910 Table ES-1 Detailed Summary of Proposed Fiber Optic Attenuator Test Plan Criteria and Conformance Status (Continued) GR-910 Req. # [Abs. #] (Sec. #) V E R I F Y Item A N A L Y Z E I N S P E C T T E S T Results (Pass/ Fail/ NA/ ND) Comment R4-2 [40] (4.1.1) Product intended for use in a controlled environment shall meet the requirement for operation under Operating Temperature and Humidity Criteria in Section 4.1.2. of GR-63-CORE. X PASS Based on 0.5 dB change in attenuation criteria for both digital and AM video applications as well as an attenuation tolerance of 0.5V for both digital and AM video applications. Refer to Section 4 for sample performance. CR4-3 [41] (4.1.2) Product intended for use in an uncontrolled environment shall remain functional (operate as expected) at all temperatures from -40C (-40F) (uncontrolled humidity) to 75C (167F) (relative humidity of 90 5% non-condensing). X PASS Based on 0.5 dB change in attenuation criteria for both digital and AM video applications as well as an attenuation tolerance of 0.5V for both digital and AM video applications. Refer to Section 4 for sample performance. Telcordia Technologies, Inc. Confidential -- Restricted Access See confidentiality restrictions on title page. 502-1198 Rev A ES-11 Confidential -- Restricted Access DA-1543 Issue 1, Revision 4 February 3, 2005 Tyco Electronics 3-dB SC Singlemode Fiber Optic Buildout Attenuators Executive Summary TP-910 Table ES-1 Detailed Summary of Proposed Fiber Optic Attenuator Test Plan Criteria and Conformance Status (Continued) GR-910 Req. # [Abs. #] (Sec. #) V E R I F Y Item A N A L Y Z E I N S P E C T T E S T Results (Pass/ Fail/ NA/ ND) Comment R4-4 [42] (4.1.3) Attenuators shall meet the optical criteria and damage criteria described in Section 4.2 [after exposure to the specified non-operating conditions]. X PASS Based on 0.5 dB change in attenuation criteria for both digital and AM video applications as well as an attenuation tolerance of 0.5V for both digital and AM video applications. Refer to Section 4 for sample performance. R4-5 [43] (4.1.3) All product shall meet the requirements for transportation and storage under Transportation and Storage Environmental Criteria in Sections 4.1.1.1- 4.1.1.3 of GR-63-CORE. These include requirement [69], low-temperature exposure and thermal shock, [70], high-temperature exposure and thermal shock, and [71] high relative humidity exposure. X PASS Based on 0.5 dB change in attenuation criteria for both digital and AM video applications as well as an attenuation tolerance of 0.5V for both digital and AM video applications. Refer to Section 4 for sample performance. Telcordia Technologies, Inc. Confidential -- Restricted Access See confidentiality restrictions on title page. ES-12 502-1198 Rev A DA-1543 Issue 1, Revision 4 February 3, 2005 Confidential -- Restricted Access Tyco Electronics 3-dB SC Singlemode Fiber Optic Buildout Attenuators Executive Summary TP-910 Table ES-1 Detailed Summary of Proposed Fiber Optic Attenuator Test Plan Criteria and Conformance Status (Continued) GR-910 Req. # [Abs. #] (Sec. #) V E R I F Y Item A N A L Y Z E I N S P E C T T E S T Results (Pass/ Fail/ NA/ ND) Comment R4-6 [78] (4.1.4) Attenuators shall meet the optical criteria and damage criteria described in Section 4.2 [after exposure to the specified humidity/ condensation cycling test conditions]. X PASS Based on 0.5 dB change in attenuation criteria for both digital and AM video applications as well as an attenuation tolerance of 0.5V for both digital and AM video applications. Refer to Section 4 for sample performance. R4-7 [44] (4.1.5) Attenuators shall meet the optical criteria and damage criteria described in Section 4.2 [after exposure to the specified water immersion test conditions]. X PASS Based on 0.5 dB change in attenuation criteria for both digital and AM video applications as well as an attenuation tolerance of 0.5V for both digital and AM video applications. Refer to Section 4 for sample performance. Telcordia Technologies, Inc. Confidential -- Restricted Access See confidentiality restrictions on title page. 502-1198 Rev A ES-13 Confidential -- Restricted Access DA-1543 Issue 1, Revision 4 February 3, 2005 Tyco Electronics 3-dB SC Singlemode Fiber Optic Buildout Attenuators Executive Summary TP-910 Table ES-1 Detailed Summary of Proposed Fiber Optic Attenuator Test Plan Criteria and Conformance Status (Continued) GR-910 Req. # [Abs. #] (Sec. #) V E R I F Y Item A N A L Y Z E I N S P E C T T E S T Results (Pass/ Fail/ NA/ ND) Comment R4-8 [45] (4.1.6) Attenuators shall meet optical criteria and damage criteria described in Section 4.2 [after exposure to the specified vibration test conditions]. X PASS Based on 0.5 dB change in attenuation criteria for both digital and AM video applications as well as an attenuation tolerance of 0.5V for both digital and AM video applications. Refer to Section 4 for sample performance. R4-9 [46] (4.1.7) Attenuators shall meet optical criteria and damage criteria described in Section 4.2 [after exposure to the specified flex test conditions]. X NA Optical fiber leads are not incorporated into this attenuator. R4-10 [47] (4.1.8) Attenuators shall meet optical criteria and damage criteria described in Section 4.2 [after exposure to the specified twist test conditions]. X NA Optical fiber leads are not incorporated into this attenuator. Telcordia Technologies, Inc. Confidential -- Restricted Access See confidentiality restrictions on title page. ES-14 502-1198 Rev A DA-1543 Issue 1, Revision 4 February 3, 2005 Confidential -- Restricted Access Tyco Electronics 3-dB SC Singlemode Fiber Optic Buildout Attenuators Executive Summary TP-910 Table ES-1 Detailed Summary of Proposed Fiber Optic Attenuator Test Plan Criteria and Conformance Status (Continued) GR-910 Req. # [Abs. #] (Sec. #) R4-11 [48] (4.1.9) V E R I F Y Item A N A L Y Z E Attenuators shall meet optical criteria and damage criteria described in Section 4.2 [during and after exposure to the specified side pull test conditions]. I N S P E C T T E S T Results (Pass/ Fail/ NA/ ND) X FAIL Comment Based on 0.5 dB change in attenuation criteria for both digital and AM video applications as well as an attenuation tolerance of 0.5V for both digital and AM video applications. Refer to Section 4 for sample performance. Nonconforming conditions observed for the 0.5 dB change in attenuation requirement for both digital and AM video applications. During the side pull test, samples i.l.04, i.l.06 and i.l.10 did not conform. After the side pull test, samples i.l.06 and i.l.10 did not conform. Telcordia Technologies, Inc. Confidential -- Restricted Access See confidentiality restrictions on title page. 502-1198 Rev A ES-15 Confidential -- Restricted Access DA-1543 Issue 1, Revision 4 February 3, 2005 Tyco Electronics 3-dB SC Singlemode Fiber Optic Buildout Attenuators Executive Summary TP-910 Table ES-1 Detailed Summary of Proposed Fiber Optic Attenuator Test Plan Criteria and Conformance Status (Continued) GR-910 Req. # [Abs. #] (Sec. #) V E R I F Y Item A N A L Y Z E I N S P E C T T E S T Results (Pass/ Fail/ NA/ ND) Comment R4-12 [49] (4.1.10) Attenuators shall meet optical criteria and damage criteria described in Section 4.2 [after exposure to the specified cable retention test conditions]. X FAIL Based on 0.5 dB change in attenuation criteria for both digital and AM video applications as well as an attenuation tolerance of 0.5V for both digital and AM video applications. Refer to Section 4 for sample performance. Nonconforming conditions observed for the 0.5 dB change in attenuation requirement for both digital and AM video applications. After the cable retention test, sample i.l.09 did not conform. R4-13 [50] (4.1.11) Attenuators shall meet optical criteria and damage criteria described in Section 4.2 [after exposure to the specified durability test conditions]. X PASS Based on 0.5 dB change in attenuation criteria for both digital and AM video applications as well as an attenuation tolerance of 0.5V for both digital and AM video applications. Refer to Section 4 for sample performance. Telcordia Technologies, Inc. Confidential -- Restricted Access See confidentiality restrictions on title page. ES-16 502-1198 Rev A DA-1543 Issue 1, Revision 4 February 3, 2005 Confidential -- Restricted Access Tyco Electronics 3-dB SC Singlemode Fiber Optic Buildout Attenuators Executive Summary TP-910 Table ES-1 Detailed Summary of Proposed Fiber Optic Attenuator Test Plan Criteria and Conformance Status (Continued) GR-910 Req. # [Abs. #] (Sec. #) V E R I F Y Item A N A L Y Z E I N S P E C T T E S T Results (Pass/ Fail/ NA/ ND) CR4-14 [51] (4.1.11) The value of attenuation, as the attenuator setting is varied in either direction (including backlash) over the entire attenuation range, shall be within the attenuation tolerance, with no physical damage. X NA CR4-15 [52] (4.1.11) Adjusting the setting past its endpoint by any amount shall not result in damage to the attenuator. Alternatively, there shall be a "stop" preventing adjustment past the endpoint. X NA R4-16 [53] (4.1.12) Attenuators shall meet optical criteria and damage criteria described in Section 4.2 [after exposure to the specified impact test conditions]. X PASS Comment Based on 0.5 dB change in attenuation criteria for both digital and AM video applications as well as an attenuation tolerance of 0.5V for both digital and AM video applications. Refer to Section 4 for sample performance. Optical Bandpass CR4-17 [54] (4.2.1) For 1310/1550nm attenuators to be used for all digital applications except long-reach SONET, all optical requirements shall be met over the bandpass for both the 1310nm and the 1550nm regions specified in GR-910 Table 4-3, Column 2. X PASS CO4-18 [55] (4.2.1) For 1310/1550nm attenuators to be used for all digital applications, all optical objectives should be met over the bandpass for both the 1310 nm and the 1550nm regions specified in GR-910 Table 4-3, Column 3. X PASS CR4-19 [56] (4.2.1) For 1310/1550nm attenuators to be used for long-reach SONET only, all optical requirements shall be met over the bandpass specified in GR-910 Table 4-3, Column 4. X PASS Telcordia Technologies, Inc. Confidential -- Restricted Access See confidentiality restrictions on title page. 502-1198 Rev A ES-17 Confidential -- Restricted Access DA-1543 Issue 1, Revision 4 February 3, 2005 Tyco Electronics 3-dB SC Singlemode Fiber Optic Buildout Attenuators Executive Summary TP-910 Table ES-1 Detailed Summary of Proposed Fiber Optic Attenuator Test Plan Criteria and Conformance Status (Continued) GR-910 Req. # [Abs. #] (Sec. #) R4-20 [57] (4.2.1) V E R I F Y Item A N A L Y Z E For all attenuators intended for use in AM-VSB video transmission, all optical requirements shall be met over the bandpass specified in GR-910 Table 4-3, Column 5. I N S P E C T T E S T Results (Pass/ Fail/ NA/ ND) Comment X PASS Change In Attenuation CR4-21 [58] (4.2.2) For all digital applications the maximum or minimum change in attenuation before, during, or after, any or all environmental or mechanical tests shall be 0.5 dB or 0.15A, whichever is less. X FAIL Based on 0.5 dB change in attenuation criteria. CR4-22 [59] (4.2.2) For all AM video applications the maximum or minimum change in attenuation before, during, or after, any or all environmental or mechanical tests shall be 0.5 dB or 0.10A, whichever is less. X FAIL Based on 0.5 dB change in attenuation criteria. Attenuation Tolerance CR4-23 [60] (4.2.3) For attenuators intended for use in digital applications the attenuation tolerance shall not exceed 0.15V. X PASS Based on an attenuation tolerance of 0.5V. CR4-24 [61] (4.2.3) For attenuators intended for use in AM video applications the attenuation tolerance shall not exceed 0.10V. X PASS Based on an attenuation tolerance of 0.5V. Attenuation Increments and Range R4-25 [62] (4.2.4) The attenuation range for attenuators shall be at least 5 to 20 dB. X PASS CR4-26 [63] (4.2.4) For digital applications the attenuation increments for fixed and discretely variable attenuators shall be 5 dB. This means that fixed and variable attenuators can change in increments of no greater than 5 dB. X NA CR4-27 [64] (4.2.4) For AM video applications the attenuation increments for fixed and discretely variable attenuators shall be 3 dB. X NA CO4-28 [65] (4.2.4) For AM video applications the attenuation increments for fixed and discretely variable attenuators shall be 1 dB. X NA Telcordia Technologies, Inc. Confidential -- Restricted Access See confidentiality restrictions on title page. ES-18 502-1198 Rev A DA-1543 Issue 1, Revision 4 February 3, 2005 Confidential -- Restricted Access Tyco Electronics 3-dB SC Singlemode Fiber Optic Buildout Attenuators Executive Summary TP-910 Table ES-1 Detailed Summary of Proposed Fiber Optic Attenuator Test Plan Criteria and Conformance Status (Continued) GR-910 Req. # [Abs. #] (Sec. #) CO4-29 [66] (4.2.4) V E R I F Y Item A N A L Y Z E The attenuation range for attenuators should be at least 1 to 25 dB. I N S P E C T T E S T Results (Pass/ Fail/ NA/ ND) Comment X PASS Reflectance R4-30 [67] (4.2.5) The maximum reflectance for attenuators intended for use in Digital systems as bit rates up to 10 Gb/s shall be -40 dB over the entire bandpass of GR-910 R4-16 [53] and GR-910 CR4-17 [54] and operating temperature range of -40C to 75C (-40F to 167F). X PASS CR4-31 [68] (4.2.5) The maximum reflectance for attenuators intended for use in AM-VSB systems shall be -55 dB over the entire bandpass of GR-910 CR4-19 [56] and operating temperature range of -40C to +75C. X PASS CO4-32 [69] (4.2.5) The maximum reflectance for attenuators intended for use in AM-VSB systems should be -65 dB over the entire bandpass of GR-910 CR4-19 [56] and operating temperature range of-40C to +75C. X FAIL Nonconforming conditions observed for all of the environmental and mechanical tests in all of the samples tested. Polarization-Dependent Loss R4-33 [70] (4.2.6) All optical requirements shall be met for all incident SOPs. X PASS CR4-34 [71] (4.2.6) For digital applications the maximum change in attenuation shall be 0.5 dB or 0.15A, whichever is less. X PASS CR4-35 [72] (4.2.6) For AM video applications the maximum change in attenuation shall be 0.5 dB or 0.10A, whichever is less. X PASS Polarization-Mode Dispersion CR4-36 [79] (4.2.7) The maximum value of dispersion (in ps) shall not exceed 0.2 ps for all operating wavelengths. X PASS Telcordia Technologies, Inc. Confidential -- Restricted Access See confidentiality restrictions on title page. 502-1198 Rev A ES-19 Confidential -- Restricted Access DA-1543 Issue 1, Revision 4 February 3, 2005 Tyco Electronics 3-dB SC Singlemode Fiber Optic Buildout Attenuators Executive Summary TP-910 Table ES-1 Detailed Summary of Proposed Fiber Optic Attenuator Test Plan Criteria and Conformance Status (Continued) GR-910 Req. # [Abs. #] (Sec. #) V E R I F Y Item A N A L Y Z E I N S P E C T T E S T Results (Pass/ Fail/ NA/ ND) Comment Damage Criteria R4-37 [73] (4.2.8) At the completion of all tests there shall be no damage that would impair the performance of the attenuator. X PASS Passive Optical Component Code (POCC) R6-1 [74] (6.1) The Passive Optical Component Code (POCC) characters as outlined in GR-910 Table 6-1 should be imprinted on the component housing. X NA Qualification Criteria R7-1 [80] (7.3) The equipment supplier shall perform or obtain verifiable data for the qualification of optical attenuators, including characterization and reliability tests. X ND R7-2 [81] (7.3.1) Optical attenuators shall be fully characterized for optical performance as part of device qualification. The characterization must include mechanical, electrical, and optical parameters. A sample size of at least 11 devices (LTPD of 20%) is required. A failure is defined as any component that does not meet all the specified parametric limits. X ND O7-3 [82] (7.3.1) Optical attenuators data also should be obtained from the vendor (in-house or external) on a much larger population (~ 50-200 units representing a minimum of three different date codes). Distributions (minimum, maximum, mean, and 3) of measured parameters should be compared to specification limits and design requirements to assure that adequate margins exist. X ND R7-4 [83] (7.3.2) Reliability tests for optical attenuators shall include mechanical/physical tests as well as endurance tests. ... Table 1 lists a minimum set of tests that must be performed. X ND Telcordia Technologies, Inc. Confidential -- Restricted Access See confidentiality restrictions on title page. ES-20 502-1198 Rev A DA-1543 Issue 1, Revision 4 February 3, 2005 Confidential -- Restricted Access Tyco Electronics 3-dB SC Singlemode Fiber Optic Buildout Attenuators Executive Summary TP-910 Table ES-1 Detailed Summary of Proposed Fiber Optic Attenuator Test Plan Criteria and Conformance Status (Continued) GR-910 Req. # [Abs. #] (Sec. #) V E R I F Y Item A N A L Y Z E I N S P E C T T E S T Results (Pass/ Fail/ NA/ ND) R7-5 [84] (7.3.2) Mechanical/optical performance tests shall be completed before and after each of the reliability tests. Out of specifications shall be counted as failures. Other pass/fail criteria, based on degradations in some key parameters, shall be documented along with the testing methods. X ND R7-6 [85] (7.3.2) Technical justification of the accelerated aging factors by stresses, such as temperature, humidity, or optical power, for different testing conditions is required. Associated acceleration/ deceleration factors must be clearly identified. X ND R7-7 [86] (7.3.2) For those components with non-hermetic packages, the thermal shock test will not be required, but the damp heat testing duration must be increased to 5000 hours from the 2000 hour test for hermetic components. X NA R7-8 [87] (7.3.2) If technical data are not available in support of other values, an activation energy of 0.3 eV shall be assumed for the dry heat test and an effective activation energy of 0.6 eV shall be assumed for the damp heat test. In the latter case, the higher activation energy accounts for the difference between the test's high humidity and "average" operating conditions, such that a separate term for humidity would not be included in the calculation of the acceleration factor. X ND Comment Manufacturers may use a different activation energy or a different model for calculating acceleration, if its use can be supported by empirical data. The empirical data must be based on reliability testing or field returns, and shall be available for review by the LECs, service providers or their representative. Telcordia Technologies, Inc. Confidential -- Restricted Access See confidentiality restrictions on title page. 502-1198 Rev A ES-21 Confidential -- Restricted Access DA-1543 Issue 1, Revision 4 February 3, 2005 Tyco Electronics 3-dB SC Singlemode Fiber Optic Buildout Attenuators Executive Summary TP-910 Table ES-1 Detailed Summary of Proposed Fiber Optic Attenuator Test Plan Criteria and Conformance Status (Continued) GR-910 Req. # [Abs. #] (Sec. #) O7-9 [88] (5.4.2.4) V E R I F Y Item A N A L Y Z E In order of priority, the following life tests should be performed as part of any effort to validate alternative acceleration models or activation energies: *High temperature damp heat = 75C, 90% RH (or 85C, 85% RH) *High temperature dry heat = 85C, ~ 16% RH *Moderate temperature damp heat = 45C, 85% RH I N S P E C T T E S T Results (Pass/ Fail/ NA/ ND) Comment X ND Minimum sample size is 22 devices for each life test. Results should include estimates of median life or mean-time-to-failure (MTTF), and a "spread" parameter (e.g., standard deviation). R7-10 [89] (7.3.2) A temperature cycle life test shall be performed in accordance with the procedures of Section 6.2.7 in GR-1221-CORE. The minimum and maximum temperatures shall be at least -40C and + 75C. The minimum sample size is 11 devices (LTPD of 20%). Results after 500 cycles shall be used for "passing" or "failing" the test. Failures between 500 cycles and 1000 cycles shall be investigated and corrective actions shall be implemented. X ND R7-11 [90] (7.3.2) Fiber pigtails and optical connectors shall comply with general flammability requirements for materials used in telecommunications systems. X ND Failure Rate Prediction R7-12 [91] (7.3.3) Equivalent time and temperature requirements shall be calculated using the Arrhenius relationship. Technical justification of the activation energy used for different conditions in temperature-dependent life tests is required. X ND Acceleration models (for failure mechanisms affected by other stresses, such as optical power or humidity) shall be demonstrated (theoretically if possible and empirically). Associated acceleration/deceleration factors must be clearly identified. Telcordia Technologies, Inc. Confidential -- Restricted Access See confidentiality restrictions on title page. ES-22 502-1198 Rev A DA-1543 Issue 1, Revision 4 February 3, 2005 Confidential -- Restricted Access Tyco Electronics 3-dB SC Singlemode Fiber Optic Buildout Attenuators Executive Summary TP-910 Table ES-1 Detailed Summary of Proposed Fiber Optic Attenuator Test Plan Criteria and Conformance Status (Continued) GR-910 Req. # [Abs. #] (Sec. #) O7-13 [92] (7.3.3) V E R I F Y Item The acceleration aging factor from humidity is recommended to be assessed by the equation below. Technical justification of the derivation is required. A N A L Y Z E I N S P E C T T E S T Results (Pass/ Fail/ NA/ ND) X ND ND Comment ML ( H 2 ) n n ------------------------- = exp [ BH 1 - BH 2 ] ML ( H 1 ) where H1 and H2 are the relative humidity levels in %, ML is the median life at a given humidity, and B and n are empirical constants. R7-14 [93] (7.3.3) Wear-out and random failure rates and acceleration aging factors shall be provided. The sources and data shall also be provided. X X O7-15 [94] (7.3.3) To simplify review (by customers or their representatives) of failure rate predictions, the format in ... Table 2 is recommended for use by device manufacturers and/or equipment suppliers. X X ND R7-16 [95] (7.3.3) The testing data and supporting evidence for ... Table 2 shall be documented and available for review at the request of a LEC, service provider or its representative. X X ND R7-17 [96] (7.3.3) Unless otherwise specified, all failures observed in qualification testing must normally be counted and must be reported, regardless of the failure mode. Omission of any failures from test results must be clearly justified and must be reviewed with the LEC, service provider or its representative. X X ND O7-18 [97] (7.3.3) ... Table 3 provides the recommended format for reporting the status of all reliability tests. X X ND R7-19 [98] (7.3.3) The testing data and supporting evidence for ... Table 3 shall be documented and available for review at the request of a LEC, service provider or its representative. X ND Telcordia Technologies, Inc. Confidential -- Restricted Access See confidentiality restrictions on title page. 502-1198 Rev A ES-23 Confidential -- Restricted Access DA-1543 Issue 1, Revision 4 February 3, 2005 Tyco Electronics 3-dB SC Singlemode Fiber Optic Buildout Attenuators Executive Summary TP-910 Table ES-1 Detailed Summary of Proposed Fiber Optic Attenuator Test Plan Criteria and Conformance Status (Continued) GR-910 Req. # [Abs. #] (Sec. #) V E R I F Y Item A N A L Y Z E I N S P E C T T E S T Results (Pass/ Fail/ NA/ ND) Comment Quality Assurance and Lot Controls R7-20 [99] (7.3.5.1) Incoming lots of optical attenuators shall be visually inspected on at least a sample basis (to be determined in accordance with a statistical sampling plan established by the equipment supplier). X ND O7-21 [100] (7.3.5.1) Visual inspection (or another step in lot acceptance procedures) should check at least for the following: *Package condition *Required documentation *Product appearance/condition *Product identification/marking *Inspection of connectors or fiber-pigtails. X ND R7-22 [101] (7.3.5.2) Parameters specified in Section 4 form the minimum set of optical parameters which must be guaranteed. If 100% testing for this purpose is not performed, adequate data shall be collected and a statistically justified sampling plan must be established. This sampling test program must be approved in writing from the LEC, service provider or its representative. X ND R7-23 [102] (7.3.5.3) All optical attenuators shall be subjected to a temperature cycle screen. The minimum requirements consist of 10 cycles between temperature limits of at least -40C and +75C; if these are outside the component's specifications, the minimum- and maximumspecified storage temperatures shall be used. X X ND O7-24 [103] (7.3.5.3) The demonstration of the effectiveness of alternate temperature cycle conditions for screening should include first characterizing devices after the proposed number of temperature cycles and again after 10 cycles, presumably showing that no significant degradation nor additional failures occurred. The demonstration should be proved on adequate samples over multiple lots. X X ND Telcordia Technologies, Inc. Confidential -- Restricted Access See confidentiality restrictions on title page. ES-24 502-1198 Rev A DA-1543 Issue 1, Revision 4 February 3, 2005 Confidential -- Restricted Access Tyco Electronics 3-dB SC Singlemode Fiber Optic Buildout Attenuators Executive Summary TP-910 Table ES-1 Detailed Summary of Proposed Fiber Optic Attenuator Test Plan Criteria and Conformance Status (Continued) V E R I F Y A N A L Y Z E I N S P E C T T E S T Results GR-910 Req. # [Abs. #] (Sec. #) Item O7-25 [104] (7.3.5.3) All optical attenuators should be subjected to a temperature humidity screen. The minimum requirement is 72 hours at +75C and 90% RH. X X ND R7-26 [105] (7.3.5.3) Optical criteria shall be measured before and after screening. Any "major" changes (as defined and documented by the equipment supplier, in addition to pass/fail criteria) shall result in rejection of a device. X X ND O7-27 [106] (7.3.5.3) The pass/fail criteria should be no more than 20% changes on the specified parameters. X ND O7-28 [107] (7.3.5.3) The manufacturer should record the optical criteria before and after screening on a sample of components as a production audit. X ND X ND (Pass/ Fail/ NA/ ND) Comment Quality and Reliability Criteria R7-29 [108] (7.4) The supplier shall, on request, make documentation available that describes: *The quality program used in the manufacture of the product. This shall include but not be limited to controls, procedures and standards for component reliability assurance, incoming material inspection procedures, product manufacture, in-process testing, equipment calibration and maintenance, final product inspection and testing, initial and periodic qualification testing, and control of nonconforming materials/product. The component reliability assurance program shall address vendor selection/qualification, component qualification, and lot controls (incoming inspection, source inspection, and where appropriate, ship-to-stock practices). *The installation, operation and maintenance of the product. *Support procedures for the product once it is in use. This includes items such as repair, technical assistance, training and a means of notifying the customer of problems and/or changes in the product. Telcordia Technologies, Inc. Confidential -- Restricted Access See confidentiality restrictions on title page. 502-1198 Rev A ES-25 Confidential -- Restricted Access DA-1543 Issue 1, Revision 4 February 3, 2005 Tyco Electronics 3-dB SC Singlemode Fiber Optic Buildout Attenuators Executive Summary TP-910 Table ES-1 Detailed Summary of Proposed Fiber Optic Attenuator Test Plan Criteria and Conformance Status (Continued) GR-910 Req. # [Abs. #] (Sec. #) V E R I F Y Item A N A L Y Z E I N S P E C T T E S T Results (Pass/ Fail/ NA/ ND) R7-30 [109] (7.4.1) The supplier shall allow the performance of a Reliability Audit at the production facilities where the product is manufactured and assembled. X ND R7-31 [110] (7.4.1) The supplier shall have a program in place to monitor both the early-life and long-term reliability of the product. The program shall include documented procedures for analysis, testing, and measurement of reliability. The reliability data shall be made available on request. X ND R7-32 [111] (7.4.2) The supplier's manufacturing process and associated quality assurance systems, as they relate to products covered by this document, shall be subject to periodic quality process and finished product audits. X ND Comment Telcordia Technologies, Inc. Confidential -- Restricted Access See confidentiality restrictions on title page. ES-26 502-1198 Rev A DA-1543 Issue 1, Revision 4 February 3, 2005 Confidential -- Restricted Access Tyco Electronics 3-dB SC Singlemode Fiber Optic Buildout Attenuators Program Scope Program Scope The scope of this program is comprehensive and includes all essential elements required under GR-910-CORE (Issue 2). Telcordia verifies, analyzes, inspects and tests Tyco Electronics Corporation's 3-dB SC Singlemode Fiber Optic Buildout Attenuators to determine conformance to each essential Requirement (R), Objective (O), Conditional Requirement (CR), and Conditional Objective (CO). A complete list of the criteria to be evaluated is included as TP-910 Table ES-1 located in the Executive Summary section of this Test Report. Any criteria that may not be applicable to a specific product will be denoted as "NA" in TP-910 Table ES-1, and the reason will be stated. For vendors of Verizon, the requirements specified herein shall be accomplished at either a certified PFOC ITL or at an approved PFOC ITL client site under the surveillance of PFOC ITL. Test Report Format It is the intent of this Test Plan for it to be converted to a Test Report for delivery to the client at the completion of the test program. In this way, a uniform correlation will be maintained between the GR-910-CORE Generic Requirements document, the Telcordia Test Plan, and the Test Report. It is an essential requirement of Verizon for there to be a one-to-one mapping between GR-910-CORE Issue 2 and this document for Section 3 (General and Design Criteria), Section 4 (Performance Criteria) and Section 7 (Reliability and Quality Assurance Program). Section 1 of GR-910-CORE is administrative in nature and does not contain criteria or require testing, and therefore it is not required or included in this document. Section 2 of GR-910-CORE does not include criteria or require any testing, but it does provide useful background information on passive optical components. Therefore, it is included in this document. Section 5 of GR-910-CORE describes the test procedures for the performance analysis of single-mode fiber optic attenuators which are used within the content of Section 4. Finally, Section 6 of GR-910-CORE contains the Telcordia Passive Optical Component Code (POCC) description format which offers a quick reference to mechanical, electrical, and optical definitions. For any case where Telcordia will not be evaluating Reliability criteria, Section 7 of GR-910-CORE may be reduced to a statement to describe why they were not evaluated by Telcordia (if this is a Verizon PFOC ITL, Verizon should be notified in advance). Telcordia Technologies, Inc. Confidential -- Restricted Access See confidentiality restrictions on title page. 502-1198 Rev A PS-1 Confidential -- Restricted Access Tyco Electronics 3-dB SC Singlemode Fiber Optic Buildout Attenuators Program Scope DA-1543 Issue 1, Revision 4 February 3, 2005 Program Initiation Flowchart The process for initiation of a program under GR-910-CORE is illustrated in the flow chart shown in TP-910 Figure PS-1 below: Receipt of Signed Service Order Testing and Documentation Review Phase Begins Legal and Technical Review; Processing by Billing Organization to establish project numbering codes Process Discussion held at client site to review and verify documented processes as required to establish conformance to general requirements Project Leader and team assigned Samples Selected for Testing Project Documentation File Formally Established Kickoff discussion with client to establish roles, responsibilities and project action items Client provides product samples for test and required documentation Test Plans Prepared and Proposed Schedule is Established Perform all required tests for GR-910CORE Section 4 Analyze supplier documetnation and results of onsite process audit Record all findings relative to general criteria conformance Completion of Section 3 and 7 of Analysis Report Record all findings relative to test and measurement related criteria Complete Section 4 of Analysis Report Test Plans reviewed by client and client customers if needed (req'd for Verizon programs) Test plans comments reflected in updated test plan as required TP-910 Figure PS-1 Program Initiation Flowchart Telcordia Technologies, Inc. Confidential -- Restricted Access See confidentiality restrictions on title page. PS-2 502-1198 Rev A DA-1543 Issue 1, Revision 4 February 3, 2005 Confidential -- Restricted Access Tyco Electronics 3-dB SC Singlemode Fiber Optic Buildout Attenuators Program Scope High-Level Flowchart for Service Life and General Requirements Evaluation/Test Program The overall flow for the entire GR-910-CORE PFOC program is illustrated in the high-level flow chart shown in TP-910 Figure PS-2. This chart shows each major step required to assess conformance, and is not intended to demonstrate the most efficient or actual path for completion. Telcordia Technologies, Inc. Confidential -- Restricted Access See confidentiality restrictions on title page. 502-1198 Rev A PS-3 Confidential -- Restricted Access Tyco Electronics 3-dB SC Singlemode Fiber Optic Buildout Attenuators Program Scope Samples Received, Uniquely Identified and Inspected for Condition Section 4.1 Environmental and Mechanical Criteria Section 3 General and Design Criteria Section 4.1.1 Controlled Operating Environment DA-1543 Issue 1, Revision 4 February 3, 2005 Section 4.1.12 Impact Section 4.2 Optical Criteria Section 4.2.1 Optical Bandpass Section 3.1 Documentation Section 4.1.2 Uncontrolled Operating Environment Section 3.2 Marking, Packaging and Shipping Section 4.1.3 Non-Operating Environment Section 3.3 Physical Design Criteria Section 4.1.4 Humidity/ Condensation Cycling Check Calibration of all test equipment to be used for measurements Section 4.1.5 Water Immersion Set Up of the Standard Test Configuration Section 4.1.6 Vibration Perform preparation and warm up of specific systems in accordance with manuals/instructions Section 4.1.9 Side Pull Section 4.1.10 Cable Retention Section 4.2.2 Change in Attenuation Section 4.2.3 Attenuation Tolerance Section 4.2.5 Reflectance Section 4.2.6 PDL Section 4.2.7 PMD Section 4.2.8 Damage Criteria Analyze all results and complete report preparation Section 4 Performance Criteria Section 4.1.11 Durability TP-910 Figure PS-2 High-Level Flowchart for Service Life and General Requirements Evaluation/Test Program Telcordia Technologies, Inc. Confidential -- Restricted Access See confidentiality restrictions on title page. PS-4 502-1198 Rev A Confidential -- Restricted Access DA-1543 Issue 1, Revision 4 February 3, 2005 1.0 Tyco Electronics 3-dB SC Singlemode Fiber Optic Buildout Attenuators Administrative Data (not from GR-910) Administrative Data (not from GR-910) 1.1 Description of Test Item(s) (not from GR-910) Buildout attenuators are 2 port, bidirectional components without integral optical fiber leads. These attenuators were manufactured to an attenuation tolerance of 3 0.5 dB and 55 dB return loss. 1.2 Part Number(s) and Serial Number(s) of Test Item(s) (not from GR-910) Product part number: 209250-3 Serial numbers of tested samples including hot spares are correlated to sample numbers as follows: TP-910 Table 1-1 Sample Name and Serial Number of Tested Samples, Hot Spares Test Sample Name Test Sample Serial Number Hot Spare Serial Number i.l.01 63 64 i.l.02 68 67 i.l.03 74 73 i.l.04 75 77 i.l.05 78 80 i.l.06 86 81 i.l.07 88 84 i.l.08 94 85 i.l.09 97 87 i.l.10 98 102 i.l.11 103 108 1.3 Location(s) of Manufacturing (not from GR-910) 3/F No. 138 He Dan Road Waigaoqiao Free Trade Zone Shanghai 200131, China Telcordia Technologies, Inc. Confidential -- Restricted Access See confidentiality restrictions on title page. 502-1198 Rev A 1-1 Confidential -- Restricted Access Tyco Electronics 3-dB SC Singlemode Fiber Optic Buildout Attenuators Administrative Data (not from GR-910) DA-1543 Issue 1, Revision 4 February 3, 2005 1.4 Test/Evaluation Location(s) and Dates (not from GR-910) Telcordia Technologies Raritan River Software Systems Center One Telcordia Drive Piscataway, NJ 08844-4157 Laboratory: RRC-1D169 Laboratory: RRC-1D183 Testing/Evaluation commenced on: April 12, 2004 Testing/Evaluation concluded on: August 3, 2004 1.5 References (not from GR-910) Telcordia References * BR 781-826-127, Optical Cross-Connect Planning (A Module of the OXPEG) * GR-63-CORE, Network Equipment-Building System (NEBS) Generic Equipment Requirements * GR-253-CORE, Synchronous Optical Network (SONET) Transport Systems: Common Generic Criteria, (A Module of TSGR, FR-440) * TR-NWT-000264, Optical Fiber Cleavers * GR-326-CORE, Generic Requirements for Single-Mode Optical Connectors and Jumper Assemblies * TR-NWT-000357, Generic Requirements for Assuring the Reliability of Components used in Telecommunications Equipment * GR-409-CORE, Generic Requirements for Premises Fiber Optic Cable * GR-765-CORE, Generic Requirements for Single Fiber Optical Splices and Systems * TA-NWT-000909, Generic Requirements and Objectives for Fiber In The Loop Systems * GR-1209-CORE, Generic Requirements for Passive Optical Components * GR-1221-CORE, Generic Reliability Assurance Requirements for Fiber Optic Branching Components * GR-1252-CORE, Quality System Generic Requirements for Hardware (A Module of RQGR, FR-796). * SR-NWT-001907, Transport Reliability Analysis Generic Guidelines (TRAGG) * SR-NWT-002014, Suggested Optical Cable Code (SOCC) Telcordia Technologies, Inc. Confidential -- Restricted Access See confidentiality restrictions on title page. 1-2 502-1198 Rev A DA-1543 Issue 1, Revision 4 February 3, 2005 Confidential -- Restricted Access Tyco Electronics 3-dB SC Singlemode Fiber Optic Buildout Attenuators Administrative Data (not from GR-910) * SR-NWT-2759, A View of Packaging, Packing, Palletization, and Marking Requirements Electronic Industries Association (EIA) References The EIA/TIA-455 documents (the official document numbers) are more commonly known as FOTPs (for Fiber Optic Test Procedures), and are referred to as such in the text of this document. * EIA/TIA-455-A, Standard Test Procedures for Fiber Optic Fibers, Cables, Transducers, Sensors, Connecting and Terminating Devices, and Other Fiber Optic Components * EIA/TIA-455-1A, FOTP-1: Cable Flexing for Fiber Optic Interconnecting Devices * EIA/TIA-455-2B, FOTP-2: Impact Test Measurements for Fiber Optic Devices * EIA/TIA-455-3A, FOTP-3: Procedure to Measure Temperature Cycling Effects on Optical Fibers, Optical Cable, and Other Passive Fiber Optic Components * EIA/TIA-455-5A, FOTP-5: Humidity Test Procedure for Fiber Optic Connecting Devices * EIA/TIA-455-6A, FOTP-6: Cable Retention Test Procedure For Fiber Optic Cable Interconnecting Devices * EIA/TIA-455-11, FOTP-11: Vibration Test Procedure For Fiber Optic Connecting Devices * EIA/TIA-455-12A, FOTP-12: Fluid Immersion Test for Fiber Optic Components * EIA/TIA-455-13, FOTP-13: Visual and Mechanical Inspection of Fiber Optic Devices * EIA/TIA-455-20A, FOTP-20: Measurement of Change In Optical Transmittance * EIA/TIA-455-36, FOTP-36: Twist Test For Fiber Optic Connecting Devices * EIA/TIA-455-57, FOTP-57: Optical Fiber End Preparation and Examination * EIA/TIA-455-78, FOTP-78: Spectral Attenuation Cutback Measurement for Single-Mode Optical Fibers * EIA/TIA-455-107, FOTP-107: Return Loss for Fiber Optic Components * EIA/TIA-455-127, FOTP-127: Spectral Characterization of Multimode Lasers Other References * ASTM B117, Salt Spray (Fog) Testing Telcordia Technologies, Inc. Confidential -- Restricted Access See confidentiality restrictions on title page. 502-1198 Rev A 1-3 Confidential -- Restricted Access Tyco Electronics 3-dB SC Singlemode Fiber Optic Buildout Attenuators Administrative Data (not from GR-910) DA-1543 Issue 1, Revision 4 February 3, 2005 * ASTM D610, Standard Method of Evaluating Degree of Rusting on Painted Steel Surfaces * ASTM D2863, Standard Method for Measuring the Minimum Oxygen Concentration to Support Candle-Like Combustion of Plastics (Oxygen Index) * ASTM G21, Determining Resistance of Polymeric Material to Fungi * MIL-M-38510J, General Specification for Microcircuits, Military Specification, (November 1991) * UL 94, Tests for Flammability of Plastic Materials for Parts in Devices and Appliances Optical Safety References * ANSIZ136.2, American National Standard for the Safe Use of Optical Fiber Communications Systems Utilizing Laser Diode and LED Sources, 1997. * FDA 79-8035, United States Food and Drug Administration, Bureau of Radiological Health Laser Product Safety Classifications, 21 CFR 1040, August 20, 1985. Telcordia Technologies, Inc. Confidential -- Restricted Access See confidentiality restrictions on title page. 1-4 502-1198 Rev A DA-1543 Issue 1, Revision 4 February 3, 2005 2.0 Confidential -- Restricted Access Tyco Electronics 3-dB SC Singlemode Fiber Optic Buildout Attenuators General Information General Information 2.1 General Product Description A fiber optic attenuator is a passive, in-line, optical component that intentionally reduces (attenuates) the optical power propagating in fiber. GR-910 Figure 2-1a) shows a schematic representation of a Fixed Attenuator and GR-910 Figure 2-1b) shows a Variable Attenuator. GR-910 Figure 2-1 The a) Fixed and b) Variable Attenuator Components Variable attenuators may adjust power continuously or in discrete steps. The ideal attenuator has a stable attenuation over a wide temperature range and mechanical stress. It is independent of wavelength and state of polarization, and causes no reflection or interference of the optical signal. In addition, a variable attenuator should have small attenuation increments, wide attenuation range, and accurate control of attenuation. 2.2 Attenuator Technology Manufacturing technology is not considered in detail here, other than to describe some of the methods used to produce attenuators. In an all-fiber attenuator1, a Ge-Al co-doped silica core attenuation fiber is cleaved at a specific length and fusion spliced between two standard single-mode fibers. The attenuator is epoxied into ferrules that are polished and packaged appropriately. In fused tapered attenuators a tapered region of a specific length is produced by heating and pulling the fiber. The tapered region is epoxied and packaged in a protective housing, ready for connectorization or fusion splicing. Several physical phenomena can be utilized to fabricate fixed and variable attenuators, including divergence of light (in an air-gap attenuator), light absorption or scattering through a partially opaque film or filtering material, reflection from, (a bend radius, refractive index discontinuity, or at an angled surface), and optical polarization. Air-gap attenuators inherently have high reflections and can cause systems power penalties in high bit rate systems. Currently there are commercially 1. Chia, Shin-Lo, Cost-effective Single-Mode wavelength independent all-fiber attenuator, NFOEC June 1992. Telcordia Technologies, Inc. Confidential -- Restricted Access See confidentiality restrictions on title page. 502-1198 Rev A 2-1 Confidential -- Restricted Access Tyco Electronics 3-dB SC Singlemode Fiber Optic Buildout Attenuators General Information DA-1543 Issue 1, Revision 4 February 3, 2005 available attenuators that attenuate optical power via bend radius that do not increase optical reflectance. These bend radius attenuators are currently designed for the 1310 nm wavelength region. Further study needs to be undertaken to evaluate the long term effects of small bend radii on optical fiber. Both fixed and variable attenuators for use in fiber optic transmission systems will be considered in this GR. Both types of attenuators can be used for BER characterization of transmission systems by representing system power penalties. * Fixed Attenuator An attenuator having a constant, non-adjustable value of attenuation. Attenuation can be changed only by removing and replacing or by concatenating fixed attenuators. * Variable AttenuatorsAn attenuator that has a variable attenuation, varied with an integral adjustment that can be either calibrated or uncalibrated Attenuators may or may not have attached optical fiber pigtails, but attenuators without fiber pigtails have either integral connector receptacles or optical connector interfaces, for coupling to connectorized fiber cables. There are three basic types of in-line attenuators: connector receptacle, optical pad, and patchcord attenuators. Connector receptacles include bulkhead, barrel build-out, sleeve, adaptor, or coupling. The connector receptacle attenuating element is either an airgap or filter and is part of the receptacle. Attenuators with male/female connector interfaces attached to the body of the attenuator are referred to as optical pad attenuators and look much like electrical pad attenuators. A patchcord attenuator has one or two permanently attached fiber pigtails, which may or may not be connectorized. The attenuating element in optical pad and patchcord attenuators is a filter, a chemically etched fiber, or a fused tapered fiber. See GR-910 Figure 2-2 for examples of types of attenuators. GR-910 Figure 2-2 Attenuator Types a) Connector Receptacle, b) Optical Pad, c) Patchcord Telcordia Technologies, Inc. Confidential -- Restricted Access See confidentiality restrictions on title page. 2-2 502-1198 Rev A DA-1543 Issue 1, Revision 4 February 3, 2005 Confidential -- Restricted Access Tyco Electronics 3-dB SC Singlemode Fiber Optic Buildout Attenuators General Information The requirements of this document are intended for attenuators with single-mode input and single-mode or multimode output, at nominal wavelengths of 1310 nm and 1550 nm. An air-gap attenuator, used to couple light from single-mode fiber to multimode fiber, typically has a lower attenuation than it would have for coupling light between single-mode fibers, because multimode fiber is able to capture more diverging light. These attenuators are needed when multimode fiber is used to connect the receiver input from a single-mode transmission link. The non-mechanical control of attenuation, where an electrical (or magnetic) input signal directly varies the optical attenuation, may be advantageous. For example, liquid crystals rotate the polarization of light depending on an applied voltage. Combined with a polarizing beam-splitter, polarization independent, electrically variable attenuation is possible. Electro-optic attenuators are available that are designed to control power in optical amplifiers used in Wavelength Division Multiplexer (WDM) systems. However, electrically, magnetically, acoustically, or optically variable attenuators are not be considered in this issue. However, as this technology becomes available it may be necessary to include these technologies in future issues of GR-910-CORE as the technology matures. Attenuators designed for use in test or laboratory instruments (not designed to remain as part of a transmission system) will also not be considered. This document considers only passive optical attenuators that are intended for use in telecommunications systems. 2.3 Attenuator Applications Attenuators are used in fiber-optic transmission systems to reduce the optical power received by the photodetector to a level that is within the dynamic range of the optical receiver. The light intensity control of laser diodes and LEDs is limited in dynamic range and can result in an undesired change in radiation pattern, modal structure and central wavelength. Light intensity control at the transmitter has the additional disadvantage of requiring either remote power monitoring at the destination central office (CO) receiver or loop-back. Therefore, for interoffice transmission applications, attenuators are normally deployed at the destination CO, immediately in front of the receiver. A fixed value of attenuation is often adequate to adjust the received power level to within the required range. GR-910 Figure 2-3 shows a fiber optic transmission system with a variable attenuator in front of the receiver. Such attenuators are useful for periodic adjustment of received power should the link loss output power increase or decrease during the life of the transmission system. Increased link loss may be caused by degradation of the fiber, splices, or optical connectors. Variable attenuators are also important for making optical measurements, such as BER as a function of received power, which are important for characterizing the performance of transmission systems. Telcordia Technologies, Inc. Confidential -- Restricted Access See confidentiality restrictions on title page. 502-1198 Rev A 2-3 Confidential -- Restricted Access DA-1543 Issue 1, Revision 4 February 3, 2005 Tyco Electronics 3-dB SC Singlemode Fiber Optic Buildout Attenuators General Information TX dB RX GR-910 Figure 2-3 Optical Transmission Using a Variable Attenuator. Fiber-optic attenuators may be used in central offices or in outside enclosures such as cabinets, huts, or underground vaults, and are intended for use in both controlled and uncontrolled environments. Outside plant applications may involve locating attenuators underground in subsurface enclosures which may be subject to flooding, on outdoor walls, or on utility poles. The closures which enclose them may be "free breathing" or they may be hermetic. Free-breathing closures will subject them to temperature and humidity swings, possible condensation, and possible biological action from airborne bacteria, insects, etc. Hermetic closures will subject the attenuators within to temperature swings unless they are breached. Attenuators in the underground plant may be subjected to groundwater immersion if closures containing them are breached or improperly assembled. A new application for attenuators is controlling gain in Ebrium Doped Fiber Amplifiers (EDFA) and optical power in Dense WDM (DWDM) systems. These are electro-optic attenuators that operate in the 1550 nm wavelength region. Electrooptic attenuators are not covered in this document, but may be included in future issues. 2.3.1 Environmental Conditions A central office/node2 has a controlled environment with an ambient temperature from 4C to 38C, and short-term ambient temperature for -5C to 50C, as stated in Telcordia document GR-63-CORE. Short-term is defined as a period of not more than 72 consecutive hours and a total of not more than 15 days in one year. Remote sites and customer premises can have the same environment as a central office, as in a controlled environment vault (CEV), or an uncontrolled environment, as in an above-ground cabinet. In an uncontrolled environment, transmission systems must operate over a temperature range from -40C with no solar load to 46C with maximum solar load and power dissipation and a relative humidity of 5 to 95% for the projected length of service. The worst-case operating temperature range for passive components is defined as -40C to 75C with a relative humidity of 90 5% RH (75C is obtained by assuming the maximum solar load and power dissipation results in a 29C increase of the component above the maximum ambient temperature of 46C). 2. Including remote nodes and customer premises. Telcordia Technologies, Inc. Confidential -- Restricted Access See confidentiality restrictions on title page. 2-4 502-1198 Rev A DA-1543 Issue 1, Revision 4 February 3, 2005 Confidential -- Restricted Access Tyco Electronics 3-dB SC Singlemode Fiber Optic Buildout Attenuators General Information Due to the difficulty of providing electrical power, the optical source at the ONU is unlikely to have temperature control. This means that source wavelength can vary with ambient temperature according to GR-910 Figure 2-4. The shift in emission wavelength amounts to ~ 0.7C and is roughly linear with temperature. All optical sources are required to operate within the wavelength range shown in gray. The optical bandpass objective for attenuators is designed to match this wavelength range. The intent is to make generic attenuator components compatible with all transmission equipment, regardless of environment. GR-910 Figure 2-4 Central Wavelength Variation of Uncontrolled Optical Source 2.4 Recommended Methods and Procedures (not from GR-910) * CAUTION: Handle all cabling with care. Avoid handling damaged cables with bare hands. NOTE: FOR A MULTI-PORT DEVICE, ALL THE PORTS MUST BE SUBJECTED TO OPTICAL, ENVIRONMENTAL AND MECHANICAL TESTS. Sections 3 through 7 of this test plan lists test conditions and outlines of recommended test procedures. These methods and procedures are recommended only. Telcordia recognizes that there are equivalent methods and procedures that can be used to determine conformance or nonconformance. These methods and procedures are used in Telcordia testing facilities and will be used in comparison during witness testing. Telcordia Technologies, Inc. Confidential -- Restricted Access See confidentiality restrictions on title page. 502-1198 Rev A 2-5 Confidential -- Restricted Access Tyco Electronics 3-dB SC Singlemode Fiber Optic Buildout Attenuators General Information DA-1543 Issue 1, Revision 4 February 3, 2005 2.5 Test Equipment (not from GR-910) Equipment that may be used to perform the testing of passive fiber optic components is listed in the Test Apparatus section for each individual test performed. The equipment used may differ from the particular equipment listed, but must be equivalent to that equipment. For operating instructions on any particular test equipment, please refer to the manufacturer's user manual. Typical test setups and facilities are described in the sections associated with the individual criteria, as needed for the performance of the testing. 2.6 Optical Data Guidelines (not from GR-910) 2.6.1 Acquisition of Optical Data (not from GR-910) The following guidelines apply to the collection of data: * A minimum of four reference transmission paths will be monitored during testing to determine the stability of the test system. The transmission paths will consist of splice(s), identical fiber media of the same length spliced to the samples, and adjacent optical switch channels * A reflectance reference with a value of -60 dB shall be monitored during the testing * All the optical equipment used for measuring characteristics of the component must be referenced out prior to the actual measurements * The data is to be collected via software-controlled data acquisition systems, where applicable * All guidelines mentioned in Section 4 of GR-910-CORE, Issue 2 must be followed for the applicable component type. 2.6.2 Analysis of Optical Data (not from GR-910) The optical performance data will consist of initial, during, and post values for the applicable characteristic at applicable wavelengths. The average value of the references will be used to normalize the measured values. Each unit tested will be included in the test report. 2.7 Test Sequence and Schedule (not from GR-910) TP-910 Table 2-1 below lists the test sequences and approximate duration to perform the tests required in a GR-910 analysis. Test durations are based on the estimated test execution time, as test setup and sample preparation time can vary depending on test equipment availability and level of sample preparedness Telcordia Technologies, Inc. Confidential -- Restricted Access See confidentiality restrictions on title page. 2-6 502-1198 Rev A Confidential -- Restricted Access DA-1543 Issue 1, Revision 4 February 3, 2005 Tyco Electronics 3-dB SC Singlemode Fiber Optic Buildout Attenuators General Information performed by the supplier when submitting the samples for test. Analysis of conformance to the General Requirements, which are verification based and do not require specific tests to be performed, will be conducted in parallel to those criteria that are addressed via testing. A draft test report is developed in parallel to all testing, incorporating results as tests are completed, and the full draft report is planned to be completed within two weeks of completion of all testing. TP-910 Table 2-1 Testing Sequences and Estimated Durations Test Title GR-910 Section Estimated Duration 1 Environmental and Mechanical Criteria 4.1 2 Controlled Operating Environment 4.1.1 8 days 3 Uncontrolled Operating Environment 4.1.2 8 days 4 Non-Operating Environment 4.1.3 15 days 5 Humidity/Condensation Cycling Test 4.1.4 8 days 6 Water Immersion 4.1.5 8 days 7 Vibration 4.1.6 1-2 days 8 Flex Test 4.1.7 1-2 days 9 Twist Test 4.1.8 1-2 days 10 Side Pull Load 4.1.9 2-3 days 11 Cable Retention 4.1.10 3-4 days 12 Durability 4.1.11 5 days 13 Impact Test 4.1.12 1-2 days 14 Optical Criteria 15 Optical Bandpass 4.2.1 1-2 days 16 Change in Attenuation 4.2.2 NA 17 Attenuation Tolerance 4.2.3 1 day 18 Attenuation Increments and Range 4.2.4 1 day 19 Reflectance 4.2.5 1 day 20 Polarization-Dependent Loss (PDL) 4.2.6 1 day 21 Polarization-Mode Dispersion (PMD) 4.2.7 1 day 22 Damage Criteria 4.2.8 NA 23 Documentation 3.1 1 day 24 Marking, Packaging and Shipping 3.2 1 day 25 Physical Design Criteria 3.3 3 days 26 Qualification Criteria 7.3 1 day 27 Quality and Reliability Criteria 7.4 3 days 4.2 Telcordia Technologies, Inc. Confidential -- Restricted Access See confidentiality restrictions on title page. 502-1198 Rev A 2-7 Confidential -- Restricted Access Tyco Electronics 3-dB SC Singlemode Fiber Optic Buildout Attenuators General Information DA-1543 Issue 1, Revision 4 February 3, 2005 2.8 Test Samples NOTE: All ports must be subjected to the full suite of GR-910 tests Per Verizon requirements, a minimum of eleven (11) module test samples shall be required for statistical sampling purposes. Suppliers may elect at their option to test a higher number of samples, however eleven samples will be the minimum to remain in accord with Verizon specifications. The length of individual, unconnectorized fiber leads shall be a minimum of two (2) meters in length to provide adequate slack for splicing. In some intra-office (CO) applications, passive optical components may be needed with leads long enough to span the gap between distributing frames. For passive optical components intended to serve as interconnects or crossconnects between the Outside Plant (OSP) panel and the network equipment, the length of individual connectorized fiber pigtails should be at least two (2) meters in length. Customer shall provide twenty five (25) fiber optic attenuator samples. From these 25 samples, Telcordia will choose eleven (11) test samples randomly for optical testing and eleven (11) hot spares, to be used in the event of non-conformance(s). Per Verizon requirements, the supplier shall provide their recommended chassis/ cabinet/housing with the mountable device, if applicable, for vibration and shock testing. If devices need to be spliced, detailed documentation on the mounting procedure shall be provided. As previously noted, all ports are intended to be tested. Customer shall however provide terminators to be available in the event that any ports are disconnected for any reason in the execution of any of the testing. Reliability test sample sizes will be confirmed with Verizon prior to any related GR-1221 reliability testing done in concurrence with the GR-910 tests. Telcordia Technologies, Inc. Confidential -- Restricted Access See confidentiality restrictions on title page. 2-8 502-1198 Rev A DA-1543 Issue 1, Revision 4 February 3, 2005 3.0 Confidential -- Restricted Access Tyco Electronics 3-dB SC Singlemode Fiber Optic Buildout Attenuators General and Design Criteria General and Design Criteria Generic requirements are identified by the word "shall" and denoted by GS-N, where G is an R, O, CR, or CO, S is the section number and N is the number of the criterion within the section. In addition, the criterion is marked with a number in brackets [] that corresponds to the criterion number within the entire document. Refer to Section 1.3 of GR-910-CORE for further explanation of requirements and objectives. 3.1 Documentation Requirements on product documentation are twofold: general and user-specific. 3.1.1 General Documentation General documentation includes all information a customer needs to select, order and use a product. This type of information is typically found in product literature such as catalogs, sales brochures, manuals, product data, and instructions sheets. 3.1.1.1 Criteria - General Documentation (heading not from GR-910) GR-910 R3-1 [1] On request, the supplier shall provide a complete set of documentation that includes: * Product Description -- General features -- Manufacturer name, model number and date made -- Type of attenuator, fixed or variable -- Attenuator component termination (e. g., pigtail, connector type) -- Fiber-type -- Description of attenuating element (e. g., filter, type of fiber) -- Applications. * Performance Specifications -- Increments and range of attenuation -- Optical characteristic in Section 4.2 (attenuation tolerance, bandpass, reflectance and polarization) -- Storage environment temperature and humidity range -- Maximum fiber and fiber cable retention, flex, and twist force Telcordia Technologies, Inc. Confidential -- Restricted Access See confidentiality restrictions on title page. 502-1198 Rev A 3-1 Confidential -- Restricted Access Tyco Electronics 3-dB SC Singlemode Fiber Optic Buildout Attenuators General and Design Criteria DA-1543 Issue 1, Revision 4 February 3, 2005 -- Thermal stability -- Humidity resistance -- Vibration stability -- Impact resistance -- Resistance to airborne contaminants. * Installation Instructions -- Component dimensions -- Tools necessary for installation -- Mounting features, conditions, and location in relation to other system components -- Safety precautions -- Test equipment and testing methods to be used when the item is provisioned. * Operating Instructions -- Use and handling including optical connector mating and splicing. * Maintenance -- Cleaning instructions -- Routine maintenance schedule -- Instructions to identify the effects of faults and the methods used to isolate a problem -- Service and service contact information. * Ordering Information -- Model numbers -- Connector interface options -- Available fiber types, lengths, and mode field diameter -- Mounting options -- Package configuration & package material options -- All other options. * Testing and troubleshooting procedure * Repair instructions and contact for repair service * Storage and transportation instructions. Telcordia Technologies, Inc. Confidential -- Restricted Access See confidentiality restrictions on title page. 3-2 502-1198 Rev A Confidential -- Restricted Access DA-1543 Issue 1, Revision 4 February 3, 2005 Tyco Electronics 3-dB SC Singlemode Fiber Optic Buildout Attenuators General and Design Criteria 3.1.1.2 Test Method (not from GR-910) A. Verify that the Product Description under the terms of this document includes: 1. General features 2. Manufacturer name, model number and date made 3. Type of attenuator, fixed or variable 4. Attenuator component termination (e. g., pigtail, connector type) 5. Fiber-type 6. Description of attenuating element (e. g., filter, type of fiber) 7. Applications. B. Verify that the Performance Specifications under the terms of this document includes: 1. Increments and range of attenuation 2. Optical characteristic in GR-910-CORE Section 4.2 (attenuation tolerance, bandpass, reflectance and polarization) 3. Storage environment temperature and humidity range 4. Maximum fiber and fiber cable retention, flex, and twist force 5. Thermal stability 6. Humidity resistance 7. Vibration stability 8. Impact resistance 9. Resistance to airborne contaminants. C. Verify that the Installation Instructions under the terms of this document includes: 1. Component dimensions 2. Tools necessary for installation 3. Mounting features, conditions, and location in relation to other system components 4. Safety precautions 5. Test equipment and testing methods to be used when the item is provisioned. D. Verify that the Operating Instructions under the terms of this document includes use and handling, including optical connector mating and splicing. E. Verify that the Maintenance under the terms of this document includes 1. Cleaning instructions Telcordia Technologies, Inc. Confidential -- Restricted Access See confidentiality restrictions on title page. 502-1198 Rev A 3-3 Confidential -- Restricted Access Tyco Electronics 3-dB SC Singlemode Fiber Optic Buildout Attenuators General and Design Criteria DA-1543 Issue 1, Revision 4 February 3, 2005 2. Routine maintenance schedule 3. Instructions to identify the effects of faults and the methods used to isolate a problem 4. Service and service contact information. F. Verify that the Ordering Information under the terms of this document includes: 1. Model numbers 2. Connector interface options 3. Available fiber types, lengths, and mode field diameter 4. Mounting options 5. Package configuration & package material options 6. All other options. G. Verify that the Testing and Troubleshooting procedures are provided. H. Verify that the Repair Instructions and contact for repair service are provided. I. Verify that the Storage and Transportation Instructions are provided. J. Record test results. K. Any nonconformance shall be documented and reported to the customer authorized representative in accordance with the Quality Assurance Program of Telcordia. L. Go to the next test group. Telcordia Technologies, Inc. Confidential -- Restricted Access See confidentiality restrictions on title page. 3-4 502-1198 Rev A DA-1543 Issue 1, Revision 4 February 3, 2005 Confidential -- Restricted Access Tyco Electronics 3-dB SC Singlemode Fiber Optic Buildout Attenuators General and Design Criteria 3.1.1.3 Test Flowchart (not from GR-910) Test Product and associated documentation are provided by supplier Review product documentation for inclusion of required information Does the documentation cover all of the topics listed in GR910 R3-1 [1]? No Document nonconformances and address corrective actions with supplier Yes Document Results and go to next criteria section TP-910 Figure 3-1 Test Flowchart - General Documentation (not from GR-910) 3.1.1.4 Test Configuration and Conditions (not from GR-910) Not applicable 3.1.1.5 Test Apparatus (not from GR-910) Not applicable 3.1.1.6 Summary of Test Results (not from GR-910) Conformance/Nonconformance Conformance to the criteria in Section 3.1.1.1 of this document has been established. Conformance is based on the verification that the Product Description Telcordia Technologies, Inc. Confidential -- Restricted Access See confidentiality restrictions on title page. 502-1198 Rev A 3-5 Confidential -- Restricted Access Tyco Electronics 3-dB SC Singlemode Fiber Optic Buildout Attenuators General and Design Criteria DA-1543 Issue 1, Revision 4 February 3, 2005 under the terms of this document have been met, verification that the Performance Specifications under the terms of this document have been met, verification that the Installation Instructions under the terms of this document have been met, verification that the Operating Instructions under the terms of this document have been met, verification that the Maintenance under the terms of this document have been met, verification that the Ordering Information under the terms of this document have been met, verification that the Testing and Troubleshooting procedures are provided, verification that the Repair Instructions and contact for repair service are provided, and verification that the Storage and Transportation Instructions are provided. Failure History Not applicable. Disposition of Nonconformance Not applicable. Test Data Not applicable. 3.1.2 Workcenter Information Package The manufacturer may be requested to prepare instructional material for individual Telcordia clients. Such instructional material could include a Workcenter Information Package (WIP) which may be an audio-visual training presentation. Information regarding the specific requirements for this documentation will be provided by the company making the request. No specific WIP testing specifications are provided at this time. 3.2 Marking, Packaging and Shipping The Passive Optical Component Code (POCC) is proposed as a uniform method for identifying and ordering components. The POCC offers a quick reference to optical component characteristics in a minimum number of characters. It is described in Section 6. 3.2.1 Criteria - Marking, Packaging and Shipping (heading not from GR-910) GR-910 O3-2 [2] Buffering and jacket color for single-mode attenuators should be yellow. GR-910 O3-3 [3] Buffering and jacket color for multimode attenuators should be orange. Telcordia Technologies, Inc. Confidential -- Restricted Access See confidentiality restrictions on title page. 3-6 502-1198 Rev A DA-1543 Issue 1, Revision 4 February 3, 2005 Confidential -- Restricted Access Tyco Electronics 3-dB SC Singlemode Fiber Optic Buildout Attenuators General and Design Criteria GR-910 O3-4 [4] The POCC should appear on the attenuator housing, including the manufacturer serial number (if applicable). GR-910 R3-5 [5] Attenuators designed to comply with specific applications (such as those indicated by CR in this document) shall be labeled to clearly distinguish them from other products that they may resemble. The following requirements apply to the packaging and shipping of attenuators. GR-910 R3-6 [6] The packaged part(s) shall be clearly labeled, with parts and names consistent with those given in the product instructions, in a manner consistent with the requirements of SR-NWT-2759, A View of Packaging, Packing, Palletization, and Marking Requirements. GR-910 R3-7 [7] All required assembly components (e. g., tools, instructions and materials) shall be shipped together. GR-910 R3-8 [8] The packaging shall be adequate to ensure that the attenuators will not be damaged under normal handling, shipping and storage in reasonably dry, unheated quarters. GR-910 R3-9 [9] Attenuators shall be packaged and shipped with dust caps or other dust impermeable packaging material. GR-910 O3-10 [10] The packaging materials should be recyclable. GR-910 O3-11 [11] The information necessary to identify the product should be bar coded. 3.2.2 Test Method (not from GR-910) A. Visually inspect and verify that: 1. Loose tube and jacket color for single-mode attenuators are yellow 2. Loose tube and jacket color for multimode attenuators are orange 3. The POCC appears on the attenuator housing, including the manufacturer serial number (if applicable) 4. Components designed to conform with specific applications (such as those indicated by CR in this document) are labeled to clearly distinguish them from other products that they may resemble. B. Visually inspect that the following requirements involving shipping and packaging of attenuators: Telcordia Technologies, Inc. Confidential -- Restricted Access See confidentiality restrictions on title page. 502-1198 Rev A 3-7 Confidential -- Restricted Access Tyco Electronics 3-dB SC Singlemode Fiber Optic Buildout Attenuators General and Design Criteria DA-1543 Issue 1, Revision 4 February 3, 2005 1. The packaged part(s) are clearly labeled, with parts and names consistent with those given in the product instructions, in a manner consistent with the requirements of SR-NWT-2759, A View of Packaging, Packing, Palletization, and Marking Requirements. 2. All required assembly components (e. g., tools, instructions and materials) are shipped together. 3. The packaging shall be adequate to ensure that the attenuators will not be damaged under normal handling, shipping and storage. 4. Attenuators are packaged and shipped with dust caps or other dust impermeable packaging material. 5. The packaging materials should be recyclable. 6. The information necessary to identify the product should be included on the packaging. C. Record test results. D. Any nonconformance shall be documented and reported to the customer authorized representative in accordance with the Quality Assurance Program of Telcordia. E. Go to the next test group. Telcordia Technologies, Inc. Confidential -- Restricted Access See confidentiality restrictions on title page. 3-8 502-1198 Rev A DA-1543 Issue 1, Revision 4 February 3, 2005 Confidential -- Restricted Access Tyco Electronics 3-dB SC Singlemode Fiber Optic Buildout Attenuators General and Design Criteria 3.2.3 Test Flowchart (not from GR-910) Test Product is selected Perform visual inspection for specified markings Does the product meet GR-910 O3-2 [2], GR-910 O3-3 [3], GR-910 O3-4 [4] and GR-910 R3-5 [5]? Yes Perform visual inspection of materials related to packaging and shipping No Does the product meet GR-910 R3-6 [6] thru GR-910 R3-9 [9], GR-910 O3-10 [10] & GR-910 O3-11 [11]? No Document nonconformances and address corrective actions with supplier Yes Document Results and go to next criteria section TP-910 Figure 3-2 Test Flowchart - Marking, Packaging and Shipping (not from GR-910) Telcordia Technologies, Inc. Confidential -- Restricted Access See confidentiality restrictions on title page. 502-1198 Rev A 3-9 Confidential -- Restricted Access Tyco Electronics 3-dB SC Singlemode Fiber Optic Buildout Attenuators General and Design Criteria DA-1543 Issue 1, Revision 4 February 3, 2005 3.2.4 Test Configuration and Conditions (not from GR-910) Not applicable 3.2.5 Test Apparatus (not from GR-910) Not applicable 3.2.6 Summary of Test Results (not from GR-910) Conformance/Nonconformance Conformance to the criteria in Section 3.2.1 of this document has been established. Conformance is based on the verification that visual inspection has been performed to verify that loose tube and jacket color for single-mode attenuators are yellow, loose tube and jacket color for multimode attenuators are orange, the POCC appears on the attenuator housing, and that the components designed to conform with specific applications are labeled. Conformance is also based on the visual inspection of the shipping and packaging of the attenuators. Failure History Not applicable. Disposition of Nonconformance Not applicable. Test Data Not applicable. 3.3 Physical Design Criteria 3.3.1 Optical Fiber The 250-m coated fiber leads must be protected from damage. For attenuators in which such leads are user-accessible, handling precautions must be observed, and the attenuators must be mounted in a protective housing such as a splice closure. Handling precautions are intended to prevent fiber breakage when unpackaging, transporting and mounting attenuators. Buffering and cabling reduce the likelihood of fiber breakage, and make the leads less susceptible to tangling. However, some 900-m tight buffered fiber is difficult to strip. Therefore, users that plan to splice or connectorize attenuators with leads should specify or ascertain the type of tight buffered fiber used by the supplier for the attenuator leads. Otherwise, attenuator leads consisting of separately strippable or loose buffered fiber1 are normally used. Fiber and fiber cable used in attenuators Telcordia Technologies, Inc. Confidential -- Restricted Access See confidentiality restrictions on title page. 3-10 502-1198 Rev A Confidential -- Restricted Access DA-1543 Issue 1, Revision 4 February 3, 2005 Tyco Electronics 3-dB SC Singlemode Fiber Optic Buildout Attenuators General and Design Criteria must be compatible with fiber used in the Telcordia client networks in order to minimize losses at splices and connectors. Any fiber is expected to be spliced using splices as described in GR-765-CORE. 3.3.1.1 Criteria - Optical Fiber (heading not from GR-910) GR-910 R3-12 [12] All fiber and fiber cable used in attenuators shall meet the criteria in GR-409-CORE, Generic Requirements for Premises Fiber Cable. Attenuators intended for use in outside side plant environments shall meet the outdoor requirements in GR-409-CORE. To determine compliance with GR-409-CORE, test samples with 2 meter length lead may be required. For leads that are unconnectorized, or otherwise unterminated, a minimum fiber length is necessary for splicing or connectorizing. GR-910 R3-13 [13] The length of individual, unconnectorized fiber leads shall be 1 meter to provide sufficient slack for splicing. In some intraoffice (CO) applications, attenuators may be needed with leads long enough to span the gap between distributing frames. GR-910 CR3-14 [14] For attenuators intended to serve as interconnects or cross-connects between the outside plant (OSP) panel and the network equipment, the length of individual connectorized fiber pigtails should be 2 meters. Rationale: Attenuators with 2 meter long pigtails should permit connections between the interconnect/cross-connect panel and network equipment without the need for additional jumpers. 3.3.1.2 Test Method (not from GR-910) A. Verify that: 1. all fiber and fiber cable used in attenuators meet the criteria in GR-409CORE, Generic Requirements for Premises Fiber Cable 2. attenuators intended for use in outside plant environment meet the outdoor requirements in GR-409-CORE 3. the length of individual, unconnectorized fiber leads is 1 meter 1. Loose buffered fiber has a buffer coating material that is in contact with, but does not adhere strongly to the fiber coating, such that it can be easily removed without damaging the fiber coating. Telcordia Technologies, Inc. Confidential -- Restricted Access See confidentiality restrictions on title page. 502-1198 Rev A 3-11 Confidential -- Restricted Access Tyco Electronics 3-dB SC Singlemode Fiber Optic Buildout Attenuators General and Design Criteria DA-1543 Issue 1, Revision 4 February 3, 2005 4. the length of individual connectorized fiber pigtails is 2 meters for attenuators intended to serve as interconnects or cross-connects between the outside plant (OSP) panel and the network equipment. B. Record test results. C. Any nonconformance shall be documented and reported to the customer authorized representative in accordance with the Quality Assurance Program of Telcordia. D. Go to the next test group. Telcordia Technologies, Inc. Confidential -- Restricted Access See confidentiality restrictions on title page. 3-12 502-1198 Rev A DA-1543 Issue 1, Revision 4 February 3, 2005 Confidential -- Restricted Access Tyco Electronics 3-dB SC Singlemode Fiber Optic Buildout Attenuators General and Design Criteria 3.3.1.3 Test Flowchart (not from GR-910) Test Product and associated conformance documentation are provided by supplier Review GR-409 conformance documentation provided by supplier Does the product meet the applicable criteria from GR-409? No Document nonconformances and address corrective actions with supplier Yes Do the fiber leads/pigtails meet GR-910 R3-13 [13] and GR-910 CR3-14 [14]? No Document nonconformances and address corrective actions with supplier Yes Document Results and go to next criteria section TP-910 Figure 3-3 Test Flowchart - Optical Fiber Physical Design (not from GR-910) Telcordia Technologies, Inc. Confidential -- Restricted Access See confidentiality restrictions on title page. 502-1198 Rev A 3-13 Confidential -- Restricted Access Tyco Electronics 3-dB SC Singlemode Fiber Optic Buildout Attenuators General and Design Criteria DA-1543 Issue 1, Revision 4 February 3, 2005 3.3.1.4 Test Configuration and Conditions (not from GR-910) Shall be included in conformance documentation provided by supplier. 3.3.1.5 Test Apparatus (not from GR-910) Shall be included in conformance documentation provided by supplier. 3.3.1.6 Summary of Test Results (not from GR-910) Conformance/Nonconformance Conformance to the criteria in Section 3.3.1.1 of this document has been partially established. Results for requirement GR-910 R3-12 [12] were not determined and the criteria for requirement GR-910 R3-13 [13] and GR-910 CR3-14 [14] were not applicable. Conformance is based on the verification that all of the fiber and fiber cable used in the attenuator meet the criteria in GR-409-CORE, verification that attenuators intended for use in an outside plant environment meet the outdoor requirements in GR-409-CORE, verification that the length of individual, unconnectorized fiber leads are 1 meter, and verification that the length of individual connectorized fiber pigtails are 2 meters for attenuators intended to serve as interconnects or cross-connects between the outside plant panel and the network equipment. Failure History Not applicable. Disposition of Nonconformance Not applicable. Test Data Not applicable. Sample Size Not applicable. 3.3.2 Optical Connectors 3.3.2.1 Criteria - Optical Connectors (heading not from GR-910) GR-910 R3-15 [15] Any single-mode optical connectors and/or connector interfaces used in the construction of the attenuator shall meet the criteria in GR-326-CORE, Generic Requirements for Optical Fiber Connectors. Telcordia Technologies, Inc. Confidential -- Restricted Access See confidentiality restrictions on title page. 3-14 502-1198 Rev A DA-1543 Issue 1, Revision 4 February 3, 2005 Confidential -- Restricted Access Tyco Electronics 3-dB SC Singlemode Fiber Optic Buildout Attenuators General and Design Criteria This requirement applies to attenuators with built-in connector receptacles, connector interfaces, and connectorized pigtails. 3.3.2.2 Test Method (not from GR-910) A. Perform testing or verify conformance for any single mode optical connector used in the construction of the attenuator per GR-326-CORE Generic Requirements for Single-mode Optical Connectors and Jumper Assemblies. B. Record test results. C. Any nonconformance shall be documented and reported to the customer authorized representative. D. If the criteria are met, then subject the DUT to the next test group. Telcordia Technologies, Inc. Confidential -- Restricted Access See confidentiality restrictions on title page. 502-1198 Rev A 3-15 Confidential -- Restricted Access Tyco Electronics 3-dB SC Singlemode Fiber Optic Buildout Attenuators General and Design Criteria DA-1543 Issue 1, Revision 4 February 3, 2005 3.3.2.3 Test Flowchart (not from GR-910) Test Product and associated conformance documentation are provided by supplier Review GR-326 conformance documentation provided by supplier Does the product meet the applicable criteria from GR-326? No Document nonconformances and address corrective actions with supplier Yes Document Results and go to next criteria section TP-910 Figure 3-4 Test Flowchart - Optical Connectors (not from GR-910) 3.3.2.4 Test Configuration and Conditions (not from GR-910) Shall be included in conformance documentation provided by supplier. 3.3.2.5 Test Apparatus (not from GR-910) Shall be included in conformance documentation provided by supplier. Telcordia Technologies, Inc. Confidential -- Restricted Access See confidentiality restrictions on title page. 3-16 502-1198 Rev A DA-1543 Issue 1, Revision 4 February 3, 2005 Confidential -- Restricted Access Tyco Electronics 3-dB SC Singlemode Fiber Optic Buildout Attenuators General and Design Criteria 3.3.2.6 Summary of Test Results (not from GR-910) Conformance/Nonconformance Conformance to the criteria in Section 3.3.2.1 of this document has not been established. Results for requirement GR-910 R3-15 [15] were not determined. Conformance is based on the attenuator's single-mode optical connectors and/or connector interface used in the construction meeting the criteria in GR-326-CORE. Failure History Not applicable. Disposition of Nonconformance Not applicable. Test Data Not applicable. 3.3.3 Cleanability 3.3.3.1 Criteria - Cleanability (heading not from GR-910) GR-910 R3-16 [16] Attenuators with accessible attenuation elements shall not be damaged nor change attenuation value when cleaned according to manufacturers' instructions. GR-910 R3-17 [17] Suppliers shall specify cleaning instructions and materials for cleaning attenuators. GR-910 R3-18 [18] Cleaning procedures shall meet all applicable safety requirements. 3.3.3.2 Test Method (not from GR-910) A. Verify the manufacturer has specified cleaning instructions and cleaning materials for cleaning attenuators. B. Verify that the manufacturer's cleaning procedures meet all applicable safety requirements. Also see cleaning safety requirements of Section 3.3.6. C. Verify that attenuators with accessible attenuation elements are not damaged nor change attenuation value when cleaned according to manufacturers' instructions. D. Record test results. Telcordia Technologies, Inc. Confidential -- Restricted Access See confidentiality restrictions on title page. 502-1198 Rev A 3-17 Confidential -- Restricted Access DA-1543 Issue 1, Revision 4 February 3, 2005 Tyco Electronics 3-dB SC Singlemode Fiber Optic Buildout Attenuators General and Design Criteria E. Any nonconformance shall be documented and reported to the customer authorized representative. F. If the criteria are met, then subject the DUT to the next test group. 3.3.3.3 Test Flowchart (not from GR-910) Test Product, cleaning instructions, and associated conformance documentation are provided by supplier Review cleaning instructions and conformance documentation related to safety compliance. Are cleaning procedures complete and compliant to safety criteria? No Document nonconformances and address corrective actions with supplier Yes Clean attenuators according to manufacture's instructions. Are accessible attenuation elements damaged or is attenuation value changed? No Yes Document nonconformances and address corrective actions with supplier Document Results and go to next criteria section TP-910 Figure 3-5 Test Flowchart - Cleanability (not from GR-910) Telcordia Technologies, Inc. Confidential -- Restricted Access See confidentiality restrictions on title page. 3-18 502-1198 Rev A DA-1543 Issue 1, Revision 4 February 3, 2005 Confidential -- Restricted Access Tyco Electronics 3-dB SC Singlemode Fiber Optic Buildout Attenuators General and Design Criteria 3.3.3.4 Test Configuration and Conditions (not from GR-910) Shall be included in the cleaning procedure documentation provided by supplier. 3.3.3.5 Test Apparatus (not from GR-910) Shall be included in the cleaning procedure documentation provided by supplier. 3.3.3.6 Summary of Test Results (not from GR-910) Conformance/Nonconformance Conformance to the criteria in Section 3.3.3.1 of this document has been established. Conformance is based on the verification that the manufacturer has specified cleaning instructions and cleaning materials for cleaning attenuators, verification that the manufacturer's cleaning procedures meet all applicable safety requirements, and verification that attenuators with accessible attenuation elements are not damaged or that the attenuation value does not change when cleaning. Failure History Not applicable. Disposition of Nonconformance Not applicable. Test Data Not applicable. Photographs Not applicable. 3.3.4 Intermateability Users must be able to purchase attenuators and connectors of a specific design, from a variety of manufacturers, with assurance that the product purchased from one supplier will function satisfactorily when intermated with a product manufactured by another supplier. Attenuator Intermateability is the ability to integrate different manufacturers' attenuators and optical connectors, that meet specific performance criteria for attenuator and connector design, even though they may come from different suppliers. Telcordia Technologies, Inc. Confidential -- Restricted Access See confidentiality restrictions on title page. 502-1198 Rev A 3-19 Confidential -- Restricted Access Tyco Electronics 3-dB SC Singlemode Fiber Optic Buildout Attenuators General and Design Criteria DA-1543 Issue 1, Revision 4 February 3, 2005 3.3.4.1 Criteria - Intermateability (heading not from GR-910) GR-910 R3-19 [75] Intermateability - Attenuator connectors, connector interfaces, and couplings shall meet the Intermateability requirements describe in GR-326-CORE. This requirement will help to ensure not only the intermateability of the suppliers' product to themselves, but also the intermateability of different suppliers' products to each other. 3.3.4.2 Test Method (not from GR-910) A. Perform testing or verify conformance of the attenuator to the Intermateability requirements describe in GR-326-CORE, Generic Requirements for Singlemode Optical Connectors and Jumper Assemblies. B. Record test results. C. Any nonconformance shall be documented and reported to the customer authorized representative. D. If the criteria are met, then subject the DUT to the next test group. Telcordia Technologies, Inc. Confidential -- Restricted Access See confidentiality restrictions on title page. 3-20 502-1198 Rev A DA-1543 Issue 1, Revision 4 February 3, 2005 Confidential -- Restricted Access Tyco Electronics 3-dB SC Singlemode Fiber Optic Buildout Attenuators General and Design Criteria 3.3.4.3 Test Flowchart (not from GR-910) Test Product and associated conformance documentation are provided by supplier Review GR-326 Intermateability conformance documentation provided by supplier Does the product meet the applicable criteria from GR-326? No Document nonconformances and address corrective actions with supplier Yes Document Results and go to next criteria section TP-910 Figure 3-6 Test Flowchart - Intermateability (not from GR-910) 3.3.4.4 Test Configuration and Conditions (not from GR-910) Shall be included in conformance documentation provided by supplier. 3.3.4.5 Test Apparatus (not from GR-910) Shall be included in conformance documentation provided by supplier. 3.3.4.6 Summary of Test Results (not from GR-910) Conformance/Nonconformance Conformance to the criteria in Section 3.3.4.1 of this document has not been established. Results for requirement GR-910 R3-19 [75] were not determined. Telcordia Technologies, Inc. Confidential -- Restricted Access See confidentiality restrictions on title page. 502-1198 Rev A 3-21 Confidential -- Restricted Access Tyco Electronics 3-dB SC Singlemode Fiber Optic Buildout Attenuators General and Design Criteria DA-1543 Issue 1, Revision 4 February 3, 2005 Conformance is based on the verification that the attenuator connectors, connector interfaces, and couplings meet the Intermateability requirements described in GR-326-CORE. Failure History Not applicable. Disposition of Nonconformance Not applicable. Test Data Not applicable. 3.3.5 Materials 3.3.5.1 Toxicity GR-910 R3-20 [19] All attenuator materials with which personnel may come in contact shall be non-toxic, and shall not present any environmental hazards as defined by applicable federal or state laws and regulations or current industry standards. Where the suggested use of certain materials by the manufacturer may pose hazardous conditions, the manufacturer shall provide the necessary instructions for the handling and use of such materials. 3.3.5.2 Corrosion Resistance GR-910 R3-21 [20] Attenuators containing metallic materials shall show no significant signs of corrosion on metallic surfaces or components nor exhibit a malfunction of any mechanical features following a 7- day exposure to a salt fog spray in accordance with ASTM B117. Attenuators shall be placed inside the salt fog chamber during the test. The analysis for the degree of rusting on painted metal surfaces shall be made in accordance with ASTM D610. A rust grade of 9 or better is required, exclusive of any surface scratches or nicks noted prior to testing. 3.3.5.3 Dissimilar Metals GR-910 R3-22 [21] The attenuator design shall ensure that no galvanic corrosion will occur when dissimilar metals are used in its construction. Telcordia Technologies, Inc. Confidential -- Restricted Access See confidentiality restrictions on title page. 3-22 502-1198 Rev A DA-1543 Issue 1, Revision 4 February 3, 2005 Confidential -- Restricted Access Tyco Electronics 3-dB SC Singlemode Fiber Optic Buildout Attenuators General and Design Criteria 3.3.5.4 Fungus Resistance GR-910 R3-23 [22] Exposed polymeric materials used in the attenuator design shall not support fungus growth per ASTM-G21. A rating of zero (0) is required. 3.3.5.5 Flammability These flammability requirements apply to attenuators that are intended to be located inside buildings. GR-910 R3-24 [23] Exposed plastic materials shall have an oxygen index of at least 28% as determined by actual test in accordance with ASTM D-2863 and GR-63-CORE, Section 4.2.3, Use of Fire-Resistant Materials, Components, Wiring and Cable. GR-910 R3-25 [24] Exposed plastic materials shall not sustain combustion when an open flame source is removed, such that they possess a rating of 94V-1 when tested according to the Vertical Burning Test for Classifying Material, Underwriters Laboratories publication UL94, Tests for Flammability of Plastic Materials for Parts in Devices and Appliances, or GR-63-CORE, Section 5.2.4, Telcordia Needle Flame Test. Manufacturers may be requested to provide material samples of appropriate size for testing. "Exposed plastic materials" refers to the exterior of the final attenuator packaging that would be used for indoor applications. 3.3.5.6 Test Method (not from GR-910) A. Verify the manufacturer has provided all documentation on all attenuator materials with which personnel may come in contact are non-toxic, and do not present any environmental hazards as defined by applicable federal or state laws and regulations or current industry standards. Where the suggested use of certain materials by the manufacturer may pose hazardous conditions, the manufacturer shall provide the necessary instructions for the handling and use of such materials. B. Verify that attenuators containing metallic materials show no significant signs of corrosion on metallic surfaces or components nor exhibit a malfunction of any mechanical features following a 7-day exposure to a salt fog spray in accordance with ASTM B117. Attenuators shall be placed inside the salt fog chamber during the test. The analysis for the degree of rusting on painted metal surfaces shall be made in accordance with ASTM D610. A rust grade of 9 or better is required, exclusive of any surface scratches or nicks noted prior to testing. Telcordia Technologies, Inc. Confidential -- Restricted Access See confidentiality restrictions on title page. 502-1198 Rev A 3-23 Confidential -- Restricted Access Tyco Electronics 3-dB SC Singlemode Fiber Optic Buildout Attenuators General and Design Criteria DA-1543 Issue 1, Revision 4 February 3, 2005 C. Verify that the attenuator design ensures that no galvanic corrosion will occur when dissimilar metals are used in its construction. D. Verify that exposed polymeric materials used in the attenuator design do not support fungus growth per ASTM-G21. A rating of zero (0) is required. E. Verify that exposed plastic materials have an oxygen index of at least 28% as determined by actual test in accordance with ASTM D-2863 and GR-63-CORE, Section 4.2.3, Use of Fire-Resistant Materials, Components, Wiring, and Cable. F. Verify that exposed plastic materials do not sustain combustion when an open flame source is removed, such that they possess a rating of 94V-l when tested according to the Vertical Burning Test for Classifying Material, Underwriters Laboratories publication UL94, Tests for Flammability of Plastic Materials for Parts in Devices and Appliances, or GR-63-CORE, Section 5.2.4, Telcordia Needle Flame Test. Manufacturers may be requested to provide material samples of appropriate size for testing. Telcordia Technologies, Inc. Confidential -- Restricted Access See confidentiality restrictions on title page. 3-24 502-1198 Rev A Confidential -- Restricted Access DA-1543 Issue 1, Revision 4 February 3, 2005 Tyco Electronics 3-dB SC Singlemode Fiber Optic Buildout Attenuators General and Design Criteria 3.3.5.7 Test Flowchart (not from GR-910) Test Product and associated conformance documentation are provided by supplier Review conformance documentation related to toxicity, corrosion, fungus and flammability Does the product meet the applicable toxicity, corrosion, fungus and flammability criteria? No Document nonconformances and address corrective actions with supplier Yes Document Results and go to next criteria section TP-910 Figure 3-7 Test Flowchart - Materials (not from GR-910) 3.3.5.8 Test Configuration and Conditions (not from GR-910) Not applicable 3.3.5.9 Test Apparatus (not from GR-910) Not applicable Telcordia Technologies, Inc. Confidential -- Restricted Access See confidentiality restrictions on title page. 502-1198 Rev A 3-25 Confidential -- Restricted Access Tyco Electronics 3-dB SC Singlemode Fiber Optic Buildout Attenuators General and Design Criteria DA-1543 Issue 1, Revision 4 February 3, 2005 3.3.5.10 Summary of Test Results (not from GR-910) Conformance/Nonconformance Conformance to the criteria in Section 3.3.5.1 has been completely established. Conformance to the criteria in Section 3.3.5.2, Section 3.3.5.3, Section 3.3.5.4, and Section 3.3.5.5 of this document has not been established. Results for requirements GR-910 R3-21 [20], GR-910 R3-22 [21], GR-910 R3-23 [22], GR-910 R3-24 [23] and GR-910 R3-25 [24] were not determined. Conformance is based on the verification that the manufacturer has provided all documentation on all attenuator materials indicating the materials personnel may come in contact with are non-toxic and do not present any environmental hazards as defined by applicable federal or state laws and regulations or current industry standards. If the suggested use of certain materials by the manufacturer poses hazardous conditions, the necessary instructions for the handling and use of such materials are provided. Conformance is also based on the verification that attenuators containing metallic materials show no significant signs of corrosion on metallic surfaces or components nor exhibit a malfunction of any mechanical features following a 7-day exposure to a salt fog spray in accordance with ASTM B117, and that the degree of rusting on painted metal surfaces, in accordance with ASTM D610, meet a rust grade of 9 or better, exclusive of any surface scratches or nicks noted prior to testing. Conformance is also based on the verification that the attenuator design shows no galvanic corrosion when dissimilar metals are used in its construction, verification that fungus growth on exposed polymeric materials used in the attenuator design does not exceed a rating of zero (0) as per ASTM-G21, verification that exposed plastic materials have an oxygen index of at least 28% as determined by actual testing in accordance with ASTM D-2863 and GR-63-CORE, Section 4.2.3, and verification that exposed plastic materials do not sustain combustion when an open flame source is removed and posses a rating of 94V-1 when tested according to the vertical Burning Test for Classifying Material, Underwriters Laboratories publication UL94 or GR-63-CORE, Section 5.2.4. Failure History Not applicable. Disposition of Nonconformance Not applicable. Test Data Not applicable. Telcordia Technologies, Inc. Confidential -- Restricted Access See confidentiality restrictions on title page. 3-26 502-1198 Rev A DA-1543 Issue 1, Revision 4 February 3, 2005 Confidential -- Restricted Access Tyco Electronics 3-dB SC Singlemode Fiber Optic Buildout Attenuators General and Design Criteria 3.3.6 Safety 3.3.6.1 Criteria - Safety (heading not from GR-910) GR-910 R3-26 [25] The supplier shall provide written warning of precautions for use of the product. GR-910 R3-27 [76] Radiation Hazard - The instructions that describe the procedures for cleaning attenuators shall indicate the possible hazard due to the presence of invisible (infrared) radiation when examining connectors with the naked eye or using a microscope. The instruction shall also contain ordering information for an IR indicator card (Edmund Scientific part #53-031 or equivalent) to allow visualization of invisible IR light. GR-910 R3-28 [77] Cleaning Materials - The instructions that describe the procedures for cleaning the attenuators shall contain the following information regarding any materials that are used for cleaning that may be considered hazardous to health or to the environment: 1. Warning as to the toxicity hazard 2. Instructions for handling and use 3. Instructions for disposal. 3.3.6.2 Test Method (not from GR-910) A. Verify the supplier has provided written warning of precautions for use of the product. B. Verify that the attenuator cleaning instructions describe procedures for indicating possible hazard due to the presence of invisible (infrared) radiation when examining connectors with the naked eye or using a microscope. Also verify that the instruction contain ordering information for an IR indicator card (Edmund Scientific part #53-031or equivalent). C. Verify that attenuator cleaning instructions contain the following information regarding any materials that are used for cleaning that may be considered hazardous to health or to the environment: (1) Warning as to the toxicity hazard, (2) Instructions for handling and use, and (3) Instructions for disposal. D. Record test results. E. Any nonconformance shall be documented and reported to the customer authorized representative. F. If the criteria are met, then subject the DUT to the next test group. Telcordia Technologies, Inc. Confidential -- Restricted Access See confidentiality restrictions on title page. 502-1198 Rev A 3-27 Confidential -- Restricted Access DA-1543 Issue 1, Revision 4 February 3, 2005 Tyco Electronics 3-dB SC Singlemode Fiber Optic Buildout Attenuators General and Design Criteria 3.3.6.3 Test Flowchart (not from GR-910) Test Product, cleaning instructions, and precaution documentation are provided by supplier Review cleaning instructions and conformance documentation related to safety compliance. Are written warning of precautions for use of the product provided? Document nonconformances and address corrective actions with supplier No Yes Review the instructions that describe the procedures for cleaning the attenuator. Clean attenuators according to manufacture's instructions. Are the safety instructions and warnings specified in GR-910 R3-27 [76] and GR-910 R3-28 [77] provided? Yes No Document nonconformances and address corrective actions with supplier Document Results and go to next criteria section TP-910 Figure 3-8 Test Flowchart - Safety (not from GR-910) Telcordia Technologies, Inc. Confidential -- Restricted Access See confidentiality restrictions on title page. 3-28 502-1198 Rev A DA-1543 Issue 1, Revision 4 February 3, 2005 Confidential -- Restricted Access Tyco Electronics 3-dB SC Singlemode Fiber Optic Buildout Attenuators General and Design Criteria 3.3.6.4 Test Configuration and Conditions (not from GR-910) Not applicable 3.3.6.5 Test Apparatus (not from GR-910) Not applicable 3.3.6.6 Summary of Test Results (not from GR-910) Conformance/Nonconformance Conformance to the criteria in Section 3.3.6.1 of this document has been partially established. Results for requirement GR-910 R3-26 [25] and GR-910 R3-27 [76] were not determined. Conformance is based on the verification that the supplier has provided written warning of precautions for use of the product, verification that the attenuator cleaning instructions describe procedures for indicating possible hazard due to the presence of invisible (infrared) radiation when examining connectors with the naked eye or using a microscope and that the instructions contain ordering information for an IR indicator card, and verification that the attenuator cleaning instructions contain the information outlined in GR-910 R3-28 [77] regarding any materials that are used for cleaning that may be considered hazardous to health or to the environment. Failure History Not applicable. Disposition of Nonconformance Not applicable. Test Data Not applicable. 3.3.7 Mounting Depending on the application and on specific Telcordia client practices, attenuators may be located in Central Offices and in various locations in the Outside Plant, including the underground, buried and aerial plant.2 2. Attenuators may also be located in an Alternate Splice Area (ASA), also referred to as an Optical Cable Rearrangement Facility (OCRF), a splice area within the CO that is not within the Cable Entrance Facility. For more information, see Section 2.5.2 of BR 781-826-127, Optical Cross-Connect Planning. Telcordia Technologies, Inc. Confidential -- Restricted Access See confidentiality restrictions on title page. 502-1198 Rev A 3-29 Confidential -- Restricted Access Tyco Electronics 3-dB SC Singlemode Fiber Optic Buildout Attenuators General and Design Criteria DA-1543 Issue 1, Revision 4 February 3, 2005 3.3.7.1 Criteria - Mounting (heading not from GR-910) GR-910 R3-29 [26] Fiber optic attenuators shall be provided with a means to be installed in Central Offices and Remote Sites. GR-910 O3-30 [27] Attenuators should be capable of being mounted on standard 23-inch relay racks, cabinets, pedestals, splice trays, splice organizers and splice closures or other protective enclosures. GR-910 R3-31 [28] Variable attenuators shall be mounted in such a way that the adjustment mechanism is easily recognizable and accessible to craft personnel. The location of the attenuator is important because it determines how accessible the attenuators will be to craftpersons for testing, repair and growth of future services. Attenuators terminated in connectors can be mounted in racks and cabinets, and are more accessible than attenuators mounted in OSP closures, which are usually spliced. Outside Plant Location GR-910 R3-32 [29] Attenuators deployed in an uncontrolled environment shall have a protective enclosure to restrict water intrusion into the attenuator housing package. GR-910 R3-33 [30] Installed attenuators shall be easily accessible for operations and maintenance support. 3.3.7.2 Test Method (not from GR-910) A. Perform visual inspection on the mounting of the attenuator to determine the following: 1. Verify that the attenuator provides a means to be installed in Central Offices and Remote Sites. 2. Determine if the attenuator is capable of being mounted on standard 23-inch relay racks, cabinets, pedestals, splice trays, splice organizers and splice closures or other protective enclosures. 3. Verify that variable attenuators can be mounted in such a way that the adjustment mechanism is easily recognizable and accessible to craft personnel. Telcordia Technologies, Inc. Confidential -- Restricted Access See confidentiality restrictions on title page. 3-30 502-1198 Rev A DA-1543 Issue 1, Revision 4 February 3, 2005 Confidential -- Restricted Access Tyco Electronics 3-dB SC Singlemode Fiber Optic Buildout Attenuators General and Design Criteria 4. Verify that attenuators intended for deployment in an uncontrolled environment have a protective enclosure to restrict water intrusion into the attenuator package. 5. Verify that the installed attenuator can be easily accessible for operations and maintenance support. B. Record test results. C. Any nonconformance shall be documented and reported to the customer authorized representative in accordance with the Quality Assurance Program of Telcordia. A determination shall be made regarding possible employment of hot spares or if the testing is to be continued. D. If the criteria are met, then subject the DUT to the next test group. 3.3.7.3 Test Flowchart (not from GR-910) Test Product and associated installation documentation are provided by supplier Visually inspect mounting capabilities and review installation documentation Does the product meet the applicable criteria from Section 3.3.7.1? No Document nonconformances and address corrective actions with supplier Yes Document Results and go to next criteria section TP-910 Figure 3-9 Test Flowchart - Mounting (not from GR-910) Telcordia Technologies, Inc. Confidential -- Restricted Access See confidentiality restrictions on title page. 502-1198 Rev A 3-31 Confidential -- Restricted Access Tyco Electronics 3-dB SC Singlemode Fiber Optic Buildout Attenuators General and Design Criteria DA-1543 Issue 1, Revision 4 February 3, 2005 3.3.7.4 Test Configuration and Conditions (not from GR-910) Not applicable 3.3.7.5 Test Apparatus (not from GR-910) Not applicable 3.3.7.6 Summary of Test Results (not from GR-910) Conformance/Nonconformance Conformance to the criteria in Section 3.3.7.1 of this document has been partially established. The criteria for requirements GR-910 R3-31 [28] and Verizon's Requirement were not applicable, and results for requirement GR-910 R3-32 [29] were not determined. Conformance is based on the verification that the attenuator provides a means to be installed in Central Offices and Remote Sites and that the attenuator is capable of being mounted on standard 23-inch relay racks, cabinets, pedestals, splice trays, splice organizers and splice closures or other protective enclosures. Conformance is also based on the verification that attenuators intended for deployment in an uncontrolled environment have a protective enclosure to restrict water intrusion into the attenuator package, and verification that the installed attenuator can be easily accessible for operations and maintenance support. Failure History Not applicable. Disposition of Nonconformance Not applicable. Test Data Not applicable. Sample Size Not applicable Photographs Not applicable Telcordia Technologies, Inc. Confidential -- Restricted Access See confidentiality restrictions on title page. 3-32 502-1198 Rev A DA-1543 Issue 1, Revision 4 February 3, 2005 Confidential -- Restricted Access Tyco Electronics 3-dB SC Singlemode Fiber Optic Buildout Attenuators General and Design Criteria 3.3.8 Index Matching 3.3.8.1 Criteria - Index Matching (heading not from GR-910) GR-910 R3-34 [31] Application of index-matching materials shall not be required for use of the attenuator. 3.3.8.2 Test Method (not from GR-910) A. Examine the attenuator and the supplier documentation to verify that the application of index-matching materials is not required for use of the attenuator. B. Record test results. C. Any nonconformance shall be documented and reported to the customer authorized representative in accordance with the Quality Assurance Program of Telcordia. A determination shall be made regarding possible employment of hot spares or if the testing is to be continued. D. If the criteria are met, then subject the DUT to the next test group. Telcordia Technologies, Inc. Confidential -- Restricted Access See confidentiality restrictions on title page. 502-1198 Rev A 3-33 Confidential -- Restricted Access Tyco Electronics 3-dB SC Singlemode Fiber Optic Buildout Attenuators General and Design Criteria DA-1543 Issue 1, Revision 4 February 3, 2005 3.3.8.3 Test Flowchart (not from GR-910) Test Product and associated installation documentation are provided by supplier Visually inspect attenuator and review installation documentation Does the product require the application of indexmatching materials? Yes Document nonconformances and address corrective actions with supplier No Document Results and go to next criteria section TP-910 Figure 3-10 Test Flowchart - Index Matching (not from GR-910) 3.3.8.4 Test Configuration and Conditions (not from GR-910) Not applicable 3.3.8.5 Test Apparatus (not from GR-910) Not applicable Telcordia Technologies, Inc. Confidential -- Restricted Access See confidentiality restrictions on title page. 3-34 502-1198 Rev A Confidential -- Restricted Access DA-1543 Issue 1, Revision 4 February 3, 2005 Tyco Electronics 3-dB SC Singlemode Fiber Optic Buildout Attenuators General and Design Criteria 3.3.8.6 Summary of Test Results (not from GR-910) Conformance/Nonconformance Conformance to the criteria in Section 3.3.8.1 of this document has been established. Conformance is based on the verification that the attenuator and the supplier documentation does not require the application of index-matching materials for use of the attenuator. Failure History Not applicable. Disposition of Nonconformance Not applicable. Test Data Not applicable. 3.3.9 Change of Attenuation 3.3.9.1 Criteria - Change of Attenuation (heading not from GR-910) To change the attenuation of a variable attenuator or remove and replace fixed attenuators in an optical transmission system: GR-910 CR3-35 [32] It shall be possible to vary the attenuation of a variable attenuator after it is installed in a transmission system. GR-910 R3-36 [33] It shall not be necessary to access both sides of the distributing frame, nor remove screws or other mounting hardware. GR-910 R3-37 [34] It shall not be necessary to re-splice fibers for attenuators other than those designed to be spliced to a fiber. 3.3.9.2 Test Method (not from GR-910) A. Verify the following: 1. The attenuation of a variable attenuator can be changed after it is installed in a transmission system. 2. To change the attenuation of a variable attenuator or remove and replace fixed attenuators in an optical transmission system it is not necessary to access both sides of the distributing frame, nor remove screws or other mounting hardware. Telcordia Technologies, Inc. Confidential -- Restricted Access See confidentiality restrictions on title page. 502-1198 Rev A 3-35 Confidential -- Restricted Access Tyco Electronics 3-dB SC Singlemode Fiber Optic Buildout Attenuators General and Design Criteria DA-1543 Issue 1, Revision 4 February 3, 2005 3. It is not necessary to re-splice fibers for attenuators (other than those designed to be spliced to a fiber) to change the attenuation of a variable attenuator or remove and replace fixed attenuators in an optical transmission system. B. Record test results. C. Any nonconformance shall be documented and reported to the customer authorized representative in accordance with the Quality Assurance Program of Telcordia. A determination shall be made regarding possible employment of hot spares or if the testing is to be continued. D. If the criteria are met, then subject the DUT to the next test group. Telcordia Technologies, Inc. Confidential -- Restricted Access See confidentiality restrictions on title page. 3-36 502-1198 Rev A DA-1543 Issue 1, Revision 4 February 3, 2005 Confidential -- Restricted Access Tyco Electronics 3-dB SC Singlemode Fiber Optic Buildout Attenuators General and Design Criteria 3.3.9.3 Test Flowchart (not from GR-910) Test Product and application documentation are provided by supplier Examine the attenuator and review application instructions for changing attenuation. Can variable attenuator be changed after it is installed? No Document nonconformances and address corrective actions with supplier Yes Examine the attenuator and review application instructions for changing attenuation. Are the change of attenuation criteria in R3-36 and R3-37 met? Yes No Document nonconformances and address corrective actions with supplier Document Results and go to next criteria section TP-910 Figure 3-11 Test Flowchart - Change in Attenuation (not from GR-910) Telcordia Technologies, Inc. Confidential -- Restricted Access See confidentiality restrictions on title page. 502-1198 Rev A 3-37 Confidential -- Restricted Access Tyco Electronics 3-dB SC Singlemode Fiber Optic Buildout Attenuators General and Design Criteria DA-1543 Issue 1, Revision 4 February 3, 2005 3.3.9.4 Test Configuration and Conditions (not from GR-910) Not applicable 3.3.9.5 Test Apparatus (not from GR-910) Not applicable 3.3.9.6 Summary of Test Results (not from GR-910) Conformance/Nonconformance Conformance to the criteria in Section 3.3.9.1 of this document has been partially established. Results for requirement GR-910 CR3-35 [32] were not applicable. Conformance is based on the verification that it is not necessary to access both sides of the distributing frame, nor remove screws or other mounting hardware when removing and replacing fixed attenuators in an optical transmission system, and verification that it is not necessary to re-splice fibers for attenuators other than those designed to be spliced to a fiber when removing and replacing fixed attenuators in an optical transmission system. Failure History Not applicable. Disposition of Nonconformance Not applicable. Test Data Not applicable. Sample Size Not applicable. Photographs Not applicable. Telcordia Technologies, Inc. Confidential -- Restricted Access See confidentiality restrictions on title page. 3-38 502-1198 Rev A Confidential -- Restricted Access DA-1543 Issue 1, Revision 4 February 3, 2005 4.0 Tyco Electronics 3-dB SC Singlemode Fiber Optic Buildout Attenuators Performance Criteria Performance Criteria For the definition of requirements, objectives, and conditional requirements, see the "Requirements Terminology:" section in the Executive Summary. The criteria fall into two categories: Optical Criteria that address unstressed, optical performance characteristics and Environmental and Mechanical Criteria that address compliance with the change in attenuation requirements, A, for either analog transmission, digital transmission, or both, whichever applies, when attenuators are subjected to stress. The change in attenuation criteria in Section 4.2.2 must be met after (and in some cases during) each individual stress test in Section 4.1. GR-910 Table 4-1 summarizes attenuator performance Requirements and Objectives. The criteria appear in the chronological order intended for testing and in the order of their appearance in this document. Compliance with all criteria is verified according to the test procedures in Section 5. The Optical Criteria are verified only after the Environmental and Mechanical Tests. GR-910 Table 4-1 Summary of Attenuator Performance Criteria and Test Sequence CHARACTERISTIC Environmental & Mechanical SECT. CRITERIA 4.1 Conditions Controlled Operating Environment 4.1.1 -5C to 50C, 5 to 95% RH Uncontrolled Operating Environment 4.1.2 -40C to 75C, RH 0 to 90% 5% Non-operating Environment 4.1.3 -40C to 70C, 0 to 95% RH Humidity/Condensation Cycling Test 4.1.4 -10C to 65C, 90% RH Water Immersion 4.1.5 43C, PH 5.5, 7 days Vibration 4.1.6 10 - 55 Hz, 1.52 mm amplitude, for 2 hrs Flex Test 4.1.7 0.5, or 2 lb load, 100 cycles Twist Test 4.1.8 1.1, 1.65 lb, or 3 lb load, 10 cycles Side Pull 4.1.9 0.55 or 2.75 lb load, 90angle, active Cable Retention 4.1.10 1 lb, 1.54 lb, or 4.4 lb load, for 1 min. Durability 4.1.11 200 cyc., 3 ft, 4.5 ft, 6 ft per GR-326 Impact Test 4.1.12 6 ft. drop, 8 cycles, 3 axes Optical Criteria 4.2 Digital (CR) 4.2.1 1260 ->1360 Optical Bandpass (nm) " & 1480 ->1580# AM-Video (CR) 1290 ->1330 & (1530 ->1570) Change in Attenuation A (dB) 4.2.2 0.5 or 0.15A 0.5 or 0.10A Attenuation Tolerance (dB) 4.2.3 0.15V 0.10V Attenuation Increments and Range (dB) 4.2.4 5 dB, 5 to 20 dB 3 dB, 3 to 20 dB@ Telcordia Technologies, Inc. Confidential -- Restricted Access See confidentiality restrictions on title page. 502-1198 Rev A 4-1 Confidential -- Restricted Access Tyco Electronics 3-dB SC Singlemode Fiber Optic Buildout Attenuators Performance Criteria DA-1543 Issue 1, Revision 4 February 3, 2005 GR-910 Table 4-1 Summary of Attenuator Performance Criteria and Test Sequence (Continued) CHARACTERISTIC SECT. CRITERIA Reflectance (dB) 4.2.5 -40 -55 (-65) PDL (dB) 4.2.6 0.5 or 0.15A 0.5 or 0.10A PMD (dB) 4.2.7 0.2 ps Notes: # The conditional objective for digital applications in the upper window is 1430 to 1580nm. The conditional requirement for LR-SONET applications is 1280 to 1335 and 1525 to 1575nm. See Section 4.2.1 for more on LR-SONET. @ The increment conditional objective for attenuators used in AM video applications is 1 dB. The range objective for attenuators in all applications is 1 to 25 dB. 4.1 Environmental and Mechanical Criteria The change in attenuation and reflectance criteria in GR-910 Table 4-1 are used as the pass/fail criteria for environmental and mechanical tests, in which attenuators are subjected to thermal, water-related and mechanical stress. Mechanical stress in attenuators can physically damage attenuators, attenuation elements, optical interfaces, and adjustment mechanisms in variable attenuators, thereby degrading product performance. Elevated temperature and humidity may degrade the performance of adhesives, attenuating fibers, and attenuating elements used to manufacture attenuators. The thermal and water-related tests are also intended to indicate the performance of attenuators exposed to short-term freezing, heat, high humidity and water immersion, as may exist in a controlled CO, CEV, or uncontrolled loop plant environment. The other tests are intended to ensure the mechanical integrity and ruggedness of attenuators. The Vibration, Cable Retention, Side Pull, and Impact Tests apply to all attenuators. The Flex and Twist tests apply only to attenuators with optical fiber leads and are intended to stress the attenuator-to-fiber interface. The Durability Test applies to variable attenuators and attenuators with connectors or connector interfaces that are an integral part of the attenuation mechanism. Refer to GR-910 R4-37 [73] for a description of what constitutes physical damage. Tensile loads for the mechanical tests are shown in GR-910 Table 4-2. The applied load depends on the attenuators media type. Environmental Requirements and Objectives refer to the reflectance, and change in attenuation, A, before, during, and after attenuators are subjected to the Temperature and Humidity Criteria described in Section 4.1 of GR-63-CORE. Mechanical requirements and objectives refer to the reflectance and change in Telcordia Technologies, Inc. Confidential -- Restricted Access See confidentiality restrictions on title page. 4-2 502-1198 Rev A DA-1543 Issue 1, Revision 4 February 3, 2005 Confidential -- Restricted Access Tyco Electronics 3-dB SC Singlemode Fiber Optic Buildout Attenuators Performance Criteria attenuation, A, before and after the Flex, Twist, Vibration, Cable Retention, and Impact Tests and during and after the Side Pull Test. GR-910 Table 4-2 Tensile Loads for Mechanical Tests Media Type Flex Test kg (lb) Twist Test kg (lb) Cable Side Pull Retention kg (lb) kg (lb) Type III 250-m coated or tight buffered 0.23 (0.5) 0.5 (1.1) 0.25 (0.55) 0.5 (1.1) " 0.75 (1.65) " 0.7 (1.54) 0.9 (2.0) 1.35 (3.0) 1.25 (2.75) 2.0 (4.4) Type II 900-m loose buffered Type I reinforced cable ( 2 mm dia.) Fiber media types are defined in the Glossary. 4.1.1 Controlled Operating Environment 4.1.1.1 Criteria - Controlled Operating Environment (heading not from GR-910) GR-910 R4-1 [39] Attenuators shall meet optical criteria and damage criteria described in Section 4.2. GR-910 R4-2 [40] Product intended for use in a controlled environment shall meet the requirement for operation under Operating Temperature and Humidity Criteria in Section 4.1.2. of GR-63-CORE. NEBS requires product to remain functional (to operate as expected) in a room ambient temperature of 5 to 40C (41 to 104F) and a relative humidity of 5% to 85%. Product must also remain functional for a period of 72 consecutive hours and 15 days in one year, in a room ambient temperature of - 5 to + 50C (23 to 122F) and a relative humidity of 5% to 90%, but not exceeding 0.024 lb of water/lb of dry air. As used here, the term "remain functional" shall be interpreted as meeting the optical performance criteria in this document. Rationale: Attenuators are expected to operate typically in a controlled environment, such as the FOT in a CO or CEV, as described in GR-63-CORE. 4.1.1.2 Test Method (not from GR-910) This section presents test methods to determine whether the attenuator can operate in controlled environments. The attenuator is to be in operation for the entire duration of the test. Conformance is based on the ability of the attenuator to operate throughout the test period. The step numbers below correspond to the numbers shown in TP-910 Figure 4-2 of Section 4.1.1.4. Telcordia Technologies, Inc. Confidential -- Restricted Access See confidentiality restrictions on title page. 502-1198 Rev A 4-3 Confidential -- Restricted Access Tyco Electronics 3-dB SC Singlemode Fiber Optic Buildout Attenuators Performance Criteria DA-1543 Issue 1, Revision 4 February 3, 2005 Test Sequence - Monitor the chamber's temperature continuously during the test. Verify lab ambient conditions, calibration and appropriate setup of product under test. Inspect product physical conditions and perform initial optical measurements. Optical measurements shall be made throughout the thermal cycle. 1. Operate the attenuator at an ambient temperature of 23C (73F) and RH level of 50% for a minimum period of 24 hrs. 2. Decrease the chamber's temperature at a rate of 30C/ hr (54F/hr) to -5C (23F). RH is not controlled. 3. Maintain a temperature of -5C (23F) and any RH for 16 hrs. 4. Increase the chamber's temperature at a rate of 5C/hr (9F/hr) to 5C (41F). RH is not controlled. 5. Increase the chamber's temperature at a rate of 5C/hr (9F/hr) to 28C (82F). Increase the RH to attain a 90% level by the time the target temperature is attained. 6. Maintain a temperature of 28C (82F) and RH of 90% for 96 hrs. 7. Increase the chamber's temperature at a rate of 5C/hr (9F/hr) to 50C1 (122F). Decrease the RH to less than 32% (by the time the target temperature is attained). 8. Maintain a temperature of 50C* (122F) and less than 32% RH for 12 hrs. 9. Maintain a temperature of 50C* (122F) for an additional 4 hrs. During these 4 hrs, reduce the RH to less than 15%. 10. Decrease the chamber's temperature at a rate of about 5C/hr (9F/hr) to 5C (41F) and maintain the RH to less than 15%. 11. Maintain a temperature of 5C (41F) and a RH of less than 15% for 3 hrs. 12. Increase the chamber's temperature at a rate of 30C/hr (54F/hr) to 50C (122F). RH is not controlled. 13. Maintain a temperature of 50C (122F) and any RH for 3 hrs. 14. Decrease the chamber's temperature at a rate of 30C/hr (54F/hr) to 23C (73F). RH is not controlled. 15. Perform final optical measurements, inspect physical damage and record results. 1. The 50C temperature is applied to frame-level equipment. For shelves (equipment that occupy less than half a frame), a temperature of 55C (131F) and 25% RH shall be used. Telcordia Technologies, Inc. Confidential -- Restricted Access See confidentiality restrictions on title page. 4-4 502-1198 Rev A DA-1543 Issue 1, Revision 4 February 3, 2005 Confidential -- Restricted Access Tyco Electronics 3-dB SC Singlemode Fiber Optic Buildout Attenuators Performance Criteria 4.1.1.3 Test Flowchart (not from GR-910) Verify lab ambient conditions of 23 5C and 30 to 70% RH Prepare/warm-up test equipment per manufacturers' instructions Verify test equipment calibration Verify product under test is configured per supplier's instructions Inspect physical condition of product under test Stabilize product under test at room temperature with less than 50% RH for 2 hours Clean connection points and perform initial optical measurements Program environmental chamber to perform temperature and humidity profile shown in TP-910 Figure 4-2 Place all components in environmental chamber Run chamber control program and execute (and record results of) daily optical measurements at specified temperatures Stabilize components at room temperature for 2 hours Perform final optical measurements and inspect for any physical damage Were the components undamaged and the optical measurements within specs? No Document nonconformances and address corrective actions with supplier Yes Document Results and go to next criteria section TP-910 Figure 4-1 Test Flowchart - Controlled Operating Environment Test (not from GR-910) Telcordia Technologies, Inc. Confidential -- Restricted Access See confidentiality restrictions on title page. 502-1198 Rev A 4-5 Confidential -- Restricted Access DA-1543 Issue 1, Revision 4 February 3, 2005 Tyco Electronics 3-dB SC Singlemode Fiber Optic Buildout Attenuators Performance Criteria 4.1.1.4 Test Configuration and Conditions (not from GR-910) 13 8 9 50 7 Temperature C 40 14 6 30 10 1 20 5 10 12 2 11 4 0 3 24 72 120 168 216 Time - Hours 1. Dwell, 23C, 50% RH, (24 hrs) 8. Dwell, 50C*, 32% RH (12 hrs) 2. Transition, 30C/hr, any RH (1 hr) 9. Dwell, 50C*, 15% RH (4 hrs) 3. Dwell, -5C, any RH (16 hrs) 4. Transition to +5C, any RH, 5C/hr (2 hrs) 10. Transition to +5C, <15% RH, 5C/hr (9 hrs) 11. Dwell, 5C, <15% RH (3 hrs) 5. Transition to 28C and 90% RH, 5C/hr (4.6 hrs) 12. Transition to 50C, 30C/hr, any RH (1.5 hrs) 6. Dwell, 28C, 90% RH (96 hrs) 13. Dwell, 50C, any RH (3 hrs) 7. Transition to (50C*, 32%* RH), 5C/ hr (5.4 hrs) 14. Transition to 23C, 30C/hr, any RH (1hr) * 55C, 25% RH for shelves that fill less than 50% the frame length. TP-910 Figure 4-2 Operating Temperature and Humidity Test Telcordia Technologies, Inc. Confidential -- Restricted Access See confidentiality restrictions on title page. 4-6 502-1198 Rev A Confidential -- Restricted Access DA-1543 Issue 1, Revision 4 February 3, 2005 Tyco Electronics 3-dB SC Singlemode Fiber Optic Buildout Attenuators Performance Criteria Optical Measurements For each test, compliance against the change in attenuation criteria is determined by measuring the attenuation as described in Section 5.2.2, or measure the optical transmittance and calculate the attenuation per FOTP-20, during or after each test. The compliance against the reflectance criteria is determined by measuring reflectance per FOTP-107, during or after each test. Visual and mechanical inspection should follow FOTP-13. The operating and non-operating environmental criteria require monitoring during testing. This can be accomplished using a Transmission Measurement Facility shown in TP-910 Figure 4-3, or another comparable system. Source TP-910 Figure 4-3 Transmission Measurement Facility In accordance with Verizon requirements, this facility is equipped to make measurements at four wavelengths, 1310 nm, 1490 nm, 1550 nm and 1625 nm, accurate to 0.05 dB for transmittance and 1 dB for reflectance down to -60 dB. While this measurement system is recommended, other configurations capable of meeting the relevant measurement requirements are acceptable. For attenuators in which the leads were connectorized by the supplier, the connectors and leads should be inside the test chamber to check for fiber pistoning. This may result in additional measurement uncertainty attributable to variations in connector loss. The measurement facility functions as follows: Switch 3 selects light from one of four laser sources emitting near 1 = 1310 nm, 2 = 1490 nm, 3 = 1550 nm or 4 = 1625 nm. The Device Under Test (DUT) is fusion spliced between the source switch (Switch 1) and the detector switch (Switch 2). The source switch is used to launch light into any of the devices under test. The detector switch connects any DUT to the power meter, measuring transmitted power and reflected power. The Coupler directs the optical power reflected by the DUT to port (r) on Switch 2 for detection. A reference fiber, located at port (m) of Switch 1 and 2, is used to correct for variations in source power over time. A reflectance reference (suggested value Telcordia Technologies, Inc. Confidential -- Restricted Access See confidentiality restrictions on title page. 502-1198 Rev A 4-7 Confidential -- Restricted Access DA-1543 Issue 1, Revision 4 February 3, 2005 Tyco Electronics 3-dB SC Singlemode Fiber Optic Buildout Attenuators Performance Criteria is -60 1 dB) is located at port (r) of Switch 1, and is used to calculate reflectance from the measured optical power. Insertion loss is calculated by subtracting the power transmitted through the reference fiber from the power transmitted through the DUT. Reflectance is calculated by subtracting the power reflected by the reflectance reference from the power reflected by the DUT. All other switch ports are dedicated to DUTs. The Switches, Power Meter and Environmental Chambers are computer controlled via GPIB interface. Laser sources are preferred over LEDs because source coherence affects both the DUT reflectance, and the loss of the switches. Fusion splices are recommended for their low loss and low reflectance. To obtain accurate reflectance measurements, all components in the measurement facility, including the power meter, splices and switches, should have a reflectance of -65 dB. The Coupler should have a directivity of 70 dB. Mode filters between the splices and DUT ensure single-mode transmission. A 2-meter length of the jumper cable will be a sufficient mode filter, provided that the cable conforms to the requirements of GR-409-CORE and there are at least two 360 loops in the 2 meter length. Refer to GR-326-CORE for additional details regarding measurement of loss and reflectance using the Transmission Measurement Facility. 4.1.1.5 Test Apparatus (not from GR-910) Description Supplier Model Calibration Cycle Calibration Due Date. Optical Multimeter Frame HP 8153A - n.a. Optical Sensor HP 81532A 12 months - Laser Source (dual wl) HP 81554SM 12 months - 90/10% Coupler - - Reflectance Standard - - Optical Switch JDS SC95B500NC n.a. Optical Switch JDS SC95B500NC n.a. Optical Switch JDS SW1-25 CS n.a. Env.Chamber Espec PLA2AP 12 months - Optical Tunable Light Source Agilent 8164A 12 months - Sensor for tunable multimeter Agilent 81640A 12 months - Telcordia Technologies, Inc. Confidential -- Restricted Access See confidentiality restrictions on title page. 4-8 502-1198 Rev A DA-1543 Issue 1, Revision 4 February 3, 2005 Confidential -- Restricted Access Tyco Electronics 3-dB SC Singlemode Fiber Optic Buildout Attenuators Performance Criteria 4.1.1.6 Summary of Test Results (not from GR-910) Conformance/Nonconformance All of the eleven test samples conformed to the less stringent criteria in Section 4.1.1.1 of this document. Refer to the Executive Summary for details on this criteria. However, as shown in TP-910 Figure 4-8, the insertion loss of sample i.l.08 did not conform to, while sample i.l.07 showed borderline performance to the more stringent criteria of GR-910 CR4-24 [61] which states that for attenuators intended for use in AM video applications, the attenuation tolerance shall not exceed 0.10V. Sample i.l.08 showed a maximum insertion loss of 3.42 0.05 dB. As shown in TP-910 Figure 4-9, the insertion loss of sample i.l.07 showed borderline performance to the more stringent criteria of GR-910 CR4-24 [61] which states that for attenuators intended for use in AM video applications, the attenuation tolerance shall not exceed 0.10V. As shown in TP-910 Figure 4-11, the insertion loss of sample i.l.07 did not conform to, while samples i.l.05, i.l.06 and i.l.10 showed borderline performance to the more stringent criteria of GR-910 CR4-24 [61] which states that for attenuators intended for use in AM video applications, the attenuation tolerance shall not exceed 0.10V. Sample i.l.07 showed a minimum insertion loss of 2.64 0.05 dB. In addition, as shown in TP-910 Figure 4-12, samples i.l.03 at the 1625 nm wavelength, i.l.05 at the 1625 nm wavelength, and i.l.11 at the 1490 nm wavelength showed borderline performance to GR-910 CR4-31 [68] which states that the maximum reflectance for attenuators intended for use in AM-VSB systems shall be -55 dB over the entire bandpass of GR-910 CR4-20 [57] and operating temperature range of -40C to +75C. Furthermore, as shown in TP-910 Figure 4-12, conformance to GR-910 CO4-32 [69] which states that the maximum reflectance for attenuators intended for use in AM-VSB systems should be -65 dB over the entire bandpass of GR-910 CR4-20 [57] and operating temperature range of -40C to +75C was not met. This is a conditional objective and it is up to the end user to determine the significance of this nonconformance issue. Conformance is based on demonstration of no physical damage to the product under test, as well as the optical criteria described in Section 4.2. Nonconforming deviations to GR-910 CO4-32 [69] were noted in testing. Sample Size Eleven samples, in accordance with 20% LTPD specified in GR-910-CORE, Issue 2, were used in the test program. In addition, eleven samples were added to serve as hot spares for replacing sample(s) with nonconformance identified in the test program. Failure History Not applicable. Telcordia Technologies, Inc. Confidential -- Restricted Access See confidentiality restrictions on title page. 502-1198 Rev A 4-9 Confidential -- Restricted Access DA-1543 Issue 1, Revision 4 February 3, 2005 Tyco Electronics 3-dB SC Singlemode Fiber Optic Buildout Attenuators Performance Criteria Disposition of Nonconformance Not applicable. Test Data The following graphs represent the entire set of samples tested. This includes a total of eleven (11) samples of buildout attenuators (BOA). TP-910 Figure 4-4 through TP-910 Figure 4-7 present change-in-attenuation measurements during the Controlled Operating Environment test for all of the eleven test samples at 1310 nm, 1490 nm, 1550 nm and 1625 nm, respectively. TP-910 Figure 4-8 through TP-910 Figure 4-11 present insertion loss measurements (including connection losses of about 0.5 dB) during the Controlled Operating Environment test for all of the eleven test samples at 1310 nm, 1490 nm, 1550 nm and 1625 nm, respectively. TP-910 Figure 4-12 presents the reflectance measurements during the Controlled Operating Environment test for all of the eleven test samples at 1310 nm, 1490 nm, 1550 nm and 1625 nm. Tyco Electronics, 3-dB Attenuators, 1310 nm., Controlled Operating Temperature i.l.01 i.l.02 0.7 i.l.03 i.l.04 0.5 Change in Attenuation (dB) i.l.05 i.l.06 0.3 i.l.07 i.l.08 0.1 i.l.09 i.l.10 -0.1 i.l.11 AM Video -0.3 Digital -0.5 +/- 0.5 dB -0.7 0 24 48 72 96 Time (h) 120 144 168 192 TP-910 Figure 4-4 Change in Attenuation at 1310 nm during Controlled Operating Environment test Telcordia Technologies, Inc. Confidential -- Restricted Access See confidentiality restrictions on title page. 4-10 502-1198 Rev A Confidential -- Restricted Access DA-1543 Issue 1, Revision 4 February 3, 2005 Tyco Electronics 3-dB SC Singlemode Fiber Optic Buildout Attenuators Performance Criteria Tyco Electronics, 3-dB Attenuators, 1490 nm., Controlled Operating Temperature 0.7 i.l.01 i.l.02 i.l.03 i.l.04 0.5 Change in Attenuation (dB) i.l.05 i.l.06 0.3 i.l.07 i.l.08 0.1 i.l.09 i.l.10 -0.1 i.l.11 AM Video -0.3 Digital -0.5 +/- 0.5 dB -0.7 0 24 48 72 96 Time (h) 120 144 168 192 TP-910 Figure 4-5 Change in Attenuation at 1490 nm during Controlled Operating Environment test Tyco Electronics, 3-dB Attenuators, 1550 nm., Controlled Operating Temperature i.l.01 0.7 i.l.02 i.l.03 Change in Attenuation (dB) 0.5 i.l.04 i.l.05 i.l.06 0.3 i.l.07 i.l.08 0.1 i.l.09 i.l.10 -0.1 i.l.11 AM Video -0.3 Digital -0.5 +/- 0.5 dB -0.7 0 24 48 72 96 Time (h) 120 144 168 192 TP-910 Figure 4-6 Change in Attenuation at 1550 nm during Controlled Operating Environment test Telcordia Technologies, Inc. Confidential -- Restricted Access See confidentiality restrictions on title page. 502-1198 Rev A 4-11 Confidential -- Restricted Access DA-1543 Issue 1, Revision 4 February 3, 2005 Tyco Electronics 3-dB SC Singlemode Fiber Optic Buildout Attenuators Performance Criteria Tyco Electronics, 3-dB Attenuators, 1625 nm., Controlled Operating Temperature i.l.01 i.l.02 0.7 i.l.03 i.l.04 0.5 Change in Attenuation (dB) i.l.05 i.l.06 0.3 i.l.07 i.l.08 0.1 i.l.09 i.l.10 -0.1 i.l.11 AM Video -0.3 Digital -0.5 +/- 0.5 dB -0.7 0 24 48 72 96 Time (h) 120 144 168 192 TP-910 Figure 4-7 Change in Attenuation at 1625 nm during Controlled Operating Environment test Tyco Electronics, 3-dB Attenuators, 1310 nm., Controlled Operating Temperature i.l.01 i.l.02 3.7 i.l.03 i.l.04 3.5 Insertion Loss (dB) i.l.05 i.l.06 3.3 i.l.07 i.l.08 3.1 i.l.09 i.l.10 2.9 i.l.11 AM Video 2.7 Digital 2.5 +/- 0.5 dB 2.3 0 24 48 72 96 Time (h) 120 144 168 192 TP-910 Figure 4-8 Insertion Loss at 1310 nm during Controlled Operating Environment test Telcordia Technologies, Inc. Confidential -- Restricted Access See confidentiality restrictions on title page. 4-12 502-1198 Rev A Confidential -- Restricted Access DA-1543 Issue 1, Revision 4 February 3, 2005 Tyco Electronics 3-dB SC Singlemode Fiber Optic Buildout Attenuators Performance Criteria Tyco Electronics, 3-dB Attenuators, 1490 nm., Controlled Operating Temperature i.l.01 i.l.02 3.7 i.l.03 i.l.04 3.5 Insertion Loss (dB) i.l.05 i.l.06 3.3 i.l.07 i.l.08 3.1 i.l.09 i.l.10 2.9 i.l.11 AM Video 2.7 Digital 2.5 +/- 0.5 dB 2.3 0 24 48 72 96 Time (h) 120 144 168 192 TP-910 Figure 4-9 Insertion Loss at 1490 nm during Controlled Operating Environment test Tyco Electronics, 3-dB Attenuators, 1550 nm., Controlled Operating Temperature i.l.01 i.l.02 3.7 i.l.03 i.l.04 3.5 Insertion Loss (dB) i.l.05 i.l.06 3.3 i.l.07 i.l.08 3.1 i.l.09 i.l.10 2.9 i.l.11 AM Video 2.7 Digital 2.5 +/- 0.5 dB 2.3 0 24 48 72 96 Time (h) 120 144 168 192 TP-910 Figure 4-10 Insertion Loss at 1550 nm during Controlled Operating Environment test Telcordia Technologies, Inc. Confidential -- Restricted Access See confidentiality restrictions on title page. 502-1198 Rev A 4-13 Confidential -- Restricted Access DA-1543 Issue 1, Revision 4 February 3, 2005 Tyco Electronics 3-dB SC Singlemode Fiber Optic Buildout Attenuators Performance Criteria Tyco Electronics, 3-dB Attenuators, 1625 nm., Controlled Operating Temperature i.l.01 i.l.02 3.7 i.l.03 i.l.04 3.5 Insertion Loss (dB) i.l.05 i.l.06 3.3 i.l.07 i.l.08 3.1 i.l.09 i.l.10 2.9 i.l.11 AM Video 2.7 Digital 2.5 +/- 0.5 dB 2.3 0 24 48 72 96 Time (h) 120 144 168 192 TP-910 Figure 4-11 Insertion Loss at 1625 nm during Controlled Operating Environment test Tyco Electronics, 3-dB Attenuators, Controlled Operating Temperature, Reflectance -70.0 -65.0 Reflectance (dB) -60.0 -55.0 -50.0 -45.0 -40.0 1310 nm 1550 nm Req (D) CR (A) -35.0 1490 nm 1625 nm Req (A) -30.0 i.l.01 i.l.02 i.l.03 i.l.04 i.l.05 i.l.06 Sample i.l.07 i.l.08 i.l.09 i.l.10 i.l.11 TP-910 Figure 4-12 Reflectance at 1310 nm, 1490 nm, 1550 nm and 1625 nm during Controlled Operating Environment test Telcordia Technologies, Inc. Confidential -- Restricted Access See confidentiality restrictions on title page. 4-14 502-1198 Rev A DA-1543 Issue 1, Revision 4 February 3, 2005 Confidential -- Restricted Access Tyco Electronics 3-dB SC Singlemode Fiber Optic Buildout Attenuators Performance Criteria 4.1.2 Uncontrolled Operating Environment 4.1.2.1 Criteria - Uncontrolled Operating Environment (heading not from GR-910) GR-910 CR4-3 [41] Product intended for use in an uncontrolled environment shall remain functional (operate as expected) at all temperatures from -40C (-40F) (uncontrolled humidity) to 75C (167F) (relative humidity of 90 5% noncondensing). Rationale: The conditional requirement is intended for attenuators that are designed to operate in an OSP (uncontrolled environment). 4.1.2.2 Test Method (not from GR-910) 1. Verify that the lab ambient conditions are in the range of 23 5C, and 30 to 70% relative humidity 2. Prepare/warm up and stabilize test equipment per manufacturers instructions, up to 1 hour 3. Verify that the test equipment to be used meets calibration requirements 4. Review manufacturer instructions/procedures for product under test, to assure product usage/configuration is appropriate 5. Allow product under test to stabilize at room temperature with relative humidity less than 50%, for two hours prior to initial optical power reading 6. Program thermal chamber to test cycle shown in GR-910 Figure 5-3 (and shown below in Section 4.1.2.4). 7. Perform initial optical measurements and record data 8. Subject product under test to temperature cycling with maximum temperature of 75C and minimum temperature of -40C with temperature rate of change of approximately 1C per minute, with the test beginning at the high temperature. Twenty-one cycles must be performed and the chamber shall be programmed to assure minimum one half hour dwells at the extremes of each cycle to assure thermal equilibrium. 9. Optical power measurements shall be made daily at each temperature plateau (23C, 75C and -40C) with measurements being taken no less than 30 minutes after the temperature has been reached 10. At conclusion of all cycles, allow product under test to stabilize at room conditions for at least 2 hours Telcordia Technologies, Inc. Confidential -- Restricted Access See confidentiality restrictions on title page. 502-1198 Rev A 4-15 Confidential -- Restricted Access Tyco Electronics 3-dB SC Singlemode Fiber Optic Buildout Attenuators Performance Criteria DA-1543 Issue 1, Revision 4 February 3, 2005 11. Perform final optical power readings and record data 12. Inspect product under test for any physical damage and record observations 13. Record conformance status. If non-conforming, notify supplier. Telcordia Technologies, Inc. Confidential -- Restricted Access See confidentiality restrictions on title page. 4-16 502-1198 Rev A DA-1543 Issue 1, Revision 4 February 3, 2005 Confidential -- Restricted Access Tyco Electronics 3-dB SC Singlemode Fiber Optic Buildout Attenuators Performance Criteria 4.1.2.3 Test Flowchart (not from GR-910) Verify lab ambient conditions of 23 5C and 30 to 70% RH Prepare/warm-up test equipment per manufacturers' instructions Verify test equipment calibration Verify product under test is configured per supplier's instructions Inspect physical condition of product under test Stabilize product under test at room temperature with less than 50% RH for 2 hours Clean connection points and perform initial optical measurements Program environmental chamber to perform temperature and humidity profile shown in GR-910 Figure 5-3 Place all components in environmental chamber Run chamber control program and execute (and record results of) daily optical measurements at specified temperatures Stabilize components at room temperature for 2 hours Perform final optical measurements and inspect for any physical damage Were the components undamaged and the optical measurements within specs? No Document nonconformances and address corrective actions with supplier Yes Document Results and go to next criteria section TP-910 Figure 4-13 Test Flowchart - Uncontrolled Operating Environment Test (not from GR-910) Telcordia Technologies, Inc. Confidential -- Restricted Access See confidentiality restrictions on title page. 502-1198 Rev A 4-17 Confidential -- Restricted Access DA-1543 Issue 1, Revision 4 February 3, 2005 Tyco Electronics 3-dB SC Singlemode Fiber Optic Buildout Attenuators Performance Criteria 4.1.2.4 Test Configuration and Conditions (not from GR-910) Temperature C Attenuators intended for use in an uncontrolled environment (outside plant) shall be subjected to the temperature cycling profile in TP-910 Figure 4-14 per FOTP 3A, for 21 cycles, 168 hours. The relative humidity is uncontrolled. Measurements should be taken at each temperature plateau once per day. Upon reaching a temperature measurement point the test samples should be allowed to stabilize for a one-half hour minimum before measuring attenuation and reflectance. The final measurement shall be made after the test samples have stabilized at 23C for a minimum or 2 hours. The requirements in Section 4.1.2 apply before during and after the test. 80 70 60 50 40 30 20 10 0 -10 0 -20 -30 -40 -50 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 Time - Hours TP-910 Figure 4-14 Uncontrolled Environment Temperature Profile Optical Measurements For each test, compliance against the change in attenuation criteria is determined by measuring the attenuation as described in Section 5.2.2, or by measuring the optical transmittance and calculating the attenuation per FOTP-20, during or after each test. The compliance against the reflectance criteria is determined by measuring reflectance per FOTP-107, during or after each test. Visual and mechanical inspection should follow FOTP-13. The operating and non-operating environmental criteria require monitoring during testing. This can be accomplished using a Transmission Measurement Facility shown in TP-910 Figure 4-15, or another comparable system. Telcordia Technologies, Inc. Confidential -- Restricted Access See confidentiality restrictions on title page. 4-18 502-1198 Rev A Confidential -- Restricted Access DA-1543 Issue 1, Revision 4 February 3, 2005 Tyco Electronics 3-dB SC Singlemode Fiber Optic Buildout Attenuators Performance Criteria Source TP-910 Figure 4-15 Transmission Measurement Facility In accordance with Verizon requirements, this facility is equipped to make measurements at four wavelengths, 1310 nm, 1490 nm, 1550 nm and 1625 nm, accurate to 0.05 dB for transmittance and 1 dB for reflectance down to -60 dB. While this measurement system is recommended, other configurations capable of meeting the relevant measurement requirements are acceptable. For attenuators in which the leads were connectorized by the supplier, the connectors and leads should be inside the test chamber to check for fiber pistoning. This may result in additional measurement uncertainty attributable to variations in connector loss. The measurement facility functions as follows: Switch 3 selects light from one of four laser sources emitting near 1 = 1310 nm, 2 = 1490 nm, 3 = 1550 nm or 4 = 1625 nm. The Device Under Test (DUT) is fusion spliced between the source switch (Switch 1) and the detector switch (Switch 2). The source switch is used to launch light into any of the devices under test. The detector switch connects any DUT to the power meter, measuring transmitted power and reflected power. The Coupler directs the optical power reflected by the DUT to port (r) on Switch 2 for detection. A reference fiber, located at port (m) of Switch 1 and 2, is used to correct for variations in source power over time. A reflectance reference (suggested value is -60 1 dB) is located at port (r) of Switch 1, and is used to calculate reflectance from the measured optical power. Insertion loss is calculated by subtracting the power transmitted through the reference fiber from the power transmitted through the DUT. Reflectance is calculated by subtracting the power reflected by the reflectance reference from the power reflected by the DUT. All other switch ports are dedicated to DUTs. The Switches, Power Meter and Environmental Chambers are computer controlled via GPIB interface. Laser sources are preferred over LEDs because source coherence affects both the DUT reflectance, and the loss of the switches. Fusion splices are recommended for their low loss and low reflectance. To obtain accurate reflectance measurements, all components in the measurement facility, including the power meter, splices and Telcordia Technologies, Inc. Confidential -- Restricted Access See confidentiality restrictions on title page. 502-1198 Rev A 4-19 Confidential -- Restricted Access DA-1543 Issue 1, Revision 4 February 3, 2005 Tyco Electronics 3-dB SC Singlemode Fiber Optic Buildout Attenuators Performance Criteria switches, should have a reflectance of -65 dB. The Coupler should have a directivity of 70 dB. Mode filters between the splices and DUT ensure single-mode transmission. A 2-meter length of the jumper cable will be a sufficient mode filter, provided that the cable conforms to the requirements of GR-409-CORE and there are at least two 360 loops in the 2 meter length. Refer to GR-326-CORE for additional details regarding measurement of loss and reflectance using the Transmission Measurement Facility. 4.1.2.5 Test Apparatus (not from GR-910) Description Supplier Model Calibration Cycle Calibration Due Date. Optical Multimeter Frame HP 8153A - n.a. Optical Sensor HP 81532A 12 months - Laser Source (dual wl) HP 81554SM 12 months - 90/10% Coupler - - Reflectance Standard - - Optical Switch JDS SC95B500NC n.a. Optical Switch JDS SC95B500NC n.a. Optical Switch JDS SW1-25 CS n.a. Env.Chamber Espec PLA2AP 12 months - Optical Tunable Light Source Agilent 8164A 12 months - Sensor for tunable multimeter Agilent 81640A 12 months - 4.1.2.6 Summary of Test Results (not from GR-910) Conformance/Nonconformance All of the eleven test samples conformed to the less stringent criteria in Section 4.1.2.1 of this document. Refer to the Executive Summary for details on this criteria. However, as shown in TP-910 Figure 4-19, the change in attenuation of sample i.l.06 showed borderline performance to the more stringent criteria of GR-910 CR4-22 [59] which states that for all AM video applications the maximum Telcordia Technologies, Inc. Confidential -- Restricted Access See confidentiality restrictions on title page. 4-20 502-1198 Rev A DA-1543 Issue 1, Revision 4 February 3, 2005 Confidential -- Restricted Access Tyco Electronics 3-dB SC Singlemode Fiber Optic Buildout Attenuators Performance Criteria or minimum change in attenuation before, during, or after, any or all environmental or mechanical tests shall be 0.5 dB or 0.10A, whichever is less. As shown in TP-910 Figure 4-21, the insertion loss of sample i.l.10 did not conform to, while sample i.l.07 showed borderline performance to the more stringent criteria of GR-910 CR4-24 [61] which states that for attenuators intended for use in AM video applications, the attenuation tolerance shall not exceed 0.10V. Sample i.l.10 showed a minimum insertion loss of 2.63 0.05 dB. In addition, as shown in TP-910 Figure 4-24, conformance to GR-910 CO4-32 [69] which states that the maximum reflectance for attenuators intended for use in AM-VSB systems should be -65 dB over the entire bandpass of GR-910 CR4-20 [57] and operating temperature range of -40C to +75C was not met. This is a conditional objective and it is up to the end user to determine the significance of this nonconformance issue. Conformance is based on demonstration of no physical damage to the product under test, as well as the optical criteria described in Section 4.2. Nonconforming deviations to GR-910 CO4-32 [69] were noted in testing. Sample Size Eleven samples, in accordance with 20% LTPD specified in GR-910-CORE, Issue 2, were used in the test program. In addition, eleven samples were added to serve as hot spares for replacing sample(s) with nonconformance identified in the test program. Failure History Not applicable. Disposition of Nonconformance Not applicable. Test Data The following graphs represent the entire set of samples tested. This includes a total of eleven (11) samples of buildout attenuators (BOA). TP-910 Figure 4-16 through TP-910 Figure 4-19 present change-in-attenuation measurements during the Uncontrolled Operating Environment test for all of the eleven test samples at 1310 nm, 1490 nm, 1550 nm and 1625 nm, respectively. TP-910 Figure 4-20 through TP-910 Figure 4-23 present insertion loss measurements (including connection losses of about 0.5 dB) during the Uncontrolled Operating Environment test for all of the eleven test samples at 1310 nm, 1490 nm, 1550 nm and 1625 nm, respectively. TP-910 Figure 4-24 presents the reflectance measurements during the Uncontrolled Operating Environment test for all of the eleven test samples at 1310 nm, 1490 nm, 1550 nm and 1625 nm. Telcordia Technologies, Inc. Confidential -- Restricted Access See confidentiality restrictions on title page. 502-1198 Rev A 4-21 Confidential -- Restricted Access DA-1543 Issue 1, Revision 4 February 3, 2005 Tyco Electronics 3-dB SC Singlemode Fiber Optic Buildout Attenuators Performance Criteria Tyco Electronics, 3-dB Attenuators, 1310 nm., Uncontrolled Operating Temperature 0.60 i.l.01 i.l.02 i.l.03 i.l.04 Change in Attenuation (dB) 0.40 i.l.05 i.l.06 i.l.07 0.20 i.l.08 i.l.09 i.l.10 0.00 i.l.11 AM Video -0.20 Digital -0.40 +/- 0.5 dB -0.60 0 24 48 72 96 120 144 168 Time (h) TP-910 Figure 4-16 Change in Attenuation at 1310 nm during Uncontrolled Operating Environment test Tyco Electronics, 3-dB Attenuators, 1490 nm., Uncontrolled Operating Temperature 0.60 i.l.01 i.l.02 i.l.03 i.l.04 Change in Attenuation (dB) 0.40 i.l.05 i.l.06 i.l.07 0.20 i.l.08 i.l.09 i.l.10 0.00 i.l.11 AM Video -0.20 Digital +/- 0.5 dB -0.40 -0.60 0 24 48 72 96 120 144 168 Time (h) TP-910 Figure 4-17 Change in Attenuation at 1490 nm during Uncontrolled Operating Environment test Telcordia Technologies, Inc. Confidential -- Restricted Access See confidentiality restrictions on title page. 4-22 502-1198 Rev A Confidential -- Restricted Access DA-1543 Issue 1, Revision 4 February 3, 2005 Tyco Electronics 3-dB SC Singlemode Fiber Optic Buildout Attenuators Performance Criteria Tyco Electronics, 3-dB Attenuators, 1550 nm., Uncontrolled Operating Temperature 0.60 i.l.01 i.l.02 i.l.03 i.l.04 Change in Attenuation (dB) 0.40 i.l.05 i.l.06 i.l.07 0.20 i.l.08 i.l.09 i.l.10 0.00 i.l.11 AM Video -0.20 Digital +/- 0.5 dB -0.40 -0.60 0 24 48 72 96 120 144 168 Time (h) TP-910 Figure 4-18 Change in Attenuation at 1550 nm during Uncontrolled Operating Environment test Tyco Electronics, 3-dB Attenuators, 1625 nm., Uncontrolled Operating Temperature 0.60 i.l.01 i.l.02 i.l.03 i.l.04 Change in Attenuation (dB) 0.40 i.l.05 i.l.06 i.l.07 0.20 i.l.08 i.l.09 i.l.10 0.00 i.l.11 AM Video -0.20 Digital +/- 0.5 dB -0.40 -0.60 0 24 48 72 96 120 144 168 Time (h) TP-910 Figure 4-19 Change in Attenuation at 1625 nm during Uncontrolled Operating Environment test Telcordia Technologies, Inc. Confidential -- Restricted Access See confidentiality restrictions on title page. 502-1198 Rev A 4-23 Confidential -- Restricted Access DA-1543 Issue 1, Revision 4 February 3, 2005 Tyco Electronics 3-dB SC Singlemode Fiber Optic Buildout Attenuators Performance Criteria Tyco Electronics, 3-dB Attenuators, 1310 nm., Uncontrolled Operating Temperature I nserti on Loss (dB) 3.70 i.l.01 i.l.02 3.50 i.l.03 i.l.04 3.30 i.l.05 i.l.06 i.l.07 3.10 i.l.08 i.l.09 i.l.10 2.90 i.l.11 AM Video 2.70 Digital 2.50 +/- 0.5 dB 2.30 0 24 48 72 96 120 144 168 Time (h) TP-910 Figure 4-20 Insertion Loss at 1310 nm during Uncontrolled Operating Environment test Tyco Electronics, 3-dB Attenuators, 1490 nm., Uncontrolled Operating Temperature I nserti on Loss (dB) 3.70 i.l.01 i.l.02 3.50 i.l.03 i.l.04 3.30 i.l.05 i.l.06 i.l.07 3.10 i.l.08 i.l.09 i.l.10 2.90 i.l.11 AM Video 2.70 Digital 2.50 +/- 0.5 dB 2.30 0 24 48 72 96 120 144 168 Time (h) TP-910 Figure 4-21 Insertion Loss at 1490 nm during Uncontrolled Operating Environment test Telcordia Technologies, Inc. Confidential -- Restricted Access See confidentiality restrictions on title page. 4-24 502-1198 Rev A Confidential -- Restricted Access DA-1543 Issue 1, Revision 4 February 3, 2005 Tyco Electronics 3-dB SC Singlemode Fiber Optic Buildout Attenuators Performance Criteria Tyco Electronics, 3-dB Attenuators, 1550 nm., Uncontrolled Operating Temperature I nserti on Loss (dB) 3.70 i.l.01 i.l.02 3.50 i.l.03 i.l.04 3.30 i.l.05 i.l.06 i.l.07 3.10 i.l.08 i.l.09 i.l.10 2.90 i.l.11 AM Video 2.70 Digital 2.50 +/- 0.5 dB 2.30 0 24 48 72 96 120 144 168 Time (h) TP-910 Figure 4-22 Insertion Loss at 1550 nm during Uncontrolled Operating Environment test Tyco Electronics, 3-dB Attenuators, 1625 nm., Uncontrolled Operating Temperature I nserti on Loss (dB) 3.70 i.l.01 i.l.02 3.50 i.l.03 i.l.04 3.30 i.l.05 i.l.06 i.l.07 3.10 i.l.08 i.l.09 i.l.10 2.90 i.l.11 AM Video 2.70 Digital 2.50 +/- 0.5 dB 2.30 0 24 48 72 96 120 144 168 Time (h) TP-910 Figure 4-23 Insertion Loss at 1625 nm during Uncontrolled Operating Environment test Telcordia Technologies, Inc. Confidential -- Restricted Access See confidentiality restrictions on title page. 502-1198 Rev A 4-25 Confidential -- Restricted Access DA-1543 Issue 1, Revision 4 February 3, 2005 Tyco Electronics 3-dB SC Singlemode Fiber Optic Buildout Attenuators Performance Criteria Tyco Electronics, 3-dB Attenuators, Uncontrolled Operating Temperature, Reflectance -70.0 -65.0 Reflectance (dB) -60.0 -55.0 -50.0 -45.0 -40.0 1310 nm 1550 nm Req (D) CR (A) -35.0 1490 nm 1625 nm Req (A) -30.0 i.l.01 i.l.02 i.l.03 i.l.04 i.l.05 i.l.06 Sample i.l.07 i.l.08 i.l.09 i.l.10 i.l.11 TP-910 Figure 4-24 Reflectance at 1310 nm, 1490 nm, 1550 nm and 1625 nm during Uncontrolled Operating Environment test 4.1.3 Non-Operating Environment During transportation or in storage, the product may be exposed to extremes in ambient temperature and humidity. Attenuators are not expected to deteriorate in functional performance after being exposed to periodic high and low temperature extremes and high humidity during transportation and storage. 4.1.3.1 Criteria - Non-Operating Environment (heading not from GR-910) GR-910 R4-4 [42] Attenuators shall meet the optical criteria and damage criteria described in Section 4.2. GR-910 R4-5 [43] All product shall meet the requirements for transportation and storage under Transportation and Storage Environmental Criteria in Sections 4.1.1.1 to 4.1.1.3 of GR-63-CORE. These include requirement [69], low-temperature exposure and thermal shock, [70], high-temperature exposure and thermal shock, and [71] high relative humidity exposure. NEBS requires product to remain functional (to operate as expected) after being subjected to cyclic variations in temperature and thermal shocks within a Telcordia Technologies, Inc. Confidential -- Restricted Access See confidentiality restrictions on title page. 4-26 502-1198 Rev A DA-1543 Issue 1, Revision 4 February 3, 2005 Confidential -- Restricted Access Tyco Electronics 3-dB SC Singlemode Fiber Optic Buildout Attenuators Performance Criteria temperature range of -40C to +70C (-40 to +158F) and a relative humidity of 0% to 95%. 4.1.3.2 Test Method (not from GR-910) This section presents test methods for determining whether the attenuator can withstand the temperature and humidity environments encountered during transportation and storage as specified in Section 4.1.3.1. The attenuator does not operate during these tests, but appropriate functionality measurements should be made on the attenuator before and after each test. The packaged attenuator should be used in these tests. If, for some reason, this is not possible (e.g., the packaging is not available), these tests may be conducted on the unpackaged attenuator. Note -- If the likelihood of nonconformance at a given environment is small, several tests may be performed before the operational test of the attenuator is performed. However, if nonconformance occurs, the tests will have to be repeated to determine which environments caused the nonconformance. 4.1.3.2.1 Low-Temperature Exposure and Thermal Shock 1. Make initial attenuator functionality test at ambient temperature and humidity level. (Do not operate the attenuator during the test.) 2. Repackage the attenuator, if applicable, and place it into the test chamber 3. Monitor the chamber temperature continuously during the test 4. Decrease the chamber temperature, at a rate of about 30C/ hr (54F/hr) to -40C (-40F) 5. Maintain a temperature of -40C (-40F) for 72 hrs 6. Administer the thermal shock by increasing the chamber temperature (or removing the attenuator from the chamber) from -40C (-40F) to ambient in less than 5 minutes. (Use insulated gloves when handling the packaged attenuator.) 7. Perform post-test attenuator's functionality test after the attenuator has stabilized at ambient temperature Telcordia Technologies, Inc. Confidential -- Restricted Access See confidentiality restrictions on title page. 502-1198 Rev A 4-27 Confidential -- Restricted Access Tyco Electronics 3-dB SC Singlemode Fiber Optic Buildout Attenuators Performance Criteria DA-1543 Issue 1, Revision 4 February 3, 2005 30 20 Temperature C 10 Transition, <5 Min. 0 Transition, 30C/Hr -10 -20 -30 -40C, Any RH, 72 Hours -40 74 2 Time - Hours TP-910 Figure 4-25 Low-Temperature Exposure and Thermal Shock 4.1.3.2.2 High-Temperature Exposure and Thermal Shock 1. Make initial attenuator functionality test at ambient temperature and humidity level. (Do not operate the attenuator during the test.) 2. Repackage the attenuator, if applicable, and place it into the test chamber 3. Monitor the chamber temperature continuously during the test 4. Increase the chamber temperature, at a rate of 30C/hr (54F/hr) to 70C (158F) 5. Maintain a temperature of 70C (158F) for 72 hrs 6. Administer the thermal shock by decreasing the chamber temperature (or removing the attenuator from the chamber) from 70C (158F) to ambient in less than 5 minutes. (Use insulated gloves when handling the packaged attenuator.) 7. Perform post-test attenuator's functionality test after the attenuator has been stabilized at ambient temperature Telcordia Technologies, Inc. Confidential -- Restricted Access See confidentiality restrictions on title page. 4-28 502-1198 Rev A Confidential -- Restricted Access DA-1543 Issue 1, Revision 4 February 3, 2005 Tyco Electronics 3-dB SC Singlemode Fiber Optic Buildout Attenuators Performance Criteria 70C, Any RH, 72 Hours 70 60 Temperature C 50 Transition, 30C/Hr 40 30 Transition, <5 Min. 20 10 0 2 72 74 Time - Hours TP-910 Figure 4-26 High-Temperature Exposure and Thermal Shock 4.1.3.2.3 High Relative Humidity Exposure 1. Make initial attenuator functionality test at ambient temperature and humidity level. (Do not operate the attenuator during the test.) 2. Repackage the attenuator, if applicable, and place it into the test chamber 3. Monitor the chamber temperature and RH continuously during the test 4. Increase the chamber temperature, at a rate of 30C/ hr (54F/hr) to 40C (104F) 5. While holding the chamber at 40C (104F), transition the chamber's RH to 95%. This RH shall be achieved in < 4 hrs 6. Maintain a temperature of 40C (104F) and a RH of 90% to 95% for 96 hrs 7. Transition the chamber to ambient temperature at a rate of 30C/hr (54F/hr) 8. Perform post-test attenuator's functionality test after the attenuator has stabilized at ambient temperature and humidity Telcordia Technologies, Inc. Confidential -- Restricted Access See confidentiality restrictions on title page. 502-1198 Rev A 4-29 Confidential -- Restricted Access Tyco Electronics 3-dB SC Singlemode Fiber Optic Buildout Attenuators Performance Criteria 50 DA-1543 Issue 1, Revision 4 February 3, 2005 40C, 90% - 95% RH, 96 Hours Temperature C 40 30 20 Transition, 30C/Hr 10 0 1 2 96 97 Time - Hours TP-910 Figure 4-27 High Relative Humidity Exposure Telcordia Technologies, Inc. Confidential -- Restricted Access See confidentiality restrictions on title page. 4-30 502-1198 Rev A DA-1543 Issue 1, Revision 4 February 3, 2005 Confidential -- Restricted Access Tyco Electronics 3-dB SC Singlemode Fiber Optic Buildout Attenuators Performance Criteria 4.1.3.3 Test Flowchart (not from GR-910) Verify lab ambient conditions of 23 5C and 30 to 70% RH Prepare/warm-up test equipment per manufacturers' instructions Verify test equipment calibration Verify product under test is configured per supplier's instructions Inspect physical condition of product under test Stabilize product under test at room temperature with less than 50% RH for 2 hours Clean connection points and perform initial optical measurements Program environmental chamber to perform low temp, high temp and high humidity tests in series Place all components in environmental chamber Run chamber control program and execute (and record results of) daily optical measurements at specified temperatures Stabilize components at room temperature for 2 hours Perform final optical measurements and inspect for any physical damage Were the components undamaged and the optical measurements within specs? No Document nonconformances and address corrective actions with supplier Yes Document Results and go to next criteria section TP-910 Figure 4-28 Test Flowchart - Non-Operating Environment Test (not from GR-910) Telcordia Technologies, Inc. Confidential -- Restricted Access See confidentiality restrictions on title page. 502-1198 Rev A 4-31 Confidential -- Restricted Access Tyco Electronics 3-dB SC Singlemode Fiber Optic Buildout Attenuators Performance Criteria DA-1543 Issue 1, Revision 4 February 3, 2005 4.1.3.4 Test Configuration and Conditions (not from GR-910) 4.1.3.4.1 Low-Temperature Exposure and Thermal Shock 30 20 Temperature C 10 Transition, <5 Min. 0 Transition, 30C/Hr -10 -20 -30 -40C, Any RH, 72 Hours -40 74 2 Time - Hours TP-910 Figure 4-29 Low-Temperature Exposure and Thermal Shock Telcordia Technologies, Inc. Confidential -- Restricted Access See confidentiality restrictions on title page. 4-32 502-1198 Rev A Confidential -- Restricted Access DA-1543 Issue 1, Revision 4 February 3, 2005 Tyco Electronics 3-dB SC Singlemode Fiber Optic Buildout Attenuators Performance Criteria 4.1.3.4.2 High-Temperature Exposure and Thermal Shock 70C, Any RH, 72 Hours 70 60 Temperature C 50 Transition, 30C/Hr 40 30 Transition, <5 Min. 20 10 0 2 72 74 Time - Hours TP-910 Figure 4-30 High-Temperature Exposure and Thermal Shock Telcordia Technologies, Inc. Confidential -- Restricted Access See confidentiality restrictions on title page. 502-1198 Rev A 4-33 Confidential -- Restricted Access DA-1543 Issue 1, Revision 4 February 3, 2005 Tyco Electronics 3-dB SC Singlemode Fiber Optic Buildout Attenuators Performance Criteria 4.1.3.4.3 High Relative Humidity Exposure 50 40C, 90% - 95% RH, 96 Hours Temperature C 40 30 20 Transition, 30C/Hr 10 0 1 2 96 97 Time - Hours TP-910 Figure 4-31 High Relative Humidity Exposure Optical Measurements For each test, compliance against the change in attenuation criteria is determined by measuring the attenuation as described in Section 5.2.2, or measure the optical transmittance and calculate the attenuation per FOTP-20, during or after each test. The compliance against the reflectance criteria is determined by measuring reflectance per FOTP-107, during or after each test. Visual and mechanical inspection should follow FOTP-13. The operating and non-operating environmental criteria require monitoring during testing. This can be accomplished using a Transmission Measurement Facility shown in TP-910 Figure 4-32, or another comparable system. Telcordia Technologies, Inc. Confidential -- Restricted Access See confidentiality restrictions on title page. 4-34 502-1198 Rev A Confidential -- Restricted Access DA-1543 Issue 1, Revision 4 February 3, 2005 Tyco Electronics 3-dB SC Singlemode Fiber Optic Buildout Attenuators Performance Criteria Source TP-910 Figure 4-32 Transmission Measurement Facility In accordance with Verizon requirements, this facility is equipped to make measurements at four wavelengths, 1310 nm, 1490 nm, 1550 nm and 1625 nm, accurate to 0.05 dB for transmittance and 1 dB for reflectance down to -60 dB. While this measurement system is recommended, other configurations capable of meeting the relevant measurement requirements are acceptable. For attenuators in which the leads were connectorized by the supplier, the connectors and leads should be inside the test chamber to check for fiber pistoning. This may result in additional measurement uncertainty attributable to variations in connector loss. The measurement facility functions as follows: Switch 3 selects light from one of four laser sources emitting near 1 = 1310 nm, 2 = 1490 nm, 3 = 1550 nm or 4 = 1625 nm. The Device Under Test (DUT) is fusion spliced between the source switch (Switch 1) and the detector switch (Switch 2). The source switch is used to launch light into any of the devices under test. The detector switch connects any DUT to the power meter, measuring transmitted power and reflected power. The Coupler directs the optical power reflected by the DUT to port (r) on Switch 2 for detection. A reference fiber, located at port (m) of Switch 1 and 2, is used to correct for variations in source power over time. A reflectance reference (suggested value is -60 1 dB) is located at port (r) of Switch 1, and is used to calculate reflectance from the measured optical power. Insertion loss is calculated by subtracting the power transmitted through the reference fiber from the power transmitted through the DUT. Reflectance is calculated by subtracting the power reflected by the reflectance reference from the power reflected by the DUT. All other switch ports are dedicated to DUTs. The Switches, Power Meter and Environmental Chambers are computer controlled via GPIB interface. Laser sources are preferred over LEDs because source coherence affects both the DUT reflectance, and the loss of the switches. Fusion splices are recommended for their low loss and low reflectance. To obtain accurate reflectance measurements, all components in the measurement facility, including the power meter, splices and Telcordia Technologies, Inc. Confidential -- Restricted Access See confidentiality restrictions on title page. 502-1198 Rev A 4-35 Confidential -- Restricted Access DA-1543 Issue 1, Revision 4 February 3, 2005 Tyco Electronics 3-dB SC Singlemode Fiber Optic Buildout Attenuators Performance Criteria switches, should have a reflectance of -65 dB. The Coupler should have a directivity of 70 dB. Mode filters between the splices and DUT ensure single-mode transmission. A 2-meter length of the jumper cable will be a sufficient mode filter, provided that the cable conforms to the requirements of GR-409-CORE and there are at least two 360 loops in the 2 meter length. Refer to GR-326-CORE for additional details regarding measurement of loss and reflectance using the Transmission Measurement Facility. 4.1.3.5 Test Apparatus (not from GR-910) Description Supplier Model Calibration Cycle Calibration Due Date. Optical Multimeter Frame HP 8153A - n.a. Optical Sensor HP 81532A 12 months - Laser Source (dual wl) HP 81554SM 12 months - 90/10% Coupler - - Reflectance Standard - - Optical Switch JDS SC95B500NC n.a. Optical Switch JDS SC95B500NC n.a. Optical Switch JDS SW1-25 CS n.a. Env.Chamber Espec PLA2AP 12 months - Optical Tunable Light Source Agilent 8164A 12 months - Sensor for tunable multimeter Agilent 81640A 12 months - 4.1.3.6 Summary of Test Results (not from GR-910) Conformance/Nonconformance All of the eleven test samples conformed to the less stringent criteria in Section 4.1.3.1 of this document. Refer to the Executive Summary for details on this criteria. However, as shown in TP-910 Figure 4-34, the insertion loss of samples i.l.06, i.l.07 and i.l.10 showed borderline performance to the more stringent criteria of GR-910 CR4-24 [61] which states that for attenuators intended for use in AM video applications, the attenuation tolerance shall not exceed 0.10V. Telcordia Technologies, Inc. Confidential -- Restricted Access See confidentiality restrictions on title page. 4-36 502-1198 Rev A DA-1543 Issue 1, Revision 4 February 3, 2005 Confidential -- Restricted Access Tyco Electronics 3-dB SC Singlemode Fiber Optic Buildout Attenuators Performance Criteria In addition, as shown in TP-910 Figure 4-35, sample i.l.03 at the 1625 nm wavelength showed borderline performance to GR-910 CR4-31 [68] which states that the maximum reflectance for attenuators intended for use in AM-VSB systems shall be -55 dB over the entire bandpass of GR-910 CR4-20 [57] and operating temperature range of -40C to +75C. Furthermore, as shown in TP-910 Figure 4-35, conformance to GR-910 CO4-32 [69] which states that the maximum reflectance for attenuators intended for use in AM-VSB systems should be -65 dB over the entire bandpass of GR-910 CR4-20 [57] and operating temperature range of -40C to +75C was not met. This is a conditional objective and it is up to the end user to determine the significance of this nonconformance issue. Conformance is based on demonstration of no physical damage to the product under test, as well as the optical criteria described in Section 4.2. Nonconforming deviations to GR-910 CO4-32 [69] were noted in testing. Sample Size Eleven samples, in accordance with 20% LTPD specified in GR-910-CORE, Issue 2, were used in the test program. In addition, eleven samples were added to serve as hot spares for replacing sample(s) with nonconformance identified in the test program. Failure History Not applicable. Disposition of Nonconformance Not applicable. Test Data The following charts represent the entire set of samples tested. This includes a total of eleven (11) samples of buildout attenuators (BOA). TP-910 Figure 4-33 presents change-in-attenuation measurements for each wavelength after the Low Temperature Exposure and Thermal Shock test for all of the eleven test samples at 1310 nm, 1490 nm, 1550 nm and 1625 nm. TP-910 Figure 4-34 presents insertion loss measurements (including connection losses of about 0.5 dB) for each wavelength after the Low Temperature Exposure and Thermal Shock test for all of the eleven test samples at 1310 nm, 1490 nm, 1550 nm and 1625 nm. TP-910 Figure 4-35 presents the reflectance measurements after the Low Temperature Exposure test for all of the eleven test samples at 1310 nm, 1490 nm, 1550 nm and 1625 nm. Telcordia Technologies, Inc. Confidential -- Restricted Access See confidentiality restrictions on title page. 502-1198 Rev A 4-37 Confidential -- Restricted Access DA-1543 Issue 1, Revision 4 February 3, 2005 Tyco Electronics 3-dB SC Singlemode Fiber Optic Buildout Attenuators Performance Criteria Tyco Electronics, 3-dB Attenuators, Non-Operating Environment, Low Temperature Exposure Test 0.6 Change in Attenuation (dB) 0.4 1310 nm 1490 nm 1550 nm 0.2 0 1625 nm .0 li 1 .0 li 2 .0 li 3 .0 li 4 .0 li 5 .0 li 6 .0 li 7 .0 li 8 .0 li 9 .1 li 0 .1 li 1 AM Video -0.2 Digital +/- 0.5 dB -0.4 -0.6 i.l.01 i.l.02 i.l.03 i.l.04 i.l.05 i.l.06 i.l.07 i.l.08 i.l.09 i.l.10 i.l.11 Sample # TP-910 Figure 4-33 Change in Attenuation at 1310 nm, 1490 nm, 1550 nm and 1625 nm after Low Temperature Exposure and Thermal Shock test 3.70 Tyco Electronics, 3-dB Attenuators, Non-Operating Environment, Low Temperature Exposure Test 1310 nm 3.50 1490 nm Insertion Loss (dB) 1550 nm 3.30 1625 nm 3.10 AM Video 2.90 Digital 2.70 +/- 0.5 dB 2.50 2.30 i.l.01 i.l.02 i.l.03 i.l.04 i.l.05 i.l.06 i.l.07 Sample # i.l.08 i.l.09 i.l.10 i.l.11 TP-910 Figure 4-34 Insertion Loss at 1310 nm, 1490 nm, 1550 nm and 1625 nm after Low Temperature Exposure and Thermal Shock test Telcordia Technologies, Inc. Confidential -- Restricted Access See confidentiality restrictions on title page. 4-38 502-1198 Rev A Confidential -- Restricted Access DA-1543 Issue 1, Revision 4 February 3, 2005 Tyco Electronics 3-dB SC Singlemode Fiber Optic Buildout Attenuators Performance Criteria Tyco Electronics, 3-dB Attenuators, Non-Operating Environment, Low Temperature Exposure Test, Reflectance -70.0 -65.0 Reflectance (dB) -60.0 -55.0 -50.0 -45.0 -40.0 1310 nm 1550 nm Req (D) CR (A) -35.0 1490 nm 1625 nm Req (A) -30.0 i.l.01 i.l.02 i.l.03 i.l.04 i.l.05 i.l.06 Sample i.l.07 i.l.08 i.l.09 i.l.10 i.l.11 TP-910 Figure 4-35 Reflectance at 1310 nm, 1490 nm, 1550 nm and 1625 nm after Low Temperature Exposure and Thermal Shock test Conformance/Nonconformance All of the eleven test samples conformed to the less stringent criteria in Section 4.1.3.1 of this document. Refer to the Executive Summary for details on this criteria. However, as shown in TP-910 Figure 4-37, the insertion loss of samples i.l.07 and i.l.10 at the 1490 nm wavelength showed borderline performance to the more stringent criteria of GR-910 CR4-24 [61] which states that for attenuators intended for use in AM video applications, the attenuation tolerance shall not exceed 0.10V. Furthermore, as shown in TP-910 Figure 4-38, conformance to GR-910 CO4-32 [69] which states that the maximum reflectance for attenuators intended for use in AM-VSB systems should be -65 dB over the entire bandpass of GR-910 CR4-20 [57] and operating temperature range of -40C to +75C was not met. This is a conditional objective and it is up to the end user to determine the significance of this nonconformance issue. Conformance is based on demonstration of no physical damage to the product under test, as well as the optical criteria described in Section 4.2. Nonconforming deviations to GR-910 CO4-32 [69] were noted in testing. Sample Size Telcordia Technologies, Inc. Confidential -- Restricted Access See confidentiality restrictions on title page. 502-1198 Rev A 4-39 Confidential -- Restricted Access DA-1543 Issue 1, Revision 4 February 3, 2005 Tyco Electronics 3-dB SC Singlemode Fiber Optic Buildout Attenuators Performance Criteria Eleven samples, in accordance with 20% LTPD specified in GR-910-CORE, Issue 2, were used in the test program. In addition, eleven samples were added to serve as hot spares for replacing sample(s) with nonconformance identified in the test program. Failure History Not applicable. Disposition of Nonconformance Not applicable. Test Data The following charts represent the entire set of samples tested. This includes a total of eleven (11) samples of buildout attenuators (BOA). TP-910 Figure 4-36 presents change-in-attenuation measurements for each wavelength after the High Temperature Exposure and Thermal Shock test for all of the eleven test samples at 1310 nm, 1490 nm, 1550 nm and 1625 nm. TP-910 Figure 4-37 presents insertion loss measurements (including connection losses of about 0.5 dB) for each wavelength after the High Temperature Exposure and Thermal Shock test for all of the eleven test samples at 1310 nm, 1490 nm, 1550 nm and 1625 nm. TP-910 Figure 4-38 presents the reflectance measurements after the High Temperature Exposure test for all of the eleven test samples at 1310 nm, 1490 nm, 1550 nm and 1625 nm. 0.60 Tyco Electronics, 3-dB Attenuators, Non-Operating Environment, High Temperature Exposure Test 1310 nm Change in Attenuation (dB) 0.40 1490 nm 1550 nm 1625 nm 0.20 0.00 .0 li 1 .0 li 2 .0 li 3 .0 li 4 .0 li 5 .0 li 6 .0 li 7 .0 li 8 .0 li 9 .1 li 0 .1 li 1 AM Video -0.20 Digital -0.40 -0.60 +/- 0.5 dB i.l.01 i.l.02 i.l.03 i.l.04 i.l.05 i.l.06 i.l.07 i.l.08 i.l.09 i.l.10 i.l.11 Sample # TP-910 Figure 4-36 Change in Attenuation at 1310 nm, 1490 nm, 1550 nm and 1625 nm after High Temperature Exposure and Thermal Shock test Telcordia Technologies, Inc. Confidential -- Restricted Access See confidentiality restrictions on title page. 4-40 502-1198 Rev A Confidential -- Restricted Access DA-1543 Issue 1, Revision 4 February 3, 2005 3.70 Tyco Electronics 3-dB SC Singlemode Fiber Optic Buildout Attenuators Performance Criteria Tyco Electronics, 3-dB Attenuators, Non-Operating Environment, High Temperature Exposure Test 1310 nm Insertion Loss (dB) 3.50 1490 nm 1550 nm 3.30 1625 nm 3.10 AM Video 2.90 Digital 2.70 +/- 0.5 dB 2.50 2.30 i.l.01 i.l.02 i.l.03 i.l.04 i.l.05 i.l.06 i.l.07 Sample # i.l.08 i.l.09 i.l.10 i.l.11 TP-910 Figure 4-37 Insertion Loss at 1310 nm, 1490 nm, 1550 nm and 1625 nm after High Temperature Exposure and Thermal Shock test Tyco Electronics, 3-dB Attenuators, Non-Operating Environment, High Temperature Exposure Test, Reflectance -70.0 -65.0 Reflectance (dB) -60.0 -55.0 -50.0 -45.0 -40.0 1310 nm 1550 nm Req (D) CR (A) -35.0 1490 nm 1625 nm Req (A) -30.0 i.l.01 i.l.02 i.l.03 i.l.04 i.l.05 i.l.06 Sample i.l.07 i.l.08 i.l.09 i.l.10 i.l.11 TP-910 Figure 4-38 Reflectance at 1310 nm, 1490 nm, 1550 nm and 1625 nm after High Temperature Exposure and Thermal Shock test Telcordia Technologies, Inc. Confidential -- Restricted Access See confidentiality restrictions on title page. 502-1198 Rev A 4-41 Confidential -- Restricted Access Tyco Electronics 3-dB SC Singlemode Fiber Optic Buildout Attenuators Performance Criteria DA-1543 Issue 1, Revision 4 February 3, 2005 Conformance/Nonconformance All of the eleven test samples conformed to the less stringent criteria in Section 4.1.3.1 of this document. Refer to the Executive Summary for details on this criteria. However, as shown in TP-910 Figure 4-40, the insertion loss of sample i.l.07 at the 1490 nm wavelength did not conform to, while i.l.06 at the 1490 nm wavelength and i.l.10 at the 1490 nm wavelength showed borderline performance to the more stringent criteria of GR-910 CR4-24 [61] which states that for attenuators intended for use in AM video applications, the attenuation tolerance shall not exceed 0.10V. Sample i.l.07 showed a minimum insertion loss of 2.59 0.05 dB at the 1490 nm wavelength. In addition, as shown in TP-910 Figure 4-41, sample i.l.03 at the 1625 nm wavelength showed borderline performance to GR-910 CR4-31 [68] which states that the maximum reflectance for attenuators intended for use in AM-VSB systems shall be -55 dB over the entire bandpass of GR-910 CR4-20 [57] and operating temperature range of -40C to +75C. Furthermore, as shown in TP-910 Figure 4-41, conformance to GR-910 CO4-32 [69] which states that the maximum reflectance for attenuators intended for use in AM-VSB systems should be -65 dB over the entire bandpass of GR-910 CR4-20 [57] and operating temperature range of -40C to +75C was not met. This is a conditional objective and it is up to the end user to determine the significance of this nonconformance issue. Conformance is based on demonstration of no physical damage to the product under test, as well as the optical criteria described in Section 4.2. Nonconforming deviations to GR-910 CO4-32 [69] were noted in testing. Sample Size Eleven samples, in accordance with 20% LTPD specified in GR-910-CORE, Issue 2, were used in the test program. In addition, eleven samples were added to serve as hot spares for replacing sample(s) with nonconformance identified in the test program. Failure History Not applicable. Disposition of Nonconformance Not applicable. Test Data The following charts represent the entire set of samples tested. This includes a total of eleven (11) samples of buildout attenuators (BOA). TP-910 Figure 4-39 presents change-in-attenuation measurements for each wavelength after the High Relative Telcordia Technologies, Inc. Confidential -- Restricted Access See confidentiality restrictions on title page. 4-42 502-1198 Rev A Confidential -- Restricted Access DA-1543 Issue 1, Revision 4 February 3, 2005 Tyco Electronics 3-dB SC Singlemode Fiber Optic Buildout Attenuators Performance Criteria Humidity test for all of the eleven test samples at 1310 nm, 1490 nm, 1550 nm and 1625 nm. TP-910 Figure 4-40 presents insertion loss measurements (including connection losses of about 0.5 dB) for each wavelength after the High Relative Humidity test for all of the eleven test samples at 1310 nm, 1490 nm, 1550 nm and 1625 nm. TP-910 Figure 4-41 presents the reflectance measurements after the High Relative Humidity Exposure test for all of the eleven test samples at 1310 nm, 1490 nm, 1550 nm and 1625 nm. Tyco Electronics, 3-dB Attenuators, Non-Operating Environment, High Relative Humidity Exposure Test 0.60 0.40 Change in Attenuation (dB) 1310 nm 1490 nm 1550 nm 0.20 1625 nm 0.00 .0 li 1 .0 li 2 .0 li 3 .0 li 4 .0 li 5 .0 li 6 .0 li 7 .0 li 8 .0 li 9 .1 li 0 .1 li 1 AM Video -0.20 Digital +/- 0.5 dB -0.40 -0.60 i.l.01 i.l.02 i.l.03 i.l.04 i.l.05 i.l.06 i.l.07 i.l.08 i.l.09 i.l.10 i.l.11 Sample # TP-910 Figure 4-39 Change in Attenuation at 1310 nm, 1490 nm, 1550 nm and 1625 nm after High Relative Humidity Exposure test Telcordia Technologies, Inc. Confidential -- Restricted Access See confidentiality restrictions on title page. 502-1198 Rev A 4-43 Confidential -- Restricted Access DA-1543 Issue 1, Revision 4 February 3, 2005 Tyco Electronics 3-dB SC Singlemode Fiber Optic Buildout Attenuators Performance Criteria 3.70 Tyco Electronics, 3-dB Attenuators, Non-Operating Environment, High Relative Humidity Exposure Test 1310 nm 3.50 1490 nm Insertion Loss (dB) 1550 nm 3.30 1625 nm 3.10 AM Video 2.90 Digital 2.70 +/- 0.5 dB 2.50 2.30 i.l.01 i.l.02 i.l.03 i.l.04 i.l.05 i.l.06 i.l.07 Sample # i.l.08 i.l.09 i.l.10 i.l.11 TP-910 Figure 4-40 Insertion Loss at 1310 nm, 1490 nm, 1550 nm and 1625 nm after High Relative Humidity Exposure test Tyco Electronics, 3-dB Attenuators, Non-Operating Environment, High Relative Humidity Exposure Test, Reflectance -70.0 -65.0 Reflectance (dB) -60.0 -55.0 -50.0 -45.0 -40.0 1310 nm 1550 nm Req (D) CR (A) -35.0 1490 nm 1625 nm Req (A) -30.0 i.l.01 i.l.02 i.l.03 i.l.04 i.l.05 i.l.06 Sample i.l.07 i.l.08 i.l.09 i.l.10 i.l.11 TP-910 Figure 4-41 Reflectance at 1310 nm, 1490 nm, 1550 nm and 1625 nm after High Relative Humidity Exposure test Telcordia Technologies, Inc. Confidential -- Restricted Access See confidentiality restrictions on title page. 4-44 502-1198 Rev A DA-1543 Issue 1, Revision 4 February 3, 2005 Confidential -- Restricted Access Tyco Electronics 3-dB SC Singlemode Fiber Optic Buildout Attenuators Performance Criteria 4.1.4 Humidity/Condensation Cycling Test 4.1.4.1 Criteria - Humidity/Condensation Cycling (heading not from GR-910) GR-910 R4-6 [78] Attenuators shall meet the optical criteria and damage criteria described in Section 4.2. Attenuator test samples are to be subjected to the Humidity/Condensation Cycling Test according to FOTP-3, per the modified temperature profile shown in Section 5.1.4. The maximum and minimum temperatures are -10C to +65C at 90% to 100% relative humidity at the temperatures indicated for 168 hours, (7 days). 4.1.4.2 Test Method (not from GR-910) 1. Verify that the lab ambient conditions are in the range of 23 5C, and 30 to 70% relative humidity 2. Warm up/prepare and stabilize test equipment per manufacturers instructions, up to 1 hour 3. Verify that the test equipment to be used meets calibration requirements 4. Review manufacturer instructions/procedures for product under test, to assure product usage/configuration is appropriate 5. Allow product under test to stabilize at room temperature with relative humidity less than 50%, for two hours prior to initial optical power reading 6. Program thermal chamber to test cycle per FOTP-3 7. Perform initial optical power reading and record data 8. Subject product under test to temperature cycling per FOTP-3 with maximum temperature of 65C and minimum temperature of -10C with temperature rate of change of approximately 1C per minute. 14 cycles must be performed and the chamber shall be programmed to assure minimum 30 minute dwells at the extremes of each cycle to assure thermal equilibrium. 9. At conclusion of ten cycles, allow product under test to stabilize at room conditions for at least 2 hours 10. Perform final optical power readings and record data 11. Inspect product under test for any physical damage and record observations 12. Record conformance status. If non-conforming, notify supplier. Telcordia Technologies, Inc. Confidential -- Restricted Access See confidentiality restrictions on title page. 502-1198 Rev A 4-45 Confidential -- Restricted Access DA-1543 Issue 1, Revision 4 February 3, 2005 Tyco Electronics 3-dB SC Singlemode Fiber Optic Buildout Attenuators Performance Criteria 4.1.4.3 Test Flowchart (not from GR-910) Verify lab ambients of 23C +/-5 and 3070%RH Prepare/Warm-up test equipment per manufacturers instructions Stabilize product under test at room temp with less than 50% RH for 2 hours Clean connection points and perform initial optical measurements Verify test equipment calibration Verify chamber settings Verify product under test configured per manufacturer instructions Inspect product under test physical condition Place components in Place all components chamber and execute in chamber and test with 14 of execute testcycles with 10 cycles of +70C to -40 +65C to -10C at C at 1C/minchange change 1C/min Stabilize components at room temp for 2 hours Perform final optical measurements and inspect for any physical damage No Mechanical Damage and optical readings in spec? No Record findings and follow nonconforming process Yes Record findings and complete report section Test Complete TP-910 Figure 4-42 Test Flowchart - Humidity/Condensation Cycling Test (not from GR-910) Telcordia Technologies, Inc. Confidential -- Restricted Access See confidentiality restrictions on title page. 4-46 502-1198 Rev A Confidential -- Restricted Access DA-1543 Issue 1, Revision 4 February 3, 2005 Tyco Electronics 3-dB SC Singlemode Fiber Optic Buildout Attenuators Performance Criteria 4.1.4.4 Test Configuration and Conditions (not from GR-910) Attenuators are subjected to a temperature cycle as described in FOTP-3 with a maximum temperature of 65 2C (149 4F) and a minimum temperature of -10 2C (14 4F). The rate of temperature change is approximately 1C per minute and dwell times at the extremes should be 30 minutes. Thermal equilibrium must be reached at the extreme temperatures. Test samples shall be subjected to 14 cycles of testing. The temperature cycle is to initiate at an ambient temperature of 23 5C with a relative humidity of 30 to 70%. Within the first interval, the temperature is to decrease to -10 2C and then be held for two intervals. During the fourth interval, the temperature is to increase to a maximum level of 65 2C with a relative humidity 90% and be held constant for two intervals. During the seventh interval, the temperature is to decrease to a minimum level of -10 2C and then be held for two intervals. During the tenth interval, the temperature is to increase back to the initial ambient temperature of 23 5C with a relative humidity 90% and be held for two intervals. Optical Measurements For each test, compliance against the change in attenuation criteria is determined by measuring the attenuation as described in Section 5.2.2, or measure the optical transmittance and calculate the attenuation per FOTP-20, during or after each test. The compliance against the reflectance criteria is determined by measuring reflectance per FOTP-107, during or after each test. Visual and mechanical inspection should follow FOTP-13. The operating and non-operating environmental criteria require monitoring during testing. This can be accomplished using a Transmission Measurement Facility shown in TP-910 Figure 4-43, or another comparable system. Source TP-910 Figure 4-43 Transmission Measurement Facility Telcordia Technologies, Inc. Confidential -- Restricted Access See confidentiality restrictions on title page. 502-1198 Rev A 4-47 Confidential -- Restricted Access DA-1543 Issue 1, Revision 4 February 3, 2005 Tyco Electronics 3-dB SC Singlemode Fiber Optic Buildout Attenuators Performance Criteria In accordance with Verizon requirements, this facility is equipped to make measurements at four wavelengths, 1310 nm, 1490 nm, 1550 nm and 1625 nm, accurate to 0.05 dB for transmittance and 1 dB for reflectance down to -60 dB. While this measurement system is recommended, other configurations capable of meeting the relevant measurement requirements are acceptable. For attenuators in which the leads were connectorized by the supplier, the connectors and leads should be inside the test chamber to check for fiber pistoning. This may result in additional measurement uncertainty attributable to variations in connector loss. The measurement facility functions as follows: Switch 3 selects light from one of four laser sources emitting near 1 = 1310 nm, 2 = 1490 nm, 3 = 1550 nm or 4 = 1625 nm. The Device Under Test (DUT) is fusion spliced between the source switch (Switch 1) and the detector switch (Switch 2). The source switch is used to launch light into any of the devices under test. The detector switch connects any DUT to the power meter, measuring transmitted power and reflected power. The Coupler directs the optical power reflected by the DUT to port (r) on Switch 2 for detection. A reference fiber, located at port (m) of Switch 1 and 2, is used to correct for variations in source power over time. A reflectance reference (suggested value is -60 1 dB) is located at port (r) of Switch 1, and is used to calculate reflectance from the measured optical power. Insertion loss is calculated by subtracting the power transmitted through the reference fiber from the power transmitted through the DUT. Reflectance is calculated by subtracting the power reflected by the reflectance reference from the power reflected by the DUT. All other switch ports are dedicated to DUTs. The Switches, Power Meter and Environmental Chambers are computer controlled via GPIB interface. Laser sources are preferred over LEDs because source coherence affects both the DUT reflectance, and the loss of the switches. Fusion splices are recommended for their low loss and low reflectance. To obtain accurate reflectance measurements, all components in the measurement facility, including the power meter, splices and switches, should have a reflectance of -65 dB. The Coupler should have a directivity of 70 dB. Mode filters between the splices and DUT ensure single-mode transmission. A 2-meter length of the jumper cable will be a sufficient mode filter, provided that the cable conforms to the requirements of GR-409-CORE and there are at least two 360 loops in the 2 meter length. Refer to GR-326-CORE for additional details regarding measurement of loss and reflectance using the Transmission Measurement Facility. 4.1.4.5 Test Apparatus (not from GR-910) Description Supplier Model Calibration Cycle Calibration Due Date. Optical Multimeter Frame HP 8153A - n.a. Optical Sensor HP 81532A 12 months - Telcordia Technologies, Inc. Confidential -- Restricted Access See confidentiality restrictions on title page. 4-48 502-1198 Rev A DA-1543 Issue 1, Revision 4 February 3, 2005 Confidential -- Restricted Access Tyco Electronics 3-dB SC Singlemode Fiber Optic Buildout Attenuators Performance Criteria Description Supplier Model Calibration Cycle Calibration Due Date. Laser Source (dual wl) HP 81554SM 12 months - 90/10% Coupler - - Reflectance Standard - - Optical Switch JDS SC95B500NC n.a. Optical Switch JDS SC95B500NC n.a. Optical Switch JDS SW1-25 CS n.a. Env.Chamber Espec PLA2AP 12 months - Optical Tunable Light Source Agilent 8164A 12 months - Sensor for tunable multimeter Agilent 81640A 12 months - 4.1.4.6 Summary of Test Results (not from GR-910) Conformance/Nonconformance All of the eleven test samples conformed to the less stringent criteria in Section 4.1.4.1 of this document. Refer to the Executive Summary for details on this criteria. However, as shown in TP-910 Figure 4-49, the insertion loss of samples i.l.04 and i.l.07 did not conform to, while samples i.l.03, i.l.06 and i.l.10 showed borderline performance to the more stringent criteria of GR-910 CR4-24 [61] which states that for attenuators intended for use in AM video applications, the attenuation tolerance shall not exceed 0.10V. Sample i.l.04 showed a minimum insertion loss of 2.64 0.05 dB. Sample i.l.07 showed a minimum insertion loss of 2.57 0.05 dB. As shown in TP-910 Figure 4-51, the insertion loss of samples i.l.08 and i.l.10 showed borderline performance to the more stringent criteria of GR-910 CR4-24 [61] which states that for attenuators intended for use in AM video applications, the attenuation tolerance shall not exceed 0.10V. In addition, as shown in TP-910 Figure 4-52, sample i.l.03 at the 1625 nm wavelength showed borderline performance to GR-910 CR4-31 [68] which states that the maximum reflectance for attenuators intended for use in AM-VSB systems shall be -55 dB over the entire bandpass of GR-910 CR4-20 [57] and operating temperature range of -40C to +75C. Furthermore, as shown in TP-910 Figure 4-52, conformance to GR-910 CO4-32 [69] which states that the maximum reflectance for attenuators intended for use in AM-VSB systems should be -65 dB over the entire bandpass of Telcordia Technologies, Inc. Confidential -- Restricted Access See confidentiality restrictions on title page. 502-1198 Rev A 4-49 Confidential -- Restricted Access Tyco Electronics 3-dB SC Singlemode Fiber Optic Buildout Attenuators Performance Criteria DA-1543 Issue 1, Revision 4 February 3, 2005 GR-910 CR4-20 [57] and operating temperature range of -40C to +75C was not met. This is a conditional objective and it is up to the end user to determine the significance of this nonconformance issue. Conformance is based on demonstration of no physical damage to the product under test, as well as the optical criteria described in Section 4.2. Nonconforming deviations to GR-910 CO4-32 [69] were noted in testing. Sample Size Eleven samples, in accordance with 20% LTPD specified in GR-910-CORE, Issue 2, were used in the test program. In addition, eleven samples were added to serve as hot spares for replacing sample(s)) with nonconformance identified in the test program. Failure History Not applicable. Disposition of Nonconformance Not applicable. Test Data The following graphs represent the entire set of samples tested. This includes a total of eleven (11) samples of buildout attenuators (BOA). TP-910 Figure 4-44 through TP-910 Figure 4-47 present change-in-attenuation measurements during the Humidity/Condensation Cycling test for all of the eleven test samples at 1310 nm, 1490 nm, 1550 nm and 1625 nm, respectively. TP-910 Figure 4-48 through TP-910 Figure 4-51 present insertion loss measurements (including connection losses of about 0.5 dB) during the Humidity/Condensation Cycling test for all of the eleven test samples at 1310 nm, 1490 nm, 1550 nm and 1625 nm, respectively. TP-910 Figure 4-52 presents the reflectance measurements during the Humidity/ Condensation Cycling test for all of the eleven test samples at 1310 nm, 1490 nm, 1550 nm and 1625 nm. It must be noted that TP-910 Figure 4-47 and TP-910 Figure 4-51 show a loss of data between 50.33 hours and 55.00 hours. This loss of data was due to a malfunction of the 1625 nm wavelength laser source used during the Humidity/Condensation Cycling test. The malfunction was discovered and corrected within a five hour period as the test continued. Telcordia Technologies, Inc. Confidential -- Restricted Access See confidentiality restrictions on title page. 4-50 502-1198 Rev A Confidential -- Restricted Access DA-1543 Issue 1, Revision 4 February 3, 2005 Tyco Electronics 3-dB SC Singlemode Fiber Optic Buildout Attenuators Performance Criteria Tyco Electronics, 3-dB Attenuators, 1310 nm., Humidity/Condensation Cycling i.l.01 0.65 i.l.02 i.l.03 Change in Attenuation (dB) 0.45 i.l.04 i.l.05 i.l.06 0.25 i.l.07 i.l.08 0.05 i.l.09 i.l.10 -0.15 i.l.11 AM Video -0.35 Digital -0.55 +/- 0.5 dB -0.75 0 24 48 72 96 120 144 168 Time (h) TP-910 Figure 4-44 Change in Attenuation at 1310 nm during Humidity/ Condensation Cycling test Tyco Electronics, 3-dB Attenuators, 1490 nm., Humidity/Condensation Cycling i.l.01 0.65 i.l.02 i.l.03 Change in Attenuation (dB) 0.45 i.l.04 i.l.05 i.l.06 0.25 i.l.07 i.l.08 0.05 i.l.09 i.l.10 -0.15 i.l.11 AM Video -0.35 Digital -0.55 +/- 0.5 dB -0.75 0 24 48 72 96 120 144 168 Time (h) TP-910 Figure 4-45 Change in Attenuation at 1490 nm during Humidity/ Condensation Cycling test Telcordia Technologies, Inc. Confidential -- Restricted Access See confidentiality restrictions on title page. 502-1198 Rev A 4-51 Confidential -- Restricted Access DA-1543 Issue 1, Revision 4 February 3, 2005 Tyco Electronics 3-dB SC Singlemode Fiber Optic Buildout Attenuators Performance Criteria Tyco Electronics, 3-dB Attenuators, 1550 nm., Humidity/Condensation Cycling i.l.01 0.65 i.l.02 i.l.03 Change in Attenuation (dB) 0.45 i.l.04 i.l.05 i.l.06 0.25 i.l.07 i.l.08 0.05 i.l.09 i.l.10 -0.15 i.l.11 AM Video -0.35 Digital -0.55 +/- 0.5 dB -0.75 0 24 48 72 96 120 144 168 Time (h) TP-910 Figure 4-46 Change in Attenuation at 1550 nm during Humidity/ Condensation Cycling test Tyco Electronics, 3-dB Attenuators, 1625 nm., Humidity/Condensation Cycling i.l.01 0.65 i.l.02 i.l.03 Change in Attenuation (dB) 0.45 i.l.04 i.l.05 i.l.06 0.25 i.l.07 i.l.08 0.05 i.l.09 i.l.10 -0.15 i.l.11 AM Video -0.35 Digital -0.55 +/- 0.5 dB -0.75 0 24 48 72 96 120 144 168 Time (h) TP-910 Figure 4-47 Change in Attenuation at 1625 nm during Humidity/ Condensation Cycling test Telcordia Technologies, Inc. Confidential -- Restricted Access See confidentiality restrictions on title page. 4-52 502-1198 Rev A Confidential -- Restricted Access DA-1543 Issue 1, Revision 4 February 3, 2005 Tyco Electronics 3-dB SC Singlemode Fiber Optic Buildout Attenuators Performance Criteria Tyco Electronics, 3-dB Attenuators, 1310 nm., Humidity/Condensation Cycling 3.70 i.l.01 i.l.02 i.l.03 I nserti on Loss (dB) 3.50 i.l.04 i.l.05 i.l.06 3.30 3.10 i.l.07 i.l.08 2.90 i.l.09 i.l.10 i.l.11 AM Video 2.70 Digital 2.50 +/- 0.5 dB 2.30 0 24 48 72 96 120 144 168 Time (h) TP-910 Figure 4-48 Insertion Loss at 1310 nm during Humidity/Condensation Cycling test Tyco Electronics, 3-dB Attenuators, 1490 nm., Humidity/Condensation Cycling 3.70 i.l.01 i.l.02 i.l.03 I nserti on Loss (dB) 3.50 i.l.04 i.l.05 i.l.06 3.30 3.10 i.l.07 i.l.08 2.90 i.l.09 i.l.10 i.l.11 AM Video 2.70 Digital 2.50 +/- 0.5 dB 2.30 0 24 48 72 96 120 144 168 Time (h) TP-910 Figure 4-49 Insertion Loss at 1490 nm during Humidity/Condensation Cycling test Telcordia Technologies, Inc. Confidential -- Restricted Access See confidentiality restrictions on title page. 502-1198 Rev A 4-53 Confidential -- Restricted Access DA-1543 Issue 1, Revision 4 February 3, 2005 Tyco Electronics 3-dB SC Singlemode Fiber Optic Buildout Attenuators Performance Criteria Tyco Electronics, 3-dB Attenuators, 1550 nm., Humidity/Condensation Cycling 3.70 i.l.01 i.l.02 i.l.03 I nserti on Loss (dB) 3.50 i.l.04 i.l.05 i.l.06 3.30 3.10 i.l.07 i.l.08 2.90 i.l.09 i.l.10 i.l.11 AM Video 2.70 Digital 2.50 +/- 0.5 dB 2.30 0 24 48 72 96 120 144 168 Time (h) TP-910 Figure 4-50 Insertion Loss at 1550 nm during Humidity/Condensation Cycling test Tyco Electronics, 3-dB Attenuators, 1625 nm., Humidity/Condensation Cycling 3.70 i.l.01 i.l.02 i.l.03 I nserti on Loss (dB) 3.50 i.l.04 i.l.05 i.l.06 3.30 3.10 i.l.07 i.l.08 2.90 i.l.09 i.l.10 i.l.11 AM Video 2.70 Digital 2.50 +/- 0.5 dB 2.30 0 24 48 72 96 120 144 168 Time (h) TP-910 Figure 4-51 Insertion Loss at 1625 nm during Humidity/Condensation Cycling test Telcordia Technologies, Inc. Confidential -- Restricted Access See confidentiality restrictions on title page. 4-54 502-1198 Rev A Confidential -- Restricted Access DA-1543 Issue 1, Revision 4 February 3, 2005 Tyco Electronics 3-dB SC Singlemode Fiber Optic Buildout Attenuators Performance Criteria Tyco Electronics, 3-dB Attenuators, Humidity-Condensation Cycling Test, Reflectance -70.0 -65.0 Reflectance (dB) -60.0 -55.0 -50.0 -45.0 -40.0 1310 nm 1550 nm Req (D) CR (A) -35.0 1490 nm 1625 nm Req (A) -30.0 i.l.01 i.l.02 i.l.03 i.l.04 i.l.05 i.l.06 Sample i.l.07 i.l.08 i.l.09 i.l.10 i.l.11 TP-910 Figure 4-52 Reflectance at 1310 nm, 1490 nm, 1550 nm and 1625 nm during Humidity/Condensation Cycling test 4.1.5 Water Immersion Attenuator test samples are to be subjected to the Water Immersion Test, Section 6.2.10, of GR-1221-CORE. Test samples are to be immersed in a water (pH 5.5 0.5) bath at a temperature of 43 2C (109 4F), for 168 hours (7 days). 4.1.5.1 Criteria - Water Immersion (heading not from GR-910) GR-910 R4-7 [44] Attenuators shall meet optical criteria and damage criteria described in Section 4.2. The requirement and objective apply before, during and after the test. Water found in the OSP typically has a pH between 5 and 6. The above test method is based on FOTP-12A, which may be used as an alternative to the method described in GR-1221-CORE. Telcordia Technologies, Inc. Confidential -- Restricted Access See confidentiality restrictions on title page. 502-1198 Rev A 4-55 Confidential -- Restricted Access Tyco Electronics 3-dB SC Singlemode Fiber Optic Buildout Attenuators Performance Criteria DA-1543 Issue 1, Revision 4 February 3, 2005 4.1.5.2 Test Method (not from GR-910) 1. Verify that the lab ambient conditions are in the range of 23 5C, and 30 to 70% relative humidity 2. Prepare/warm up and stabilize test equipment per manufacturers instructions, up to 1 hour 3. Verify that the test equipment to be used meets calibration requirements 4. Review manufacturer instructions/procedures for product under test, to assure product usage/configuration is appropriate 5. Allow product under test to stabilize at room temperature with relative humidity less than 50%, for two hours prior to initial optical power reading 6. Prepare water bath per FOTP-12 maintaining water temperature of 43 2C (109 4F), and adjust pH of water to be 5.5 0.5 7. Perform initial optical power reading and record data 8. Maintain product under test immersed in water bath for seven days 9. Optical power measurements shall be made once every day throughout the duration of the test 10. At conclusion of the seven days, allow product under test to stabilize at room conditions 11. Perform final optical power readings within 24 hours of test conclusion and record data 12. Inspect product under test for any physical damage and record observations 13. Record conformance status. If non-conforming, notify supplier. Telcordia Technologies, Inc. Confidential -- Restricted Access See confidentiality restrictions on title page. 4-56 502-1198 Rev A DA-1543 Issue 1, Revision 4 February 3, 2005 Confidential -- Restricted Access Tyco Electronics 3-dB SC Singlemode Fiber Optic Buildout Attenuators Performance Criteria 4.1.5.3 Test Flowchart (not from GR-910) Verify lab ambient conditions of 23 5C and 30 to 70% RH Prepare/warm-up test equipment per manufacturers' instructions Verify test equipment calibration Verify product under test is configured per supplier's instructions Inspect physical condition of product under test Stabilize product under test at room temperature with less than 50% RH for 2 hours Clean connection points and perform initial optical measurements Prepare water bath per FOTP-12 (43C, pH=5.5) Immerse product under test in bath for 7 days, and make (and record results of) optical measurements once per day Stabilize components at room temperature for 24 hours Perform final optical measurements and inspect for any physical damage Were the components undamaged and the optical measurements within specs? No Document nonconformances and address corrective actions with supplier Yes Document Results and go to next criteria section TP-910 Figure 4-53 Test Flowchart - Water Immersion Test (not from GR-910) Telcordia Technologies, Inc. Confidential -- Restricted Access See confidentiality restrictions on title page. 502-1198 Rev A 4-57 Confidential -- Restricted Access Tyco Electronics 3-dB SC Singlemode Fiber Optic Buildout Attenuators Performance Criteria DA-1543 Issue 1, Revision 4 February 3, 2005 4.1.5.4 Test Configuration and Conditions (not from GR-910) This test is to be performed according to GR-1221-CORE, Section 6.2.10, Water Immersion Test, which is based on FOTP-12. Attenuator test samples are to be subjected to immersion in water (pH 5.5 0.5) at 43 2C (109 4F) for 7 days. The pH level can be set by mixing a standard buffer solution containing sodium hydroxide and acetic acid. The pH level should be checked periodically throughout the test and compensated if it drifts. Optical transmittance and reflectance are to be monitored once/day for 7 consecutive days and 24 hours after the test samples are removed from the bath. The samples are washed and allowed to drain for 24 hours at room temperature following removal from the water bath. The final optical transmittance and reflectance is to be measured at 23C, 24 hours following removal from the water bath. The change in attenuation and reflectance at any measurement point during or at the end of the test is to be compared against the requirements and objectives specified in GR-910 Table 4-1. Optical Measurements For each test, compliance against the change in attenuation criteria is determined by measuring the attenuation as described in Section 5.2.2, or measure the optical transmittance and calculate the attenuation per FOTP-20, during or after each test. The compliance against the reflectance criteria is determined by measuring reflectance per FOTP-107, during or after each test. Visual and mechanical inspection should follow FOTP-13. The operating and non-operating environmental criteria require monitoring during testing. This can be accomplished using a Transmission Measurement Facility shown in TP-910 Figure 4-54, or another comparable system. Source TP-910 Figure 4-54 Transmission Measurement Facility In accordance with Verizon requirements, this facility is equipped to make measurements at four wavelengths, 1310 nm, 1490 nm, 1550 nm and 1625 nm, Telcordia Technologies, Inc. Confidential -- Restricted Access See confidentiality restrictions on title page. 4-58 502-1198 Rev A DA-1543 Issue 1, Revision 4 February 3, 2005 Confidential -- Restricted Access Tyco Electronics 3-dB SC Singlemode Fiber Optic Buildout Attenuators Performance Criteria accurate to 0.05 dB for transmittance and 1 dB for reflectance down to -60 dB. While this measurement system is recommended, other configurations capable of meeting the relevant measurement requirements are acceptable. For attenuators in which the leads were connectorized by the supplier, the connectors and leads should be inside the test chamber to check for fiber pistoning. This may result in additional measurement uncertainty attributable to variations in connector loss. The measurement facility functions as follows: Switch 3 selects light from one of four laser sources emitting near 1 = 1310 nm, 2 = 1490 nm, 3 = 1550 nm or 4 = 1625 nm. The Device Under Test (DUT) is fusion spliced between the source switch (Switch 1) and the detector switch (Switch 2). The source switch is used to launch light into any of the devices under test. The detector switch connects any DUT to the power meter, measuring transmitted power and reflected power. The Coupler directs the optical power reflected by the DUT to port (r) on Switch 2 for detection. A reference fiber, located at port (m) of Switch 1 and 2, is used to correct for variations in source power over time. A reflectance reference (suggested value is -60 1 dB) is located at port (r) of Switch 1, and is used to calculate reflectance from the measured optical power. Insertion loss is calculated by subtracting the power transmitted through the reference fiber from the power transmitted through the DUT. Reflectance is calculated by subtracting the power reflected by the reflectance reference from the power reflected by the DUT. All other switch ports are dedicated to DUTs. The Switches, Power Meter and Environmental Chambers are computer controlled via GPIB interface. Laser sources are preferred over LEDs because source coherence affects both the DUT reflectance, and the loss of the switches. Fusion splices are recommended for their low loss and low reflectance. To obtain accurate reflectance measurements, all components in the measurement facility, including the power meter, splices and switches, should have a reflectance of -65 dB. The Coupler should have a directivity of 70 dB. Mode filters between the splices and DUT ensure single-mode transmission. A 2-meter length of the jumper cable will be a sufficient mode filter, provided that the cable conforms to the requirements of GR-409-CORE and there are at least two 360 loops in the 2 meter length. Refer to GR-326-CORE for additional details regarding measurement of loss and reflectance using the Transmission Measurement Facility. 4.1.5.5 Test Apparatus (not from GR-910) Description Supplier Model Calibration Cycle Calibration Due Date. Optical Multimeter Frame HP 8153A - n.a. Optical Sensor HP 81532A 12 months - Laser Source (dual wl) HP 81554SM 12 months - Telcordia Technologies, Inc. Confidential -- Restricted Access See confidentiality restrictions on title page. 502-1198 Rev A 4-59 Confidential -- Restricted Access DA-1543 Issue 1, Revision 4 February 3, 2005 Tyco Electronics 3-dB SC Singlemode Fiber Optic Buildout Attenuators Performance Criteria Calibration Cycle Calibration Due Date. 90/10% Coupler - - Reflectance Standard - - Description Supplier Model Optical Switch JDS SC95B500NC n.a. Optical Switch JDS SC95B500NC n.a. Optical Switch JDS SW1-25 CS n.a. Water Tub with Temperature Sensor In-house Optical Tunable Light Source Agilent Sensor for tunable multimeter Agilent 12 months - 8164A 12 months - 81640A 12 months - 4.1.5.6 Summary of Test Results (not from GR-910) Conformance/Nonconformance All of the eleven test samples conformed to the less stringent criteria in Section 4.1.5.1 of this document. Refer to the Executive Summary for details on this criteria. However, as shown in TP-910 Figure 4-60, the insertion loss of sample i.l.07 did not conform to the more stringent criteria of GR-910 CR4-24 [61] which states that for attenuators intended for use in AM video applications, the attenuation tolerance shall not exceed 0.10V. Sample i.l.07 showed a minimum insertion loss of 2.58 0.05 dB. Furthermore, as shown in TP-910 Figure 4-63, conformance to GR-910 CO4-32 [69] which states that the maximum reflectance for attenuators intended for use in AM-VSB systems should be -65 dB over the entire bandpass of GR-910 CR4-20 [57] and operating temperature range of -40C to +75C was not met. This is a conditional objective and it is up to the end user to determine the significance of this nonconformance issue. Conformance is based on demonstration of no physical damage to the product under test, as well as the optical criteria described in Section 4.2. Nonconforming deviations to GR-910 CO4-32 [69] were noted in testing. Sample Size Eleven samples, in accordance with 20% LTPD specified in GR-910-CORE, Issue 2, were used in the test program. In addition, eleven samples were added to serve as Telcordia Technologies, Inc. Confidential -- Restricted Access See confidentiality restrictions on title page. 4-60 502-1198 Rev A Confidential -- Restricted Access DA-1543 Issue 1, Revision 4 February 3, 2005 Tyco Electronics 3-dB SC Singlemode Fiber Optic Buildout Attenuators Performance Criteria hot spares for replacing sample(s) with nonconformance identified in the test program. Failure History Not applicable. Disposition of Nonconformance Not applicable. Test Data The following graphs represent the entire set of samples tested. This includes a total of eleven (11) samples of buildout attenuators (BOA). TP-910 Figure 4-55 through TP-910 Figure 4-58 present change-in-attenuation measurements during the Water Immersion test for all of the eleven test samples at 1310 nm, 1490 nm, 1550 nm and 1625 nm, respectively. TP-910 Figure 4-59 through TP-910 Figure 4-62 present insertion loss measurements (including connection losses of about 0.5 dB) during the Water Immersion test for all of the eleven test samples at 1310 nm, 1490 nm, 1550 nm and 1625 nm, respectively. TP-910 Figure 4-63 presents the reflectance measurements during the water immersion test for all of the eleven test samples at 1310 nm, 1490 nm, 1550 nm and 1625 nm. Tyco Electronics, 3-dB Attenuators, 1310 nm., Water Immersion i.l.01 0.65 i.l.02 i.l.03 i.l.04 Change in Attenuation (dB) 0.45 i.l.05 i.l.06 i.l.07 0.25 i.l.08 0.05 i.l.09 i.l.10 -0.15 i.l.11 AM Video -0.35 Digital -0.55 +/- 0.5 dB -0.75 0 24 48 72 96 120 144 168 192 216 Time (h) TP-910 Figure 4-55 Change in Attenuation at 1310 nm during Water Immersion test Telcordia Technologies, Inc. Confidential -- Restricted Access See confidentiality restrictions on title page. 502-1198 Rev A 4-61 Confidential -- Restricted Access DA-1543 Issue 1, Revision 4 February 3, 2005 Tyco Electronics 3-dB SC Singlemode Fiber Optic Buildout Attenuators Performance Criteria Tyco Electronics, 3-dB Attenuators, 1490 nm., Water Immersion i.l.01 0.65 i.l.02 i.l.03 Change in Atteunation (dB) 0.45 i.l.04 i.l.05 i.l.06 0.25 i.l.07 i.l.08 0.05 i.l.09 i.l.10 -0.15 i.l.11 AM Video -0.35 Digital -0.55 +/- 0.5 dB -0.75 0 24 48 72 96 120 144 168 192 216 Time (h) TP-910 Figure 4-56 Change in Attenuation at 1490 nm during Water Immersion test Tyco Electronics, 3-dB Attenuators, 1550 nm., Water Immersion i.l.01 0.65 i.l.02 i.l.03 Change in Attenuation (dB) 0.45 i.l.04 i.l.05 i.l.06 0.25 i.l.07 i.l.08 0.05 i.l.09 i.l.10 -0.15 i.l.11 AM Video -0.35 Digital -0.55 +/- 0.5 dB -0.75 0 24 48 72 96 120 144 168 192 216 Time (h) TP-910 Figure 4-57 Change in Attenuation at 1550 nm during Water Immersion test Telcordia Technologies, Inc. Confidential -- Restricted Access See confidentiality restrictions on title page. 4-62 502-1198 Rev A Confidential -- Restricted Access DA-1543 Issue 1, Revision 4 February 3, 2005 Tyco Electronics 3-dB SC Singlemode Fiber Optic Buildout Attenuators Performance Criteria Tyco Electronics, 3-dB Attenuators, 1625 nm., Water Immersion i.l.01 i.l.02 0.65 i.l.03 i.l.04 Change in Attenuation (dB) 0.45 i.l.05 i.l.06 i.l.07 0.25 i.l.08 0.05 i.l.09 i.l.10 i.l.11 -0.15 AM Video -0.35 Digital -0.55 +/- 0.5 dB -0.75 0 24 48 72 96 120 Time (h) 144 168 192 216 TP-910 Figure 4-58 Change in Attenuation at 1625 nm during Water Immersion test Tyco Electronics, 3-dB Attenuators, 1310 nm., Water Immersion 3.70 i.l.01 i.l.02 3.50 i.l.03 i.l.04 i.l.05 Insertion Loss (dB) 3.30 i.l.06 i.l.07 3.10 i.l.08 i.l.09 i.l.10 2.90 i.l.11 AM Video 2.70 Digital 2.50 +/- 0.5 dB 2.30 0 24 48 72 96 120 144 168 192 216 Time (h) TP-910 Figure 4-59 Insertion Loss at 1310 nm during Water Immersion test Telcordia Technologies, Inc. Confidential -- Restricted Access See confidentiality restrictions on title page. 502-1198 Rev A 4-63 Confidential -- Restricted Access DA-1543 Issue 1, Revision 4 February 3, 2005 Tyco Electronics 3-dB SC Singlemode Fiber Optic Buildout Attenuators Performance Criteria Tyco Electronics, 3-dB Attenuators, 1490 nm., Water Immersion 3.70 i.l.01 i.l.02 3.50 i.l.03 i.l.04 i.l.05 Insertion Loss (dB) 3.30 i.l.06 i.l.07 3.10 i.l.08 i.l.09 i.l.10 2.90 i.l.11 AM Video 2.70 Digital 2.50 +/- 0.5 dB 2.30 0 24 48 72 96 120 144 168 192 216 Time (h) TP-910 Figure 4-60 Insertion Loss at 1490 nm during Water Immersion test Tyco Electronics, 3-dB Attenuators, 1550 nm., Water Immersion 3.70 i.l.01 i.l.02 3.50 i.l.03 i.l.04 i.l.05 Insertion Loss (dB) 3.30 i.l.06 i.l.07 3.10 i.l.08 i.l.09 i.l.10 2.90 i.l.11 AM Video 2.70 Digital 2.50 +/- 0.5 dB 2.30 0 24 48 72 96 120 144 168 192 216 Time (h) TP-910 Figure 4-61 Insertion Loss at 1550 nm during Water Immersion test Telcordia Technologies, Inc. Confidential -- Restricted Access See confidentiality restrictions on title page. 4-64 502-1198 Rev A Confidential -- Restricted Access DA-1543 Issue 1, Revision 4 February 3, 2005 Tyco Electronics 3-dB SC Singlemode Fiber Optic Buildout Attenuators Performance Criteria Tyco Electronics, 3-dB Attenuators, 1625 nm., Water Immersion 3.70 i.l.01 i.l.02 i.l.03 3.50 i.l.04 i.l.05 3.30 Insertion Loss (dB) i.l.06 i.l.07 i.l.08 3.10 i.l.09 i.l.10 2.90 i.l.11 AM Video 2.70 Digital 2.50 +/- 0.5 dB 2.30 0 24 48 72 96 120 Time (h) 144 168 192 216 TP-910 Figure 4-62 Insertion Loss at 1625 nm during Water Immersion test Tyco Electronics, 3-dB Attenuators, Water Immersion Test, Reflectance -70.0 -65.0 Reflectance (dB) -60.0 -55.0 -50.0 -45.0 -40.0 1310 nm 1550 nm Req (D) CR (A) -35.0 1490 nm 1625 nm Req (A) -30.0 i.l.01 i.l.02 i.l.03 i.l.04 i.l.05 i.l.06 Sample i.l.07 i.l.08 i.l.09 i.l.10 i.l.11 TP-910 Figure 4-63 Reflectance at 1310 nm, 1490 nm, 1550 nm and 1625 nm during Water Immersion test Telcordia Technologies, Inc. Confidential -- Restricted Access See confidentiality restrictions on title page. 502-1198 Rev A 4-65 Confidential -- Restricted Access Tyco Electronics 3-dB SC Singlemode Fiber Optic Buildout Attenuators Performance Criteria DA-1543 Issue 1, Revision 4 February 3, 2005 4.1.6 Vibration Attenuator test samples are to be subjected to the Variable Frequency Vibration Test, Section 6.2.2, of GR-1221-CORE, except that test samples are to withstand vibrations from 10 Hz to 55 Hz. 4.1.6.1 Criteria - Vibration (heading not from GR-910) GR-910 R4-8 [45] Attenuators shall meet optical criteria and damage criteria described in Section 4.2. The requirements and objectives apply before and after, but not during, the test. The above test method is based on FOTP-11, which may be used as an alternative to the method described in GR-1221-CORE. During vibration testing, time variations in attenuation may be observed with an oscilloscope. 4.1.6.2 Test Method (not from GR-910) 1. Verify that the lab ambient conditions are in the range of 23 5C, and 30 to 70% relative humidity 2. Warm up/prepare and stabilize test equipment per manufacturers instructions, up to 1 hour 3. Verify that the test equipment to be used meets calibration requirements 4. Review manufacturer instructions/procedures for product under test, to assure product usage/configuration is appropriate 5. Perform initial optical power reading and record data 6. Program vibration table for modified FOTP-11, Condition 1 test (modification limits sweep range between 10 Hz to 55 Hz 7. Mount test samples to vibration table for X-axis test 8. Subject product to five sweeps of 10 Hz to 55 Hz and back to 10 Hz (each sweep should take approximately four minutes and the total test time should be 20 minutes 9. Perform final optical power readings and record data 10. Inspect product under test for any physical damage and record observations 11. Record conformance status. If non-conforming, notify supplier. 12. Repeat Step 5 to Step 11 for Y-Axis Telcordia Technologies, Inc. Confidential -- Restricted Access See confidentiality restrictions on title page. 4-66 502-1198 Rev A Confidential -- Restricted Access DA-1543 Issue 1, Revision 4 February 3, 2005 Tyco Electronics 3-dB SC Singlemode Fiber Optic Buildout Attenuators Performance Criteria 13. Repeat Step 5 to Step 11 for Z-Axis 4.1.6.3 Test Flowchart (not from GR-910) Verify lab ambients of 23C +/-5 and 3070%RH Prepare/Warm-up test equipment per manufacturers instructions Verify test equipment calibration Verify product under test configured per manufacturer instructions Clean connection points and perform initial optical measurements Program vibration table for modified FOTP-11 test from 10 Hz to55 hz Mount test samples to vibration table for Xaxis test orientation Execute test - 5 sweeps of 10 Hz to 55 Hz to 10 Hz Inspect product under test physical condition Perform final optical measurements and inspect for any physical damage No Mechanical Damage and optical readings in spec? No Record findings and follow nonconforming process Yes Record findings and complete report section Repeat tests for Y-Axis and Z-Axis Test Complete TP-910 Figure 4-64 Test Flowchart - Vibration Test (not from GR-910) Telcordia Technologies, Inc. Confidential -- Restricted Access See confidentiality restrictions on title page. 502-1198 Rev A 4-67 Confidential -- Restricted Access Tyco Electronics 3-dB SC Singlemode Fiber Optic Buildout Attenuators Performance Criteria DA-1543 Issue 1, Revision 4 February 3, 2005 4.1.6.4 Test Configuration and Conditions (not from GR-910) This test is to be performed according to GR-1221-CORE, Section 6.2.2, Variable Frequency Vibration Test, which is based on FOTP-11, Condition I, except that test samples are to withstand vibrations from 10 Hz to 55 Hz. This test subjects the samples to a simple harmonic motion having an amplitude of 1.52 mm (0.060") maximum total excursion. The frequency is to vary uniformly between 10 Hz and 55 Hz and return to 10 Hz in approximately 4 minutes. The attenuators are to be tested for 2 hours in each of three mutually perpendicular planes. Optical transmittance and reflectance are to be measured before and after the test. The change in attenuation and reflectance is the difference in measurements taken before and after the test and is to be compared against the requirements and objectives specified in GR-910 Table 4-1. Optical Measurements For each test, compliance against the change in attenuation criteria is determined by measuring the attenuation as described in Section 5.2.2, or measure the optical transmittance and calculate the attenuation per FOTP-20, during or after each test. The compliance against the reflectance criteria is determined by measuring reflectance per FOTP-107, during or after each test. Visual and mechanical inspection should follow FOTP-13. The operating and non-operating environmental criteria require monitoring during testing. This can be accomplished using a Transmission Measurement Facility shown in TP-910 Figure 4-65, or another comparable system. Source TP-910 Figure 4-65 Transmission Measurement Facility In accordance with Verizon requirements, this facility is equipped to make measurements at four wavelengths, 1310 nm, 1490 nm, 1550 nm and 1625 nm, accurate to 0.05 dB for transmittance and 1 dB for reflectance down to -60 dB. While this measurement system is recommended, other configurations capable of Telcordia Technologies, Inc. Confidential -- Restricted Access See confidentiality restrictions on title page. 4-68 502-1198 Rev A DA-1543 Issue 1, Revision 4 February 3, 2005 Confidential -- Restricted Access Tyco Electronics 3-dB SC Singlemode Fiber Optic Buildout Attenuators Performance Criteria meeting the relevant measurement requirements are acceptable. For attenuators in which the leads were connectorized by the supplier, the connectors and leads should be inside the test chamber to check for fiber pistoning. This may result in additional measurement uncertainty attributable to variations in connector loss. The measurement facility functions as follows: Switch 3 selects light from one of four laser sources emitting near 1 = 1310 nm, 2 = 1490 nm, 3 = 1550 nm or 4 = 1625 nm. The Device Under Test (DUT) is fusion spliced between the source switch (Switch 1) and the detector switch (Switch 2). The source switch is used to launch light into any of the devices under test. The detector switch connects any DUT to the power meter, measuring transmitted power and reflected power. The Coupler directs the optical power reflected by the DUT to port (r) on Switch 2 for detection. A reference fiber, located at port (m) of Switch 1 and 2, is used to correct for variations in source power over time. A reflectance reference (suggested value is -60 1 dB) is located at port (r) of Switch 1, and is used to calculate reflectance from the measured optical power. Insertion loss is calculated by subtracting the power transmitted through the reference fiber from the power transmitted through the DUT. Reflectance is calculated by subtracting the power reflected by the reflectance reference from the power reflected by the DUT. All other switch ports are dedicated to DUTs. The Switches, Power Meter and Environmental Chambers are computer controlled via GPIB interface. Laser sources are preferred over LEDs because source coherence affects both the DUT reflectance, and the loss of the switches. Fusion splices are recommended for their low loss and low reflectance. To obtain accurate reflectance measurements, all components in the measurement facility, including the power meter, splices and switches, should have a reflectance of -65 dB. The Coupler should have a directivity of 70 dB. Mode filters between the splices and DUT ensure single-mode transmission. A 2-meter length of the jumper cable will be a sufficient mode filter, provided that the cable conforms to the requirements of GR-409-CORE and there are at least two 360 loops in the 2 meter length. Refer to GR-326-CORE for additional details regarding measurement of loss and reflectance using the Transmission Measurement Facility. 4.1.6.5 Test Apparatus (not from GR-910) Description Supplier Model Calibration Cycle Calibration Due Date. Optical Multimeter Frame HP 8153A - n.a. Optical Sensor HP 81532A 12 months - Laser Source (dual wl) HP 81554SM 12 months - - - 90/10% Coupler Telcordia Technologies, Inc. Confidential -- Restricted Access See confidentiality restrictions on title page. 502-1198 Rev A 4-69 Confidential -- Restricted Access DA-1543 Issue 1, Revision 4 February 3, 2005 Tyco Electronics 3-dB SC Singlemode Fiber Optic Buildout Attenuators Performance Criteria Description Supplier Model Reflectance Standard Calibration Cycle Calibration Due Date. - - Optical Switch JDS SC95B500NC n.a. Optical Switch JDS SC95B500NC n.a. Optical Switch JDS SW1-25 CS n.a. Vibration Controller TTI 2050A 12 months - Optical Tunable Light Source Agilent 8164A 12 months - Sensor for tunable multimeter Agilent 81640A 12 months - 4.1.6.6 Summary of Test Results (not from GR-910) Conformance/Nonconformance All of the eleven test samples conformed to the less stringent criteria in Section 4.1.6.1 of this document. Refer to the Executive Summary for details on this criteria. However, as shown in TP-910 Figure 4-67, the insertion loss of samples i.l.01 at the 1310 nm wavelength, i.l.05 at the 1490 nm wavelength, i.l.06 at the 1310 nm and i.l.07 at the 1490 nm wavelength showed borderline performance to the more stringent criteria of GR-910 CR4-24 [61] which states that for attenuators intended for use in AM video applications, the attenuation tolerance shall not exceed 0.10V. In addition, as shown in TP-910 Figure 4-68, samples i.l.03 and i.l.04 at the 1490 nm wavelength showed borderline performance to GR-910 CR4-31 [68] which states that the maximum reflectance for attenuators intended for use in AM-VSB systems shall be -55 dB over the entire bandpass of GR-910 CR4-20 [57] and operating temperature range of -40C to +75C. Furthermore, as shown in TP-910 Figure 4-68, conformance to GR-910 CO4-32 [69] which states that the maximum reflectance for attenuators intended for use in AM-VSB systems should be -65 dB over the entire bandpass of GR-910 CR4-20 [57] and operating temperature range of -40C to +75C was not met. This is a conditional objective and it is up to the end user to determine the significance of this nonconformance issue. Conformance is based on demonstration of no physical damage to the product under test, as well as the optical criteria described in Section 4.2. Nonconforming deviations to GR-910 CO4-32 [69] were noted in testing. Sample Size Telcordia Technologies, Inc. Confidential -- Restricted Access See confidentiality restrictions on title page. 4-70 502-1198 Rev A Confidential -- Restricted Access DA-1543 Issue 1, Revision 4 February 3, 2005 Tyco Electronics 3-dB SC Singlemode Fiber Optic Buildout Attenuators Performance Criteria Eleven samples, in accordance with 20% LTPD specified in GR-910-CORE, Issue 2, were used in the test program. In addition, eleven samples were added to serve as hot spares for replacing sample(s) with nonconformance identified in the test program. Failure History Not applicable. Disposition of Nonconformance Not applicable. Test Data The following charts represent the entire set of samples tested. This includes a total of eleven (11) samples of buildout attenuators (BOA). TP-910 Figure 4-66 presents change-in-attenuation measurements after the Vibration test for all of the eleven test samples at 1310 nm, 1490 nm, 1550 nm and 1625 nm. TP-910 Figure 4-67 presents insertion loss measurements (including connection losses of about 0.5 dB) after the Vibration test for all of the eleven test samples at 1310 nm, 1490 nm, 1550 nm and 1625 nm. TP-910 Figure 4-68 presents the reflectance measurements after the Vibration test for all of the eleven test samples at 1310 nm, 1490 nm, 1550 nm and 1625 nm. Tyco Electronics, 3-dB Attenuators, Vibration Test 0.65 Change in Attenuation (dB) 0.45 1310 nm 1490 nm 0.25 1550 nm 1625 nm 0.05 .0 li 1 .0 li 2 .0 li 3 .0 li 4 .0 li 5 .0 li 6 .0 li 7 .0 li 8 .0 li 9 .1 li 0 .1 li 1 AM Video -0.15 Digital -0.35 +/- 0.5 dB -0.55 -0.75 i.l.01 i.l.02 i.l.03 i.l.04 i.l.05 i.l.06 i.l.07 i.l.08 i.l.09 i.l.10 i.l.11 Sample # TP-910 Figure 4-66 Change in Attenuation at 1310 nm, 1490 nm, 1550 nm and 1625 nm after Vibration test Telcordia Technologies, Inc. Confidential -- Restricted Access See confidentiality restrictions on title page. 502-1198 Rev A 4-71 Confidential -- Restricted Access DA-1543 Issue 1, Revision 4 February 3, 2005 Tyco Electronics 3-dB SC Singlemode Fiber Optic Buildout Attenuators Performance Criteria Tyco Electronics, 3-dB Attenuators, Vibration Test 3.70 3.50 1310 nm Insertion Loss (dB) 1490 nm 3.30 1550 nm 1625 nm 3.10 2.90 AM Video 2.70 Digital +/- 0.5 dB 2.50 2.30 i.l.01 i.l.02 i.l.03 i.l.04 i.l.05 i.l.06 i.l.07 Sample # i.l.08 i.l.09 i.l.10 i.l.11 TP-910 Figure 4-67 Insertion Loss at 1310 nm, 1490 nm, 1550 nm and 1625 nm after Vibration test Tyco Electronics, 3-dB Attenuators, Vibration Test, Reflectance -70.0 -65.0 Reflectance (dB) -60.0 -55.0 -50.0 -45.0 -40.0 1310 nm 1550 nm Req (D) CR (A) -35.0 1490 nm 1625 nm Req (A) -30.0 i.l.01 i.l.02 i.l.03 i.l.04 i.l.05 i.l.06 Sample i.l.07 i.l.08 i.l.09 i.l.10 i.l.11 TP-910 Figure 4-68 Reflectance at 1310 nm, 1490 nm, 1550 nm and 1625 nm after Vibration test Telcordia Technologies, Inc. Confidential -- Restricted Access See confidentiality restrictions on title page. 4-72 502-1198 Rev A DA-1543 Issue 1, Revision 4 February 3, 2005 Confidential -- Restricted Access Tyco Electronics 3-dB SC Singlemode Fiber Optic Buildout Attenuators Performance Criteria 4.1.7 Flex Test Attenuator test samples are to be subjected to 100 cable flex cycles with the load specified in GR-910 Table 4-2, per FOTP-1. 4.1.7.1 Criteria - Flex (heading not from GR-910) GR-910 R4-9 [46] Attenuators shall meet optical criteria and damage criteria described in Section 4.2. The Flex test applies only to attenuators with optical fiber leads. The requirements and objectives apply before and after, but not during, the test. Telcordia Technologies, Inc. Confidential -- Restricted Access See confidentiality restrictions on title page. 502-1198 Rev A 4-73 Confidential -- Restricted Access Tyco Electronics 3-dB SC Singlemode Fiber Optic Buildout Attenuators Performance Criteria DA-1543 Issue 1, Revision 4 February 3, 2005 4.1.7.2 Test Method (not from GR-910) 1. Verify that the lab ambient conditions are in the range of 23 5C, and 30 to 70% relative humidity 2. Prepare/warm up and stabilize test equipment per manufacturers instructions, up to 1 hour 3. Verify that the test equipment to be used meets calibration requirements 4. Review manufacturer instructions/procedures for product under test, to assure product usage/configuration is appropriate 5. Perform initial optical power reading and record data F. Prepare flex test apparatus per FOTP-1 with load based on attenuator type (Table 4-2). Rotate the angle of the test fixture arm through the following cycle: 0, 90, 0, -90, 0, and repeat for 100 cycles. G. Remove load 8. Perform final optical power readings and record data for each fiber after each set of 100 cycles 9. Inspect product under test for any physical damage and record observations 10. Record conformance status. If non-conforming, notify supplier. Telcordia Technologies, Inc. Confidential -- Restricted Access See confidentiality restrictions on title page. 4-74 502-1198 Rev A DA-1543 Issue 1, Revision 4 February 3, 2005 Confidential -- Restricted Access Tyco Electronics 3-dB SC Singlemode Fiber Optic Buildout Attenuators Performance Criteria 4.1.7.3 Test Flowchart (not from GR-910) Verify lab ambient conditions of 23 5C and 30 to 70% RH Prepare/warm-up test equipment per manufacturers' instructions Mount the product under test in the flex test machine such that an untested fiber will be flexed Execute test Verify test equipment calibration Verify product under test is configured per supplier's instructions Inspect physical condition of product under test Clean connection points and perform initial optical measurements Prepare flex test machine for FOTP-1 with load based on attenuator type, 100 cycles through 180 degrees) Have all fibers that are connected to ports been tested? No Yes Perform final optical measurements and inspect for any physical damage Were the components undamaged and the optical measurements within specs? No Document nonconformances and address corrective actions with supplier Yes Document Results and go to next criteria section TP-910 Figure 4-69 Test Flowchart - Fiber Flex Test (not from GR-910) Telcordia Technologies, Inc. Confidential -- Restricted Access See confidentiality restrictions on title page. 502-1198 Rev A 4-75 Confidential -- Restricted Access Tyco Electronics 3-dB SC Singlemode Fiber Optic Buildout Attenuators Performance Criteria DA-1543 Issue 1, Revision 4 February 3, 2005 4.1.7.4 Test Configuration and Conditions (not from GR-910) Attenuator test samples are to be subjected to a modified flex test per Section 4.4.3.1 of GR-326-CORE. The flex test may be performed according to FOTP-1. The optical fiber lead(s) of the test sample shall be flexed through 180 for 100 cycles with the required load specified in GR-910 Table 4-2. The maximum change in attenuation and reflectance is the difference in measurements taken before and after the test and is to be compared against the requirements and objectives specified in Section 4.2.2 and Section 4.2.5. This test applies only to attenuators with optical fiber leads. A. Measure attenuation and reflectance B. Apply load: Media Type I, 0.9 kg (2.0 lb.) Media Type II, 0.23 kg (0.5 lb.) Media Type III, 0.23 kg (0.5 lb.) C. Rotate the angle of the test fixture arm (see TP-910 Figure 4-70) through the following cycle: 0, 90, 0, -90, 0, and repeat for 100 cycles D. Remove load E. Measure attenuation and reflectance Telcordia Technologies, Inc. Confidential -- Restricted Access See confidentiality restrictions on title page. 4-76 502-1198 Rev A Confidential -- Restricted Access DA-1543 Issue 1, Revision 4 February 3, 2005 Tyco Electronics 3-dB SC Singlemode Fiber Optic Buildout Attenuators Performance Criteria _ + 90 90 CABLE OR FIBER TEST ARM ATTENUATOR CAPSTAN 7.5 Cm DIA. 22-28 Cm GUIDES WEIGHTS TP-910 Figure 4-70 Mechanical Test Facility for Flex, Twist, Side Pull and Cable Retention Tests Telcordia Technologies, Inc. Confidential -- Restricted Access See confidentiality restrictions on title page. 502-1198 Rev A 4-77 Confidential -- Restricted Access Tyco Electronics 3-dB SC Singlemode Fiber Optic Buildout Attenuators Performance Criteria DA-1543 Issue 1, Revision 4 February 3, 2005 Optical Measurements For each test, compliance against the change in attenuation criteria is determined by measuring the attenuation as described in Section 5.2.2, or measure the optical transmittance and calculate the attenuation per FOTP-20, during or after each test. The compliance against the reflectance criteria is determined by measuring reflectance per FOTP-107, during or after each test. Visual and mechanical inspection should follow FOTP-13. The operating and non-operating environmental criteria require monitoring during testing. This can be accomplished using a Transmission Measurement Facility shown in TP-910 Figure 4-71, or another comparable system. Source TP-910 Figure 4-71 Transmission Measurement Facility In accordance with Verizon requirements, this facility is equipped to make measurements at four wavelengths, 1310 nm, 1490 nm, 1550 nm and 1625 nm, accurate to 0.05 dB for transmittance and 1 dB for reflectance down to -60 dB. While this measurement system is recommended, other configurations capable of meeting the relevant measurement requirements are acceptable. For attenuators in which the leads were connectorized by the supplier, the connectors and leads should be inside the test chamber to check for fiber pistoning. This may result in additional measurement uncertainty attributable to variations in connector loss. The measurement facility functions as follows: Switch 3 selects light from one of four laser sources emitting near 1 = 1310 nm, 1 = 1490 nm, 1 = 1550 nm or 2 = 1625 nm. The Device Under Test (DUT) is fusion spliced between the source switch (Switch 1) and the detector switch (Switch 2). The source switch is used to launch light into any of the devices under test. The detector switch connects any DUT to the power meter, measuring transmitted power and reflected power. The Coupler directs the optical power reflected by the DUT to port (r) on Switch 2 for detection. A reference fiber, located at port (m) of Switch 1 and 2, is used to correct for variations in source power over time. A reflectance reference (suggested value Telcordia Technologies, Inc. Confidential -- Restricted Access See confidentiality restrictions on title page. 4-78 502-1198 Rev A DA-1543 Issue 1, Revision 4 February 3, 2005 Confidential -- Restricted Access Tyco Electronics 3-dB SC Singlemode Fiber Optic Buildout Attenuators Performance Criteria is -60 1 dB) is located at port (r) of Switch 1, and is used to calculate reflectance from the measured optical power. Insertion loss is calculated by subtracting the power transmitted through the reference fiber from the power transmitted through the DUT. Reflectance is calculated by subtracting the power reflected by the reflectance reference from the power reflected by the DUT. All other switch ports are dedicated to DUTs. The Switches, Power Meter and Environmental Chambers are computer controlled via GPIB interface. Laser sources are preferred over LEDs because source coherence affects both the DUT reflectance, and the loss of the switches. Fusion splices are recommended for their low loss and low reflectance. To obtain accurate reflectance measurements, all components in the measurement facility, including the power meter, splices and switches, should have a reflectance of -65 dB. The Coupler should have a directivity of 70 dB. Mode filters between the splices and DUT ensure single-mode transmission. A 2-meter length of the jumper cable will be a sufficient mode filter, provided that the cable conforms to the requirements of GR-409-CORE and there are at least two 360 loops in the 2 meter length. Refer to GR-326-CORE for additional details regarding measurement of loss and reflectance using the Transmission Measurement Facility. 4.1.7.5 Test Apparatus (not from GR-910) Description Supplier Model Calibration Cycle Calibration Due Date. Optical Multimeter Frame HP 8153A - n.a. Optical Sensor HP 81532A 12 months - Laser Source (dual wl) HP 81554SM 12 months - 90/10% Coupler - - Reflectance Standard - - Optical Switch JDS SC95B500NC n.a. Optical Switch JDS SC95B500NC n.a. Optical Switch JDS SW1-25 CS n.a. Jumper Test Apparatus In-house Optical Tunable Light Source Agilent Sensor for tunable multimeter Agilent 12 months - 8164A 12 months - 81640A 12 months - Telcordia Technologies, Inc. Confidential -- Restricted Access See confidentiality restrictions on title page. 502-1198 Rev A 4-79 Confidential -- Restricted Access Tyco Electronics 3-dB SC Singlemode Fiber Optic Buildout Attenuators Performance Criteria DA-1543 Issue 1, Revision 4 February 3, 2005 4.1.7.6 Summary of Test Results (not from GR-910) Conformance/Nonconformance Not applicable. Sample Size Not applicable. Failure History Not applicable. Disposition of Nonconformance Not applicable. Test Data Not applicable 4.1.8 Twist Test Attenuator test samples are to be subjected to 10 twisting cycles (in a non-operating mode) under the load specified in GR-910 Table 4-2, per FOTP-36. 4.1.8.1 Criteria - Twist (heading not from GR-910) GR-910 R4-10 [47] Attenuators shall meet optical criteria and damage criteria described in Section 4.2. The Twist test applies only to attenuators with optical fiber leads. The requirements and objectives apply before and after, but not during, the test. 4.1.8.2 Test Method (not from GR-910) 1. Verify that the lab ambient conditions are in the range of 23 5C, and 30 to 70% relative humidity 2. Prepare/warm up and stabilize test equipment per manufacturers instructions, up to 1 hour 3. Verify that the test equipment to be used meets calibration requirements 4. Review manufacturer instructions/procedures for product under test, to assure product usage/configuration is appropriate 5. Perform initial optical power reading and record data 6. Prepare twist test apparatus per FOTP-36 and parameters: 0.45 kg, 10 cycles Telcordia Technologies, Inc. Confidential -- Restricted Access See confidentiality restrictions on title page. 4-80 502-1198 Rev A DA-1543 Issue 1, Revision 4 February 3, 2005 Confidential -- Restricted Access Tyco Electronics 3-dB SC Singlemode Fiber Optic Buildout Attenuators Performance Criteria 7. Apply load based on Media Type Media Type I, 1.35 kgf (3.0 lbf.) Media Type II, 0.75 kgf (1.65 lbf.) Media Type III, 0.5 kgf (1.1 lbf.) 8. Rotate the capstan (see figure below) X revolutions about the axis of the fiber, where X=2.5 for Media Type 1 and X=1.5 for Media Types II and III 9. Reverse direction and rotate Y revolutions, where Y=5 for Media Type 1 and Y=3 for Media Types II and III. Reverse direction again, and rotate Y revolutions. 10. Perform final optical power readings and record data for each fiber after each set of 10 cycles 11. Inspect product under test for any physical damage and record observations 12. Record conformance status. If non-conforming, notify supplier. Telcordia Technologies, Inc. Confidential -- Restricted Access See confidentiality restrictions on title page. 502-1198 Rev A 4-81 Confidential -- Restricted Access DA-1543 Issue 1, Revision 4 February 3, 2005 Tyco Electronics 3-dB SC Singlemode Fiber Optic Buildout Attenuators Performance Criteria 4.1.8.3 Test Flowchart (not from GR-910) Verify lab ambient conditions of 23 5C and 30 to 70% RH Prepare/warm-up test equipment per manufacturers' instructions Mount the product under test in the twist test apparatus such that an untested fiber will be twisted Execute test Verify test equipment calibration Verify product under test is configured per supplier's instructions Inspect physical condition of product under test Clean connection points and perform initial optical measurements Prepare twist test apparatus for FOTP-36 with load based on attenuator type;10 cycles Have all fibers that are connected to ports been tested? No Yes Perform final optical measurements and inspect for any physical damage Were the components undamaged and the optical measurements within specs? No Document nonconformances and address corrective actions with supplier Yes Document Results and go to next criteria section TP-910 Figure 4-72 Test Flowchart - Fiber Twist Test (not from GR-910) Telcordia Technologies, Inc. Confidential -- Restricted Access See confidentiality restrictions on title page. 4-82 502-1198 Rev A DA-1543 Issue 1, Revision 4 February 3, 2005 Confidential -- Restricted Access Tyco Electronics 3-dB SC Singlemode Fiber Optic Buildout Attenuators Performance Criteria 4.1.8.4 Test Configuration and Conditions (not from GR-910) Attenuator test samples are to be subjected to a modified twist test per Section 4.4.2.3 of GR-326-CORE. The twist test may be performed according to FOTP-36. The optical fiber lead(s) of the test sample shall be twisted for 10 cycles with the required load specified in GR-910 Table 4-2. The maximum change in attenuation and reflectance is the difference in measurements taken before and after the test and is to be compared against the requirements and objectives specified in Section 4.2.2 and Section 4.2.5. A. Mount the test sample in the test facility; see TP-910 Figure 4-73 B. Measure attenuation and reflectance C. Apply load: Media Type I, 1.35 kg (3.0 lb.) Media Type II, 0.75 kg (1.65 lb.) Media Type III, 0.5 kg (1.1 lb.) D. Rotate the capstan (see TP-910 Figure 4-73) X revolutions about the axis of the fiber. (See the following table.) E. Reverse direction and rotate Y revolutions. Reverse direction again, and rotate Y revolutions. See TP-910 Table 4-1. F. Repeat step "E." nine times G. Remove load, and measure attenuation and reflectance. TP-910 Table 4-1 Number of Turns for Twist Test Media Types X Y Type I 2.5 5 Types II & III 1.5 3 The test may be conducted with a fixture as illustrated in TP-910 Figure 4-73. Telcordia Technologies, Inc. Confidential -- Restricted Access See confidentiality restrictions on title page. 502-1198 Rev A 4-83 Confidential -- Restricted Access DA-1543 Issue 1, Revision 4 February 3, 2005 Tyco Electronics 3-dB SC Singlemode Fiber Optic Buildout Attenuators Performance Criteria _ + 90 90 CABLE OR FIBER TEST ARM 22-28 Cm ATTENUATOR CAPSTAN 7.5 Cm DIA. GUIDES WEIGHTS TP-910 Figure 4-73 Mechanical Test Facility for Flex, Twist, Side Pull and Cable Retention Tests Telcordia Technologies, Inc. Confidential -- Restricted Access See confidentiality restrictions on title page. 4-84 502-1198 Rev A Confidential -- Restricted Access DA-1543 Issue 1, Revision 4 February 3, 2005 Tyco Electronics 3-dB SC Singlemode Fiber Optic Buildout Attenuators Performance Criteria Optical Measurements For each test, compliance against the change in attenuation criteria is determined by measuring the attenuation as described in Section 5.2.2, or measure the optical transmittance and calculate the attenuation per FOTP-20, during or after each test. The compliance against the reflectance criteria is determined by measuring reflectance per FOTP-107, during or after each test. Visual and mechanical inspection should follow FOTP-13. The operating and non-operating environmental criteria require monitoring during testing. This can be accomplished using a Transmission Measurement Facility shown in TP-910 Figure 4-74, or another comparable system. Source TP-910 Figure 4-74 Transmission Measurement Facility In accordance with Verizon requirements, this facility is equipped to make measurements at four wavelengths, 1310 nm, 1490 nm, 1550 nm and 1625 nm, accurate to 0.05 dB for transmittance and 1 dB for reflectance down to -60 dB. While this measurement system is recommended, other configurations capable of meeting the relevant measurement requirements are acceptable. For attenuators in which the leads were connectorized by the supplier, the connectors and leads should be inside the test chamber to check for fiber pistoning. This may result in additional measurement uncertainty attributable to variations in connector loss. The measurement facility functions as follows: Switch 3 selects light from one of four laser sources emitting near 1 = 1310 nm, 2 = 1490 nm, 3 = 1550 nm or 4 = 1625 nm. The Device Under Test (DUT) is fusion spliced between the source switch (Switch 1) and the detector switch (Switch 2). The source switch is used to launch light into any of the devices under test. The detector switch connects any DUT to the power meter, measuring transmitted power and reflected power. The Coupler directs the optical power reflected by the DUT to port (r) on Switch 2 for detection. A reference fiber, located at port (m) of Switch 1 and 2, is used to correct for variations in source power over time. A reflectance reference (suggested value Telcordia Technologies, Inc. Confidential -- Restricted Access See confidentiality restrictions on title page. 502-1198 Rev A 4-85 Confidential -- Restricted Access DA-1543 Issue 1, Revision 4 February 3, 2005 Tyco Electronics 3-dB SC Singlemode Fiber Optic Buildout Attenuators Performance Criteria is -60 1 dB) is located at port (r) of Switch 1, and is used to calculate reflectance from the measured optical power. Insertion loss is calculated by subtracting the power transmitted through the reference fiber from the power transmitted through the DUT. Reflectance is calculated by subtracting the power reflected by the reflectance reference from the power reflected by the DUT. All other switch ports are dedicated to DUTs. The Switches, Power Meter and Environmental Chambers are computer controlled via GPIB interface. Laser sources are preferred over LEDs because source coherence affects both the DUT reflectance, and the loss of the switches. Fusion splices are recommended for their low loss and low reflectance. To obtain accurate reflectance measurements, all components in the measurement facility, including the power meter, splices and switches, should have a reflectance of -65 dB. The Coupler should have a directivity of 70 dB. Mode filters between the splices and DUT ensure single-mode transmission. A 2-meter length of the jumper cable will be a sufficient mode filter, provided that the cable conforms to the requirements of GR-409-CORE and there are at least two 360 loops in the 2 meter length. Refer to GR-326-CORE for additional details regarding measurement of loss and reflectance using the Transmission Measurement Facility. 4.1.8.5 Test Apparatus (not from GR-910) Description Supplier Model Calibration Cycle Calibration Due Date. Optical Multimeter Frame HP 8153A - n.a. Optical Sensor HP 81532A 12 months - Laser Source (dual wl) HP 81554SM 12 months - 90/10% Coupler - - Reflectance Standard - - Optical Switch JDS SC95B500NC n.a. Optical Switch JDS SC95B500NC n.a. Optical Switch JDS SW1-25 CS n.a. Jumper Test Apparatus In-house Optical Tunable Light Source Agilent Sensor for tunable multimeter Agilent 12 months - 8164A 12 months - 81640A 12 months - Telcordia Technologies, Inc. Confidential -- Restricted Access See confidentiality restrictions on title page. 4-86 502-1198 Rev A DA-1543 Issue 1, Revision 4 February 3, 2005 Confidential -- Restricted Access Tyco Electronics 3-dB SC Singlemode Fiber Optic Buildout Attenuators Performance Criteria 4.1.8.6 Summary of Test Results (not from GR-910) Conformance/Nonconformance Not applicable. Sample Size Not applicable. Failure History Not applicable. Disposition of Nonconformance Not applicable. Test Data Not applicable 4.1.9 Side Pull Load Attenuator test samples are to be subjected to the tensile load specified in GR910 Table 4-2, with the load applied at a angle of 90. The Side Pull test applies to all attenuators. Refer to GR-326-CORE for more details on this test. 4.1.9.1 Criteria - Side Pull Load (heading not from GR-910) GR-910 R4-11 [48] Attenuators shall meet optical criteria and damage criteria described in Section 4.2. The requirements and objectives apply before, during and after the test. 4.1.9.2 Test Method (not from GR-910) 1. Verify that the lab ambient conditions are in the range of 23 5C, and 30 to 70% relative humidity 2. Prepare/warm up and stabilize test equipment per manufacturers instructions, up to 1 hour 3. Verify that the test equipment to be used meets calibration requirements 4. Review manufacturer instructions/procedures for product under test, to assure product usage/configuration is appropriate 5. Perform initial optical power reading and record data 6. Mount the test sample in the test facility as shown in TP-910 Figure 4-76 Telcordia Technologies, Inc. Confidential -- Restricted Access See confidentiality restrictions on title page. 502-1198 Rev A 4-87 Confidential -- Restricted Access Tyco Electronics 3-dB SC Singlemode Fiber Optic Buildout Attenuators Performance Criteria DA-1543 Issue 1, Revision 4 February 3, 2005 7. Apply 1.25 kgf (2.75 lbf) at 90 for at least 5 seconds 8. Remove the load, and after at least 20 seconds, measure loss and reflectance 9. Inspect product under test for any physical damage and record observations 10. Record conformance status. If non-conforming, notify supplier. Telcordia Technologies, Inc. Confidential -- Restricted Access See confidentiality restrictions on title page. 4-88 502-1198 Rev A DA-1543 Issue 1, Revision 4 February 3, 2005 Confidential -- Restricted Access Tyco Electronics 3-dB SC Singlemode Fiber Optic Buildout Attenuators Performance Criteria 4.1.9.3 Test Flowchart (not from GR-910) Verify lab ambient conditions of 23 5C and 30 to 70% RH Prepare/warm-up test equipment per manufacturers' instructions Verify test equipment calibration Verify product under test is configured per supplier's instructions Inspect physical condition of product under test Clean connection points and perform initial optical measurements Prepare tensile load test apparatus in accordance with the specified parameters Mount the product under test in the tensile load test apparatus such that an untested fiber will be stressed Execute tests side pulls of 2.75 lbf Have all fibers that are connected to ports been tested? No Yes Perform final optical measurements and inspect for any physical damage Were the components undamaged and the optical measurements within specs? No Document nonconformances and address corrective actions with supplier Yes Document Results and go to next criteria section TP-910 Figure 4-75 Test Flowchart - Fiber Side Pull Test (not from GR-910) Telcordia Technologies, Inc. Confidential -- Restricted Access See confidentiality restrictions on title page. 502-1198 Rev A 4-89 Confidential -- Restricted Access Tyco Electronics 3-dB SC Singlemode Fiber Optic Buildout Attenuators Performance Criteria DA-1543 Issue 1, Revision 4 February 3, 2005 4.1.9.4 Test Configuration and Conditions (Not from GR-910) Attenuator test samples are to be subjected to the required tensile side load in an operating mode. The optical fiber lead(s) of the test sample shall be tested with the required load, specified in TP-910 Table 4-2, applied at an angle of 90. The maximum change in attenuation and reflectance is the difference in measurements taken before, during and after the test and is to be compared against the requirements and objectives specified in Section 4.2.2 and Section 4.2.5. The Side Pull test is based on the Equilibrium Tensile Loading Test in Section 4.4.3.5 of GR-326-CORE. Mount the test sample in the test facility of TP-910 Figure 4-76. The test is conducted as follows: A. Measure both loss and reflectance B. Apply the load listed in TP-910 Table 4-2 at an angle of 90 C. Measure both loss and reflectance after 5 seconds D. Remove the load and measure attenuation and reflectance after 10 seconds TP-910 Table 4-2 Side Pull Tensile Loading Media Type Load Media I 1.25 kg (2.75 lb) Media II 0.25 kg (0.55 lb) Media III 0.25 kg (0.55 lb) The test may be conducted with a fixture as illustrated in TP-910 Figure 4-76 below. Telcordia Technologies, Inc. Confidential -- Restricted Access See confidentiality restrictions on title page. 4-90 502-1198 Rev A Confidential -- Restricted Access DA-1543 Issue 1, Revision 4 February 3, 2005 Tyco Electronics 3-dB SC Singlemode Fiber Optic Buildout Attenuators Performance Criteria _ + 90 90 CABLE OR FIBER TEST ARM ATTENUATOR CAPSTAN 7.5 Cm DIA. 22-28 Cm GUIDES WEIGHTS TP-910 Figure 4-76 Mechanical Test Facility for Flex, Twist, Side Pull and Cable Retention Tests Telcordia Technologies, Inc. Confidential -- Restricted Access See confidentiality restrictions on title page. 502-1198 Rev A 4-91 Confidential -- Restricted Access Tyco Electronics 3-dB SC Singlemode Fiber Optic Buildout Attenuators Performance Criteria DA-1543 Issue 1, Revision 4 February 3, 2005 Optical Measurements For each test, compliance against the change in attenuation criteria is determined by measuring the attenuation as described in Section 5.2.2, or measure the optical transmittance and calculate the attenuation per FOTP-20, during or after each test. The compliance against the reflectance criteria is determined by measuring reflectance per FOTP-107, during or after each test. Visual and mechanical inspection should follow FOTP-13. The operating and non-operating environmental criteria require monitoring during testing. This can be accomplished using a Transmission Measurement Facility shown in TP-910 Figure 4-77, or another comparable system. Source TP-910 Figure 4-77 Transmission Measurement Facility In accordance with Verizon requirements, this facility is equipped to make measurements at four wavelengths, 1310 nm, 1490 nm, 1550 nm and 1625 nm, accurate to 0.05 dB for transmittance and 1 dB for reflectance down to -60 dB. While this measurement system is recommended, other configurations capable of meeting the relevant measurement requirements are acceptable. For attenuators in which the leads were connectorized by the supplier, the connectors and leads should be inside the test chamber to check for fiber pistoning. This may result in additional measurement uncertainty attributable to variations in connector loss. The measurement facility functions as follows: Switch 3 selects light from one of four laser sources emitting near 1 = 1310 nm, 2 = 1490 nm, 3 = 1550 nm or 4 = 1625 nm. The Device Under Test (DUT) is fusion spliced between the source switch (Switch 1) and the detector switch (Switch 2). The source switch is used to launch light into any of the devices under test. The detector switch connects any DUT to the power meter, measuring transmitted power and reflected power. The Coupler directs the optical power reflected by the DUT to port (r) on Switch 2 for detection. A reference fiber, located at port (m) of Switch 1 and 2, is used to correct for variations in source power over time. A reflectance reference (suggested value Telcordia Technologies, Inc. Confidential -- Restricted Access See confidentiality restrictions on title page. 4-92 502-1198 Rev A DA-1543 Issue 1, Revision 4 February 3, 2005 Confidential -- Restricted Access Tyco Electronics 3-dB SC Singlemode Fiber Optic Buildout Attenuators Performance Criteria is -60 1 dB) is located at port (r) of Switch 1, and is used to calculate reflectance from the measured optical power. Insertion loss is calculated by subtracting the power transmitted through the reference fiber from the power transmitted through the DUT. Reflectance is calculated by subtracting the power reflected by the reflectance reference from the power reflected by the DUT. All other switch ports are dedicated to DUTs. The Switches, Power Meter and Environmental Chambers are computer controlled via GPIB interface. Laser sources are preferred over LEDs because source coherence affects both the DUT reflectance, and the loss of the switches. Fusion splices are recommended for their low loss and low reflectance. To obtain accurate reflectance measurements, all components in the measurement facility, including the power meter, splices and switches, should have a reflectance of -65 dB. The Coupler should have a directivity of 70 dB. Mode filters between the splices and DUT ensure single-mode transmission. A 2-meter length of the jumper cable will be a sufficient mode filter, provided that the cable conforms to the requirements of GR-409-CORE and there are at least two 360 loops in the 2 meter length. Refer to GR-326-CORE for additional details regarding measurement of loss and reflectance using the Transmission Measurement Facility. 4.1.9.5 Test Apparatus (not from GR-910) Description Supplier Model Calibration Cycle Calibration Due Date. Optical Multimeter Frame HP 8153A - n.a. Optical Sensor HP 81532A 12 months - Laser Source (dual wl) HP 81554SM 12 months - 90/10% Coupler - - Reflectance Standard - - Optical Switch JDS SC95B500NC n.a. Optical Switch JDS SC95B500NC n.a. Optical Switch JDS SW1-25 CS n.a. Jumper Test Apparatus In-house Optical Tunable Light Source Agilent Sensor for tunable multimeter Agilent 12 months - 8164A 12 months - 81640A 12 months - Telcordia Technologies, Inc. Confidential -- Restricted Access See confidentiality restrictions on title page. 502-1198 Rev A 4-93 Confidential -- Restricted Access Tyco Electronics 3-dB SC Singlemode Fiber Optic Buildout Attenuators Performance Criteria DA-1543 Issue 1, Revision 4 February 3, 2005 4.1.9.6 Summary of Test Results (not from GR-910) Conformance/Nonconformance Eight of the eleven samples conformed to the criteria in Section 4.1.9.1 of this document for during the side pull test. Refer to the Executive Summary for details on this criteria. As shown in TP-910 Figure 4-78, the change in attenuation for samples i.l.04 at the 1625 nm wavelength, i.l.06 at the 1625 nm wavelength and i.l.10 at the 1310 nm, 1490 nm, 1550 nm and 1625 nm wavelengths did not conform to the less stringent criteria of GR-910 CR4-21 [58] which states that for all digital applications, the maximum or minimum change in attenuation before, during, or after, any or all environmental or mechanical tests shall be 0.5 dB, and the less stringent criteria of GR-910 CR4-22 [59] which states that for all AM video applications, the maximum or minimum change in attenuation before, during, or after, any or all environmental or mechanical tests shall be 0.5 dB. Sample i.l.04 showed a change in attenuation of 0.56 0.05 dB at the 1625 nm wavelength. Sample i.l.06 showed a change in attenuation of 0.66 0.05 dB at the 1625 nm wavelength. Sample i.l.10 showed a change in attenuation of 1.29 0.05 dB at the 1310 nm wavelength, 1.82 0.05 dB at the 1490 nm wavelength, 2.04 0.05 dB at the 1550 nm wavelength and 1.53 0.05 dB at the 1625 nm wavelength. Also shown in TP-910 Figure 4-78, the change in attenuation of samples i.l.04 at the 1625 nm wavelength, i.l.06 at the 1625 nm wavelength and i.l.10 at the 1310 nm, 1490 nm, 1550 nm and 1625 nm wavelengths did not conform to, while samples i.l.06 at the 1550 nm wavelength showed borderline performance to the more stringent criteria of GR-910 CR4-21 [58] which states that for all digital applications the maximum or minimum change in attenuation before, during, or after, any or all environmental or mechanical tests shall be 0.5 dB or 0.15A, whichever is less. Sample i.l.04 showed a change in attenuation of 0.56 0.05 dB at the 1625 nm wavelength. Sample i.l.06 showed a change in attenuation of 0.66 0.05 dB at the 1625 nm wavelength. Sample i.l.10 showed a change in attenuation of 1.29 0.05 dB at the 1310 nm wavelength, 1.82 0.05 dB at the 1490 nm wavelength, 2.04 0.05 dB at the 1550 nm wavelength and 1.53 0.05 dB at the 1625 nm wavelength. In addition, as shown in TP-910 Figure 4-78, the change in attenuation of samples i.l.04 at the 1310 nm, 1490 nm, 1550 nm and 1625 nm wavelengths, i.l.06 at the 1550 nm and 1625 nm wavelengths and i.l.10 at the 1310 nm, 1490 nm, 1550 nm and 1625 nm wavelengths did not conform to, while samples i.l.02 at the 1310 nm wavelength showed borderline performance to the more stringent criteria of GR-910 CR4-22 [59] which states that for all AM video applications the maximum or minimum change in attenuation before, during, or after, any or all environmental or mechanical tests shall be 0.5 dB or 0.10A, whichever is less. Sample i.l.04 showed a change in attenuation of 0.44 0.05 dB at the 1310 nm wavelength, 0.43 0.05 dB at the 1490 nm wavelength, 0.37 0.05 dB at the 1550 nm wavelength and 0.56 0.05 dB at the 1625 nm wavelength. Sample i.l.06 showed a change in attenuation of 0.45 0.05 dB at the 1550 nm wavelength and 0.66 0.05 dB at the 1625 nm wavelength. Sample i.l.10 showed a change in attenuation of 1.29 0.05 dB Telcordia Technologies, Inc. Confidential -- Restricted Access See confidentiality restrictions on title page. 4-94 502-1198 Rev A DA-1543 Issue 1, Revision 4 February 3, 2005 Confidential -- Restricted Access Tyco Electronics 3-dB SC Singlemode Fiber Optic Buildout Attenuators Performance Criteria at the 1310 nm wavelength, 1.82 0.05 dB at the 1490 nm wavelength, 2.04 0.05 dB at the 1550 nm wavelength and 1.53 0.05 dB at the 1625 nm wavelength. Shown in TP-910 Figure 4-79, the insertion loss of samples i.l.06 at the 1625 nm wavelength and i.l.10 at the 1310 nm wavelength showed borderline performance to the less stringent criteria of GR-910 CR4-23 [60] which states that for attenuators intended for use in digital applications, the attenuation tolerance shall not exceed 0.15V, modified to 0.5 dB, and to the less stringent criteria of GR-910 CR4-24 [61] which states that for attenuators intended for use in AM video applications, the attenuation tolerance shall not exceed 0.10V, modified to 0.5 dB. Also shown in TP-910 Figure 4-79, the insertion loss of samples i.l.06 at the 1550 nm and 1625 nm wavelengths and i.l.10 at the 1310 nm wavelength showed borderline performance to the more stringent criteria of GR-910 CR4-23 [60] which states that for attenuators intended for use in digital applications, the attenuation tolerance shall not exceed 0.15V. Also shown in TP-910 Figure 4-79, the insertion loss of samples i.l.02 at the 1310 nm, wavelength, i.l.05 at the 1490 nm wavelength, i.l.06 at the 1550 nm and 1625 nm wavelengths and i.l.10 at the 1310 nm, 1490 nm and 1550 nm wavelengths did not conform to, while samples i.l.01 at the 1310 nm wavelength, i.l.06 at the 1310 nm wavelength, i.l.07 at the 1625 nm wavelength and i.l.10 at the 1625 nm wavelength showed borderline performance to the more stringent criteria of GR-910 CR4-24 [61] which states that for attenuators intended for use in AM video applications, the attenuation tolerance shall not exceed 0.10V. Sample i.l.02 showed a maximum insertion loss of 3.43 0.05 dB at the 1310 nm wavelength. Sample i.l.05 showed a maximum insertion loss of 3.36 0.05 dB at the 1490 nm wavelength. Sample i.l.06 showed a maximum insertion loss of 3.45 0.05 dB at the 1550 nm wavelength and 3.48 0.05 dB at the 1625 nm wavelength. Sample i.l.10 showed a maximum insertion loss of 3.48 0.05 dB at the 1310 nm wavelength, 3.42 0.05 dB at the 1490 nm wavelength and 3.40 0.05 dB at the 1550 nm wavelength. In addition, as shown in TP-910 Figure 4-80, sample i.l.06 at the 1625 nm wavelength showed borderline performance to GR-910 CR4-31 [68] which states that the maximum reflectance for attenuators intended for use in AM-VSB systems shall be -55 dB over the entire bandpass of GR-910 CR4-20 [57] and operating temperature range of -40C to +75C. Furthermore, as shown in TP-910 Figure 4-80, conformance to GR-910 CO4-32 [69] which states that the maximum reflectance for attenuators intended for use in AM-VSB systems should be -65 dB over the entire bandpass of GR-910 CR4-20 [57] and operating temperature range of -40C to +75C was not met. This is a conditional objective and it is up to the end user to determine the significance of this nonconformance issue. Conformance is based on demonstration of no physical damage to the product under test, as well as the optical criteria described in Section 4.2. Nonconforming deviations to GR-910 CR4-21 [58], GR-910 CR4-22 [59] and GR-910 CO4-32 [69] were noted in testing. Telcordia Technologies, Inc. Confidential -- Restricted Access See confidentiality restrictions on title page. 502-1198 Rev A 4-95 Confidential -- Restricted Access DA-1543 Issue 1, Revision 4 February 3, 2005 Tyco Electronics 3-dB SC Singlemode Fiber Optic Buildout Attenuators Performance Criteria Sample Size Eleven samples, in accordance with 20% LTPD specified in GR-910-CORE, Issue 2, were used in the test program. In addition, eleven samples were added to serve as hot spares for replacing sample(s) with nonconformance identified in the test program. Failure History Not applicable. Disposition of Nonconformance Not applicable. Test Data The following charts represent the entire set of samples tested. This includes a total of eleven (11) samples of buildout attenuators (BOA). TP-910 Figure 4-78 presents change-in-attenuation measurements during the Side Pull Load test for all of the eleven test samples at 1310 nm, 1490 nm, 1550 nm and 1625 nm. TP-910 Figure 4-79 presents insertion loss measurements (including connection losses of about 0.5 dB) during the Side Pull Load test for all of the eleven test samples at 1310 nm, 1490 nm, 1550 nm and 1625 nm. TP-910 Figure 4-80 presents the reflectance measurements during the Side Pull Load test for all of the eleven test samples at 1310 nm, 1490 nm, 1550 nm and 1625 nm. Tyco Electronics, 3-dB Attenuators, Side Pull Test, During 2.50 1310 nm Change in Attenuation (dB) 2.00 1490 nm 1.50 1550 nm 1625 nm 1.00 0.50 0.00 AM Video .0 li 1 .0 li 2 .0 li 3 .0 li 4 .0 li 5 .0 li 6 .0 li 7 .0 li 8 .0 li 9 .1 li 0 .1 li 1 -0.50 Digital -1.00 +/- 0.5 dB -1.50 -2.00 -2.50 i.l.01 i.l.02 i.l.03 i.l.04 i.l.05 i.l.06 i.l.07 i.l.08 i.l.09 i.l.10 i.l.11 Sample # TP-910 Figure 4-78 Change in Attenuation at 1310 nm, 1490 nm, 1550 nm and 1625 nm during Side Pull test Telcordia Technologies, Inc. Confidential -- Restricted Access See confidentiality restrictions on title page. 4-96 502-1198 Rev A Confidential -- Restricted Access DA-1543 Issue 1, Revision 4 February 3, 2005 Tyco Electronics 3-dB SC Singlemode Fiber Optic Buildout Attenuators Performance Criteria Tyco Electronics, 3-dB Attenuators, Side Pull Test, During 3.70 3.50 1310 nm Insertion Loss (dB) 1490 nm 3.30 1550 nm 1625 nm 3.10 2.90 AM Video 2.70 Digital +/- 0.5 dB 2.50 2.30 i.l.01 i.l.02 i.l.03 i.l.04 i.l.05 i.l.06 i.l.07 Sample # i.l.08 i.l.09 i.l.10 i.l.11 TP-910 Figure 4-79 Insertion Loss at 1310 nm, 1490 nm, 1550 nm and 1625 nm during Side Pull test Tyco Electronics, 3-dB Attenuators, During Side Pull, Reflectance -70.0 -65.0 Reflectance (dB) -60.0 -55.0 -50.0 -45.0 -40.0 1310 nm 1550 nm Req (D) CR (A) -35.0 1490 nm 1625 nm Req (A) -30.0 i.l.01 i.l.02 i.l.03 i.l.04 i.l.05 i.l.06 i.l.07 i.l.08 i.l.09 i.l.10 i.l.11 Sample TP-910 Figure 4-80 Reflectance at 1310 nm, 1490 nm, 1550 nm and 1625 nm during Side Pull test Telcordia Technologies, Inc. Confidential -- Restricted Access See confidentiality restrictions on title page. 502-1198 Rev A 4-97 Confidential -- Restricted Access Tyco Electronics 3-dB SC Singlemode Fiber Optic Buildout Attenuators Performance Criteria DA-1543 Issue 1, Revision 4 February 3, 2005 Conformance/Nonconformance Nine of the eleven samples conformed to the criteria in Section 4.1.9.1 of this document for after the side pull test. Refer to the Executive Summary for details on this criteria. As shown in TP-910 Figure 4-81, the change in attenuation for samples i.l.06 at the 1550 nm and 1625 nm wavelengths and i.l.10 at the 1310 nm, 1490 nm, 1550 nm and 1625 nm wavelengths did not conform to, while sample i.l.04 at the 1625 nm wavelength showed borderline performance to the less stringent criteria of GR-910 CR4-21 [58] which states that for all digital applications, the maximum or minimum change in attenuation before, during, or after, any or all environmental or mechanical tests shall be 0.5 dB, and the less stringent criteria of GR-910 CR4-22 [59] which states that for all AM video applications, the maximum or minimum change in attenuation before, during, or after, any or all environmental or mechanical tests shall be 0.5 dB. Sample i.l.06 showed a change in attenuation of 0.64 0.05 dB at the 1550 nm wavelength and 0.84 0.05 dB at the 1625 nm wavelength. Sample i.l.10 showed a change in attenuation of 1.23 0.05 dB at the 1310 nm wavelength, 1.82 0.05 dB at the 1490 nm wavelength, 2.04 0.05 dB at the 1550 nm wavelength and 1.54 0.05 dB at the 1625 nm wavelength. Also shown in TP-910 Figure 4-81, the change in attenuation of samples i.l.06 at the 1550 nm and 1625 nm wavelengths and i.l.10 at the 1310 nm, 1490 nm, 1550 nm and 1625 nm wavelengths did not conform to, while samples i.l.04 at the 1625 nm wavelength showed borderline performance to the more stringent criteria of GR-910 CR4-21 [58] which states that for all digital applications the maximum or minimum change in attenuation before, during, or after, any or all environmental or mechanical tests shall be 0.5 dB or 0.15A, whichever is less. Sample i.l.06 showed a change in attenuation of 0.64 0.05 dB at the 1550 nm wavelength and 0.84 0.05 dB at the 1625 nm wavelength. Sample i.l.10 showed a change in attenuation of 1.23 0.05 dB at the 1310 nm wavelength, 1.82 0.05 dB at the 1490 nm wavelength, 2.04 0.05 dB at the 1550 nm wavelength and 1.54 0.05 dB at the 1625 nm wavelength. In addition, as shown in TP-910 Figure 4-81, the change in attenuation of samples i.l.04 at the 1310 nm, 1490 nm, 1550 nm and 1625 nm wavelengths, i.l.06 at the 1490 nm, 1550 nm and 1625 nm wavelengths and i.l.10 at the 1310 nm, 1490 nm, 1550 nm and 1625 nm wavelengths did not conform to the more stringent criteria of GR-910 CR4-22 [59] which states that for all AM video applications the maximum or minimum change in attenuation before, during, or after, any or all environmental or mechanical tests shall be 0.5 dB or 0.10A, whichever is less. Sample i.l.04 showed a change in attenuation of 0.40 0.05 dB at the 1310 nm wavelength, 0.38 0.05 dB at the 1490 nm wavelength, 0.38 0.05 dB at the 1550 nm wavelength and 0.49 0.05 dB at the 1625 nm wavelength. Sample i.l.06 showed a change in attenuation of 0.43 0.05 dB at the 1490 nm wavelength, 0.64 0.05 dB at the 1550 nm wavelength and 0.84 0.05 dB at the 1625 nm wavelength. Sample i.l.10 showed a change in attenuation of 1.23 0.05 dB at the 1310 nm wavelength, Telcordia Technologies, Inc. Confidential -- Restricted Access See confidentiality restrictions on title page. 4-98 502-1198 Rev A DA-1543 Issue 1, Revision 4 February 3, 2005 Confidential -- Restricted Access Tyco Electronics 3-dB SC Singlemode Fiber Optic Buildout Attenuators Performance Criteria 1.82 0.05 dB at the 1490 nm wavelength, 2.04 0.05 dB at the 1550 nm wavelength and 1.54 0.05 dB at the 1625 nm wavelength. Shown in TP-910 Figure 4-82, the insertion loss of sample i.l.06 at the 1550 nm and 1625 nm wavelengths did not conform to, while i.l.04 at the 1625 nm wavelength, i.l.05 at the 1490 nm wavelength and i.l.06 at the 1310 nm and 1490 nm wavelengths showed borderline performance to the more stringent criteria of GR-910 CR4-24 [61] which states that for attenuators intended for use in AM video applications, the attenuation tolerance shall not exceed 0.10V. Sample i.l.06 showed a change in attenuation of 3.39 0.05 dB at the 1550 nm wavelength and 3.36 0.05 dB at the 1625 nm wavelength. In addition, as shown in TP-910 Figure 4-83, sample i.l.06 at the 1625 nm wavelength showed borderline performance to GR-910 CR4-31 [68] which states that the maximum reflectance for attenuators intended for use in AM-VSB systems shall be -55 dB over the entire bandpass of GR-910 CR4-20 [57] and operating temperature range of -40C to +75C. Furthermore, as shown in TP-910 Figure 4-83, conformance to GR-910 CO4-32 [69] which states that the maximum reflectance for attenuators intended for use in AM-VSB systems should be -65 dB over the entire bandpass of GR-910 CR4-20 [57] and operating temperature range of -40C to +75C was not met. This is a conditional objective and it is up to the end user to determine the significance of this nonconformance issue. Conformance is based on demonstration of no physical damage to the product under test, as well as the optical criteria described in Section 4.2. Nonconforming deviations to GR-910 CR4-21 [58], GR-910 CR4-22 [59] and GR-910 CO4-32 [69] were noted in testing. Sample Size Eleven samples, in accordance with 20% LTPD specified in GR-910-CORE, Issue 2, were used in the test program. In addition, eleven samples were added to serve as hot spares for replacing sample(s) with nonconformance identified in the test program. Failure History Not applicable. Disposition of Nonconformance Not applicable. Test Data The following charts represent the entire set of samples tested. This includes a total of eleven (11) samples of buildout attenuators (BOA). TP-910 Figure 4-81 presents change-in-attenuation measurements after the Side Pull Load test for all of the eleven test samples at 1310 nm, 1490 nm, 1550 nm and 1625 nm. TP-910 Figure 4-82 presents insertion loss measurements (including connection losses of about 0.5 dB) after the Side Pull Load test for all of the eleven test samples at 1310 nm, 1490 nm, Telcordia Technologies, Inc. Confidential -- Restricted Access See confidentiality restrictions on title page. 502-1198 Rev A 4-99 Confidential -- Restricted Access DA-1543 Issue 1, Revision 4 February 3, 2005 Tyco Electronics 3-dB SC Singlemode Fiber Optic Buildout Attenuators Performance Criteria 1550 nm and 1625 nm.TP-910 Figure 4-83 presents the reflectance measurements after the Side Pull Load test for all of the eleven test samples at 1310 nm, 1490 nm, 1550 nm and 1625 nm. Tyco Electronics, 3-dB Attenuators, Side Pull Test, After 2.50 2.00 1310 nm 1490 nm Change in Atteunation (dB) 1.50 1550 nm 1.00 1625 nm 0.50 0.00 .0 li 1 .0 li 2 .0 li 3 .0 li 4 .0 li 5 .0 li 6 .0 li 7 .0 li 8 .0 li 9 .1 li 0 .1 li 1 AM Video -0.50 Digital -1.00 +/- 0.5 dB -1.50 -2.00 -2.50 i.l.01 i.l.02 i.l.03 i.l.04 i.l.05 i.l.06 i.l.07 i.l.08 i.l.09 i.l.10 i.l.11 Sample # TP-910 Figure 4-81 Change in Attenuation at 1310 nm, 1490 nm, 1550 nm and 1625 nm after Side Pull test Telcordia Technologies, Inc. Confidential -- Restricted Access See confidentiality restrictions on title page. 4-100 502-1198 Rev A Confidential -- Restricted Access DA-1543 Issue 1, Revision 4 February 3, 2005 Tyco Electronics 3-dB SC Singlemode Fiber Optic Buildout Attenuators Performance Criteria Tyco Electronics, 3-dB Attenuators, Side Pull Test, After 3.70 3.50 1310 nm Insertion Loss (dB) 1490 nm 3.30 1550 nm 1625 nm 3.10 2.90 AM Video 2.70 Digital +/- 0.5 dB 2.50 2.30 i.l.01 i.l.02 i.l.03 i.l.04 i.l.05 i.l.06 i.l.07 Sample # i.l.08 i.l.09 i.l.10 i.l.11 TP-910 Figure 4-82 Insertion Loss at 1310 nm, 1490 nm, 1550 nm and 1625 nm after Side Pull test Tyco Electronics, 3-dB Attenuators, After Side Pull, Reflectance -70.0 -65.0 Reflectance (dB) -60.0 -55.0 -50.0 -45.0 -40.0 1310 nm 1550 nm Req (D) CR (A) -35.0 1490 nm 1625 nm Req (A) -30.0 i.l.01 i.l.02 i.l.03 i.l.04 i.l.05 i.l.06 i.l.07 i.l.08 i.l.09 i.l.10 i.l.11 Sample TP-910 Figure 4-83 Reflectance at 1310 nm, 1490 nm, 1550 nm and 1625 nm after Side Pull test Telcordia Technologies, Inc. Confidential -- Restricted Access See confidentiality restrictions on title page. 502-1198 Rev A 4-101 Confidential -- Restricted Access Tyco Electronics 3-dB SC Singlemode Fiber Optic Buildout Attenuators Performance Criteria DA-1543 Issue 1, Revision 4 February 3, 2005 4.1.10 Cable Retention Attenuator test samples are to be subjected to the tensile load specified in GR910 Table 4-2, per FOTP-6. The Cable Retention test applies to all attenuators. 4.1.10.1 Criteria - Cable Retention (heading not from GR-910) GR-910 R4-12 [49] Attenuators shall meet optical criteria and damage criteria described in Section 4.2. The requirements and objectives apply after, but not during, the test. 4.1.10.2 Test Method (not from GR-910) 1. Verify that the lab ambient conditions are in the range of 23 5C, and 30 to 70% relative humidity 2. Prepare/warm up and stabilize test equipment per manufacturers instructions, up to 1 hour 3. Verify that the test equipment to be used meets calibration requirements 4. Review manufacturer instructions/procedures for product under test, to assure product usage/configuration is appropriate 5. Perform initial optical power reading and record data 6. Mount the test sample in the test facility as shown in TP-910 Figure 4-85 7. Apply 2.3 kgf (5.0 lbf) at 90 for at least 5 seconds. 8. Remove the load, and after at least 20 seconds, measure loss and reflectance 9. Apply 3.4 kgf (7.5 lbf) at 90 for 5 seconds 10. Remove the load, and after at least 20 seconds measure loss and reflectance 11. Inspect product under test for any physical damage and record observations 12. Record conformance status. If non-conforming, notify supplier. Telcordia Technologies, Inc. Confidential -- Restricted Access See confidentiality restrictions on title page. 4-102 502-1198 Rev A DA-1543 Issue 1, Revision 4 February 3, 2005 Confidential -- Restricted Access Tyco Electronics 3-dB SC Singlemode Fiber Optic Buildout Attenuators Performance Criteria 4.1.10.3 Test Flowchart (not from GR-910) Verify lab ambient conditions of 23 5C and 30 to 70% RH Prepare/warm-up test equipment per manufacturers' instructions Verify test equipment calibration Verify product under test is configured per supplier's instructions Inspect physical condition of product under test Clean connection points and perform initial optical measurements Prepare tensile load test apparatus in accordance with the specified parameters Mount the product under test in the tensile load test apparatus such that an untested fiber will be stressed Execute tensile test pulls of 5 lbf and 7.5 lbf Have all fibers that are connected to ports been tested? No Yes Perform final optical measurements and inspect for any physical damage Were the components undamaged and the optical measurements within specs? No Document nonconformances and address corrective actions with supplier Yes Document Results and go to next criteria section TP-910 Figure 4-84 Test Flowchart - Cable Retention Test (not from GR-910) Telcordia Technologies, Inc. Confidential -- Restricted Access See confidentiality restrictions on title page. 502-1198 Rev A 4-103 Confidential -- Restricted Access Tyco Electronics 3-dB SC Singlemode Fiber Optic Buildout Attenuators Performance Criteria DA-1543 Issue 1, Revision 4 February 3, 2005 4.1.10.4 Test Configuration and Conditions (not from GR-910) Attenuator test samples are to be subjected to the required tensile load in GR-910 Table 4-2. The load is to be applied to the secured cable at a minimum distance of 10 cm (4 inches) from the end of the fiber. Apply the load at a rate of 400 micrometers (0.016 in.) per second until attaining the maximum load, which is to be maintained for 1 minute. The maximum change in attenuation and reflectance is the difference in measurements taken before and after the test and is to be compared against the requirements and objectives specified in Section 4.2.2 and Section 4.2.5. The Cable Retention test is based on the Transmission with Applied Tensile Load Test in Section 4.4.3.4 of GR-326-CORE. Mount the test sample in the test facility shown in TP-910 Figure 4-85. The test is conducted as follows: A. Measure both loss and reflectance B. Apply the load specified in GR-910 Table 4-2 at a rate of 400 micrometers (0.016 in) per second C. Remove the load after 1 minute D. Measure both loss and reflectance Telcordia Technologies, Inc. Confidential -- Restricted Access See confidentiality restrictions on title page. 4-104 502-1198 Rev A Confidential -- Restricted Access DA-1543 Issue 1, Revision 4 February 3, 2005 Tyco Electronics 3-dB SC Singlemode Fiber Optic Buildout Attenuators Performance Criteria _ + 90 90 CABLE OR FIBER TEST ARM ATTENUATOR CAPSTAN 7.5 Cm DIA. 22-28 Cm GUIDES WEIGHTS TP-910 Figure 4-85 Mechanical Test Facility for Flex, Twist, Side Pull and Cable Retention Tests Telcordia Technologies, Inc. Confidential -- Restricted Access See confidentiality restrictions on title page. 502-1198 Rev A 4-105 Confidential -- Restricted Access Tyco Electronics 3-dB SC Singlemode Fiber Optic Buildout Attenuators Performance Criteria DA-1543 Issue 1, Revision 4 February 3, 2005 Optical Measurements For each test, compliance against the change in attenuation criteria is determined by measuring the attenuation as described in Section 5.2.2, or measure the optical transmittance and calculate the attenuation per FOTP-20, during or after each test. The compliance against the reflectance criteria is determined by measuring reflectance per FOTP-107, during or after each test. Visual and mechanical inspection should follow FOTP-13. The operating and non-operating environmental criteria require monitoring during testing. This can be accomplished using a Transmission Measurement Facility shown in TP-910 Figure 4-86, or another comparable system. Source TP-910 Figure 4-86 Transmission Measurement Facility In accordance with Verizon requirements, this facility is equipped to make measurements at four wavelengths, 1310 nm, 1490 nm, 1550 nm and 1625 nm, accurate to 0.05 dB for transmittance and 1 dB for reflectance down to -60 dB. While this measurement system is recommended, other configurations capable of meeting the relevant measurement requirements are acceptable. For attenuators in which the leads were connectorized by the supplier, the connectors and leads should be inside the test chamber to check for fiber pistoning. This may result in additional measurement uncertainty attributable to variations in connector loss. The measurement facility functions as follows: Switch 3 selects light from one of four laser sources emitting near 1 = 1310 nm, 2 = 1490 nm, 3 = 1550 nm or 4 = 1625 nm. The Device Under Test (DUT) is fusion spliced between the source switch (Switch 1) and the detector switch (Switch 2). The source switch is used to launch light into any of the devices under test. The detector switch connects any DUT to the power meter, measuring transmitted power and reflected power. The Coupler directs the optical power reflected by the DUT to port (r) on Switch 2 for detection. A reference fiber, located at port (m) of Switch 1 and 2, is used to correct for variations in source power over time. A reflectance reference (suggested value Telcordia Technologies, Inc. Confidential -- Restricted Access See confidentiality restrictions on title page. 4-106 502-1198 Rev A DA-1543 Issue 1, Revision 4 February 3, 2005 Confidential -- Restricted Access Tyco Electronics 3-dB SC Singlemode Fiber Optic Buildout Attenuators Performance Criteria is -60 1 dB) is located at port (r) of Switch 1, and is used to calculate reflectance from the measured optical power. Insertion loss is calculated by subtracting the power transmitted through the reference fiber from the power transmitted through the DUT. Reflectance is calculated by subtracting the power reflected by the reflectance reference from the power reflected by the DUT. All other switch ports are dedicated to DUTs. The Switches, Power Meter and Environmental Chambers are computer controlled via GPIB interface. Laser sources are preferred over LEDs because source coherence affects both the DUT reflectance, and the loss of the switches. Fusion splices are recommended for their low loss and low reflectance. To obtain accurate reflectance measurements, all components in the measurement facility, including the power meter, splices and switches, should have a reflectance of -65 dB. The Coupler should have a directivity of 70 dB. Mode filters between the splices and DUT ensure single-mode transmission. A 2-meter length of the jumper cable will be a sufficient mode filter, provided that the cable conforms to the requirements of GR-409-CORE and there are at least two 360 loops in the 2 meter length. Refer to GR-326-CORE for additional details regarding measurement of loss and reflectance using the Transmission Measurement Facility. 4.1.10.5 Test Apparatus (not from GR-910) Description Supplier Model Calibration Cycle Calibration Due Date. Optical Multimeter Frame HP 8153A - n.a. Optical Sensor HP 81532A 12 months - Laser Source (dual wl) HP 81554SM 12 months - 90/10% Coupler - - Reflectance Standard - - Optical Switch JDS SC95B500NC n.a. Optical Switch JDS SC95B500NC n.a. Optical Switch JDS SW1-25 CS n.a. Jumper Test Apparatus In-house Optical Tunable Light Source Agilent Sensor for tunable multimeter Agilent 12 months - 8164A 12 months - 81640A 12 months - Telcordia Technologies, Inc. Confidential -- Restricted Access See confidentiality restrictions on title page. 502-1198 Rev A 4-107 Confidential -- Restricted Access Tyco Electronics 3-dB SC Singlemode Fiber Optic Buildout Attenuators Performance Criteria DA-1543 Issue 1, Revision 4 February 3, 2005 4.1.10.6 Summary of Test Results (not from GR-910) Conformance/Nonconformance Ten of the eleven samples conformed to the criteria in Section 4.1.10.1 of this document for the cable retention test. Refer to the Executive Summary for details on this criteria. As shown in TP-910 Figure 4-87, the change in attenuation for sample i.l.09 at the 1310 nm, 1490 nm, 1550 nm and 1625 nm wavelengths did not conform to the less stringent criteria of GR-910 CR4-21 [58] which states that for all digital applications, the maximum or minimum change in attenuation before, during, or after, any or all environmental or mechanical tests shall be 0.5 dB, and the less stringent criteria of GR-910 CR4-22 [59] which states that for all AM video applications, the maximum or minimum change in attenuation before, during, or after, any or all environmental or mechanical tests shall be 0.5 dB. Sample i.l.09 showed a change in attenuation of 1.73 0.05 dB at the 1310 nm wavelength, 2.17 0.05 dB at the 1490 nm wavelength, 2.19 0.05 dB at the 1550 nm wavelength and 2.19 0.05 dB at the 1625 nm wavelength. Also shown in TP-910 Figure 4-87, the change in attenuation of samples i.l.02 at the 1550 nm wavelength, i.l.06 at the 1490 nm wavelength and i.l.09 at the 1310 nm, 1490 nm, 1550 nm and 1625 nm wavelengths did not conform to the more stringent criteria of GR-910 CR4-21 [58] which states that for all digital applications the maximum or minimum change in attenuation before, during, or after, any or all environmental or mechanical tests shall be 0.5 dB or 0.15A, whichever is less. Sample i.l.02 showed a change in attenuation of 0.52 0.05 dB at the 1550 nm wavelength. Sample i.l.06 showed a change in attenuation of 0.52 0.05 dB at the 1490 nm wavelength. Sample i.l.09 showed a change in attenuation of 1.73 0.05 dB at the 1310 nm wavelength, 2.17 0.05 dB at the 1490 nm wavelength, 2.19 0.05 dB at the 1550 nm wavelength and 2.13 0.05 dB at the 1625 nm wavelength. In addition, as shown in TP-910 Figure 4-87, the change in attenuation of samples i.l.02 at the 1310 nm, 1550 nm and 1625 nm wavelengths, i.l.06 at the 1490 nm and 1625 nm wavelengths and i.l.09 at the 1310 nm, 1490 nm, 1550 nm and 1625 nm wavelengths did not conform to the more stringent criteria of GR-910 CR4-22 [59] which states that for all AM video applications the maximum or minimum change in attenuation before, during, or after, any or all environmental or mechanical tests shall be 0.5 dB or 0.10A, whichever is less. Sample i.l.02 showed a change in attenuation of 0.36 0.05 dB at the 1310 nm wavelength, 0.52 0.05 dB at the 1550 nm wavelength, and 0.39 0.05 dB at the 1625 nm wavelength. Sample i.l.06 showed a change in attenuation of 0.52 0.05 dB at the 1490 nm wavelength and 0.37 0.05 dB at the 1625 nm wavelength. Sample i.l.09 showed a change in attenuation of 1.73 0.05 dB at the 1310 nm wavelength, 2.17 0.05 dB at the 1490 nm wavelength, 2.19 0.05 dB at the 1550 nm wavelength and 2.13 0.05 dB at the 1625 nm wavelength. Shown in TP-910 Figure 4-88, the insertion loss of sample i.l.06 at the 1625 nm wavelength did not conform to, while i.l.03 at the 1550 nm wavelength, i.l.04 at the 1310 nm wavelength, i.l.06 at the 1490 nm and 1550 nm wavelengths and i.l.08 at the Telcordia Technologies, Inc. Confidential -- Restricted Access See confidentiality restrictions on title page. 4-108 502-1198 Rev A DA-1543 Issue 1, Revision 4 February 3, 2005 Confidential -- Restricted Access Tyco Electronics 3-dB SC Singlemode Fiber Optic Buildout Attenuators Performance Criteria 1310 nm wavelength showed borderline performance to the more stringent criteria of GR-910 CR4-24 [61] which states that for attenuators intended for use in AM video applications, the attenuation tolerance shall not exceed 0.10V. Sample i.l.06 showed a change in attenuation of 3.38 0.05 dB at the 1625 nm wavelength. In addition, as shown in TP-910 Figure 4-89, sample i.l.06 at the 1625 nm wavelength showed borderline performance to GR-910 CR4-31 [68] which states that the maximum reflectance for attenuators intended for use in AM-VSB systems shall be -55 dB over the entire bandpass of GR-910 CR4-20 [57] and operating temperature range of -40C to +75C. Furthermore, as shown in TP-910 Figure 4-89, conformance to GR-910 CO4-32 [69] which states that the maximum reflectance for attenuators intended for use in AM-VSB systems should be -65 dB over the entire bandpass of GR-910 CR4-20 [57] and operating temperature range of -40C to +75C was not met. This is a conditional objective and it is up to the end user to determine the significance of this nonconformance issue. Conformance is based on demonstration of no physical damage to the product under test, as well as the optical criteria described in Section 4.2. Nonconforming deviations to GR-910 CR4-21 [58], GR-910 CR4-22 [59] and GR-910 CO4-32 [69] were noted in testing. Sample Size Eleven samples, in accordance with 20% LTPD specified in GR-910-CORE, Issue 2, were used in the test program. In addition, eleven samples were added to serve as hot spares for replacing sample(s) with nonconformance identified in the test program. Failure History Not applicable. Disposition of Nonconformance Not applicable. Test Data The following charts represent the entire set of samples tested. This includes a total of eleven (11) samples of buildout attenuators (BOA). TP-910 Figure 4-87 presents change-in-attenuation measurements after the Cable Retention test for all of the eleven test samples at 1310 nm, 1490 nm, 1550 nm and 1625 nm. TP-910 Figure 4-88 presents insertion loss measurements (including connection losses of about 0.5 dB) after the Cable Retention test for all of the eleven test samples at 1310 nm, 1490 nm, 1550 nm and 1625 nm. TP-910 Figure 4-89 presents the reflectance measurements after the Cable Retention test for all of the eleven test samples at 1310 nm, 1490 nm, 1550 nm and 1625 nm. Telcordia Technologies, Inc. Confidential -- Restricted Access See confidentiality restrictions on title page. 502-1198 Rev A 4-109 Confidential -- Restricted Access DA-1543 Issue 1, Revision 4 February 3, 2005 Tyco Electronics 3-dB SC Singlemode Fiber Optic Buildout Attenuators Performance Criteria Tyco Electronics, 3-dB Attenuators, Cable Retention Test 2.50 2.00 1310 nm Change in Attenuation (dB) 1.50 1490 nm 1.00 1550 nm 1625 nm 0.50 0.00 .0 li 1 .0 li 2 .0 li 3 .0 li 4 .0 li 5 .0 li 6 .0 li 7 .0 li 8 .0 li 9 .1 li 0 .1 li 1 -0.50 AM Video -1.00 Digital -1.50 +/- 0.5 dB -2.00 -2.50 i.l.01 i.l.02 i.l.03 i.l.04 i.l.05 i.l.06 i.l.07 Sample # i.l.08 i.l.09 i.l.10 i.l.11 TP-910 Figure 4-87 Change in Attenuation at 1310 nm, 1490 nm, 1550 nm and 1625 nm after Cable Retention test Tyco Electronics, 3-dB Attenuators, Cable Retention Test 3.70 3.50 1310 nm Insertion Loss (dB) 1490 nm 3.30 1550 nm 1625 nm 3.10 2.90 AM Video 2.70 Digital +/- 0.5 dB 2.50 2.30 i.l.01 i.l.02 i.l.03 i.l.04 i.l.05 i.l.06 i.l.07 Sample # i.l.08 i.l.09 i.l.10 i.l.11 TP-910 Figure 4-88 Insertion Loss at 1310 nm, 1490 nm, 1550 nm and 1625 nm after Cable Retention test Telcordia Technologies, Inc. Confidential -- Restricted Access See confidentiality restrictions on title page. 4-110 502-1198 Rev A Confidential -- Restricted Access DA-1543 Issue 1, Revision 4 February 3, 2005 Tyco Electronics 3-dB SC Singlemode Fiber Optic Buildout Attenuators Performance Criteria Tyco Electronics, 3-dB Attenuators, Cable Retention, Reflectance -70.0 -65.0 Reflectance (dB) -60.0 -55.0 -50.0 -45.0 -40.0 1310 nm 1550 nm Req (D) CR (A) -35.0 1490 nm 1625 nm Req (A) -30.0 i.l.01 i.l.02 i.l.03 i.l.04 i.l.05 i.l.06 i.l.07 i.l.08 i.l.09 i.l.10 i.l.11 Sample TP-910 Figure 4-89 Reflectance at 1310 nm, 1490 nm, 1550 nm and 1625 nm after Cable Retention test 4.1.11 Durability Attenuators with connector receptacles, connector interfaces, or connectorized pigtails are to be subjected to 200 connector mating cycles, as specified in Section 4.4.3.86. of GR-326-CORE. 4.1.11.1 Criteria - Durability (heading not from GR-910) GR-910 R4-13 [50] Attenuators shall meet optical criteria and damage criteria described in Section 4.2. Variable attenuators are to have their attenuation setting changed from the minimum dB setting to their maximum setting and back for a minimum of 200 excursions. The requirements and objectives apply before, during and after the test. Telcordia Technologies, Inc. Confidential -- Restricted Access See confidentiality restrictions on title page. 502-1198 Rev A 4-111 Confidential -- Restricted Access Tyco Electronics 3-dB SC Singlemode Fiber Optic Buildout Attenuators Performance Criteria DA-1543 Issue 1, Revision 4 February 3, 2005 GR-910 CR4-14 [51] The value of attenuation, as the attenuator setting is varied in either direction (including backlash) over the entire attenuation range, shall be within the attenuation tolerance, with no physical damage. GR-910 CR4-15 [52] Adjusting the setting past its endpoint by any amount shall not result in damage to the attenuator. Alternatively, there shall be a "stop" preventing adjustment past the endpoint. 4.1.11.2 Test Method (not from GR-910) NOTE: This test is applicable only for attenuator products with connector receptacles, connector interfaces, or connectorized pigtails. Test procedure reference: FOTP-21. An initial cleaning is performed and baseline optical measurements taken. Re-cleaning is permitted if necessary to bring a connector into conformance. Each of the connector assemblies is reconnected a total of 200 insertions during the course of this test. The operator must stand on the floor for all cleaning and reconnections. The following sequence is used in making successive insertions: A. Disconnect and reconnect 1 connector assembly at the 6 ft. height B. Disconnect and reconnect 1 connector assembly at the 4.5 ft. height C. Disconnect and reconnect 1 connector assembly at the 3 ft. height D. Disconnect and reconnect 1 connector assembly at the 3 ft. height E. Disconnect and reconnect 1 connector assembly at the 4.5 ft. height F. Disconnect and reconnect 1 connector assembly at the 6 ft. height G. Repeat Steps A through F until all 15 connector assemblies have been disconnected and reconnected H. This sequence counts as a single insertion The following scheme is used during the course of the 200 insertions. A. Measurements are taken at insertions 24, 49, 74, 99, 124, 149, 174, and 199, without cleaning B. Readings are taken at insertions 25, 75, 125 and 175 after one-sided cleaning. No re-cleaning is performed at this point. NOTE: The cleaning method used is Cleaning Method A (GR-326, Section 4.3.1) or Cleaning Method B (GR-326, Section 4.3.2), at the supplier's option. Also, cleaning may be omitted at the request of the supplier, if the product purports to be one which does not require cleaning. Telcordia Technologies, Inc. Confidential -- Restricted Access See confidentiality restrictions on title page. 4-112 502-1198 Rev A DA-1543 Issue 1, Revision 4 February 3, 2005 Confidential -- Restricted Access Tyco Electronics 3-dB SC Singlemode Fiber Optic Buildout Attenuators Performance Criteria C. Readings are taken at insertions 50, 100, 150 and 200 after two-sided cleaning. No re-cleaning is performed at this point (except for insertion 200, if required). The Note above applies to this step also. D. If at the end of 200 insertions some connectors do not meet the optical criteria, and after cleaning they still do not meet optical criteria, then up to two re-cleanings are performed Telcordia Technologies, Inc. Confidential -- Restricted Access See confidentiality restrictions on title page. 502-1198 Rev A 4-113 Confidential -- Restricted Access DA-1543 Issue 1, Revision 4 February 3, 2005 Tyco Electronics 3-dB SC Singlemode Fiber Optic Buildout Attenuators Performance Criteria 4.1.11.3 Test Flowchart (Not from GR-910) Test Product is selected Perform insertions and measure attenuation value and reflectance per the test method Does the product meet GR-910 R4-13 [50]? No Document nonconformance and address corrective actions with supplier Yes Does the product meet GR-910 CR4-14 [51] and GR-910 CR4-15 [52]? No Note nonconformance Yes Document results and go to next criteria section TP-910 Figure 4-90 Test Flowchart - Durability Test (not from GR-910) Telcordia Technologies, Inc. Confidential -- Restricted Access See confidentiality restrictions on title page. 4-114 502-1198 Rev A DA-1543 Issue 1, Revision 4 February 3, 2005 Confidential -- Restricted Access Tyco Electronics 3-dB SC Singlemode Fiber Optic Buildout Attenuators Performance Criteria 4.1.11.4 Test Configuration and Conditions (not from GR-910) This test shall apply to connector receptacles, optical pad type attenuators, and patchcord type attenuators with connectorized pigtails. Attenuator test samples are to be subjected to the durability test procedure per Section 4.4.3.7 of GR-326-CORE. Both connector interfaces of a connector receptacle or optical pad type attenuator are reconnected for 200 cycles. The attenuator shall be cleaned according to the supplier's instructions. Connectors are to be cleaned in accordance with the procedure in Section 4.4.3.7 of GR-326-CORE. Variable attenuators are to have their attenuation setting changed from the zero dB setting to their maximum setting and back, for a minimum of 200 times. For fixed attenuators the attenuation value and reflectance are to be measured for each reconnection. The criteria in Section 4.2.2 and Section 4.2.5 are applied only to measurements made immediately after the cleaning operation. The results of all measurements will be reported. For variable attenuators the attenuation value and reflectance are measured and reported after each excursion at their minimum and maximum attenuation setting. The criteria in Section 4.2.2 and Section 4.2.5 apply to each measurement. Optical Measurements For each test, compliance against the change in attenuation criteria is determined by measuring the attenuation as described in Section 5.2.2, or measure the optical transmittance and calculate the attenuation per FOTP-20, during or after each test. The compliance against the reflectance criteria is determined by measuring reflectance per FOTP-107, during or after each test. Visual and mechanical inspection should follow FOTP-13. The operating and non-operating environmental criteria require monitoring during testing. This can be accomplished using a Transmission Measurement Facility shown in TP-910 Figure 4-91, or another comparable system. Telcordia Technologies, Inc. Confidential -- Restricted Access See confidentiality restrictions on title page. 502-1198 Rev A 4-115 Confidential -- Restricted Access Tyco Electronics 3-dB SC Singlemode Fiber Optic Buildout Attenuators Performance Criteria DA-1543 Issue 1, Revision 4 February 3, 2005 Source TP-910 Figure 4-91 Transmission Measurement Facility In accordance with Verizon requirements, this facility is equipped to make measurements at four wavelengths, 1310 nm, 1490 nm, 1550 nm and 1625 nm, accurate to 0.05 dB for transmittance and 1 dB for reflectance down to -60 dB. While this measurement system is recommended, other configurations capable of meeting the relevant measurement requirements are acceptable. For attenuators in which the leads were connectorized by the supplier, the connectors and leads should be inside the test chamber to check for fiber pistoning. This may result in additional measurement uncertainty attributable to variations in connector loss. The measurement facility functions as follows: Switch 3 selects light from one of four laser sources emitting near 1 = 1310 nm, 2 = 1490 nm, 3 = 1550 nm or 4 = 1625 nm. The Device Under Test (DUT) is fusion spliced between the source switch (Switch 1) and the detector switch (Switch 2). The source switch is used to launch light into any of the devices under test. The detector switch connects any DUT to the power meter, measuring transmitted power and reflected power. The Coupler directs the optical power reflected by the DUT to port (r) on Switch 2 for detection. A reference fiber, located at port (m) of Switch 1 and 2, is used to correct for variations in source power over time. A reflectance reference (suggested value is -60 1 dB) is located at port (r) of Switch 1, and is used to calculate reflectance from the measured optical power. Insertion loss is calculated by subtracting the power transmitted through the reference fiber from the power transmitted through the DUT. Reflectance is calculated by subtracting the power reflected by the reflectance reference from the power reflected by the DUT. All other switch ports are dedicated to DUTs. The Switches, Power Meter and Environmental Chambers are computer controlled via GPIB interface. Laser sources are preferred over LEDs because source coherence affects both the DUT reflectance, and the loss of the switches. Fusion splices are recommended for their low loss and low reflectance. To obtain accurate reflectance measurements, all components in the measurement facility, including the power meter, splices and Telcordia Technologies, Inc. Confidential -- Restricted Access See confidentiality restrictions on title page. 4-116 502-1198 Rev A DA-1543 Issue 1, Revision 4 February 3, 2005 Confidential -- Restricted Access Tyco Electronics 3-dB SC Singlemode Fiber Optic Buildout Attenuators Performance Criteria switches, should have a reflectance of -65 dB. The Coupler should have a directivity of 70 dB. Mode filters between the splices and DUT ensure single-mode transmission. A 2-meter length of the jumper cable will be a sufficient mode filter, provided that the cable conforms to the requirements of GR-409-CORE and there are at least two 360 loops in the 2 meter length. Refer to GR-326-CORE for additional details regarding measurement of loss and reflectance using the Transmission Measurement Facility. 4.1.11.5 Test Apparatus (not from GR-910) Description Supplier Model Calibration Cycle Calibration Due Date. Optical Multimeter Frame HP 8153A - n.a. Optical Sensor HP 81532A 12 months - Laser Source (dual wl) HP 81554SM 12 months - 90/10% Coupler - - Reflectance Standard - - Optical Switch JDS SC95B500NC n.a. Optical Switch JDS SC95B500NC n.a. Optical Switch JDS SW1-25 CS n.a. Connector Panel ADC NA 12 months - Optical Tunable Light Source Agilent 8164A 12 months - Sensor for tunable multimeter Agilent 81640A 12 months - 4.1.11.6 Summary of Test Results (not from GR-910) Conformance/Nonconformance All of the eleven test samples conformed to the less stringent criteria in Section 4.1.11.1 of this document. Refer to the Executive Summary for details on this criteria. However, as shown in TP-910 Figure 4-92, the change in attenuation of samples i.l.06 at the 1310 nm wavelength and i.l.10 at the 1310 nm wavelength showed borderline performance to the more stringent criteria of GR-910 CR4-22 [59] which states that for all AM video applications the maximum or minimum change Telcordia Technologies, Inc. Confidential -- Restricted Access See confidentiality restrictions on title page. 502-1198 Rev A 4-117 Confidential -- Restricted Access Tyco Electronics 3-dB SC Singlemode Fiber Optic Buildout Attenuators Performance Criteria DA-1543 Issue 1, Revision 4 February 3, 2005 in attenuation before, during, or after, any or all environmental or mechanical tests shall be 0.5 dB or 0.10A, whichever is less. As shown in TP-910 Figure 4-93, the insertion loss of samples i.l.03 at the 1550 nm wavelength, i.l.04 at the 1625 nm wavelength, i.l.08 at the 1310 nm, i.l.09 at the 1490 nm and 1550 nm wavelengths, i.l.10 at the 1310 nm wavelength and i.l.11 at the 1310 nm wavelength did not conform to, while samples i.l.01 at the 1310 nm wavelength, i.l.02 at the 1550 nm wavelength, i.l.04 at the 1310 nm wavelength, i.l.06 at the 1550 nm and 1625 nm wavelengths and i.l.11 at the 1550 nm wavelength showed borderline performance to the more stringent criteria of GR-910 CR4-24 [61] which states that for attenuators intended for use in AM video applications, the attenuation tolerance shall not exceed 0.10V. Sample i.l.03 showed a maximum insertion loss of 3.36 0.05 dB at the 1550 nm wavelength. Sample i.l.04 showed a minimum insertion loss of 2.61 0.05 dB at the 1625 nm wavelength. Sample i.l.08 showed a maximum insertion loss of 3.42 0.05 dB at the 1310 nm wavelength. Sample i.l.09 showed a maximum insertion loss of 3.36 0.05 dB at the 1490 nm wavelength and 3.38 0.05 dB at the 1550 nm wavelength. Sample i.l.10 showed a maximum insertion loss of 3.38 0.05 dB at the 1310 nm wavelength. Sample i.l.11 showed a maximum insertion loss of 3.37 0.05 dB at the 1310 nm wavelength. In addition, as shown in TP-910 Figure 4-94, conformance to GR-910 CO4-32 [69] which states that the maximum reflectance for attenuators intended for use in AM-VSB systems should be -65 dB over the entire bandpass of GR-910 CR4-20 [57] and operating temperature range of -40C to +75C was not met. This is a conditional objective and it is up to the end user to determine the significance of this nonconformance issue. Conformance is based on demonstration of no physical damage to the product under test, as well as the optical criteria described in Section 4.2. Nonconforming deviations to GR-910 CO4-32 [69] were noted in testing. Sample Size Eleven samples, in accordance with 20% LTPD specified in GR-910-CORE, Issue 2, were used in the test program. In addition, eleven samples were added to serve as hot spares for replacing sample(s) with nonconformance identified in the test program. Failure History Not applicable. Disposition of Nonconformance Not applicable. Test Data The following charts represent the entire set of samples tested. This includes a total of eleven (11) samples of buildout attenuators (BOA). TP-910 Figure 4-92 presents change-in-attenuation measurements after the Durability test for all of the eleven test samples at 1310 nm, 1490 nm, 1550 nm and 1625 nm. TP-910 Figure 4-93 Telcordia Technologies, Inc. Confidential -- Restricted Access See confidentiality restrictions on title page. 4-118 502-1198 Rev A Confidential -- Restricted Access DA-1543 Issue 1, Revision 4 February 3, 2005 Tyco Electronics 3-dB SC Singlemode Fiber Optic Buildout Attenuators Performance Criteria presents insertion loss measurements (including connection losses of about 0.5 dB) after the Durability test for all of the eleven test samples at 1310 nm, 1490 nm, 1550 nm and 1625 nm. TP-910 Figure 4-94 presents the reflectance measurements after the Durability test for all of the eleven test samples at 1310 nm, 1490 nm, 1550 nm and 1625 nm. Tyco Electronics, 3-dB Attenuators, After Durability Test 0.65 Change in Attenuation (dB) 0.45 1310 nm 1490 nm 0.25 1550 nm 1625 nm 0.05 .0 li 1 .0 li 2 .0 li 3 .0 li 4 .0 li 5 .0 li 6 .0 li 7 .0 li 8 .0 li 9 .1 li 0 .1 li 1 -0.15 AM Video -0.35 Digital -0.55 +/- 0.5 dB -0.75 i.l.01 i.l.02 i.l.03 i.l.04 i.l.05 i.l.06 i.l.07 i.l.08 i.l.09 i.l.10 i.l.11 Sample # TP-910 Figure 4-92 Change in Attenuation at 1310 nm, 1490 nm, 1550 nm and 1625 nm after Durability test Telcordia Technologies, Inc. Confidential -- Restricted Access See confidentiality restrictions on title page. 502-1198 Rev A 4-119 Confidential -- Restricted Access DA-1543 Issue 1, Revision 4 February 3, 2005 Tyco Electronics 3-dB SC Singlemode Fiber Optic Buildout Attenuators Performance Criteria Tyco Electronics, 3-dB Attenuators, After Durability Test 3.70 3.50 1310 nm Insertion Loss (dB) 1490 nm 3.30 1550 nm 1625 nm 3.10 2.90 AM Video 2.70 Digital +/- 0.5 dB 2.50 2.30 i.l.01 i.l.02 i.l.03 i.l.04 i.l.05 i.l.06 i.l.07 Sample # i.l.08 i.l.09 i.l.10 i.l.11 TP-910 Figure 4-93 Insertion Loss at 1310 nm, 1490 nm, 1550 nm and 1625 nm after Durability test Tyco Electronics, 3-dB Attenuators, Durability, Reflectance -70.0 -65.0 Reflectance (dB) -60.0 -55.0 -50.0 -45.0 -40.0 1310 nm 1550 nm Req (D) CR (A) -35.0 1490 nm 1625 nm Req (A) -30.0 i.l.01 i.l.02 i.l.03 i.l.04 i.l.05 i.l.06 i.l.07 i.l.08 i.l.09 i.l.10 i.l.11 Sample TP-910 Figure 4-94 Reflectance at 1310 nm, 1490 nm, 1550 nm and 1625 nm after Durability test Telcordia Technologies, Inc. Confidential -- Restricted Access See confidentiality restrictions on title page. 4-120 502-1198 Rev A DA-1543 Issue 1, Revision 4 February 3, 2005 Confidential -- Restricted Access Tyco Electronics 3-dB SC Singlemode Fiber Optic Buildout Attenuators Performance Criteria 4.1.12 Impact Test Attenuator test samples are to be subjected to the Impact Test, Section 6.2.1, GR-1221-CORE. Attenuators are to withstand 8 impact cycles, in each of 3 axes, when dropped from a height of 1.8 meters (6 feet) onto a concrete floor. Samples are mounted rigidly so that the shock is transmitted to the internal components and not absorbed or cushioned by leads or connector interfaces. Test samples are to be dropped in an unmated condition without dust caps. The requirements and objectives apply after, but not during, the test. 4.1.12.1 Criteria - Impact (heading not from GR-910) GR-910 R4-16 [53] Attenuators shall meet optical criteria and damage criteria described in Section 4.2. The above test method is based on FOTP-2, which may be used as an alternative to the method described in GR-1221-CORE. This test may also be performed using an impact test machine with the force of impact set to 1000 G's (8 impacts in each of 3 axes), per MIL 202F, Method 213B- 1/2 sine Shock. Duration is 0.5 ms by definition. 4.1.12.2 Test Method (not from GR-910) 1. Verify that the lab ambient conditions are in the range of 23 5C, and 30 to 70% relative humidity 2. Warm up/prepare and stabilize test equipment per manufacturers instructions, up to 1 hour 3. Verify that the test equipment to be used meets calibration requirements 4. Review manufacturer instructions/procedures for product under test, to assure product usage/configuration is appropriate 5. Inspect physical condition of product under test 6. Clean connection points and perform initial optical measurements 7. Prepare test setup as defined in EIA/TIA-455-2A for light service applications with drop height of six feet 8. Verify that the product under test is rigidly mounted for the X-axis orientation 9. Execute five (5) sets of eight (8) drops for the X-axis orientation 10. Perform final optical power readings and record data Telcordia Technologies, Inc. Confidential -- Restricted Access See confidentiality restrictions on title page. 502-1198 Rev A 4-121 Confidential -- Restricted Access Tyco Electronics 3-dB SC Singlemode Fiber Optic Buildout Attenuators Performance Criteria DA-1543 Issue 1, Revision 4 February 3, 2005 11. Repeat five sets of eight drops each in Y-axis, and then the Z-axis 12. Perform final optical measurements after completion of each axis tests 13. Inspect product under test for any physical damage and record observations 14. Record conformance status. If non-conforming, notify supplier. Telcordia Technologies, Inc. Confidential -- Restricted Access See confidentiality restrictions on title page. 4-122 502-1198 Rev A DA-1543 Issue 1, Revision 4 February 3, 2005 Confidential -- Restricted Access Tyco Electronics 3-dB SC Singlemode Fiber Optic Buildout Attenuators Performance Criteria 4.1.12.3 Test Flowchart (not from GR-910) Verify lab ambients of 23C +/-5 and 3070%RH Prepare/Warm-up test equipment per manufacturers instructions Verify test equipment calibration Verify product under test configured per manufacturer instructions Clean connection points and perform initial optical measurements Prepare test setup per EIA/TIA-455-2A using a drop height of six feet Verify that samples are rigidly mounted for Xaxis impacts Execute test - 8 drops for the X-axis per cycle, 5 cycles total Inspect product under test physical condition Perform final optical measurements and inspect for any physical damage No Mechanical Damage and optical readings in spec? No Record findings and follow nonconforming process Yes Record findings and complete report section Repeat tests for Y-Axis and Z-Axis Test Complete TP-910 Figure 4-95 Test Flowchart - Impact Test (not from GR-910) Telcordia Technologies, Inc. Confidential -- Restricted Access See confidentiality restrictions on title page. 502-1198 Rev A 4-123 Confidential -- Restricted Access DA-1543 Issue 1, Revision 4 February 3, 2005 Tyco Electronics 3-dB SC Singlemode Fiber Optic Buildout Attenuators Performance Criteria 4.1.12.4 Test Configuration and Conditions (not from GR-910) This test is to be performed according to GR-1221-CORE, Section 6.2.1, Impact Test, which is based on FOTP-2 for "Light Service Application." Attenuators are to withstand 8 impact cycles, from each of three mutually perpendicular axes, when dropped from a height of 1.8 meters (6 feet) onto a concrete floor. The attenuators shall be dropped in an unmated condition without protective caps. Samples are mounted rigidly so that the shock is transmitted to the internal components and not absorbed or cushioned by the leads. A suggested method for performing this test is to place the test sample inside a container filled with a rigid packing material (such as sand or small glass beads) so that the sample does not shift or bounce around when the container is dropped. In this way, the impact shock is not absorbed by an elastic packing material, but is fully transmitted to the internal components. Samples with leads may be protected from breakage if they are coiled and tied. The connector plug/ferrule may be protected with a cap that does not impede the impact force. This test may also be performed using an impact test machine with the force of impact set to 1000 G's. After testing, each attenuator is to be carefully examined for evidence of physical damage as described in Section 4.2.8. The maximum change in attenuation and reflectance is the difference in measurements taken before and after the test and is to be compared against the requirements and objectives specified in Section 4.2.2 and Section 4.2.5. 4.1.12.5 Test Apparatus (not from GR-910) Description Supplier Model Calibration Cycle Calibration Due Date. Optical Multimeter Frame HP 8153A - n.a. Optical Sensor HP 81532A 12 months - Laser Source (dual wl) HP 81554SM 12 months - 90/10% Coupler - - Reflectance Standard - - Optical Switch JDS SC95B500NC n.a. Optical Switch JDS SC95B500NC n.a. Optical Switch JDS SW1-25 CS n.a. Telcordia Technologies, Inc. Confidential -- Restricted Access See confidentiality restrictions on title page. 4-124 502-1198 Rev A DA-1543 Issue 1, Revision 4 February 3, 2005 Confidential -- Restricted Access Tyco Electronics 3-dB SC Singlemode Fiber Optic Buildout Attenuators Performance Criteria Description Supplier Model Calibration Cycle Calibration Due Date. Impact Tester In-house NA 12 months - Optical Tunable Light Source Agilent 8164A 12 months - Sensor for tunable multimeter Agilent 81640A 12 months - 4.1.12.6 Summary of Test Results (not from GR-910) Conformance/Nonconformance All of the eleven test samples conformed to the less stringent criteria in Section 4.1.12.1 of this document. Refer to the Executive Summary for details on this criteria. However, as shown in TP-910 Figure 4-96, the change in attenuation of samples i.l.05 at the 1310 nm wavelength showed borderline performance to the more stringent criteria of GR-910 CR4-22 [59] which states that for all AM video applications the maximum or minimum change in attenuation before, during, or after, any or all environmental or mechanical tests shall be 0.5 dB or 0.10A, whichever is less. As shown in TP-910 Figure 4-97, the insertion loss of sample i.l.05 at the 1310 nm wavelength showed borderline performance to the more stringent criteria of GR-910 CR4-23 [60] which states that for attenuators intended for use in digital applications, the attenuation tolerance shall not exceed 0.15V. Also shown in TP-910 Figure 4-97, the insertion loss of samples i.l.01 at the 1550 nm wavelength, i.l.03 at the 1550 nm wavelength, i.l.04 at the 1310 nm wavelength, i.l.05 at the 1310 nm wavelength, i.l.06 at the 1310 nm and 1625 nm wavelengths and i.l.08 at the 1310 nm wavelength did not conform to, while samples i.l.02 at the 1550 nm and 1625 nm wavelengths, i.l.04 at the 1490 nm wavelength, i.l.06 at the 1490 nm and 1550 nm wavelengths, i.l.09 at the 1550 nm wavelength and i.l.11 at the 1310 nm and 1550 nm wavelengths showed borderline performance to the more stringent criteria of GR-910 CR4-24 [61] which states that for attenuators intended for use in AM video applications, the attenuation tolerance shall not exceed 0.10V. Sample i.l.01 showed a maximum insertion loss of 3.38 0.05 dB at the 1550 nm wavelength. Sample i.l.03 showed a maximum insertion loss of 3.38 0.05 dB at the 1550 nm wavelength. Sample i.l.04 showed a minimum insertion loss of 2.64 0.05 dB at the 1310 nm wavelength. Sample i.l.05 showed a minimum insertion loss of 2.56 0.05 dB at the 1310 nm wavelength. Sample i.l.06 showed a maximum insertion loss of 3.41 0.05 dB at the 1310 nm wavelength and 3.40 0.05 dB at the 1625 nm wavelength. Sample i.l.08 showed a maximum insertion loss of 3.37 0.05 dB at the 1310 nm wavelength. In addition, as shown in TP-910 Figure 4-98, conformance to GR-910 CO4-32 [69] which states that the maximum reflectance for attenuators intended for use in Telcordia Technologies, Inc. Confidential -- Restricted Access See confidentiality restrictions on title page. 502-1198 Rev A 4-125 Confidential -- Restricted Access Tyco Electronics 3-dB SC Singlemode Fiber Optic Buildout Attenuators Performance Criteria DA-1543 Issue 1, Revision 4 February 3, 2005 AM-VSB systems should be -65 dB over the entire bandpass of GR-910 CR4-20 [57] and operating temperature range of -40C to +75C was not met. This is a conditional objective and it is up to the end user to determine the significance of this nonconformance issue. Conformance is based on demonstration of no physical damage to the product under test, as well as the optical criteria described in Section 4.2. Nonconforming deviations to GR-910 CO4-32 [69] were noted in testing. Sample Size Eleven samples, in accordance with 20% LTPD specified in GR-910-CORE, Issue 2, were used in the test program. In addition, eleven samples were added to serve as hot spares for replacing sample(s) with nonconformance identified in the test program. Failure History Not applicable. Disposition of Nonconformance Not applicable. Test Data The following charts represent the entire set of samples tested. This includes a total of eleven (11) samples of buildout attenuators (BOA). TP-910 Figure 4-96 presents change-in-attenuation measurements after the Impact test for all of the eleven test samples at 1310 nm, 1490 nm, 1550 nm and 1625 nm. TP-910 Figure 4-97 presents insertion loss measurements (including connection losses of about 0.5 dB) after the Impact test for all of the eleven test samples at 1310 nm, 1490 nm, 1550 nm and 1625 nm. TP-910 Figure 4-98 presents the reflectance measurements after the Impact test for all of the eleven test samples at 1310 nm, 1490 nm, 1550 nm and 1625 nm. Telcordia Technologies, Inc. Confidential -- Restricted Access See confidentiality restrictions on title page. 4-126 502-1198 Rev A Confidential -- Restricted Access DA-1543 Issue 1, Revision 4 February 3, 2005 Tyco Electronics 3-dB SC Singlemode Fiber Optic Buildout Attenuators Performance Criteria Tyco Electronics, 3-dB Attenuators, After Impact Test 0.70 0.50 Change in Attenuation (dB) 1310 nm 0.30 1490 nm 1550 nm 1625 nm 0.10 .0 li 1 .0 li 2 .0 li 3 .0 li 4 .0 li 5 .0 li 6 .0 li 7 .0 li 8 .0 li 9 .1 li 0 .1 li 1 -0.10 AM Video -0.30 Digital -0.50 +/- 0.5 dB -0.70 i.l.01 i.l.02 i.l.03 i.l.04 i.l.05 i.l.06 i.l.07 i.l.08 i.l.09 i.l.10 i.l.11 Sample # TP-910 Figure 4-96 Change in Attenuation at 1310 nm, 1490 nm, 1550 nm and 1625 nm after Impact test Tyco Electronics, 3-dB Attenuators, After Impact Test 3.70 3.50 1310 nm Insertion Loss (dB) 1490 nm 3.30 1550 nm 1625 nm 3.10 2.90 AM Video 2.70 Digital +/- 0.5 dB 2.50 2.30 i.l.01 i.l.02 i.l.03 i.l.04 i.l.05 i.l.06 i.l.07 Sample # i.l.08 i.l.09 i.l.10 i.l.11 TP-910 Figure 4-97 Insertion Loss at 1310 nm, 1490 nm, 1550 nm and 1625 nm after Impact test Telcordia Technologies, Inc. Confidential -- Restricted Access See confidentiality restrictions on title page. 502-1198 Rev A 4-127 Confidential -- Restricted Access DA-1543 Issue 1, Revision 4 February 3, 2005 Tyco Electronics 3-dB SC Singlemode Fiber Optic Buildout Attenuators Performance Criteria Tyco Electronics, 3-dB Attenuators, Impact, Reflectance -70.0 -65.0 Reflectance (dB) -60.0 -55.0 -50.0 -45.0 -40.0 1310 nm 1550 nm Req (D) CR (A) -35.0 1490 nm 1625 nm Req (A) -30.0 i.l.01 i.l.02 i.l.03 i.l.04 i.l.05 i.l.06 Sample i.l.07 i.l.08 i.l.09 i.l.10 i.l.11 TP-910 Figure 4-98 Reflectance at 1310 nm, 1490 nm, 1550 nm and 1625 nm after Impact test 4.2 Optical Criteria The Optical Criteria addresses the required optical performance characteristics of attenuators. The wavelength ranges over which the attenuator must operate independently are addressed by the optical bandpass requirement. The attenuation tolerance requirement addresses the accuracy of attenuators marked in units of "dB". The attenuation change requirement addresses the change in attenuation due to environmental or mechanical stress. The attenuation increments and range requirements specify the minimum incremental change of attenuation and the minimum range of fixed and variable attenuators. The optical power reflected back from an attenuator is addressed by the reflectance requirement. Finally, the variation of attenuation with changing incident light polarization orientation is addressed by the polarization-dependent loss criteria. All optical requirements shall be applied for both directions of light propagation (only one direction for singlemode to multimode attenuators that are non-reversible). The attenuation, A, is the ratio of optical power input to the attenuator, Pi, to the optical power output from the attenuator, Po, measured in units of dB. The criteria is intended for attenuators used for digital transmission at bit-rates up to 10 Gb/s and for analog AM/Digital video transmission. Some of these optical criteria are separated into application specific conditional requirements (CRs) for digital transmission at bit-rates up to 10 Gb/s, and application specific CRs for Telcordia Technologies, Inc. Confidential -- Restricted Access See confidentiality restrictions on title page. 4-128 502-1198 Rev A DA-1543 Issue 1, Revision 4 February 3, 2005 Confidential -- Restricted Access Tyco Electronics 3-dB SC Singlemode Fiber Optic Buildout Attenuators Performance Criteria analog AM/Digital video transmission. It is the responsibility of the user to select the appropriate CR to invoke, based on the type of service to be supported. (4-3) A = 10 log (Pi / Po) 4.2.1 Optical Bandpass The optical bandpass is the wavelength range over which the applicable set of optical requirements are satisfied. An optical bandpass for an attenuator is bounded by two wavelength end points at which its transmission spectrum intercepts the required criteria. 4.2.1.1 Criteria - Optical Bandpass (heading not from GR-910) GR-910 CR4-17 [54] For 1310/1550nm attenuators to be used for all digital applications except long-reach SONET, all optical requirements shall be met over the bandpass for both the 1310nm and the 1550nm regions specified in GR-910 Table 4-3, Column 2. GR-910 CO4-18 [55] For 1310/1550nm attenuators to be used for all digital applications, all optical objectives should be met over the bandpass for both the 1310 nm and the 1550nm regions specified in GR-910 Table 4-3, Column 3. GR-910 CR4-19 [56] For 1310/1550nm attenuators to be used for long-reach SONET only, all optical requirements shall be met over the bandpass specified in GR-910 Table 4-3, Column 4. GR-910 CR4-20 [57] For all attenuators intended for use in AM-VSB video transmission, all optical requirements shall be met over the bandpass specified in GR-910 Table 4-3, Column 5. GR-910 Table 4-3 Optical Bandpass Criteria Wavelength Digital Long Reach SONET AM Video 1 Region (nm) 2 3 (GR-910 CR4- (GR-910 CO417 [54]) 18 [55]) (nm) (nm) 4 (GR-910 CR4-19 [56]) (nm) 5 (GR-910 CR420 [57]) (nm) 1310 1260 ->1360 1260 ->1360 1280 ->1335 1290 ->1330 1550 1480 ->1580 1430 ->1580 1525 ->1575 1530 ->1570 Telcordia Technologies, Inc. Confidential -- Restricted Access See confidentiality restrictions on title page. 502-1198 Rev A 4-129 Confidential -- Restricted Access Tyco Electronics 3-dB SC Singlemode Fiber Optic Buildout Attenuators Performance Criteria DA-1543 Issue 1, Revision 4 February 3, 2005 The bandpasses shown in Columns 2 and 3 apply to attenuators used in all applications, including FITL and SONET short-reach (SR; having interconnect distances of ~ 2 km or more), intermediate-reach (IR; ~ 15 km or more), and longreach (LR; ~ 40 km or more) systems. For attenuators, (GR-910 CR4-19 [56]) (in Column 4) applies to SONET LR and interoffice systems. For these applications, the source wavelength must be selected to match this narrower bandpass. (GR-910 CR4-19 [56]) may not work for SONET SR and IR systems, nor for FITL systems, since these systems may operate outside this narrow bandpass. (GR-910 CR4-20 [57]) (in Column 5) applies to all attenuators intended for use in AM-video applications. For video, the specific optical criteria in the 1310nm and 1550nm windows differ. Should more than one service need to be supported, then several bandpass criteria may apply. The user should select the widest applicable bandpass in either window. Rationale: All attenuators must be of the wideband type, i.e., capable of operation in both regions simultaneously, to accommodate future upgrades. The bandpasses are derived from the attenuation characteristics of single-mode fiber and the variations in transmitter central wavelength. The bandpass values in GR-910 Table 4-3 are intended to make attenuators reasonably transparent in the telecommunications network. The bandpass requirement is consistent with optical interface requirements for FITL (TA-NWT-000909) and SONET (GR-253-CORE). The video bandpass criteria is derived from the standard emission wavelength range of video laser transmitters and receivers. 4.2.1.2 Test Method (not from GR-910) 1. Is the attenuator intended for use in multiple application environments? If so, determine from the product documentation the wavelength bands over which it is specified to operate. If not, go to the next test area. 2. Does the attenuator have connectorized pigtails for all fiber terminations? If it does not, fusion splice connectorized fiber pigtails to all DUT fiber leads. When possible, use fiber fanouts. 3. Clean all optical connectors prior to use following cleaning procedure A or B described in GR-326-CORE, Section 4.3. The following cleaning procedure (Procedure A) shall be followed, unless the manufacturer of the DUT provides an alternative procedure (Procedure B). a. If both plugs have been removed from the adapter, blow compressed gas through the adapter. If both plugs are not to be removed, blow compressed gas into the open end of the adapter. b. Wipe completely around the ferrule of the plug twice with a lint-free wiping material that has been moistened with alcohol. Then wipe across the end of the ferrule. Telcordia Technologies, Inc. Confidential -- Restricted Access See confidentiality restrictions on title page. 4-130 502-1198 Rev A DA-1543 Issue 1, Revision 4 February 3, 2005 Confidential -- Restricted Access Tyco Electronics 3-dB SC Singlemode Fiber Optic Buildout Attenuators Performance Criteria c. Repeat Step (b) with a dry wipe d. Blow compressed gas across the end of the ferrule. This is the final step before inserting the plug. Do not wipe the ferrule or allow it to touch anything after completion of this step and before the ferrule is inserted into the sleeve. e. Insert the plug in the adapter f. If both plugs have been removed, repeat Steps (b) through (e) with the second plug 4. Determine the output power spectrum launched by the light source being used with the equipment shown in TP-910 Figure 4-100 in Section 4.2.1.4 to perform baseline reference measurements: received power versus wavelength. Sweep the light source or spectrum analyzer through the full range of operational wavelengths that comprise the DUT's specified bandwidth. 5. Record (e.g., on hard disk) the baseline measurements with their respective wavelengths, i, as the reference power, Reference Poweri, for each output fiber 6. Insert the DUT into the test setup as shown in TP-910 Figure 4-101 in Section 4.2.1.4. The same test setup format should be used as for the reference measurements 7. Record the transmitted power, DUT Poweri, versus wavelength, i, for each output fiber. Sweep the light source or spectrum analyzer through the full range of operational wavelengths that comprise the DUT's specified bandwidth. 8. For each output fiber, compute the insertion loss of the device versus wavelength by subtracting the reference power level for each wavelength from the power level with the DUT in place for the same wavelength ILi = Reference Poweri - DUT Poweri 9. Plot the IL versus wavelength curve for each output fiber of the DUT 10. Determine the maximum allowable bandpass IL, n dB, for the DUT from GR-910 Table 4-3 11. Compute the bandpass, Bn, for each fiber of the device using the IL versus wavelength curve and the bandpass IL, n dB 12. Does the bandpass of each output fiber meet the requirements of GR-910? 13. Yes - record the results and go on to the next test 14. No - investigate the nature of the failure using the Telcordia Nonconforming Product Process Telcordia Technologies, Inc. Confidential -- Restricted Access See confidentiality restrictions on title page. 502-1198 Rev A 4-131 Confidential -- Restricted Access DA-1543 Issue 1, Revision 4 February 3, 2005 Tyco Electronics 3-dB SC Singlemode Fiber Optic Buildout Attenuators Performance Criteria 4.2.1.3 Test Flowchart (not from GR-910) Does DUT have connectorized fiber ends ? Blow compressed air through the connector adapter. No Prepare fiber ends with connectors Yes Wipe each plug twice with lint-free cloth moistened with alcohol. Wipe across end of ferrule. Setup Equipment as is shown in TP-1209, Figure 4-2. Wipe each plug twice with lint-free cloth. Wipe across end of ferrule. Clean all optical connectors, see GR-326-CORE, Section 4.3, Method A or B. Perform baseline power measurements: Ref Pwri versus i, save. Blow compressed air through the connector adapter. Insert mating connector plugs in adapter. Insert device under test (DUT) into test setup, see TP-1209, Figure 4-3. Perform DUT power measurements: DUT Pwri versus i, save. Compute insertion loss (IL) through DUT : ILi = Ref Pwri - DUT Pwri Plot ILi versus i . Continue Telcordia Technologies, Inc. Confidential -- Restricted Access See confidentiality restrictions on title page. 4-132 502-1198 Rev A Confidential -- Restricted Access DA-1543 Issue 1, Revision 4 February 3, 2005 Tyco Electronics 3-dB SC Singlemode Fiber Optic Buildout Attenuators Performance Criteria continue Determine the bandpass IL, n dB, for the DUT using GR-1209, Table 4-1. Determine the bandpass, Bn dB, for the DUT using GR-1209 Figure 4-1. Bandpass meets GR1209, CR4-2 [35] ? No Investigate nature of failure using Telcordia Non-Conforming Product Process. Yes Document results, go on to next test. TP-910 Figure 4-99 Test Flowchart - General Optical Bandpass Test (not from GR-910) 4.2.1.4 Test Configuration and Conditions (not from GR-910) The optical bandpass definition and criteria are given in Section 4.2.1 and can be calculated by using the procedures given below. The attenuator is to be tested in both directions of light propagation, at room temperature, and at the minimum and maximum operating temperatures. The suggested measurement method is outlined below. 1. Measure optical transmission spectrum A. Light Source: Use a single-mode fiber-coupled, high-powered optical source having central wavelengths covering the required bandpass. Couple the optical source to the attenuator under test with a wavelength-independent coupler or jumper. Alternatively, use a fiber-coupled white light source. Refer to FOTP-20 for stripping higher-order mode and cladding light. B. Reference Power Spectrum: Connect the source to an optical spectrum analyzer as shown in TP-910 Figure 4-100. Measure and store this signal as the reference spectrum. Best results are typically obtained using 1 nm resolution, 10 nm/division span, and start and stop wavelengths just Telcordia Technologies, Inc. Confidential -- Restricted Access See confidentiality restrictions on title page. 502-1198 Rev A 4-133 Confidential -- Restricted Access DA-1543 Issue 1, Revision 4 February 3, 2005 Tyco Electronics 3-dB SC Singlemode Fiber Optic Buildout Attenuators Performance Criteria enclosing the required bandpass. The resolution of the optical spectrum analyzer should be better than the linewidth of the test source. Optical spectrum analyzer Broadband stabilized light source or Optical power meter Tunable laser TP-910 Figure 4-100 Reference Test Configurations for General Optical Bandpass (not from GR-910) C. Attenuator Power Spectrum: If the attenuator under test is connectorized, connect it to the test configuration replacing the jumper; otherwise, cut the jumper in half, and fusion splice in the attenuator. Connect the attenuator under test between the source and the optical spectrum analyzer as shown in TP-910 Figure 4-101. Broadband stabilized light source D U T Optical spectrum analyzer D U T Optical power meter or Tunable laser TP-910 Figure 4-101 Through-DUT Test Configurations for General Optical Bandpass (not from GR-910) Telcordia Technologies, Inc. Confidential -- Restricted Access See confidentiality restrictions on title page. 4-134 502-1198 Rev A Confidential -- Restricted Access DA-1543 Issue 1, Revision 4 February 3, 2005 Tyco Electronics 3-dB SC Singlemode Fiber Optic Buildout Attenuators Performance Criteria (The remaining steps are most easily completed by using the marker features on most optical spectrum analyzers.) 2. Find the wavelength intercepts; Find the two wavelength intercepts for each required bandpass region. Set the level marker at the value designated on the attenuator. The other optical requirements must also be met across the bandpass defined by these wavelengths. See TP-910 Figure 4-102 for an example of an attenuator optical spectrum. 3. Compare bandpass against criteria. The pairs of wavelengths found in Step 2 represent the measured optical bandpass of the attenuator under test. Compare the bandpass against the bandpass requirements and objectives in Section 4.2.1. TP-910 Figure 4-102 shows an ideal spectra for a 3 dB attenuator. 4. The solid and dashed boxes represent the bandpass and attenuation tolerance requirement and objective 6.00 5.80 Insertion Loss (dB) 5.60 5.40 5.20 5.00 4.80 4.60 4.40 4.20 1200 1220 1240 1260 1280 1300 1320 1340 1360 1380 1400 1420 1440 1460 1480 1500 1520 1540 1560 1580 1600 4.00 Wavelength (nm) TP-910 Figure 4-102 3 dB Attenuator Optical Bandpass Spectra Telcordia Technologies, Inc. Confidential -- Restricted Access See confidentiality restrictions on title page. 502-1198 Rev A 4-135 Confidential -- Restricted Access DA-1543 Issue 1, Revision 4 February 3, 2005 Tyco Electronics 3-dB SC Singlemode Fiber Optic Buildout Attenuators Performance Criteria 4.2.1.5 Test Apparatus (not from GR-910) Description Supplier Model Calibration Cycle Calibration Due Date. Optical Tunable Light Source Agilent 8164A 12 months - Sensor for Tunable Multimeter Agilent 81640A 12 months - Broadband Stabilized Light Source Anritsu MG 922 A 12 months - Optical Spectrum Analyzer Anritsu MS 9710 B 12 months - Fiber cleaning supplies: alcohol, compressed air, lintfree wipes, and lint-free tipped probes - - - - 4.2.1.6 Summary of Test Results (not from GR-910) Conformance/Nonconformance All of the eleven test samples conformed to the criteria in Section 4.2.1.1 of this document. Conformance is based on demonstration of meeting all of the optical requirements over the bandpass specified in GR-910 Table 4-3. No nonconforming deviations were noted in testing. Sample Size Eleven samples, in accordance with 20% LTPD specified in GR-910-CORE, Issue 2, were used in the test program. In addition, eleven samples were added to serve as hot spares for replacing sample(s) with nonconformance identified in the test program. Failure History Not applicable. Disposition of Nonconformance Not applicable. Test Data The following graph represents the entire set of samples tested. This includes a total of eleven (11) samples of buildout attenuators (BOA). TP-910 Figure 4-103 presents the spectral attenuation measurements (including connection losses of about 0.5 dB) taken as a baseline for the Optical Bandpass requirements for all of the eleven test samples from 1250 nm through 1650 nm. Telcordia Technologies, Inc. Confidential -- Restricted Access See confidentiality restrictions on title page. 4-136 502-1198 Rev A Confidential -- Restricted Access DA-1543 Issue 1, Revision 4 February 3, 2005 Tyco Electronics 3-dB SC Singlemode Fiber Optic Buildout Attenuators Performance Criteria Tyco Electronics, 3-dB Attenuators, Spectral Attenuation 4.0 3.8 i.l.01 3.6 i.l.02 i.l.03 Insertion Loss (dB) 3.4 i.l.04 i.l.05 3.2 i.l.06 3.0 i.l.07 i.l.08 2.8 i.l.09 i.l.10 2.6 i.l.11 AM Video 2.4 Digital +/- 0.5 dB 2.2 2.0 1250 1300 1350 1400 1450 1500 1550 1600 Wavelength (nm) TP-910 Figure 4-103 Spectral Attenuation Measurements from 1250 nm to 1650 nm 4.2.2 Change in Attenuation This requirement addresses the change in attenuation (insertion loss) before, during and after environmental and mechanical stress. This requirement applies to the environmental and mechanical criteria in Section 4.1. 4.2.2.1 Criteria - Change in Attenuation (heading not from GR-910) GR-910 CR4-21 [58] For all digital applications the maximum or minimum change in attenuation before, during, or after, any or all environmental or mechanical tests shall be 0.5 dB or 0.15A, whichever is less. GR-910 CR4-22 [59] For all AM video applications the maximum or minimum change in attenuation before, during, or after, any or all environmental or mechanical tests shall be 0.5 dB or 0.10A, whichever is less. Rationale: If attenuators are used in AM video systems or Digital systems they must be accurate so as not to exceed the system's power budget. It is not practical Telcordia Technologies, Inc. Confidential -- Restricted Access See confidentiality restrictions on title page. 502-1198 Rev A 4-137 Confidential -- Restricted Access DA-1543 Issue 1, Revision 4 February 3, 2005 Tyco Electronics 3-dB SC Singlemode Fiber Optic Buildout Attenuators Performance Criteria to allow for a greater increase in attenuation, during the service life of the attenuator, due to mechanical and environmental stress. 4.2.2.2 Test Method (not from GR-910) 4.2.2.3 Test Flowchart (not from GR-910) 4.2.2.4 Test Configuration and Conditions (not from GR-910) This section discusses a method of measuring the attenuation change of a attenuator. It applies to all tests which specify an attenuation change requirement. Variable attenuators are to be assigned settings in increments of not less than 3 or 5 dB, depending on their application, ranging from their minimum to maximum setting. Variable attenuators must not have their attenuation setting adjusted during these tests, except at the end of each test, to check the adjustment mechanism for damage, or when otherwise specified. Light sources must be within the required optical bandpass from GR-910 Table 4-3, and insertion loss from splices and connectors is excluded. Connector loss can be excluded by cutting them off, or if a non-destructive test is desired, by substituting the DUT with a jumper cable with equivalent connectors. In the latter case, the connector repeatability determines the measurement uncertainty. FOTP-57 gives the procedure for fiber end face preparation. FOTP-127 gives the procedure for measuring the source central wavelength. FOTP-20 gives the procedure for measuring optical transmittance. TP-910 Figure 4-104 diagrams the procedure for measuring the change in attenuation, which consists of the following steps. 1. Measure the Reference Power Pi Fusion Splice Source Power Meter 2. Measure the Insertion Loss of the Attenuator MF DUT Source Po MF Power Meter TP-910 Figure 4-104 Attenuation Loss Measurement 1. Fiber End Face Preparation Telcordia Technologies, Inc. Confidential -- Restricted Access See confidentiality restrictions on title page. 4-138 502-1198 Rev A DA-1543 Issue 1, Revision 4 February 3, 2005 Confidential -- Restricted Access Tyco Electronics 3-dB SC Singlemode Fiber Optic Buildout Attenuators Performance Criteria For attenuators with a bare fiber pigtail, the fiber end face should be clean and cleaved well or polished well if it is to be directly attached to a detector using a bare fiber adapter. Otherwise, the fiber may be connectorized or fusion spliced to a connectorized optical pigtail to facilitate light monitoring. All connectors, connector interfaces, and connector receptacles are to be cleaned in accordance with Section 4.3 of GR-326-CORE. Make sure the source power is off, for eye safety, and then inspect the connector end face using a microscope. Mate attenuators with an integral connector receptacle, or connector interfaces to a connectorized fiber jumper and do not disturb the fibers launch condition. 2. Measure the Incident Optical Power, Pi Use a stable optical power source having a central wavelength which is within the wavelength range of the attenuator under test. Connect the source to an optical power meter using a launch jumper with the same connectors as the attenuator under test. A 2-meter length of the jumper cable will be a sufficient mode filter, provided that the cable conforms to the requirements of GR-409-CORE and there are at least two 360 loops in the 2-meter length. The optical power meter should now display the incident (input) optical power, Pi. For power meters having a REFERENCE feature, press the REF key to enter Pi as the reference. The connection to the source must not be disturbed, and the coupling efficiency of the connection to the detector in Step 3 must be equivalent to the coupling efficiency obtained in Step 2. 3. Determine the Attenuation If the attenuator under test is connectorized, mate the connector to the detector end of the launch jumper, otherwise, cut the launch jumper in half and fusion splice (with 0.02 dB loss per splice) the attenuator to both halves. The optical power meter should now display the output optical power, Po. Then the attenuation is: A = 10 log10 (Pi / Po ) (4-4) If the optical power meter reference feature has been used, the attenuation, A should be displayed automatically. 4. Determine the Final Attenuation Repeat Step 3 to determine the final attenuation. Measure the attenuation in both directions of light propagation. 5. Compare Results Against Requirements Compare the attenuation values against the requirement and objective from Section 4.2.2. The transmission measurement facility in TP-910 Figure 4-105 or loss spectra (from TP-910 Figure 4-102) can also be used to determine insertion loss within a (typical) measurement uncertainty of 0.5 dB. Telcordia Technologies, Inc. Confidential -- Restricted Access See confidentiality restrictions on title page. 502-1198 Rev A 4-139 Confidential -- Restricted Access Tyco Electronics 3-dB SC Singlemode Fiber Optic Buildout Attenuators Performance Criteria DA-1543 Issue 1, Revision 4 February 3, 2005 Source TP-910 Figure 4-105 Transmission Measurement Facility In accordance with Verizon requirements, this facility is equipped to make measurements at four wavelengths, 1310 nm, 1490 nm, 1550 nm and 1625 nm, accurate to 0.05 dB for transmittance and 1 dB for reflectance down to -60 dB. While this measurement system is recommended, other configurations capable of meeting the relevant measurement requirements are acceptable. For attenuators in which the leads were connectorized by the supplier, the connectors and leads should be inside the test chamber to check for fiber pistoning. This may result in additional measurement uncertainty attributable to variations in connector loss. The measurement facility functions as follows: Switch 3 selects light from one of four laser sources emitting near 1 = 1310 nm, 2 = 1490 nm, 3 = 1550 nm or 4 = 1625 nm. The Device Under Test (DUT) is fusion spliced between the source switch (Switch 1) and the detector switch (Switch 2). The source switch is used to launch light into any of the devices under test. The detector switch connects any DUT to the power meter, measuring transmitted power and reflected power. The Coupler directs the optical power reflected by the DUT to port (r) on Switch 2 for detection. A reference fiber, located at port (m) of Switch 1 and 2, is used to correct for variations in source power over time. A reflectance reference (suggested value is -60 1 dB) is located at port (r) of Switch 1, and is used to calculate reflectance from the measured optical power. Insertion loss is calculated by subtracting the power transmitted through the reference fiber from the power transmitted through the DUT. Reflectance is calculated by subtracting the power reflected by the reflectance reference from the power reflected by the DUT. All other switch ports are dedicated to DUTs. The Switches, Power Meter and Environmental Chambers are computer controlled via GPIB interface. Laser sources are preferred over LEDs because source coherence affects both the DUT reflectance, and the loss of the switches. Fusion splices are recommended for their low loss and low reflectance. To obtain accurate reflectance measurements, Telcordia Technologies, Inc. Confidential -- Restricted Access See confidentiality restrictions on title page. 4-140 502-1198 Rev A DA-1543 Issue 1, Revision 4 February 3, 2005 Confidential -- Restricted Access Tyco Electronics 3-dB SC Singlemode Fiber Optic Buildout Attenuators Performance Criteria all components in the measurement facility, including the power meter, splices and switches, should have a reflectance of -65 dB. The Coupler should have a directivity of 70 dB. Mode filters between the splices and DUT ensure single-mode transmission. A 2-meter length of the jumper cable will be a sufficient mode filter, provided that the cable conforms to the requirements of GR-409-CORE and there are at least two 360 loops in the 2 meter length. Refer to GR-326-CORE for additional details regarding measurement of loss and reflectance using the Transmission Measurement Facility. 4.2.2.5 Test Apparatus (not from GR-910) Description Supplier Model Calibration Cycle Calibration Due Date. Optical Tunable Light Source Agilent 8164A 12 months - Sensor for Tunable Multimeter Agilent 81640A 12 months - Broadband Stabilized Light Source Anritsu MG 922 A 12 months - Optical Spectrum Analyzer Anritsu MS 9710 B 12 months - Fiber cleaning supplies: alcohol, compressed air, lintfree wipes, and lint-free tipped probes - - - - 4.2.2.6 Summary of Test Results (not from GR-910) Conformance/Nonconformance Conformance is based on demonstration of meeting the allocated change in attenuation before, during and after environmental and mechanical stress as applied to in Section 4.1. The status of each environmental and mechanical stress influence as well as the performance of each individual sample is described in the pertinent subsections of section of Section 4.1. Nonconformances to the less stringent criteria of GR-910 CR4-21 [58] and GR-910 CR4-22 [59] were observed in Section 4.1.9, "Side Pull Load," both during and after, and Section 4.1.10, "Cable Retention." Refer to the Executive Summary for details on this criteria. Sample Size Eleven samples, in accordance with 20% LTPD specified in GR-910-CORE, Issue 2, were used in the test program. In addition, eleven samples were added to serve as hot spares for replacing sample(s) with nonconformance identified in the test program. Telcordia Technologies, Inc. Confidential -- Restricted Access See confidentiality restrictions on title page. 502-1198 Rev A 4-141 Confidential -- Restricted Access DA-1543 Issue 1, Revision 4 February 3, 2005 Tyco Electronics 3-dB SC Singlemode Fiber Optic Buildout Attenuators Performance Criteria Failure History Not applicable. Disposition of Nonconformance Not applicable. Test Data The following chart represents the entire set of samples tested. This includes a total of eleven (11) samples of buildout attenuators (BOA). TP-910 Figure 4-106 presents the insertion loss measurements (including connection losses of about 0.5 dB) taken as a baseline for the Change in Attenuation requirements for all of the eleven test samples at 1310 nm, 1490 nm, 1550 nm and 1625 nm. Refer to the results presented in Section 4.1 for the during and after test measurements of which these values are compared to. Tyco Electronics, 3-dB Attenuators, Insertion Loss 4.0 3.5 Insertion Loss (dB) 3.0 2.5 2.0 1.5 1.0 1310 nm 1550 nm 0.5 AM Video Digital +/- 0.5 dB 1490 nm 1625 nm 0.0 i.l.01 i.l.02 i.l.03 i.l.04 i.l.05 i.l.06 Sample i.l.07 i.l.08 i.l.09 i.l.10 i.l.11 TP-910 Figure 4-106 Baseline Insertion Loss Measurements at 1310 nm, 1490 nm, 1550 nm and 1625 nm 4.2.3 Attenuation Tolerance Attenuation tolerance is the difference between the attenuation value V marked on a fixed attenuator or set on a variable attenuator and the measured attenuation of the attenuator. The following tolerance criteria will apply to all attenuators. Telcordia Technologies, Inc. Confidential -- Restricted Access See confidentiality restrictions on title page. 4-142 502-1198 Rev A DA-1543 Issue 1, Revision 4 February 3, 2005 Confidential -- Restricted Access Tyco Electronics 3-dB SC Singlemode Fiber Optic Buildout Attenuators Performance Criteria 4.2.3.1 Criteria - Attenuation Tolerance (heading not from GR-910) GR-910 CR4-23 [60] For attenuators intended for use in digital applications the attenuation tolerance shall not exceed 0.15V. GR-910 CR4-24 [61] For attenuators intended for use in AM video applications the attenuation tolerance shall not exceed 0.10V. Rationale: The attenuation tolerance requirement serves to limit the loss uncertainty when changes in attenuation are made. For example, an attenuator with a marked attenuation of "5 dB" must have an actual attenuation between 4.25 and 5.75 dB. "0 dB attenuators" are considered to be connector sleeves for which requirements are given in GR-326-CORE. 4.2.3.2 Test Method (not from GR-910) 4.2.3.3 Test Flowchart (not from GR-910) 4.2.3.4 Test Configuration and Conditions (not from GR-910) Light sources must be within the required optical bandpass from GR-910 Table 4-3, and insertion loss from splices and connectors is excluded. Connector loss can be excluded by cutting them off, or if a non-destructive test is desired, by substituting the DUT with a jumper cable with equivalent connectors. In the latter case, the connector repeatability determines the measurement uncertainty. FOTP-57 gives the procedure for fiber end face preparation. FOTP-127 gives the procedure for measuring the source central wavelength. FOTP-20 gives the procedure for measuring optical transmittance. TP-910 Figure 4-107 diagrams the procedure for measuring the change in attenuation, which consists of the following steps. Telcordia Technologies, Inc. Confidential -- Restricted Access See confidentiality restrictions on title page. 502-1198 Rev A 4-143 Confidential -- Restricted Access DA-1543 Issue 1, Revision 4 February 3, 2005 Tyco Electronics 3-dB SC Singlemode Fiber Optic Buildout Attenuators Performance Criteria 1. Measure the Reference Power Pi Fusion Splice Source Power Meter 2. Measure the Insertion Loss of the Attenuator MF DUT Source Po MF Power Meter TP-910 Figure 4-107 Attenuation Loss Measurement 1. Fiber End Face Preparation For attenuators with a bare fiber pigtail, the fiber end face should be clean and cleaved well or polished well if it is to be directly attached to a detector using a bare fiber adapter. Otherwise, the fiber may be connectorized or fusion spliced to a connectorized optical pigtail to facilitate light monitoring. All connectors, connector interfaces, and connector receptacles are to be cleaned in accordance with Section 4.3 of GR-326-CORE. Make sure the source power is off, for eye safety, and then inspect the connector end face using a microscope. Mate attenuators with an integral connector receptacle, or connector interfaces to a connectorized fiber jumper and do not disturb the fibers launch condition. 2. Measure the Incident Optical Power, Pi Use a stable optical power source having a central wavelength which is within the wavelength range of the attenuator under test. Connect the source to an optical power meter using a launch jumper with the same connectors as the attenuator under test. A 2-meter length of the jumper cable will be a sufficient mode filter, provided that the cable conforms to the requirements of GR-409-CORE and there are at least two 360 loops in the 2-meter length. The optical power meter should now display the incident (input) optical power, Pi. For power meters having a REFERENCE feature, press the REF key to enter Pi as the reference. The connection to the source must not be disturbed, and the coupling efficiency of the connection to the detector in Step 3 must be equivalent to the coupling efficiency obtained in Step 2. 3. Determine the Attenuation If the attenuator under test is connectorized, mate the connector to the detector end of the launch jumper, otherwise, cut the launch jumper in half and fusion splice (with 0.02 dB loss per splice) the attenuator to both halves. The optical Telcordia Technologies, Inc. Confidential -- Restricted Access See confidentiality restrictions on title page. 4-144 502-1198 Rev A Confidential -- Restricted Access DA-1543 Issue 1, Revision 4 February 3, 2005 Tyco Electronics 3-dB SC Singlemode Fiber Optic Buildout Attenuators Performance Criteria power meter should now display the output optical power, Po. Then the attenuation is: A = 10 log10 (Pi / Po ) (4-5) If the optical power meter reference feature has been used, the attenuation, A should be displayed automatically. 4. Determine the Final Attenuation Repeat Step 3 to determine the final attenuation. Measure the attenuation in both directions of light propagation. 5. Compare Results Against Requirements Compare the attenuation values against the requirement and objective from Section 4.2.2. The transmission measurement facility in TP-910 Figure 4-108 or loss spectra (from TP-910 Figure 4-102) can also be used to determine insertion loss within a (typical) measurement uncertainty of 0.5 dB. Source TP-910 Figure 4-108 Transmission Measurement Facility In accordance with Verizon requirements, this facility is equipped to make measurements at four wavelengths, 1310 nm, 1490 nm, 1550 nm and 1625 nm, accurate to 0.05 dB for transmittance and 1 dB for reflectance down to -60 dB. While this measurement system is recommended, other configurations capable of meeting the relevant measurement requirements are acceptable. For attenuators in which the leads were connectorized by the supplier, the connectors and leads should be inside the test chamber to check for fiber pistoning. This may result in additional measurement uncertainty attributable to variations in connector loss. The measurement facility functions as follows: Switch 3 selects light from one of Telcordia Technologies, Inc. Confidential -- Restricted Access See confidentiality restrictions on title page. 502-1198 Rev A 4-145 Confidential -- Restricted Access DA-1543 Issue 1, Revision 4 February 3, 2005 Tyco Electronics 3-dB SC Singlemode Fiber Optic Buildout Attenuators Performance Criteria four laser sources emitting near 1 = 1310 nm, 2 = 1490 nm, 3 = 1550 nm or 4 = 1625 nm. The Device Under Test (DUT) is fusion spliced between the source switch (Switch 1) and the detector switch (Switch 2). The source switch is used to launch light into any of the devices under test. The detector switch connects any DUT to the power meter, measuring transmitted power and reflected power. The Coupler directs the optical power reflected by the DUT to port (r) on Switch 2 for detection. A reference fiber, located at port (m) of Switch 1 and 2, is used to correct for variations in source power over time. A reflectance reference (suggested value is -60 1 dB) is located at port (r) of Switch 1, and is used to calculate reflectance from the measured optical power. Insertion loss is calculated by subtracting the power transmitted through the reference fiber from the power transmitted through the DUT. Reflectance is calculated by subtracting the power reflected by the reflectance reference from the power reflected by the DUT. All other switch ports are dedicated to DUTs. The Switches, Power Meter and Environmental Chambers are computer controlled via GPIB interface. Laser sources are preferred over LEDs because source coherence affects both the DUT reflectance, and the loss of the switches. Fusion splices are recommended for their low loss and low reflectance. To obtain accurate reflectance measurements, all components in the measurement facility, including the power meter, splices and switches, should have a reflectance of -65 dB. The Coupler should have a directivity of 70 dB. Mode filters between the splices and DUT ensure single-mode transmission. A 2-meter length of the jumper cable will be a sufficient mode filter, provided that the cable conforms to the requirements of GR-409-CORE and there are at least two 360 loops in the 2 meter length. Refer to GR-326-CORE for additional details regarding measurement of loss and reflectance using the Transmission Measurement Facility. 4.2.3.5 Test Apparatus (not from GR-910) Description Supplier Model Calibration Cycle Calibration Due Date. Optical Tunable Light Source Agilent 8164A 12 months - Sensor for Tunable Multimeter Agilent 81640A 12 months - Broadband Stabilized Light Source Anritsu MG 922 A 12 months - Optical Spectrum Analyzer Anritsu MS 9710 B 12 months - Fiber cleaning supplies: alcohol, compressed air, lintfree wipes, and lint-free tipped probes - - - - Telcordia Technologies, Inc. Confidential -- Restricted Access See confidentiality restrictions on title page. 4-146 502-1198 Rev A DA-1543 Issue 1, Revision 4 February 3, 2005 Confidential -- Restricted Access Tyco Electronics 3-dB SC Singlemode Fiber Optic Buildout Attenuators Performance Criteria 4.2.3.6 Summary of Test Results (not from GR-910) Conformance/Nonconformance All of the eleven test samples conformed to the criteria in Section 4.2.3.1 of this document. Conformance is based on demonstration of not exceeding the attenuation tolerance of the marked attenuation value labeled on the sample under test. Refer to the Executive Summary for details on this criteria. However, as shown in TP-910 Figure 4-109, the insertion loss of samples i.l.06 at the 1625 nm wavelength, i.l.07 at the 1625 nm wavelength and i.l.10 at the 1625 nm wavelength showed borderline performance to the more stringent criteria of GR-910 CR4-24 [61] which states that for attenuators intended for use in AM video applications, the attenuation tolerance shall not exceed 0.10V. Sample Size Eleven samples, in accordance with 20% LTPD specified in GR-910-CORE, Issue 2, were used in the test program. In addition, eleven samples were added to serve as hot spares for replacing sample(s) with nonconformance identified in the test program. Failure History Not applicable. Disposition of Nonconformance Not applicable. Test Data The following graph represents the entire set of samples tested. This includes a total of eleven (11) samples of buildout attenuators (BOA). TP-910 Figure 4-109 presents the attenuation measurements (including connection losses of about 0.5 dB) during the Attenuation Tolerance test for all of the eleven test samples from 1250 nm through 1650 nm. Tolerance values are indicated by the deviance from the nominal 3 dB value per wavelength. Telcordia Technologies, Inc. Confidential -- Restricted Access See confidentiality restrictions on title page. 502-1198 Rev A 4-147 Confidential -- Restricted Access DA-1543 Issue 1, Revision 4 February 3, 2005 Tyco Electronics 3-dB SC Singlemode Fiber Optic Buildout Attenuators Performance Criteria Tyco Electronics, 3-dB Attenuators, Insertion Loss 4.0 3.5 Insertion Loss (dB) 3.0 2.5 2.0 1.5 1.0 1310 nm 1550 nm 0.5 AM Video Digital +/- 0.5 dB 1490 nm 1625 nm 0.0 i.l.01 i.l.02 i.l.03 i.l.04 i.l.05 i.l.06 Sample i.l.07 i.l.08 i.l.09 i.l.10 i.l.11 TP-910 Figure 4-109 Baseline Insertion Loss Measurements at 1310 nm, 1490 nm, 1550 nm and 1625 nm 4.2.4 Attenuation Increments and Range The attenuation increment is the minimum attenuation step size in dB. The attenuation range is the minimum and maximum values of attenuation to which a variable attenuator can be set. This criteria is intended to ensure that attenuators are capable of the value and range necessary to cover the dynamic range of most fiber optic transmission systems. The minimum attenuation of an attenuator is its insertion loss. A low insertion loss is necessary since attenuation may be required in a transmission system when the system is put into operation, but changes over the life of the system may require that the loss of the attenuator be reduced. 4.2.4.1 Criteria - Attenuation Increments and Range (heading not from GR-910) GR-910 R4-25 [62] The attenuation range for attenuators shall be at least 5 to 20 dB. Telcordia Technologies, Inc. Confidential -- Restricted Access See confidentiality restrictions on title page. 4-148 502-1198 Rev A Confidential -- Restricted Access DA-1543 Issue 1, Revision 4 February 3, 2005 Tyco Electronics 3-dB SC Singlemode Fiber Optic Buildout Attenuators Performance Criteria GR-910 CR4-26 [63] For digital applications the attenuation increments for fixed and discretely variable attenuators shall be 5 dB. This means that fixed and variable attenuators can change in increments of no greater than 5 dB. GR-910 CR4-27 [64] For AM video applications the attenuation increments for fixed and discretely variable attenuators shall be 3 dB. GR-910 CO4-28 [65] For AM video applications the attenuation increments for fixed and discretely variable attenuators shall be 1 dB. GR-910 O4-29 [66] The attenuation range for attenuators should be at least 1 to 25 dB. 4.2.4.2 Test Method (not from GR-910) 4.2.4.3 Test Flowchart (not from GR-910) 4.2.4.4 Test Configuration and Conditions (not from GR-910) Light sources must be within the required optical bandpass as described in GR-910 Table 4-3, with insertion loss from splices and connectors excluded. Connector loss can be excluded by cutting them off, or if a non-destructive test is desired, by substituting the DUT with a jumper cable with equivalent connectors. In the latter case, the connector repeatability determines the measurement uncertainty. FOTP-57 gives the procedure for fiber end face preparation. FOTP-127 gives the procedure for measuring the source central wavelength. FOTP-20 gives the procedure for measuring optical transmittance. TP-910 Figure 4-110 diagrams the procedure for measuring the change in attenuation, which consists of the following steps. 1. Measure the Reference Power Pi Fusion Splice Source Power Meter 2. Measure the Insertion Loss of the Attenuator MF Source DUT Po MF Power Meter TP-910 Figure 4-110 Attenuation Loss Measurement Telcordia Technologies, Inc. Confidential -- Restricted Access See confidentiality restrictions on title page. 502-1198 Rev A 4-149 Confidential -- Restricted Access Tyco Electronics 3-dB SC Singlemode Fiber Optic Buildout Attenuators Performance Criteria DA-1543 Issue 1, Revision 4 February 3, 2005 1. Fiber End Face Preparation For attenuators with a bare fiber pigtail, the fiber end face should be clean and cleaved well or polished well if it is to be directly attached to a detector using a bare fiber adapter. Otherwise, the fiber may be connectorized or fusion spliced to a connectorized optical pigtail to facilitate light monitoring. All connectors, connector interfaces, and connector receptacles are to be cleaned in accordance with Section 4.3 of GR-326-CORE. Make sure the source power is off, for eye safety, and then inspect the connector end face using a microscope. Mate attenuators with an integral connector receptacle, or connector interfaces to a connectorized fiber jumper and do not disturb the fibers launch condition. 2. Measure the Incident Optical Power, Pi Use a stable optical power source having a central wavelength which is within the wavelength range of the attenuator under test. Connect the source to an optical power meter using a launch jumper with the same connectors as the attenuator under test. A 2-meter length of the jumper cable will be a sufficient mode filter, provided that the cable conforms to the requirements of GR-409-CORE and there are at least two 360 loops in the 2-meter length. The optical power meter should now display the incident (input) optical power, Pi. For power meters having a REFERENCE feature, press the REF key to enter Pi as the reference. The connection to the source must not be disturbed, and the coupling efficiency of the connection to the detector in Step 3 must be equivalent to the coupling efficiency obtained in Step 2. 3. Determine the Attenuation If the attenuator under test is connectorized, mate the connector to the detector end of the launch jumper, otherwise, cut the launch jumper in half and fusion splice (with 0.02 dB loss per splice) the attenuator to both halves. The optical power meter should now display the output optical power, Po. Then the attenuation is: A = 10 log10 (Pi / Po ) (4-6) If the optical power meter reference feature has been used, the attenuation, A should be displayed automatically. 4. Determine the Final Attenuation Repeat Step 3 to determine the final attenuation. Measure the attenuation in both directions of light propagation. 5. Compare Results Against Requirements Compare the attenuation values against the requirement and objective from Section 4.2.2. Telcordia Technologies, Inc. Confidential -- Restricted Access See confidentiality restrictions on title page. 4-150 502-1198 Rev A Confidential -- Restricted Access DA-1543 Issue 1, Revision 4 February 3, 2005 Tyco Electronics 3-dB SC Singlemode Fiber Optic Buildout Attenuators Performance Criteria The transmission measurement facility in TP-910 Figure 4-111 or loss spectra (from TP-910 Figure 4-102) can also be used to determine insertion loss within a (typical) measurement uncertainty of 0.5 dB. Source TP-910 Figure 4-111 Transmission Measurement Facility In accordance with Verizon requirements, this facility is equipped to make measurements at four wavelengths, 1310 nm, 1490 nm, 1550 nm and 1625 nm, accurate to 0.05 dB for transmittance and 1 dB for reflectance down to -60 dB. While this measurement system is recommended, other configurations capable of meeting the relevant measurement requirements are acceptable. For attenuators in which the leads were connectorized by the supplier, the connectors and leads should be inside the test chamber to check for fiber pistoning. This may result in additional measurement uncertainty attributable to variations in connector loss. The measurement facility functions as follows: Switch 3 selects light from one of four laser sources emitting near 1 = 1310 nm, 2 = 1490 nm, 3 = 1550 nm or 4 = 1625 nm. The Device Under Test (DUT) is fusion spliced between the source switch (Switch 1) and the detector switch (Switch 2). The source switch is used to launch light into any of the devices under test. The detector switch connects any DUT to the power meter, measuring transmitted power and reflected power. The Coupler directs the optical power reflected by the DUT to port (r) on Switch 2 for detection. A reference fiber, located at port (m) of Switch 1 and 2, is used to correct for variations in source power over time. A reflectance reference (suggested value is -60 1 dB) is located at port (r) of Switch 1, and is used to calculate reflectance from the measured optical power. Insertion loss is calculated by subtracting the power transmitted through the reference fiber from the power transmitted through the DUT. Reflectance is calculated by subtracting the power reflected by the reflectance reference from the power reflected by the DUT. All other switch ports are dedicated to DUTs. The Switches, Power Meter and Environmental Chambers are computer controlled via GPIB interface. Telcordia Technologies, Inc. Confidential -- Restricted Access See confidentiality restrictions on title page. 502-1198 Rev A 4-151 Confidential -- Restricted Access DA-1543 Issue 1, Revision 4 February 3, 2005 Tyco Electronics 3-dB SC Singlemode Fiber Optic Buildout Attenuators Performance Criteria Laser sources are preferred over LEDs because source coherence affects both the DUT reflectance, and the loss of the switches. Fusion splices are recommended for their low loss and low reflectance. To obtain accurate reflectance measurements, all components in the measurement facility, including the power meter, splices and switches, should have a reflectance of -65 dB. The Coupler should have a directivity of 70 dB. Mode filters between the splices and DUT ensure single-mode transmission. A 2-meter length of the jumper cable will be a sufficient mode filter, provided that the cable conforms to the requirements of GR-409-CORE and there are at least two 360 loops in the 2 meter length. Refer to GR-326-CORE for additional details regarding measurement of loss and reflectance using the Transmission Measurement Facility. 4.2.4.5 Test Apparatus (not from GR-910) Description Supplier Model Calibration Cycle Calibration Due Date. Optical Tunable Light Source Agilent 8164A 12 months - Sensor for Tunable Multimeter Agilent 81640A 12 months - Broadband Stabilized Light Source Anritsu MG 922 A 12 months - Optical Spectrum Analyzer Anritsu MS 9710 B 12 months - Fiber cleaning supplies: alcohol, compressed air, lintfree wipes, and lint-free tipped probes - - - - 4.2.4.6 Summary of Test Results (not from GR-910) Conformance/Nonconformance Not applicable. Failure History Not applicable. Disposition of Nonconformance Not applicable. Test Data Not applicable. Telcordia Technologies, Inc. Confidential -- Restricted Access See confidentiality restrictions on title page. 4-152 502-1198 Rev A DA-1543 Issue 1, Revision 4 February 3, 2005 Confidential -- Restricted Access Tyco Electronics 3-dB SC Singlemode Fiber Optic Buildout Attenuators Performance Criteria 4.2.5 Reflectance The discrete reflectance, R, is the ratio of reflected power, Pr, to the incident power, Pi, in units of negative dB. R (dB) = 10 log (Pr / Pi) (4-7) In an attenuator, optical power may propagate in both directions. The measurement does not include reflectance from connectors unless connectors are an integral part of the attenuator. Reflectance must be the worst-case value at a nominal wavelength for each wavelength region. Ideally, the criteria would be met for the entire bandpass. 4.2.5.1 Criteria - Reflectance (heading not from GR-910) GR-910 R4-30 [67] The maximum reflectance for attenuators intended for use in Digital systems as bit rates up to 10 Gb/s shall be -40 dB over the entire bandpass of GR-910 CR4-17 [54] and GR-910 CO4-18 [55] and operating temperature range of -40C to 75C (-40F to 167F). GR-910 CR4-31 [68] The maximum reflectance for attenuators intended for use in AM-VSB systems shall be -55 dB over the entire bandpass of GR-910 CR4-20 [57] and operating temperature range of-40C to +75C. GR-910 CO4-32 [69] The maximum reflectance for attenuators intended for use in AMVSB systems should be -65 dB over the entire bandpass of GR-910 CR4-20 [57] and operating temperature range of-40C to +75C. Rationale: Low reflectance and optical return loss minimizes noise associated with reflections back to the laser source and noise caused by multiple reflection paths, both of which result in a system power penalty. The conditional requirement and objective are intended to support AM-VSB video transmission, which have been observed to incur multiple-reflection induced distortion in the presence of reflections below -60 dB. Reflectance -40 dB is most likely sufficient to support digital transmission at bit-rates up to at least 10 Gb/s. However, in future issues of Telcordia documents a single reflectance requirement and objective will be specified for all applications to limit product segregation. Telcordia Technologies, Inc. Confidential -- Restricted Access See confidentiality restrictions on title page. 502-1198 Rev A 4-153 Confidential -- Restricted Access Tyco Electronics 3-dB SC Singlemode Fiber Optic Buildout Attenuators Performance Criteria DA-1543 Issue 1, Revision 4 February 3, 2005 4.2.5.2 Test Method (not from GR-910) 4.2.5.3 Test Flowchart (not from GR-910) 4.2.5.4 Test Configuration and Conditions (not from GR-910) Reflectance is measured by Optical Continuous Wave Reflectometry (OCWR) per FOTP-107, which uses a coupler to provide a path for the reflected light. The light sources must be within the required optical bandpass from GR-910 Table 4-3. Connector reflectance is covered in GR-326-CORE for optical pad type and connector receptacle attenuators. Connector reflectance for patchcord (pigtail) type attenuators is excluded when measuring reflectance. Measure reflectance in both the directions of light propagation. Reflectance can be measured with the transmission measurement test facility shown in TP-910 Figure 4-112. See Section 5.2.1.2 of GR-326-CORE, for details. Source TP-910 Figure 4-112 Transmission Measurement Facility In accordance with Verizon requirements, this facility is equipped to make measurements at four wavelengths, 1310 nm, 1490 nm, 1550 nm and 1625 nm, accurate to 0.05 dB for transmittance and 1 dB for reflectance down to -60 dB. While this measurement system is recommended, other configurations capable of meeting the relevant measurement requirements are acceptable. For attenuators in which the leads were connectorized by the supplier, the connectors and leads should be inside the test chamber to check for fiber pistoning. This may result in additional measurement uncertainty attributable to variations in connector loss. The measurement facility functions as follows: Switch 3 selects light from one of four laser sources emitting near 1 = 1310 nm, 2 = 1490 nm, 3 = 1550 nm or Telcordia Technologies, Inc. Confidential -- Restricted Access See confidentiality restrictions on title page. 4-154 502-1198 Rev A DA-1543 Issue 1, Revision 4 February 3, 2005 Confidential -- Restricted Access Tyco Electronics 3-dB SC Singlemode Fiber Optic Buildout Attenuators Performance Criteria 4 = 1625 nm. The Device Under Test (DUT) is fusion spliced between the source switch (Switch 1) and the detector switch (Switch 2). The source switch is used to launch light into any of the devices under test. The detector switch connects any DUT to the power meter, measuring transmitted power and reflected power. The Coupler directs the optical power reflected by the DUT to port (r) on Switch 2 for detection. A reference fiber, located at port (m) of Switch 1 and 2, is used to correct for variations in source power over time. A reflectance reference (suggested value is -60 1 dB) is located at port (r) of Switch 1, and is used to calculate reflectance from the measured optical power. Insertion loss is calculated by subtracting the power transmitted through the reference fiber from the power transmitted through the DUT. Reflectance is calculated by subtracting the power reflected by the reflectance reference from the power reflected by the DUT. All other switch ports are dedicated to DUTs. The Switches, Power Meter and Environmental Chambers are computer controlled via GPIB interface. Laser sources are preferred over LEDs because source coherence affects both the DUT reflectance, and the loss of the switches. Fusion splices are recommended for their low loss and low reflectance. To obtain accurate reflectance measurements, all components in the measurement facility, including the power meter, splices and switches, should have a reflectance of -65 dB. The Coupler should have a directivity of 70 dB. Mode filters between the splices and DUT ensure single-mode transmission. A 2-meter length of the jumper cable will be a sufficient mode filter, provided that the cable conforms to the requirements of GR-409-CORE and there are at least two 360 loops in the 2 meter length. Refer to GR-326-CORE for additional details regarding measurement of loss and reflectance using the Transmission Measurement Facility. 4.2.5.5 Test Apparatus (not from GR-910) Description Supplier Model Calibration Cycle Calibration Due Date. Optical Tunable Light Source Agilent 8164A 12 months - Sensor for Tunable Multimeter Agilent 81640A 12 months - Broadband Stabilized Light Source Anritsu MG 922 A 12 months - Optical Spectrum Analyzer Anritsu MS 9710 B 12 months - Fiber cleaning supplies: alcohol, compressed air, lintfree wipes, and lint-free tipped probes - - - - Telcordia Technologies, Inc. Confidential -- Restricted Access See confidentiality restrictions on title page. 502-1198 Rev A 4-155 Confidential -- Restricted Access Tyco Electronics 3-dB SC Singlemode Fiber Optic Buildout Attenuators Performance Criteria DA-1543 Issue 1, Revision 4 February 3, 2005 4.2.5.6 Summary of Test Results (not from GR-910) Conformance/Nonconformance The baseline reflectance measurements presented in TP-910 Figure 4-113 shows conformance to GR-910 R4-30 [67] and GR-910 CR4-31 [68], but shows nonconformance to GR-910 CO4-32 [69]. this is a conditional objective and it is up to the end user the significance of this nonconforming issue. Conformance is based on demonstration that the maximum reflectance for attenuators is not exceeded for both digital systems as well as analog systems before, during and after environmental and mechanical stress as applied to in Section 4.1. The status of each requirement is described in each pertinent section of Section 4.1. Sample Size Eleven samples, in accordance with 20% LTPD specified in GR-910-CORE, Issue 2, were used in the test program. In addition, eleven samples were added to serve as hot spares for replacing sample(s) with nonconformance identified in the test program. Failure History Not applicable. Disposition of Nonconformance Not applicable. Test Data The following chart represents the entire set of samples tested. This includes a total of eleven (11) samples of buildout attenuators (BOA). TP-910 Figure 4-113 presents the reflectance measurements (including connection losses of about 0.5 dB) taken as a baseline for all of the eleven test samples at 1310 nm, 1490 nm, 1550 nm and 1625 nm, respectively. Refer to the results presented in Section 4.1 for the during and after test measurements of which these values are compared to. Telcordia Technologies, Inc. Confidential -- Restricted Access See confidentiality restrictions on title page. 4-156 502-1198 Rev A Confidential -- Restricted Access DA-1543 Issue 1, Revision 4 February 3, 2005 Tyco Electronics 3-dB SC Singlemode Fiber Optic Buildout Attenuators Performance Criteria TYCO Electronics, 3-dB Attenuators, Reflectance -70.0 -65.0 Reflectance (dB) -60.0 -55.0 -50.0 -45.0 -40.0 1310 nm 1550 nm Req (D) CR (A) -35.0 1490 nm 1625 nm Req (A) -30.0 i.l.01 i.l.02 i.l.03 i.l.04 i.l.05 i.l.06 Sample i.l.07 i.l.08 i.l.09 i.l.10 i.l.11 TP-910 Figure 4-113 Baseline Reflectance Measurements at 1310 nm, 1490 nm, 1550 nm and 1625 nm 4.2.6 Polarization-Dependent Loss (PDL) PDL is the variation in insertion loss as the state of polarization (SOP) of the incident signal is varied over all orientations. 4.2.6.1 Criteria - Polarization-Dependent Loss (heading not from GR-910) GR-910 R4-33 [70] All optical requirements shall be met for all incident SOPs. GR-910 CR4-34 [71] For digital applications the maximum change in attenuation shall be 0.5 dB or 0.15A, whichever is less. GR-910 CR4-35 [72] For AM video applications the maximum change in attenuation shall be 0.5 dB or 0.10A, whichever is less. Rationale: The SOP of light propagating through fiber optic transmission systems, using conventional Class IVa single-mode fiber, is indeterminate. Therefore, attenuators used in these systems must be insensitive to the SOP. Telcordia Technologies, Inc. Confidential -- Restricted Access See confidentiality restrictions on title page. 502-1198 Rev A 4-157 Confidential -- Restricted Access Tyco Electronics 3-dB SC Singlemode Fiber Optic Buildout Attenuators Performance Criteria DA-1543 Issue 1, Revision 4 February 3, 2005 4.2.6.2 Test Method (not from GR-910) 1. Clean all optical connectors prior to use following cleaning procedure A or B described in GR-326-CORE, Section 4.3. The following cleaning procedure (Procedure A) shall be followed, unless the manufacturer of the DUT provides an alternative procedure (Procedure B). a. If both plugs have been removed from the adapter, blow compressed gas through the adapter. If both plugs are not to be removed, blow compressed gas into the open end of the adapter. b. Wipe completely around the ferrule of the plug twice with a lint-free wiping material that has been moistened with alcohol. Then wipe across the end of the ferrule. c. Repeat Step (b.) with a dry wipe. d. Blow compressed gas across the end of the ferrule. This is the final step before inserting the plug. Do not wipe the ferrule or allow it to touch anything after completion of this step and before the ferrule is inserted into the sleeve. e. Insert the plug in the adapter. f. If both plugs have been removed, repeat Steps (b.) through (e.) with the second plug. 2. Determine the output power spectrum launched by the light source being used with equipment shown in TP-910 Figure 4-115 to perform baseline reference measurements: received power versus wavelength. Sweep the light source or spectrum analyzer through the full range of operational wavelengths that comprise the DUT's anticipated bandwidth. 3. Save baseline measurements with their respective wavelength i, as the reference power, Reference Poweri, for each output fiber on hard disk. 4. Insert the device under test and a polarization controller into the test setup shown in TP-910 Figure 4-116. 5. Record polarization dependent power for each DUT output fiber, DUT Polarization Poweri, versus wavelength, k, on hard disk. Sweep the light source through the full range of operational wavelengths that comprise the DUT's anticipated bandwidth. During this measurement the polarization controller will be required to rotate the light through all states of polarization. The variations between the maximum and minimum DUT polarization poweri will define the variation in PDL of each DUT output fiber. 6. Compute the polarization dependent loss versus wavelength for each output fiber of the DUT by subtracting the reference power level for each wavelength from the power level with the DUT in place for the same wavelength. Max PDLi = Reference Poweri - Max DUT Polarization Poweri Telcordia Technologies, Inc. Confidential -- Restricted Access See confidentiality restrictions on title page. 4-158 502-1198 Rev A DA-1543 Issue 1, Revision 4 February 3, 2005 Confidential -- Restricted Access Tyco Electronics 3-dB SC Singlemode Fiber Optic Buildout Attenuators Performance Criteria Min PDLi = Reference Poweri - Min DUT Polarization Poweri 7. Compute the range of polarization dependent loss, LI, versus wavelength for each output fiber of the DUT by calculating the difference between the maximum and minimum DUT Polarization Poweri for each. LI = Max DUT Polarization Poweri - Min DUT Polarization Poweri 8. Does Max and Min PDLi meet all optical requirements of GR-910 for all SOP as per GR-910? 9. No - investigate the nature of the failure using the Telcordia Nonconforming Product Process. 10. Yes - does LI meet the requirements of GR-910? 11. No - investigate the nature of the failure using the Telcordia Nonconforming Product Process. 12. Go on to the next product test. Telcordia Technologies, Inc. Confidential -- Restricted Access See confidentiality restrictions on title page. 502-1198 Rev A 4-159 Confidential -- Restricted Access DA-1543 Issue 1, Revision 4 February 3, 2005 Tyco Electronics 3-dB SC Singlemode Fiber Optic Buildout Attenuators Performance Criteria 4.2.6.3 Test Flowchart (not from GR-910) Clean all optical connectors, see GR-326CORE, Section 4.3, Method A or B. Blow compressed air through the connector adapter. Setup Equipment as is shown in TP-1209 Figure 4-48. Wipe each plug twice with lint-free cloth moistened with alcohol. Wipe across end of ferrule. Perform baseline measurements: Reference Pwri versus i, save. Wipe each plug twice with lint-free cloth. Wipe across end of ferrule. Insert device under test (DUT) and polarization controller into test setup, as per TP-1209 Figure 4-49. Blow compressed air through the connector adapter. Perform DUT measurements: DUT Polarization Pwri versus i, save. Insert mating connector plugs in adapter. Compute polarization dependent loss vs for each DUT output fiber by subtracting the reference power leveli for each wavelength from the power level with the DUT in place for the same wavelength. Max PDLi = Reference Poweri - Max DUT Polarization Poweri Min PDLi = Reference Poweri - Min DUT Polarization Poweri Compute range of polarization dependent loss, LI, versus for each DUT output fiber by calculating difference between the maximum and minimum DUT Polarization Poweri for each. LI = Max DUT Polarization Poweri - Min DUT Polarization Poweri Continue Telcordia Technologies, Inc. Confidential -- Restricted Access See confidentiality restrictions on title page. 4-160 502-1198 Rev A Confidential -- Restricted Access DA-1543 Issue 1, Revision 4 February 3, 2005 Tyco Electronics 3-dB SC Singlemode Fiber Optic Buildout Attenuators Performance Criteria continue Does Max and Min PDLi meet all optical criteiria of GR-1209 for all SOP as per GR-1209R4-52 [85]? No Investigate the nature of the failure using the Telcordia NonConforming Product Process. Yes Does LI meet requirements of GR1209 R4-53 [86]? No Investigate the nature of the failure using the Telcordia NonConforming Product Process. Yes Is DUT and Isolator or a circulator? No Test DUT as a filter Yes Continue Telcordia Technologies, Inc. Confidential -- Restricted Access See confidentiality restrictions on title page. 502-1198 Rev A 4-161 Confidential -- Restricted Access DA-1543 Issue 1, Revision 4 February 3, 2005 Tyco Electronics 3-dB SC Singlemode Fiber Optic Buildout Attenuators Performance Criteria continue Does isolator or circulator Max and Min PDLi meet all optical requirements of GR-1209 for all SOP as per GR-1209 R4-54 [87]? Investigate the nature of the failure using the Telcordia Non-Conforming Product Process. No Yes Does LI meet requirements of GR-1209 R4-55 [88] for isolators and GR-1209 R4-56 [89] for circulators? Investigate the nature of the failure using the Telcordia NonConforming Product Process. No Yes Is DUT a filter? No Go on to next product test Yes Continue Telcordia Technologies, Inc. Confidential -- Restricted Access See confidentiality restrictions on title page. 4-162 502-1198 Rev A Confidential -- Restricted Access DA-1543 Issue 1, Revision 4 February 3, 2005 Tyco Electronics 3-dB SC Singlemode Fiber Optic Buildout Attenuators Performance Criteria continue Does filter LI meet the requirements of GR-1209 R4-58 [91]? No Investigate the nature of the failure using the Telcordia Non-Conforming Product Process. Yes Go on to next product test TP-910 Figure 4-114 Test Flowchart - PDL Test (not from GR-910) 4.2.6.4 Test Configuration and Conditions (not from GR-910) The intent of this test is to determine compliance with the optical criteria given in Section 4.2.2 through Section 4.2.6, given incident light which is linearly polarized at any angle. Methods to more accurately determine PDL and the polarization sensitivity of passive components require further development, and such development is ongoing. Some test instruments now measure PDL. TP-910 Figure 4-117 shows a configuration for measuring PDL using a fiber coupled Polarization Controller (PC). The PC is a device that adjusts to select any SOP, such as an all-fiber PC, or a combination of a linear polarizer (P), quarter-wave plate (Q), and a half-wave plate (H), which are compatible with the wavelength of the source. The important characteristics of the measurement apparatus are: * PDL must be demonstrated for at least at one nominal wavelength within each of the 1310 nm and 1550 nm regions. * The Optical Source launches temporally stable light, with 10 nm spectral width, and an extinction ratio of 20 dB, into single-mode fiber. * Bends in conventional Class IVa or IVb single-mode fiber will modify the state of polarization. For this reason, the device launch pigtail must be deployed in a straight configuration, and must not be moved during the polarization measurement. Telcordia Technologies, Inc. Confidential -- Restricted Access See confidentiality restrictions on title page. 502-1198 Rev A 4-163 Confidential -- Restricted Access DA-1543 Issue 1, Revision 4 February 3, 2005 Tyco Electronics 3-dB SC Singlemode Fiber Optic Buildout Attenuators Performance Criteria * The DUT should be spliced into the optical path to avoid varying the SOP, otherwise connect the attenuator between the PC and the detector power meter. Attenuators with connectors incur a greater PDL. * The test procedures in Section 5.2.1 through Section 5.2.4 are to be followed, to measure the particular optical characteristic of interest. * Adjust the polarization controller to measure the worst-case value for the characteristic of interest. The plane of polarization should be rotated through an angle of 180. If using a PQH Controller: * Rotate P until the maximum power is obtained. * Alternatively, rotate Q and H to obtain the worst-case value for the characteristic of interest. * To determine L, alternatively, rotate Q and H to obtain the highest power level, and subtract from the lowest power level (from the previous step) Optical power meter Tunable laser TP-910 Figure 4-115 Reference Configuration for PDL Tests (not from GR-910) Tunable laser Polarization controller Optical power meter DUT TP-910 Figure 4-116 Through-DUT Configuration for PDL Tests (not from GR910) O ptical S ource P olarization Controller D UT P ow er M eter TP-910 Figure 4-117 Configuration for Measuring Polarization Dependent Loss Telcordia Technologies, Inc. Confidential -- Restricted Access See confidentiality restrictions on title page. 4-164 502-1198 Rev A DA-1543 Issue 1, Revision 4 February 3, 2005 Confidential -- Restricted Access Tyco Electronics 3-dB SC Singlemode Fiber Optic Buildout Attenuators Performance Criteria 4.2.6.5 Test Apparatus (not from GR-910) Description Supplier Model Calibration Cycle Calibration Due Date. Optical Tunable Light Source Agilent 8164A 12 months - Sensor for Tunable Multimeter Agilent 81640A 12 months - Polarization Controller HP 11896A 12 months - Fiber cleaning supplies: alcohol, compressed air, lintfree wipes, and lint-free tipped probes - - - - 4.2.6.6 Summary of Test Results (not from GR-910) Conformance/Nonconformance All of the eleven samples conformed to the criteria in Section 4.2.6.1 of this document. Conformance is based on demonstration that all optical requirements are met for all incident states of polarization and that the maximum change in attenuation is within the required criteria. Sample Size Eleven samples, in accordance with 20% LTPD specified in GR-910-CORE, Issue 2, were used in the test program. In addition, eleven samples were added to serve as hot spares for replacing sample(s) with nonconformance identified in the test program. Failure History Not applicable. Disposition of Nonconformance Not applicable. Test Data The following chart represents the entire set of samples tested. This includes a total of eleven (11) samples of buildout attenuators (BOA). TP-910 Figure 4-118 presents Polarization-Dependent Loss (PDL) measurements for all of the eleven test samples at 1310 nm, 1490 nm, 1550 nm and 1625 nm, respectively. Telcordia Technologies, Inc. Confidential -- Restricted Access See confidentiality restrictions on title page. 502-1198 Rev A 4-165 Confidential -- Restricted Access DA-1543 Issue 1, Revision 4 February 3, 2005 Tyco Electronics 3-dB SC Singlemode Fiber Optic Buildout Attenuators Performance Criteria TYCO Electronics, 3-dB Attenuators, PDL 0.50 0.45 1310 nm 1550 nm Req (D) 0.40 PDL (dB) 0.35 1490 nm 1625 nm Req (A) 0.30 0.25 0.20 0.15 0.10 0.05 0.00 i.l.01 i.l.02 i.l.03 i.l.04 i.l.05 i.l.06 i.l.07 i.l.08 i.l.09 i.l.10 i.l.11 Sample # TP-910 Figure 4-118 Polarization-Dependent Loss (PDL) at 1310 nm, 1490 nm, 1550 nm and 1625 nm 4.2.7 Polarization-Mode Dispersion (PMD) PMD is the dispersion, or difference between arrival times, of pulses which travel through optical fiber as ordinary and extraordinary rays. In optical fiber cable, PMD is statistical, varying with time and changes in wavelength, temperature, vibration, etc. Although, PMD in optical components is more stable and the ratio of standard deviation to the mean is much smaller, optical components contribute to the overall PMD of an optical transmission system. All optical components including attenuators must be compatible with optical fiber transmission systems and not contribute significantly to the total PMD in the optical path. 4.2.7.1 Criteria - Polarization Mode Dispersion (heading not from GR-910) GR-910 R4-36 [79] The maximum value of dispersion (in ps) shall not exceed 0.2 ps for all operating wavelengths. Telcordia Technologies, Inc. Confidential -- Restricted Access See confidentiality restrictions on title page. 4-166 502-1198 Rev A DA-1543 Issue 1, Revision 4 February 3, 2005 Confidential -- Restricted Access Tyco Electronics 3-dB SC Singlemode Fiber Optic Buildout Attenuators Performance Criteria 4.2.7.2 Test Method (not from GR-910) 1. Clean all optical connectors prior to use following cleaning procedure A or B described in GR-326-CORE, Section 4.3. The following cleaning procedure (Procedure A) shall be followed, unless the manufacturer of the DUT provides an alternative procedure (Procedure B). a. If both plugs have been removed from the adapter, blow compressed gas through the adapter. If both plugs are not to be removed, blow compressed gas into the open end of the adapter. b. Wipe completely around the ferrule of the plug twice with a lint-free wiping material that has been moistened with alcohol. Then wipe across the end of the ferrule. c. Repeat Step (b.) with a dry wipe. d. Blow compressed gas across the end of the ferrule. This is the final step before inserting the plug. Do not wipe the ferrule or allow it to touch anything after completion of this step and before the ferrule is inserted into the sleeve. e. Insert the plug in the adapter. f. If both plugs have been removed, repeat Steps (b.) through (e.) with the second plug. 2. Determine the output power spectrum launched by the light source being used with equipment shown in TP-910 Figure 4-120 to perform baseline reference measurements: received power versus wavelength. Sweep the light source or spectrum analyzer through the full range of operational wavelengths that comprise the DUT's anticipated bandwidth. 3. Measure the PMD delay time for each DUT output fiber using the PMD test setup shown in TP-910 Figure 4-121. 4. Does the PMD delay time for each DUT output fiber meet GR-910? 5. No - investigate the nature of the failure using the Telcordia Nonconforming Product Process. 6. Go on to the next product test. Telcordia Technologies, Inc. Confidential -- Restricted Access See confidentiality restrictions on title page. 502-1198 Rev A 4-167 Confidential -- Restricted Access DA-1543 Issue 1, Revision 4 February 3, 2005 Tyco Electronics 3-dB SC Singlemode Fiber Optic Buildout Attenuators Performance Criteria 4.2.7.3 Test Flowchart (not from GR-910) Blow compressed air through the connector adapter. Wipe each plug twice with lint-free cloth moistened with alcohol. Wipe across end of ferrule. Clean all optical connectors, see GR-326CORE, Section 4.3, Method A or B. Setup Equipment and DUT as is shown in TP-1209 Figure 4-60. Note, equipment includes a PMD transmitter and receiver. Perform PMD delay time measurements: DUT Polarization Pwri versus i, save. Wipe each plug twice with lint-free cloth. Wipe across end of ferrule. Blow compressed air through the connector adapter. Does PMD delay timefor DUT output fiber meet GR-1209 R4-60 [93]? No Investigate the nature of the failure using the Telcordia Non-Conforming Product Process. Insert mating connector plugs in adapter. Yes Is the DUT an isolator or circulator? No Skip to next product test, Yes Does PMD delay time for isolator/circulator meet GR-1209 R4-61 [94] No Investigate the nature of the failure using the Telcordia NonConforming Product Process. Yes continue Telcordia Technologies, Inc. Confidential -- Restricted Access See confidentiality restrictions on title page. 4-168 502-1198 Rev A Confidential -- Restricted Access DA-1543 Issue 1, Revision 4 February 3, 2005 Tyco Electronics 3-dB SC Singlemode Fiber Optic Buildout Attenuators Performance Criteria continue Compute the central frequency,fc , for both curves. Does variation in fc for polarization effect meet GR-1209 R4-59 [92]? No Investigate the nature of the failure using the Telcordia NonConforming Product Process. Yes Go on to next product test. TP-910 Figure 4-119 Test Flowchart - PMD (not from GR-910) 4.2.7.4 Test Configuration and Conditions (not from GR-910) The measurement of PMD can be accomplished by the fixed analyzer method in FOTP-113, the Jones matrix analysis in FOTP-122, or the interferometric method in FOTP-124. There are commercially available measurement instruments capable of measuring PDL and PMD. PMD Light Source PMD Receiver TP-910 Figure 4-120 Reference Configuration for PMD Tests (not from GR-910) Telcordia Technologies, Inc. Confidential -- Restricted Access See confidentiality restrictions on title page. 502-1198 Rev A 4-169 Confidential -- Restricted Access DA-1543 Issue 1, Revision 4 February 3, 2005 Tyco Electronics 3-dB SC Singlemode Fiber Optic Buildout Attenuators Performance Criteria PMD Light SOurce PMD Receiver DUT TP-910 Figure 4-121 Configuration for PMD Tests (not from GR-910) 4.2.7.5 Test Apparatus (not from GR-910) Description Supplier Model Calibration Cycle Calibration Due Date. PMD Light Source EXFO FLS210A-03B-70 12 months - PMD Receiver EXFO 5500 12 months - Fiber cleaning supplies: alcohol, compressed air, lintfree wipes, and lint-free tipped probes - - - - 4.2.7.6 Summary of Test Results (not from GR-910) Conformance/Nonconformance All of the eleven samples conformed to the criteria in Section 4.2.7.1 of this document. Conformance is based on demonstration that the maximum value of dispersion is not exceeded for all operating wavelengths. Sample Size Eleven samples, in accordance with 20% LTPD specified in GR-910-CORE, Issue 2, were used in the test program. In addition, eleven samples were added to serve as hot spares for replacing sample(s) with nonconformance identified in the test program. Failure History Not applicable. Disposition of Nonconformance Not applicable. Telcordia Technologies, Inc. Confidential -- Restricted Access See confidentiality restrictions on title page. 4-170 502-1198 Rev A Confidential -- Restricted Access DA-1543 Issue 1, Revision 4 February 3, 2005 Tyco Electronics 3-dB SC Singlemode Fiber Optic Buildout Attenuators Performance Criteria Test Data The following chart represents the entire set of samples tested. This includes a total of eleven (11) samples of buildout attenuators (BOA). TP-910 Figure 4-122 presents Polarization-Mode Dispersion (PMD) measurements for all of the eleven test samples. Tyco Electronics, 3-dB Attenuators, PMD 0.25 PMD (ps) Req. PMD (ps) 0.20 0.15 0.10 0.05 0.00 i.l.01 i.l.02 i.l.03 i.l.04 i.l.05 i.l.06 i.l.07 Sample# i.l.08 i.l.09 i.l.10 i.l.11 TP-910 Figure 4-122 Polarization-Mode Dispersion (PMD) measurements 4.2.8 Damage Criteria Damage criteria apply after each of the Environmental and Mechanical Tests, and after all testing. The attenuators and associated parts (i.e., connectors, pigtails) shall be inspected for damage that might impair the performance of the attenuator. This inspection shall include inspections for * Distortion * Package Cracks * Hardening or Softening of Materials * Fiber Breakage * Cable Pullout * Cable Jacket Damage * Cable Seal Damage Telcordia Technologies, Inc. Confidential -- Restricted Access See confidentiality restrictions on title page. 502-1198 Rev A 4-171 Confidential -- Restricted Access Tyco Electronics 3-dB SC Singlemode Fiber Optic Buildout Attenuators Performance Criteria DA-1543 Issue 1, Revision 4 February 3, 2005 * Damage to the Attenuation Element * Damage to the Variable Attenuation Adjustment Mechanism. 4.2.8.1 Criteria - Damage (heading not from GR-910) GR-910 R4-37 [73] At the completion of all tests there shall be no damage that would impair the performance of the attenuator. 4.2.8.2 Test Method (not from GR-910) 1. Review for damage is provided as a step within the test procedures documented in this section for each individual test. 2. Any damage observed and reported as a part of the other test procedures in this section shall be summarized for overall damage criteria conformance per the above requirement. 4.2.8.3 Test Flowchart (not from GR-910) Not applicable 4.2.8.4 Test Configuration and Conditions (not from GR-910) Not applicable 4.2.8.5 Test Apparatus (not from GR-910) Not applicable 4.2.8.6 Summary of Test Results (not from GR-910) Conformance/Nonconformance All of the eleven samples conformed to the criteria in Section 4.2.8.1 of this document. Conformance is based on demonstration that upon completion of all tests there is no damage sustained that would impair the performance of the attenuator. Sample Size Eleven samples, in accordance with 20% LTPD specified in GR-910-CORE, Issue 2, were used in the test program. In addition, eleven samples were added to serve as Telcordia Technologies, Inc. Confidential -- Restricted Access See confidentiality restrictions on title page. 4-172 502-1198 Rev A DA-1543 Issue 1, Revision 4 February 3, 2005 Confidential -- Restricted Access Tyco Electronics 3-dB SC Singlemode Fiber Optic Buildout Attenuators Performance Criteria hot spares for replacing sample(s) with nonconformance identified in the test program. Failure History Not applicable. Disposition of Nonconformance Not applicable. Test Data Not applicable. Telcordia Technologies, Inc. Confidential -- Restricted Access See confidentiality restrictions on title page. 502-1198 Rev A 4-173 Confidential -- Restricted Access Tyco Electronics 3-dB SC Singlemode Fiber Optic Buildout Attenuators Performance Criteria DA-1543 Issue 1, Revision 4 February 3, 2005 Telcordia Technologies, Inc. Confidential -- Restricted Access See confidentiality restrictions on title page. 4-174 502-1198 Rev A DA-1543 Issue 1, Revision 4 February 3, 2005 5.0 Confidential -- Restricted Access Tyco Electronics 3-dB SC Singlemode Fiber Optic Buildout Attenuators Performance Verification/Test Procedures Performance Verification/Test Procedures This section describes the test procedures for the performance analysis of singlemode fiber optic attenuators. These configurations and procedures are recommended. However, other configurations and procedures capable of meeting the relevant measurement requirements are not excluded. The performance verification and test procedures presented in this section are presented in parallel with the requirements given in Section 4, and they will be used as a basis for analyzing attenuators. Performance tests are designed not only to verify performance of attenuators, but also to determine the performance of attenuators under severe environmental and mechanical conditions which may degrade their performance. The standard test procedures and conditions defined in EIA/TIA-455-A are to be used for testing. The following conditions also apply to these test procedures: * All tests are performed at a room temperature of 23 5C (73 9F) and a relative humidity of 30% to 70% unless otherwise specified. * The test instruments are allowed to stabilize for the minimum time specified by the equipment manufacturer prior to any measurement or 1 hour, whichever is greater. * All test equipment is properly calibrated. Optical power meters have a relative accuracy 0.05 dB for all power levels from 0 dBm to - 80 dBm, for all wavelengths from 1260 nm to 1580 nm. * Work procedures, such as the mating of connectors or the adjustments of attenuator settings, that have a potential for altering the measurements are performed strictly in accordance with the written instructions supplied with the product. * The manufacturer selects1 samples of the product to be used in the analysis at random, from stock that represents the manufacturer's normal production. The sample of the product for analysis shall be shipped by the manufacturer to the testing agency with the complete packing and marking that product supplied to a customer would normally have. * The performance of an optical attenuator may depend on the cleanliness of the attenuation element, connector receptacle and integral connectors, or connector interfaces. It is the responsibility of the supplier to provide cleaning instructions for attenuation elements that are accessible to the end user. Attenuators with accessible attenuation elements shall be cleaned according to the suppliers instructions. All optical connector receptacles, connectors, and connector interfaces shall be cleaned in accordance with Section 4.3 of GR-326CORE. 1. Telcordia reserves the option to select product for analysis. Telcordia Technologies, Inc. Confidential -- Restricted Access See confidentiality restrictions on title page. 502-1198 Rev A 5-1 Confidential -- Restricted Access Tyco Electronics 3-dB SC Singlemode Fiber Optic Buildout Attenuators Performance Verification/Test Procedures DA-1543 Issue 1, Revision 4 February 3, 2005 * A minimum of 11 attenuator samples per test allowing no failures is suggested for testing per FOTP-3A. This corresponds to a Lot Tolerance Percentage Defective (LTPD) of 20%. LTPD is described in Appendix B of Military Specification MIL-M-38510J. Smaller sample sizes are not sufficient to establish a statistically meaningful result. * All samples undergo sequential testing in the order presented in this document. 5.1 Environmental and Mechanical Testing These tests are intended to demonstrate the operation of attenuators under environmental stress, but not reliability. For a complete set of reliability tests, refer to GR-1221-CORE. For each test, compliance against the change in attenuation criteria is determined by measuring the attenuation as described in Section 5.2.2, or measure the optical transmittance and calculate the attenuation per FOTP-20, during or after each test. The compliance against the reflectance criteria is determined by measuring reflectance per FOTP-107, during or after each test. Visual and mechanical inspection should follow FOTP-13. The operating and non-operating environmental criteria require monitoring during testing. This can be accomplished using a Transmission Measurement Facility shown in GR-910 Figure 5-1, or another comparable system. GR-910 Figure 5-1 Transmission Measurement Facility This facility makes measurements in both the 1310 nm and 1550 nm wavelength regions, accurate to 0.05 dB for transmittance and 1 dB for reflectance down to - 60 dB. While this measurement system is recommended, other configurations capable of meeting the relevant measurement requirements are acceptable. For attenuators in which the leads were connectorized by the supplier, the connectors Telcordia Technologies, Inc. Confidential -- Restricted Access See confidentiality restrictions on title page. 5-2 502-1198 Rev A DA-1543 Issue 1, Revision 4 February 3, 2005 Confidential -- Restricted Access Tyco Electronics 3-dB SC Singlemode Fiber Optic Buildout Attenuators Performance Verification/Test Procedures and leads should be inside the test chamber to check for fiber pistoning. This may result in additional measurement uncertainty attributable to variations in connector loss. The measurement facility functions as follows: Switch 3 selects light from one of two laser sources emitting near 1 = 1310 nm or 2 = 1550 nm. The Device Under Test (DUT) is fusion spliced between the source switch (Switch 1) and the detector switch (Switch 2). The source switch is used to launch light into any of the devices under test. The detector switch connects any DUT to the power meter, measuring transmitted power and reflected power. The Coupler directs the optical power reflected by the DUT to port (r) on Switch 2 for detection. A reference fiber, located at port (m) of Switch 1 and 2, is used to correct for variations in source power over time. A reflectance reference (suggested value is - 60 1 dB) is located at port (r) of Switch 1, and is used to calculate reflectance from the measured optical power. Insertion loss is calculated by subtracting the power transmitted through the reference fiber from the power transmitted through the DUT. Reflectance is calculated by subtracting the power reflected by the reflectance reference from the power reflected by the DUT. All other switch ports are dedicated to DUTs. The Switches, Power Meter and Environmental Chambers are computer controlled via GPIB interface. Laser sources are preferred over LEDs because source coherence affects both the DUT reflectance, and the loss of the switches. Fusion splices are recommended for their low loss and low reflectance. To obtain accurate reflectance measurements, all components in the measurement facility, including the power meter, splices and switches, should have a reflectance - 65 dB. The Coupler should have a directivity of 70 dB. Mode filters between the splices and DUT ensure single-mode transmission. A 2-meter length of the jumper cable will be a sufficient mode filter, provided that the cable conforms to the requirements of GR-409-CORE and there are at least two 360 loops in the 2 meter length. Refer to GR-326-CORE for additional details regarding measurement of loss and reflectance using the Transmission Measurement Facility. 5.1.1 Controlled Operating Environment The product shall be tested according to the performance requirements in Section 4 while being exposed to the temperatures and humidity specified in Section 5.1.2, Operating Temperature and Relative Humidity, in GR-63-CORE. The controlled operating environment temperature profile is shown in GR-910 Figure 5-2. Measurements should be taken at each temperature plateau. Upon reaching a temperature measurement point the test samples should be allowed to stabilize for a one-half hour minimum before measuring attenuation and reflectance. The final measurement shall be made after the test samples have stabilized at 23C for a minimum or 2 hours. The requirements in Section 4.1.1 apply before during and after the test. Telcordia Technologies, Inc. Confidential -- Restricted Access See confidentiality restrictions on title page. 502-1198 Rev A 5-3 Confidential -- Restricted Access DA-1543 Issue 1, Revision 4 February 3, 2005 Tyco Electronics 3-dB SC Singlemode Fiber Optic Buildout Attenuators Performance Verification/Test Procedures 60 Temperature C 50 40 30 20 10 0 -10 0 48 96 144 192 Time - Hours GR-910 Figure 5-2 Controlled Operating Environment Temperature Profile 5.1.2 Uncontrolled Operating Environment Attenuators intended for use in an uncontrolled environment (outside plant) shall be subjected to the temperature cycling profile in GR-910 Figure 5-3 per FOTP 3A, for 21 cycles, 168 hours. The relative humidity is uncontrolled. Measurements should be taken at each temperature plateau once per day. Upon reaching a temperature measurement point the test samples should be allowed to stabilize for a one-half hour minimum before measuring attenuation and reflectance. The final measurement shall be made after the test samples have stabilized at 23C for a minimum or 2 hours. The requirements in Section 4.1.2 apply before during and after the test. Telcordia Technologies, Inc. Confidential -- Restricted Access See confidentiality restrictions on title page. 5-4 502-1198 Rev A Confidential -- Restricted Access DA-1543 Issue 1, Revision 4 February 3, 2005 Temperature C Tyco Electronics 3-dB SC Singlemode Fiber Optic Buildout Attenuators Performance Verification/Test Procedures 80 70 60 50 40 30 20 10 0 -10 0 -20 -30 -40 -50 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 Time - Hours GR-910 Figure 5-3 Uncontrolled Environment Temperature Profile 5.1.3 Non-Operating Environment The product shall be tested according to the performance requirements in Section 4 while being exposed to the temperatures and humidity specified in Sections 5.1.1.1, 5.1.1.2, and 5.1.1.1.3 per GR-63-CORE for low-temperature exposure and thermal shock, high-temperature exposure and thermal shock, and high relative humidity exposure respectively. The requirements in Section 4.1.3 apply before and after each test. 5.1.4 Humidity/Condensation Cycling Test The product shall be tested according to the performance requirements in Section 4 while being exposed to the modified temperatures and humidity profile shown in GR-910 Figure 5-4 per FOTP 3A, for 14 cycles, 168 hours. The relative humidity shall be 90% at interval four, 65C, and at interval eight, 23C. Measurements should be taken at each temperature plateau. Upon reaching a temperature measurement point the test samples should be allowed to stabilize for a one-half hour minimum before measuring attenuation and reflectance. The final measurement shall be made after the test samples have stabilized at 23C for a minimum or 2 hours. The requirements in Section 4.1.4 apply before during and after the test. Telcordia Technologies, Inc. Confidential -- Restricted Access See confidentiality restrictions on title page. 502-1198 Rev A 5-5 Confidential -- Restricted Access DA-1543 Issue 1, Revision 4 February 3, 2005 Tyco Electronics 3-dB SC Singlemode Fiber Optic Buildout Attenuators Performance Verification/Test Procedures Humidity Control Temperature C 70 60 50 40 30 20 Humidity Control 10 0 -10 -20 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 Time - Hours GR-910 Figure 5-4 Humidity/Condensation Temperature Profile 5.1.5 Water Immersion This test is to be performed according to GR-1221-CORE, Section 6.2.10, Water Immersion Test, which is based on FOTP-12. Attenuator test samples are to be subjected to immersion in water (pH 5.5 0.5) at 43 2C (109 4F) for 7 days. The pH level can be set by mixing a standard buffer solution containing sodium hydroxide and acetic acid. The pH level should be checked periodically throughout the test and compensated if it drifts. Optical transmittance and reflectance are to be monitored once/day for 7 consecutive days and 24 hours after the test samples are removed from the bath. The samples are washed and allowed to drain for 24 hours at room temperature following removal from the water bath. The final optical transmittance and reflectance is to be measured at 23C, 24 hours following removal from the water bath. The change in attenuation and reflectance at any measurement point during or at the end of the test is to be compared against the requirements and objectives specified in Section 4.2.2 and Section 4.2.5. 5.1.6 Vibration Test This test is to be performed according to GR-1221-CORE, Section 6.2.2, Variable Frequency Vibration Test, which is based on FOTP-11, Condition I, except that test samples are to withstand vibrations from 10 Hz to 55 Hz. This test subjects the samples to a simple harmonic motion having an amplitude of 1.52 mm (0.060") maximum total excursion. The frequency is to vary uniformly between 10 Hz and 55 Hz and return to 10 Hz in approximately 4 minutes. The attenuators are to be tested for 2 hours in each of three mutually perpendicular planes. Optical transmittance and reflectance are to be measured before and after the test. The change in attenuation and reflectance is the difference in measurements taken Telcordia Technologies, Inc. Confidential -- Restricted Access See confidentiality restrictions on title page. 5-6 502-1198 Rev A DA-1543 Issue 1, Revision 4 February 3, 2005 Confidential -- Restricted Access Tyco Electronics 3-dB SC Singlemode Fiber Optic Buildout Attenuators Performance Verification/Test Procedures before and after the test and is to be compared against the requirements and objectives specified in Section 4.2.2 and Section 4.2.5. 5.1.7 Flex Test Attenuator test samples are to be subjected to a modified flex test per Section 4.4.3.1 of GR-326-CORE. The flex test may be performed according to FOTP-1. The optical fiber lead(s) of the test sample shall be flexed through 180 for 100 cycles with the required load specified in GR-910 Table 4-2. The maximum change in attenuation and reflectance is the difference in measurements taken before and after the test and is to be compared against the requirements and objectives specified in Section 4.2.2 and Section 4.2.5. This test applies only to attenuators with optical fiber leads. A. Measure attenuation and reflectance. B. Apply load: Media Type I, 0.9 kg (2.0 lb.) Media Type II, 0.23 kg (0.5 lb.) Media Type III, 0.23 kg (0.5 lb.) C. Rotate the angle of the test fixture arm (see GR-910 Figure 5-8) through the following cycle: 0, 90, 0, -90, 0, and repeat for 100 cycles. D. Remove load. E. Measure attenuation and reflectance. 5.1.8 Twist Test Attenuator test samples are to be subjected to a modified twist test per Section 4.4.2.3 of GR-326-CORE. The twist test may be performed according to FOTP-36. The optical fiber lead(s) of the test sample shall be twisted for 10 cycles with the required load specified in GR-910 Table 4-2. The maximum change in attenuation and reflectance is the difference in measurements taken before and after the test and is to be compared against the requirements and objectives specified in Section 4.2.2 and Section 4.2.5. A. Mount the test sample in the test facility; see GR-910 Figure 5-8. B. Measure attenuation and reflectance. C. Apply load: Media Type I, 1.35 kg (3.0 lb.) Media Type II, 0.75 kg (1.65 lb.) Media Type III, 0.5 kg (1.1 lb.) D. Rotate the capstan (see GR-910 Figure 5-8) X revolutions about the axis of the fiber. (See the following table.) Telcordia Technologies, Inc. Confidential -- Restricted Access See confidentiality restrictions on title page. 502-1198 Rev A 5-7 Confidential -- Restricted Access Tyco Electronics 3-dB SC Singlemode Fiber Optic Buildout Attenuators Performance Verification/Test Procedures DA-1543 Issue 1, Revision 4 February 3, 2005 E. Reverse direction and rotate Y revolutions. Reverse direction again, and rotate Y revolutions. See GR-910 Table 5-1. F. Repeat step "e" nine times. G. Remove load, and measure attenuation and reflectance. GR-910 Table 5-1 Number of Turns for Twist Test Media Types X Y Type I 2.5 5 Types II & III 1.5 3 5.1.9 Side Pull Attenuator test samples are to be subjected to the required tensile side load in an operating mode. The optical fiber lead(s) of the test sample shall be tested with the required load, specified in GR-910 Table 5-2, applied at an angle of 90. The maximum change in attenuation and reflectance is the difference in measurements taken before, during and after the test and is to be compared against the requirements and objectives specified in Section 4.2.2 and Section 4.2.5. The Side Pull test is based on the Equilibrium Tensile Loading Test in Section 4.4.3.5 of GR-326-CORE. Mount the test sample in the test facility of GR-910 Figure 5-8. The test is conducted as follows: A. Measure both loss and reflectance. B. Apply the load listed in GR-910 Table 5-2 at an angle of 90. C. Measure both loss and reflectance after 5 seconds. D. Remove the load and measure attenuation and reflectance after 10 seconds. GR-910 Table 5-2 Side Pull Tensile Loading Media Type Load Media I 1.25 kg (2.75 lb) Media II 0.25 kg (0.55 lb) Media III 0.25 kg (0.55 lb) 5.1.10 Cable Retention Attenuator test samples are to be subjected to the required tensile load in GR910 Table 4-2. The load is to be applied to the secured cable at a minimum distance Telcordia Technologies, Inc. Confidential -- Restricted Access See confidentiality restrictions on title page. 5-8 502-1198 Rev A DA-1543 Issue 1, Revision 4 February 3, 2005 Confidential -- Restricted Access Tyco Electronics 3-dB SC Singlemode Fiber Optic Buildout Attenuators Performance Verification/Test Procedures of 10 cm (4 inches) from the end of the fiber. Apply the load at a rate of 400 micrometers (0.016 in.) per second until attaining the maximum load, which is to be maintained for 1 minute. The maximum change in attenuation and reflectance is the difference in measurements taken before and after the test and is to be compared against the requirements and objectives specified in Section 4.2.2 and Section 4.2.5. The Cable Retention test is based on the Transmission with Applied Tensile Load Test in Section 4.4.3.4 of GR-326-CORE. Mount the test sample in the test facility of GR-910 Figure 5-8. The test is conducted as follows: A. Measure both loss and reflectance. B. Apply the load specified in GR-910 Table 4-2 at a rate of 400 micrometers (0.016 in) per second. C. Remove the load after 1 minute. D. Measure both loss and reflectance. 5.1.11 Durability This test shall apply to connector receptacles, optical pad type attenuators, and patchcord type attenuators with connectorized pigtails. Attenuator test samples are to be subjected to the durability test procedure per Section 4.4.3.7 of GR-326-CORE. Both connector interfaces of a connector receptacle or optical pad type attenuator are reconnected for 200 cycles. The attenuator shall be cleaned according to the supplier's instructions. Connectors are to be cleaned in accordance with the procedure in Section 4.4.3.7 of GR-326-CORE. Variable attenuators are to have their attenuation setting changed from the zero dB setting to their maximum setting and back, for a minimum of 200 times. For fixed attenuators the attenuation value and reflectance are to be measured for each reconnection. The criteria in Section 4.2.2 and Section 4.2.5 are applied only to measurements made immediately after the cleaning operation. The results of all measurements will be reported. For variable attenuators the attenuation value and reflectance are measured and reported after each excursion at their minimum and maximum attenuation setting. The criteria in Section 4.2.2 and Section 4.2.5 apply to each measurement. 5.1.12 Impact Test This test is to be performed according to GR-1221-CORE, Section 6.2.1, Impact Test, which is based on FOTP-2 for "Light Service Application." Attenuators are to Telcordia Technologies, Inc. Confidential -- Restricted Access See confidentiality restrictions on title page. 502-1198 Rev A 5-9 Confidential -- Restricted Access Tyco Electronics 3-dB SC Singlemode Fiber Optic Buildout Attenuators Performance Verification/Test Procedures DA-1543 Issue 1, Revision 4 February 3, 2005 withstand 8 impact cycles, from each of three mutually perpendicular axes, when dropped from a height of 1.8 meters (6 feet) onto a concrete floor. The attenuators shall be dropped in an unmated condition without protective caps. Samples are mounted rigidly so that the shock is transmitted to the internal components and not absorbed or cushioned by the leads. A suggested method for performing this test is to place the test sample inside a container filled with a rigid packing material (such as sand or small glass beads) so that the sample does not shift or bounce around when the container is dropped. In this way, the impact shock is not absorbed by an elastic packing material, but is fully transmitted to the internal components. Samples with leads may be protected from breakage if they are coiled and tied. The connector plug/ferrule may be protected with a cap that does not impede the impact force. This test may also be performed using an impact test machine with the force of impact set to 1000 G's. After testing, each attenuator is to be carefully examined for evidence of physical damage Section 4.2.8. The maximum change in attenuation and reflectance is the difference in measurements taken before and after the test and is to be compared against the requirements and objectives specified in Section 4.2.2 and Section 4.2.5. 5.2 Optical Testing The optical bandpass and attenuation tolerance require measurements of the attenuator optical transmission spectrum. The equipment needed to perform these tests are light sources accommodating the bandpass of the attenuator, such as infrared LEDs, an optical spectrum analyzer, and an optical power meter. In lieu of a spectrum analyzer, spectral measurements can be made using a scanning monochromator as described in FOTP-78, or with tunable lasers or tunable filters. Non-polarization-compensating spectrum analyzers are a potential source of measurement error. Conversely, analyzers that can measure SOP are useful for PDL measurements. 5.2.1 Optical Bandpass The optical bandpass definition and criteria are given in Section 4.2.1 and can be calculated by using the procedures given below. The attenuator is to be tested in both directions of light propagation, at room temperature, and at the minimum and maximum operating temperatures. The suggested measurement method is outlined below. 1. Measure optical transmission spectrum. A. Light Source: Use a single-mode fiber-coupled, high-powered optical source having central wavelengths covering the required bandpass. Couple the optical source to the attenuator under test with a wavelength-independent Telcordia Technologies, Inc. Confidential -- Restricted Access See confidentiality restrictions on title page. 5-10 502-1198 Rev A DA-1543 Issue 1, Revision 4 February 3, 2005 Confidential -- Restricted Access Tyco Electronics 3-dB SC Singlemode Fiber Optic Buildout Attenuators Performance Verification/Test Procedures coupler or jumper. Alternatively, use a fiber-coupled white light source. Refer to FOTP-20 for stripping higher-order mode and cladding light. B. Reference Power Spectrum: Connect the source to an optical spectrum analyzer. Measure and store this signal as the reference spectrum. Best results are typically obtained using 1 nm resolution, 10 nm/division span, and start and stop wavelengths just enclosing the required bandpass. The resolution of the optical spectrum analyzer should be better than the linewidth of the test source. C. Attenuator Power Spectrum: If the attenuator under test is connectorized, connect it to the test configuration replacing the jumper; otherwise, cut the jumper in half, and fusion splice in the attenuator. Connect the attenuator under test between the source and the optical spectrum analyzer. (The remaining steps are most easily completed by using the marker features on most optical spectrum analyzers.) 2. Find the wavelength intercepts; Find the two wavelength intercepts for each required bandpass region. Set the level marker at the value designated on the attenuator. The other optical requirements must also be met across the bandpass defined by these wavelengths. See GR-910 Figure 5-5 for an example of a attenuator optical spectrum. 3. Compare bandpass against criteria. The pairs of wavelengths found in Step 2 represent the measured optical bandpass of the attenuator under test. Compare the bandpass against the bandpass requirements and objectives in Section 4.2.1. GR-910 Figure 5-5 shows an ideal spectra for a 5 dB attenuator. 4. The solid and dashed boxes represent the bandpass and attenuation tolerance requirement and objective. Telcordia Technologies, Inc. Confidential -- Restricted Access See confidentiality restrictions on title page. 502-1198 Rev A 5-11 Confidential -- Restricted Access Tyco Electronics 3-dB SC Singlemode Fiber Optic Buildout Attenuators Performance Verification/Test Procedures DA-1543 Issue 1, Revision 4 February 3, 2005 6.00 5.80 Insertion Loss (dB) 5.60 5.40 5.20 5.00 4.80 4.60 4.40 4.20 1200 1220 1240 1260 1280 1300 1320 1340 1360 1380 1400 1420 1440 1460 1480 1500 1520 1540 1560 1580 1600 4.00 Wavelength (nm) GR-910 Figure 5-5 3 dB Attenuator Optical Bandpass Spectra 5.2.2 Change in Attenuation This section discusses a method of measuring the attenuation change of a attenuator. It applies to all tests which specify an attenuation change requirement. Variable attenuators are to be assigned settings in increments of not less than 3 or 5 dB, depending on their application, ranging from their minimum to maximum setting. Variable attenuators must not have their attenuation setting adjusted during these tests, except at the end of each test, to check the adjustment mechanism for damage, or when otherwise specified. Light sources must be within the required optical bandpass from GR-910 Table 4-3, and insertion loss from splices and connectors is excluded. Connector loss can be excluded by cutting them off, or if a non-destructive test is desired, by substituting the DUT with a jumper cable with equivalent connectors. In the latter case, the connector repeatability determines the measurement uncertainty. FOTP-57 gives the procedure for fiber end face preparation. FOTP-127 gives the procedure for measuring the source central wavelength. FOTP-20 gives the procedure for measuring optical transmittance. GR-910 Figure 5-6 diagrams the procedure for measuring the change in attenuation, which consists of the following steps. Telcordia Technologies, Inc. Confidential -- Restricted Access See confidentiality restrictions on title page. 5-12 502-1198 Rev A Confidential -- Restricted Access DA-1543 Issue 1, Revision 4 February 3, 2005 Tyco Electronics 3-dB SC Singlemode Fiber Optic Buildout Attenuators Performance Verification/Test Procedures 1. Measure the Reference Power Fusion Splice Source Pi Power Meter 2. Measure the Insertion Loss of the Attenuator MF DUT Source Po MF Power Meter GR-910 Figure 5-6 Attenuation Loss Measurement 1. Fiber End Face Preparation For attenuators with a bare fiber pigtail, the fiber end face should be clean and cleaved well or polished well if it is to be directly attached to a detector using a bare fiber adapter. Otherwise, the fiber may be connectorized or fusion spliced to a connectorized optical pigtail to facilitate light monitoring. All connectors, connector interfaces, and connector receptacles are to be cleaned in accordance with Section 4.3 of GR-326-CORE. Make sure the source power is off, for eye safety, and then inspect the connector end face using a microscope. Mate attenuators with an integral connector receptacle, or connector interfaces to a connectorized fiber jumper and do not disturb the fibers launch condition. 2. Measure the Incident Optical Power, Pi Use a stable optical power source having a central wavelength which is within the wavelength range of the attenuator under test. Connect the source to an optical power meter using a launch jumper with the same connectors as the attenuator under test. A 2-meter length of the jumper cable will be a sufficient mode filter, provided that the cable conforms to the requirements of GR-409CORE and there are at least two 360 loops in the 2-meter length. The optical power meter should now display the incident (input) optical power, Pi. For power meters having a REFERENCE feature, press the REF key to enter Pi as the reference. The connection to the source must not be disturbed, and the coupling efficiency of the connection to the detector in Step 3 must be equivalent to the coupling efficiency obtained in Step 2. 3. Determine the Attenuation If the attenuator under test is connectorized, mate the connector to the detector end of the launch jumper, otherwise, cut the launch jumper in half and fusion splice (with 0.02 dB loss per splice) the attenuator to both halves. The optical Telcordia Technologies, Inc. Confidential -- Restricted Access See confidentiality restrictions on title page. 502-1198 Rev A 5-13 Confidential -- Restricted Access Tyco Electronics 3-dB SC Singlemode Fiber Optic Buildout Attenuators Performance Verification/Test Procedures DA-1543 Issue 1, Revision 4 February 3, 2005 power meter should now display the output optical power, Po. Then the attenuation is: A = 10 log10 (Pi / Po ) (TP-910 Eq. 5-1) If the optical power meter reference feature has been used, the attenuation, A should be displayed automatically. 4. Determine the Final Attenuation Repeat Step 3 to determine the final attenuation. Measure the attenuation in both directions of light propagation. 5. Compare Results Against Requirements Compare the attenuation values against the requirement and objective from Section 4.2.2. The transmission measurement facility in GR-910 Figure 5-1 or loss spectra (from GR-910 Figure 5-5) can also be used to determine insertion loss within a (typical) measurement uncertainty of 0.5 dB. 5.2.3 Attenuation Tolerance Use the procedure described in Section 5.2.2 to measure attenuation tolerance. 5.2.4 Attenuation Increments and Range Use the procedure described in Section 5.2.2 to measure attenuation increments and range. 5.2.5 Reflectance Reflectance is measured by Optical Continuous Wave Reflectometry (OCWR) per FOTP-107, which uses a coupler to provide a path for the reflected light. The light sources must be within the required optical bandpass from GR-910 Table 4-3. Connector reflectance is covered in GR-326-CORE for optical pad type and connector receptacle attenuators. Connector reflectance for patchcord (pigtail) type attenuators is excluded when measuring reflectance. Measure reflectance in both the directions of light propagation. Reflectance can be measured with the transmission measurement test facility in GR-910 Figure 5-1. See Section 5.2.1.2 of GR-326-CORE, for details. 5.2.6 Polarization-Dependent Loss (PDL) The intent of this test is to determine compliance with the optical criteria given in Section 4.2.2 through Section 4.2.6, given incident light which is linearly polarized Telcordia Technologies, Inc. Confidential -- Restricted Access See confidentiality restrictions on title page. 5-14 502-1198 Rev A Confidential -- Restricted Access DA-1543 Issue 1, Revision 4 February 3, 2005 Tyco Electronics 3-dB SC Singlemode Fiber Optic Buildout Attenuators Performance Verification/Test Procedures at any angle. Methods to more accurately determine PDL and the polarization sensitivity of passive components require further development, and such development is ongoing. Some test instruments now measure PDL. GR-910 Figure 5-7 shows a configuration for measuring PDL using a fiber coupled Polarization Controller (PC). The PC is a device that adjusts to select any SOP, such as an all-fiber PC, or a combination of a linear polarizer (P), quarter-wave plate (Q), and a half-wave plate (H), which are compatible with the wavelength of the source. The important characteristics of the measurement apparatus are: * PDL must be demonstrated for at least at one nominal wavelength within each of the 1310nm and 1550nm regions. * The Optical Source launches temporally stable light, with 10 nm spectral width, and an extinction ratio of 20 dB, into single-mode fiber. * Bends in conventional Class IVa or IVb single-mode fiber will modify the state of polarization. For this reason, the device launch pigtail must be deployed in a straight configuration, and must not be moved during the polarization measurement. * The DUT should be spliced into the optical path to avoid varying the SOP, otherwise connect the attenuator between the PC and the detector power meter. Attenuators with connectors incur a greater PDL. * The test procedures in Section 5.2.1 through Section 5.2.4 are to be followed, to measure the particular optical characteristic of interest. * Adjust the polarization controller to measure the worst-case value for the characteristic of interest. The plane of polarization should be rotated through an angle of 180. If using a PQH Controller: * Rotate P until the maximum power is obtained. * Alternatively, rotate Q and H to obtain the worst-case value for the characteristic of interest. * To determine L, alternatively, rotate Q and H to obtain the highest power level, and subtract from the lowest power level (from the previous step) O ptical S ource P olarization Controller D UT P ow er M eter GR-910 Figure 5-7 Configuration for Measuring Polarization Dependent Loss Telcordia Technologies, Inc. Confidential -- Restricted Access See confidentiality restrictions on title page. 502-1198 Rev A 5-15 Confidential -- Restricted Access DA-1543 Issue 1, Revision 4 February 3, 2005 Tyco Electronics 3-dB SC Singlemode Fiber Optic Buildout Attenuators Performance Verification/Test Procedures 5.2.7 Polarization-Mode Dispersion (PMD) The measurement of PMD can be accomplished by the fixed analyzer method in FOTP-113, the Jones matrix analysis in FOTP-122, or the interferometric method in FOTP-124. There are commercially available measurement instruments cable of measuring PDL and PMD. _ + 90 90 CABLE OR FIBER TEST ARM 22-28 Cm ATTENUATOR CAPSTAN 7.5 Cm DIA. GUIDES WEIGHTS GR-910 Figure 5-8 Mechanical Test Facility for Flex, Twist, Side Pull and Cable Retention Tests Telcordia Technologies, Inc. Confidential -- Restricted Access See confidentiality restrictions on title page. 5-16 502-1198 Rev A DA-1543 Issue 1, Revision 4 February 3, 2005 6.0 Confidential -- Restricted Access Tyco Electronics 3-dB SC Singlemode Fiber Optic Buildout Attenuators Passive Optical Component Code (POCC) Passive Optical Component Code (POCC) 6.1 Structure and Format The Passive Optical Component Code is the Telcordia proposed descriptive code which offers1 a quick reference to mechanical, electrical, and optical definitions in a minimum number of characters. To accommodate LEC and service provider procurement system software, the code length must not exceed 15 characters. GR-910 O6-1 [74] The Passive Optical Component Code (POCC) characters as outlined in GR-910 Table 6-1 should be imprinted on the component housing. The code has two fields, M1M2 - S1S2S3 A S4S5S6 S7S8S9S10S11S12 The first field, M1M2, is a manufacturer code. The following table lists the cable manufacturer codes assigned by Telcordia based upon lists of manufacturers provided to Telcordia by regions, LECs, and other service providers. The list is not necessarily complete. There may be other manufacturers of similar products who are not listed. No recommendation for or against any manufacturer is intended or should be inferred from its presence or absence from this list. The list includes only attenuator manufacturers.2 1. The POCC was adopted from SR-NWT-002014, Suggested Optical Cable Code (SOCC). 2. The following codes should be avoided as they are assigned to fiber cable and/or other component manufacturers; BC, BI, BR, BT, CW, DI, DN, EB, EC, FG, GC, GS, LC, MC, OC, PC, PK, SR, SP, TF, TN. Telcordia Technologies, Inc. Confidential -- Restricted Access See confidentiality restrictions on title page. 502-1198 Rev A 6-1 Confidential -- Restricted Access Tyco Electronics 3-dB SC Singlemode Fiber Optic Buildout Attenuators Passive Optical Component Code (POCC) DA-1543 Issue 1, Revision 4 February 3, 2005 GR-910 Table 6-1 Passive Optical Component Manufacturer Code POCC Code Manufacturer Code Manufacturer 3M 3M ME Methode Electronics Inc. AD ADC Telecommunications MO AF Alcoa-Fujikura Molex Fiber Optic Interconnect Technology AI ATI MP MP Fiber Optics Inc, AM Amphenol NE NEC Electronics AO AOFR NS NSG America AP AMP NT Northern Telecom AR Aster OS Optotec Spa AT AT&T OZ Oz Optics CO Corning PD PD-LD Inc. EB E x B Technology Inc, PO Physical Optics ER Ericsson Components PS Porta Systems ET E-TEK Dynamics RL Radiall FE Furukawa Electric Co. Ltd. RC Radiant Communications Corp, FN Fiber Network Solutions RS Rifocs FS Fibersense & Signals SA Santec Corp. FU Fujikura Ltd. SD Storm Products FX Foxconn International Inc, SE Sumitomo Electric GD Gould SM Sifam Ltd. (Selco) IP Ipitek SO Seiko JF JDS-Fitel (Furukawa) SR Siecor LS Light Control Systems SS Siemens Stromburg-Carlson Any manufacturers not on this list but who would like to be placed on it should contact the appropriate region, LEC, service provider, or Telcordia. Telcordia Technologies, Inc. Confidential -- Restricted Access See confidentiality restrictions on title page. 6-2 502-1198 Rev A Confidential -- Restricted Access DA-1543 Issue 1, Revision 4 February 3, 2005 Tyco Electronics 3-dB SC Singlemode Fiber Optic Buildout Attenuators Passive Optical Component Code (POCC) The second field, S1S2S3 S4S5S6 S7S8S9S10,S11 S12S13 is a structural description where each alphanumeric character carries information about the component structure, according to GR-910 Table 6-2. GR-910 Table 6-2 POCC Character Description Code Description S1 Component Type S2 Fiber type S3 Cable Type S4 Application S5 Application S6 Application S7 Configuration S8 Configuration S9 Configuration S10 Configuration S11 Configuration S12 Configuration S13 Configuration The individual characters are described in the following tables. In all of the tables, several valid alphanumeric characters are not used. These unused characters are reserved for future use to permit the code to grow as component designs change. One exception to this rule for unused characters is the treatment of the character X. In any of the ten positions, this character means that the component is nonstandard and the tables for that position do not apply. These tables only apply to components which conform to the requirements for fiber optic attenuators as specified in this document. 6.2 Component Type Character Character S1 defines the type of component (see GR-910 Table 6-3). Telcordia Technologies, Inc. Confidential -- Restricted Access See confidentiality restrictions on title page. 502-1198 Rev A 6-3 Confidential -- Restricted Access DA-1543 Issue 1, Revision 4 February 3, 2005 Tyco Electronics 3-dB SC Singlemode Fiber Optic Buildout Attenuators Passive Optical Component Code (POCC) GR-910 Table 6-3 POCC Character S1 Code Component A Attenuator B Connector C Coupler F Filter I Isolator P Polarizer S Switch T Terminator W WDM 6.3 Fiber Type and Operating Wavelength Region Character S2 defines the fiber type (e.g., single-mode) and the usable wavelengths (i.e., the wavelengths at which the component may operate). For components with no fiber pigtails, S2 only indicates the component's usable wavelength region. See GR-910 Table 6-4. GR-910 Table 6-4 POCC Character S2 Usable Wavelength Regions (nm) and Codes Fiber Type 850 1300 850 -1300 1310 1550 1310 -1550 1480 -1580 980 -1550 Single-Mode Class IVa - - 0 1 2 3 4 5 Dispersion-Shifted Class IVb - - - - 6 7 8 9 Hybrid Class IVa-50/125 A B C D E F G H 50/125 Multimode K L M - - - - - 62.5/125 Multimode P Q R - - - - - 85/125 Multimode T W Y - - - - - The 1480-1580 and 980-1550 columns apply to components for use with optical fiber amplifiers. 6.4 Cable Type Character Character S3, describes the cable or fiber jacket type (GR-910 Table 6-5). Telcordia Technologies, Inc. Confidential -- Restricted Access See confidentiality restrictions on title page. 6-4 502-1198 Rev A Confidential -- Restricted Access DA-1543 Issue 1, Revision 4 February 3, 2005 Tyco Electronics 3-dB SC Singlemode Fiber Optic Buildout Attenuators Passive Optical Component Code (POCC) GR-910 Table 6-5 POCC Character S3 Code Cable Type B Fiber Bundle L Loose Buffer M Flat Matrix R Ribbon S Standard Coated Fiber (250 m nominal) T Tight Buffer 3 Ruggedized- 3 mm dia. 6.5 Attenuation Value Characters These characters are keyed to the Component Type S1 character, so that the meaning of S4S5S6S7 may change for different components. For attenuators (S1 = A), S4S5S6 S7 is a 3-digit integer from 1 to 100 defining the attenuation value for a fixed attenuator or the minimum and maximum values for a variable attenuator in dB. 6.6 Application Character S8 defines applications for which the component is designed (GR-910 Table 6-6). GR-910 Table 6-6 POCC Character S8 Code Application A AM-VSB Analog Systems Only D Digital Systems Only H Hybrid - for both Analog & Digital Systems L Long-Reach Digital Systems Only Refer to GR-253-CORE for definitions of long-reach systems. 6.7 Configuration Characters Characters S9-12 are keyed to the Component Type S1 character, so that their meaning may change for different components. For attenuators (S1 = A), S 910 indicate the reflectance value of the attenuator ranging from 1 to 99. S11 S12 describe the optical connector type. Telcordia Technologies, Inc. Confidential -- Restricted Access See confidentiality restrictions on title page. 502-1198 Rev A 6-5 Confidential -- Restricted Access Tyco Electronics 3-dB SC Singlemode Fiber Optic Buildout Attenuators Passive Optical Component Code (POCC) DA-1543 Issue 1, Revision 4 February 3, 2005 For example, for an attenuator with 40 dB reflectance and FC connectors S9S10S11S12 = 40FF. 6.8 Example The POCC WD-A3S 520140FF is interpreted as shown in GR-910 Table 6-7. GR-910 Table 6-7 POCC Interpretation Character Value Interpretation M1M2 WD Manufacturer is Widget Inc. S1 A Component is a an Attenuator S2 3 Fiber is 1310-1550 nm single-mode S3 S Fiber is 250 m coated S4S5S6S7 5201 Attenuation is variable 5-20 1 dB S8 D Attenuator is for digital system applications S9-12 40FF R=40 dB FC connectors Telcordia Technologies, Inc. Confidential -- Restricted Access See confidentiality restrictions on title page. 6-6 502-1198 Rev A DA-1543 Issue 1, Revision 4 February 3, 2005 7.0 Confidential -- Restricted Access Tyco Electronics 3-dB SC Singlemode Fiber Optic Buildout Attenuators Reliability and Quality Assurance Program Reliability and Quality Assurance Program This section treats reliability and quality (R&Q) for optical attenuators from the same perspective as other fiber optic passive components. Thus, it deals with the overall assembled unit, manufacturing reliability, and other topics. Major points in a minimum R&Q program are briefly discussed here, with details to be referenced in GR-1221-CORE. The criteria here are not meant to prevent a manufacturer from using alternative approaches if testing of the assembled unit (e.g., used in a complete optical attenuator package) and pass/fail criteria are at least as stringent as the methods described here. Alternatives will also be necessary for future fully integrated designs in which functionality is provided in a single "plug- and-play" adjunct (to the platform transport system) that does not have any field-replaceable parts. The philosophy and basic elements of reliability assurance are provided in Section 7.1 and Section 7.2. The qualification and lot-to-lot controls criteria for optical attenuators are detailed in Section 7.3. Section 7.4 contains criteria used if a quality and reliability audit is performed. 7.1 Reliability Assurance Requirements Philosophy Many of the criteria in this GR deal with necessary elements of a comprehensive reliability assurance program; as such, they are clearly satisfied or not by the component manufacturer's and/or equipment supplier's practices. However, many other criteria deal with demonstration of device reliability or with levels of confidence. The intent of these latter requirements and objectives can sometimes be accomplished in alternative ways. While the qualification tests and screening procedures in this GR have been developed to establish an appropriate baseline for a comprehensive reliability assurance program, other techniques could prove to be more cost-effective. However, this does not suggest that the Telcordia criteria contained here can be satisfied by any other approach. The difficulty of such alternative approaches involves the demonstration by the manufacturer or supplier of their equivalency or effectiveness. Although certain general guidelines can be described, specific steps to demonstrate this cannot be determined in advance for every situation. Nevertheless, manufacturers and suppliers are encouraged to investigate "improved" test methods and practices. To avoid problems and possible disagreement later, Telcordia can be contacted to resolve most questions prior to significant expenditures in special equipment or testing by the manufacturer or supplier. 7.2 Overview of Reliability Assurance Unlike functional or performance generic requirements, reliability assurance criteria are seldom "yes or no" issues. There could be many ways of achieving the Telcordia Technologies, Inc. Confidential -- Restricted Access See confidentiality restrictions on title page. 502-1198 Rev A 7-1 Confidential -- Restricted Access Tyco Electronics 3-dB SC Singlemode Fiber Optic Buildout Attenuators Reliability and Quality Assurance Program DA-1543 Issue 1, Revision 4 February 3, 2005 same end goal of reliable optical attenuators for use in a LEC or service provider telecommunications network. The following sections first describe the tenets of a comprehensive reliability assurance program, and then discuss the philosophy behind the approach taken in this GR. The basic reliability of fiber optic systems can be no better than the reliability of the components contained in them. Moreover, it is generally impossible to thoroughly test the performance and reliability of components once they are incorporated into higher levels of assembly. It thus becomes necessary for product manufacturers and equipment suppliers to set up programs at the component level to help ensure necessary device reliability. The major elements of a comprehensive reliability assurance program are: * Vendor Qualification Programs * Component Qualification Programs * Lot-to-Lot Quality and Reliability Controls * Feedback and Corrective Action Programs * Storage and Handling * Documentation. The critical nature of optical attenuators, plus the rapid evolution of designs and manufacturing practices, make such a program particularly important. The devices used in a telecommunications system should be initially qualified and purchased only from approved vendors. The reliability and quality of each lot should be tested and analyzed. Any problem detected in the manufacturing processes or reported from field applications should be examined and corrected. This information should be fed back as the inputs for vendor and product qualification. Products should also be stored properly, avoiding excessive heat and humidity. Finally, the reliability assurance program should be fully documented to ensure consistency and continuity. The elements of a complete reliability assurance program are depicted in GR-910 Figure 7-1. Telcordia Technologies, Inc. Confidential -- Restricted Access See confidentiality restrictions on title page. 7-2 502-1198 Rev A Confidential -- Restricted Access DA-1543 Issue 1, Revision 4 February 3, 2005 Tyco Electronics 3-dB SC Singlemode Fiber Optic Buildout Attenuators Reliability and Quality Assurance Program Component Lot-To-Lot Q&R Controls Component Qualification Vendor Qualification Component Reliability Assurance Storage & Handling Documentation Feedback & Corrective Action GR-910 Figure 7-1 Elements of a Comprehensive Reliability Assurance Program 7.3 Qualification Criteria The equipment manufacturer has the final responsibility for assuring that the components meet the appropriate quality level, even the component manufacturer may be the one that performs the reliability tests and documents the testing results. If the equipment manufacturer relies on the component manufacturer to supply reliability data, the equipment manufacturer needs to verify the accuracy of the data by periodic audits. 7.3.0.1 Criteria (heading not from GR-910) GR-910 R7-1 [80] The equipment supplier shall perform or obtain verifiable data for the qualification of optical attenuators, including characterization and reliability tests. 7.3.0.2 Test Method (not from GR-910) Not Applicable - the requirement is to verify that the supplier has data to support product conformance, as would be obtained by completing a program in accordance with this test plan document 7.3.0.3 Test Flowchart (not from GR-910) Not applicable. Telcordia Technologies, Inc. Confidential -- Restricted Access See confidentiality restrictions on title page. 502-1198 Rev A 7-3 Confidential -- Restricted Access Tyco Electronics 3-dB SC Singlemode Fiber Optic Buildout Attenuators Reliability and Quality Assurance Program DA-1543 Issue 1, Revision 4 February 3, 2005 7.3.0.4 Test Configuration and Conditions (not from GR-910) Not applicable. 7.3.0.5 Test Apparatus (not from GR-910) Not applicable. 7.3.0.6 Summary of Test Results (not from GR-910) Conformance/Nonconformance Conformance to the criteria in Section 7.3.0.1 of this document has not been met. The criteria for requirement GR-910 R7-1 [80] was not determined. Conformance is based on the equipment supplier performing or obtaining verifiable data for the qualification of optical attenuators, including characterization and reliability tests Failure History Not applicable. Disposition of Nonconformance Not applicable. Test Data Not applicable. 7.3.1 Characterization 7.3.1.1 Criteria (heading not from GR-910) Several acronyms are used in the detailed tables for device qualification. "LTPD" refers to Lot Tolerance Percent Defective as described in Appendix B of Military Specification MIL-M-38510F or in Appendix C of MIL-S-19500G.1 "SS" refers to a suggested sample size appropriate for the specified LTPD. "C" indicates the maximum number of failures allowed for that sample size. GR-910 R7-2 [81] Optical attenuators shall be fully characterized for optical performance as part of device qualification. The characterization must include mechanical, electrical, and optical parameters. A sample size of at least 11 devices (LTPD of 20%) is required. A failure is defined as any component that does not meet all the specified parametric limits. 1. The same information also may be found in Appendix A of IEC Pub. 747-10. Telcordia Technologies, Inc. Confidential -- Restricted Access See confidentiality restrictions on title page. 7-4 502-1198 Rev A DA-1543 Issue 1, Revision 4 February 3, 2005 Confidential -- Restricted Access Tyco Electronics 3-dB SC Singlemode Fiber Optic Buildout Attenuators Reliability and Quality Assurance Program Because of varieties of optical attenuator designs, the minimum set of parameters for characterization is not included here. To avoid cost and poor reliability that might occur later, Telcordia can be contacted for discussions to reach a consensus on the parameters to be characterized. GR-910 O7-3 [82] Optical attenuators data also should be obtained from the vendor (inhouse or external) on a much larger population (~ 50-200 units representing a minimum of three different date codes). Distributions (minimum, maximum, mean, and 3) of measured parameters should be compared to specification limits and design requirements to assure that adequate margins exist. 7.3.1.2 Test Method (not from GR-910) 1. Determine the appropriate specification for attenuator characterization and use the test procedures defined for selected parameters specific to the attenuator under test 2. Verify that the test procedures address mechanical, environmental and optical performance characteristics, such as optical bandpass, change in attenuation, attenuation tolerance, attenuation increments and range, reflectance and PDL, and PMD. 3. Verify that the sample size for test is at least 11 devices (LTPD of 20%), unless otherwise specified by the end user (and if otherwise specified, fully document any such deviation) 4. Analyze the characterization data obtained in accordance with the requirements specific to the product under test and verify conformance, as well as documenting any deviation from the criteria 5. Analyze vendor data on broader samplings of component performance characteristics to assess the distribution of measured parameters to assure adequate measurement margins are in evidence Telcordia Technologies, Inc. Confidential -- Restricted Access See confidentiality restrictions on title page. 502-1198 Rev A 7-5 Confidential -- Restricted Access Tyco Electronics 3-dB SC Singlemode Fiber Optic Buildout Attenuators Reliability and Quality Assurance Program DA-1543 Issue 1, Revision 4 February 3, 2005 7.3.1.3 Test Flowchart (not from GR-910) Determine appropriate criteria for product and verify required optical parameters addressed Verify sampling size and measured data to assure parameters within spec and with adequate margin Does the product meet the applicable criteria to demonstrate conformance to Section 7.3.1.1? No Document nonconformances and address corrective actions with supplier Yes Document Results and go to next criteria section TP-910 Figure 7-1 Test Flowchart - Character Test (not from GR-910) 7.3.1.4 Test Configuration and Conditions (not from GR-910) Test configuration and conditions must be verified for the specific test and applicable parameters based on Section 4 of this test plan and GR-910. 7.3.1.5 Test Apparatus (not from GR-910) Test apparatus must be verified for the specific attenuator and applicable parameters based on the information provided in the appropriate areas of this document. Some typical types of test apparatus for the performance of characterizing optical components are provided below. Telcordia Technologies, Inc. Confidential -- Restricted Access See confidentiality restrictions on title page. 7-6 502-1198 Rev A DA-1543 Issue 1, Revision 4 February 3, 2005 Confidential -- Restricted Access Tyco Electronics 3-dB SC Singlemode Fiber Optic Buildout Attenuators Reliability and Quality Assurance Program Description Supplier Model Calibration Cycle Calibration Due Date. Optical Tunable Light Source Agilent 8164A 12 months - Sensor for Tunable Multimeter Agilent 81640A 12 months - Broadband Stabilized Light Source Anritsu MG 922 A 12 months - Optical Spectrum Analyzer Anritsu MS 9710 B 12 months - 7.3.1.6 Summary of Test Results (not from GR-1221) Conformance/Nonconformance Conformance to the criteria in Section 7.3.1.1 of this document has not been met. The criteria for requirements GR-910 R7-2 [81] and GR-910 O7-3 [82] were not determined. Conformance is based on the optical attenuators being fully characterized for optical performance as part of device qualification. Failure History Not applicable. Disposition of Nonconformance Not applicable. Test Data Not applicable. 7.3.2 Reliability Tests 7.3.2.1 Criteria (heading not from GR-910) GR-910 R7-4 [83] Reliability tests for optical attenuators shall include mechanical/physical tests as well as endurance tests. ... Table 1 lists a minimum set of tests that must be performed. GR-910 R7-5 [84] Mechanical/optical performance tests shall be completed before and after each of the reliability tests. Out of specifications shall be counted as failures. Other pass/fail criteria, based on degradations in some key parameters, shall be documented along with the testing methods. Telcordia Technologies, Inc. Confidential -- Restricted Access See confidentiality restrictions on title page. 502-1198 Rev A 7-7 Confidential -- Restricted Access DA-1543 Issue 1, Revision 4 February 3, 2005 Tyco Electronics 3-dB SC Singlemode Fiber Optic Buildout Attenuators Reliability and Quality Assurance Program ... Table 1 (R) Required Reliability Tests Test Standard Conditions Mech. Shock EIA/TIA-455-2A Vibration EIA/TIA-455-11A 20G, 10-2,000 Hz Thermal Shock EIA/TIA-455-71 1.8 meters, 5 cycles T=100oC, 20 Sampling [LTPD] Criterion 20% R 20% R 20% R cycles MIL-STD-883-D, Method 1005, 85oC, <40%RH, 5000 hrs-qualif. 10,000 hrs-info. dynamically exercised 10% R High Temperature Storage EIA/TIA-455-5A (damp) 75oC, 90%RH 2000 hrs-qualif. 5000 hrs-info. 10% R Low Temperature Storage EIA/TIA-455-4A -40oC, 2500 hrs-qualif. 5000 hrs-info. 20% CR* Temp. Cycling EIA/TIA-455-3A or MIL-STD883D Method 1010 -40 to 75oC, 500 cycles-qualif. 1000 cycles-info. 20% R Temp./Humidity Cycling IEC 68-2-38 -40 to 75oC, 5 cycles 20% CR Salt Spray EIA/TIA-455-16A 20% CR Water Immersion EIA/TIA-455-12A 20% CR Airborne Contaminants ASTM B827-92 5 devices CR High Temperature Aging (dry) * CR indicates a Conditional Requirement that is only necessary for products intended for uncontrolled environments, except for Airborne Contaminants where CR indicates that this test applies to specific products - see Section 4. Different groups of sample devices may be used for each test or the same sample may be used for several tests, but the manufacturer must be aware that any failures due to the cumulative degradation carried over from one test to the next shall be counted as failures. The conditional requirements in ... Table 1 need only be conducted for uncontrolled environment applications. Different time and temperature combinations may be chosen by the supplier if the alternate test conditions are shown to be at least as effective as those in this document. This often involves the use of models for calculating an acceleration factor. Intrinsic failure mechanisms are defined as the type modeled by the Arrhenius relationship (such as chemical reactions or processes involving diffusion). Extrinsic failure mechanisms are characterized by Telcordia Technologies, Inc. Confidential -- Restricted Access See confidentiality restrictions on title page. 7-8 502-1198 Rev A DA-1543 Issue 1, Revision 4 February 3, 2005 Confidential -- Restricted Access Tyco Electronics 3-dB SC Singlemode Fiber Optic Buildout Attenuators Reliability and Quality Assurance Program threshold-type failures, such as those resulting from mechanical impact, bending or applied tension - in such cases, it is not appropriate to use the Arrhenius relationship. The relative humidity is another important stress factor and its acceleration factor has not been generally agreed upon in the industry. Any questions on this need to be resolved prior to any extensive reliability testing. GR-910 R7-6 [85] Technical justification of the acceleration aging factors by stresses, such as temperature, humidity, or optical power, for different testing conditions is required. Associated acceleration/deceleration factors must be clearly identified. Some of the commercially available products in the market today are not hermetically sealed. For these components, the liquid-to-liquid thermal shock test might not be appropriate. However, additional tests are recommended if these nonhermetic components are to be used in non-central office (CO) environments. GR-910 R7-7 [86] For those components with non-hermetic packages, the thermal shock test will not be required, but the damp heat testing duration must be increased to 5000 hours from the 2000 hour test for hermetic components. The object of the dry and damp heat tests is to assess the effects of temperature and humidity on the expected operating life of the component. In addition to the thermal activation energy, the presence of water vapor at an elevated temperature produces an accelerated aging effect. GR-910 R7-8 [87] If technical data are not available in support of other values, an activation energy of 0.3 eV shall be assumed for the dry heat test and an effective activation energy of 0.6 eV shall be assumed for the damp heat test. In the latter case, the higher activation energy accounts for the difference between the test's high humidity and "average" operating conditions, such that a separate term for humidity would not be included in the calculation of the acceleration factor. Manufacturers may use a different activation energy or a different model for calculating acceleration, if its use can be supported by empirical data. The empirical data must be based on reliability testing or field returns, and shall be available for review by the LECs, service providers or their representative. There is very limited information on activation energies for optical attenuators. The above values represent a conservative assumption and will be modified as more data become available. To demonstrate different acceleration models or activation energies, a matrix of multiple temperatures and humidities would provide the most thorough understanding (see GR-910 Table 7-1). However, as a minimum, or as the first tests performed, three specific sets of conditions are usually required: Telcordia Technologies, Inc. Confidential -- Restricted Access See confidentiality restrictions on title page. 502-1198 Rev A 7-9 Confidential -- Restricted Access DA-1543 Issue 1, Revision 4 February 3, 2005 Tyco Electronics 3-dB SC Singlemode Fiber Optic Buildout Attenuators Reliability and Quality Assurance Program GR-910 Table 7-1 Test Matrix for Demonstrating Acceleration Factors [Relative Humidity as a Function of Temperature and Absolute Humidity] Absolute Humidity [gm/ m3] 25 40 45 55 65 75 85 95 19.2 85 38 30 19 12 8 6 4 42.5 sat 85 67 42 27 18 12 9 sat 85 53 34 23 16 11 sat 85 55 37 25 18 sat 85 57 39 27 sat 85 58 41 211.0 90 61 43 293.0 sat 85 60 sat 85 54.0 86.0 134.0 Temperature [C] 200.0 419.0 GR-910 O7-9 [88] In order of priority, the following life tests should be performed as part of any effort to validate alternative acceleration models or activation energies: 1. High temperature damp heat = 75C, 90% RH (or 85C, 85% RH) 2. High temperature dry heat = 85C, ~ 16% RH 3. Moderate temperature damp heat = 45C, 85% RH Minimum sample size is 22 devices for each life test. Results should include estimates of median life or mean-time-to-failure (MTTF), and a "spread" parameter (e.g., standard deviation). The purpose of the temperature cycling life test is to demonstrate the long-term mechanical stability of the package. GR-910 R7-10 [89] A temperature cycle life test shall be performed in accordance with the procedures of Section 6.2.7 in GR-1221-CORE. The minimum and maximum temperatures shall be at least - 40C and + 75C. The minimum sample size is 11 devices (LTPD of 20%). Results after 500 cycles shall be used for "passing" or "failing" the test. Failures between 500 cycles and 1000 cycles shall be investigated and corrective actions shall be implemented. GR-910 R7-11 [90] Fiber pigtails and optical connectors shall comply with general flammability requirements for materials used in telecommunications systems. Detailed flammability criteria are given in GR-78-CORE and TR-NWT-000357. For packages made of metal, glass or ceramic, destructive flammability testing is not Telcordia Technologies, Inc. Confidential -- Restricted Access See confidentiality restrictions on title page. 7-10 502-1198 Rev A DA-1543 Issue 1, Revision 4 February 3, 2005 Confidential -- Restricted Access Tyco Electronics 3-dB SC Singlemode Fiber Optic Buildout Attenuators Reliability and Quality Assurance Program required. However, a statement that the module (excluding the fiber optic pigtail) will not support combustion and is capable of passing component flammability requirements2 may be requested. Flammability testing of packages having external epoxy, silicone or other organic materials is required. 7.3.2.2 Test Method (not from GR-910) 1. Verify that supplier subjects their components to mechanical/physical tests for reliability such as those described in ... Table 1 (and as described in Section 4 of this test plan which fully details the requirements and methods to be followed in the performance of mechanical/physical tests). 2. Verify that optical performance testing is included in any reliability testing, and that the test programs specify performance measurements be made both before and after the test, and that test results are analyzed against the product specific criteria documented for the particular product under test. 3. If alternate testing methods for accelerated aging, specifying alternate activation energies, then analyze and verify the technical data and rationale which justifies the use of such alternatives. Verify that a minimum of 22 samples is used as part of the justification test data. 4. Verify that for those components with non-hermetic packages, the thermal shock test is not performed (as it is not required for that case), but the damp heat testing duration has been increased to 5000 hours from the 2000 hour test for hermetic components 5. Verify that thermal cycling tests per Section 6.2.7 in GR-1221-CORE are performed and any non-conformance are documented and addressed for proposed corrective actions. 6. Verify that fiber pigtails and optical connectors comply with general flammability requirements for materials used in telecommunications systems. 2. See Section 4.4.2.5 of TR-NWT-000357. Telcordia Technologies, Inc. Confidential -- Restricted Access See confidentiality restrictions on title page. 502-1198 Rev A 7-11 Confidential -- Restricted Access Tyco Electronics 3-dB SC Singlemode Fiber Optic Buildout Attenuators Reliability and Quality Assurance Program DA-1543 Issue 1, Revision 4 February 3, 2005 7.3.2.3 Test Flowchart (not from GR-910) Verify appropriate reliability tests are performed and optical parameters measured Use test results and analysis to validate any alternative methodologies used in reliability tests Does the product meet the applicable criteria to demonstrate conformance to Section 7.3.2.1 criteria? No Document nonconformances and address corrective actions with supplier Yes Document Results and go to next criteria section TP-910 Figure 7-2 Test Flowchart - Reliability Test (not from GR-910) 7.3.2.4 Test Configuration and Conditions (not from GR-910) Not Applicable - this section requires verifying that tests are performed such as those described in Section 4 of this document. Section 4 contains the details on test configuration, conditions and apparatus appropriate to the specified tests. Telcordia Technologies, Inc. Confidential -- Restricted Access See confidentiality restrictions on title page. 7-12 502-1198 Rev A DA-1543 Issue 1, Revision 4 February 3, 2005 Confidential -- Restricted Access Tyco Electronics 3-dB SC Singlemode Fiber Optic Buildout Attenuators Reliability and Quality Assurance Program 7.3.2.5 Test Apparatus (not from GR-910) Not Applicable - this section requires verifying that tests are performed such as those described in Section 4 of this document. Section 4 contains the details on test configuration, conditions and apparatus appropriate to the specified tests. 7.3.2.6 Summary of Test Results (not from GR-910) Conformance/Nonconformance Conformance to the criteria in Section 7.3.2.1 of this document has not been met. The criteria for requirements GR-910 R7-4 [83], GR-910 R7-5 [84], GR-910 R7-6 [85], GR-910 R7-7 [86], GR-910 R7-8 [87], GR-910 O7-9 [88], GR-910 R7-10 [89] and GR-910 R7-11 [90] were not determined. Conformance is based on the verification that the supplier has subjected their components to the mechanical/physical tests for reliability as described in Section 4, verification that optical performance testing is included in any reliability testing, verification that for components with non-hermetic packages the damp heat testing duration has been increased to 5000 hours from the 2000 hour test for hermetic components, verification that thermal cycling tests per Section 6.2.7 in GR-1221-CORE are performed and that any non-conformance are documented and addressed for proposed corrective actions, and verification that fiber pigtails and optical connectors comply with general flammability requirements for materials used in telecommunications systems. If alternate testing methods for accelerated aging are used, conformance is also based on the specification of alternate activation energies as well as the analysis and verification of technical data and rationale to justify the use of such alternatives. A minimum of 22 samples must be used as part of the justification test data. Failure History Not applicable. Disposition of Nonconformance Not applicable. Test Data Not applicable. 7.3.3 Failure Rate Prediction The failure rate is an important concept and provides useful information for a reliability analysis. TR-332 contains the details on failure rate predictions. The section here provides some specific information on failure rates for optical attenuators. Telcordia Technologies, Inc. Confidential -- Restricted Access See confidentiality restrictions on title page. 502-1198 Rev A 7-13 Confidential -- Restricted Access Tyco Electronics 3-dB SC Singlemode Fiber Optic Buildout Attenuators Reliability and Quality Assurance Program DA-1543 Issue 1, Revision 4 February 3, 2005 7.3.3.1 Criteria (heading not from GR-910) GR-910 R7-12 [91] Equivalent time and temperature requirements shall be calculated using the Arrhenius relationship. Technical justification of the activation energy used for different conditions in temperature-dependent life tests is required. Acceleration models (for failure mechanisms affected by other stresses, such as optical power or humidity) shall be demonstrated (theoretically if possible and empirically). Associated acceleration/deceleration factors must be clearly identified. A common form of the Arrhenius relationship is given below: ML ( T 2 ) Ea 1- - -----1- ------------------------ = exp -------- -----k T 2 T 1 ML ( T 1 ) where T1 and T2 are the temperatures in Kelvin, ML is the median life at a given temperature, Ea is the activation energy, and k is Boltzmann's constant. To date, the use of the Arrhenius relationship for some failure mechanisms observed in passive components has not been proven. Unless the failure mechanism and associated activation energy can be identified, the data generated using the Arrhenius relationship is recognized as the best estimate. Section 7.3.2 gives default values for activation energies if empirical data are not available. GR-910 O7-13 [92] The acceleration aging factor from humidity is recommended to be assessed by the equation below. Technical justification of the derivation is required. ML ( H 2 ) n n ------------------------- = exp [ BH 1 - BH 2 ] ML ( H 1 ) where H1 and H2 are the relative humidity levels in %, ML is the median life at a given humidity, and B and n are empirical constants. GR-910 R7-14 [93] Wear-out and random failure rates and acceleration aging factors shall be provided. The sources and data shall also be provided. Telcordia Technologies, Inc. Confidential -- Restricted Access See confidentiality restrictions on title page. 7-14 502-1198 Rev A DA-1543 Issue 1, Revision 4 February 3, 2005 Confidential -- Restricted Access Tyco Electronics 3-dB SC Singlemode Fiber Optic Buildout Attenuators Reliability and Quality Assurance Program Wear-out failure rates are usually based on the aging test data obtained during the formal qualification tests. The random failure rates are difficult to be adequately determined solely based on the formal qualification testing data because these data are usually limited and do not provide adequate basis for calculation. To compensate the deficiency, pre-qualification testing data or data from other sources can be used as supplemented database to calculate the random failure rate if they are adequately documented. Additional detailed reliability prediction procedure is documented in TR-332, in which there are three prediction methods accepted. They are: Method I - parts count; Method II - combining laboratory data with parts count; and Method III - field tracking. It must be understood that adequate reliability assurance practices, as outlined in TR-NWT-000357 and other related documents, provide the foundation for failure rate predictions. Without the basic component reliability programs in design and manufacturing, some failure mechanisms that might be real in the actual field operations may not be included in the base failure rates of components contained in TR-332. Without thorough qualification, field tracking data might be misinterpreted because failure mechanisms and environment stresses are not known. And without lot-to-lot controls, the reliability of the product might have already shifted from those installed in fields. In short, failure rate predictions might be very different from reality if the basic component reliability programs are not in place at the manufacturer. In practice, the failure rate prediction for a specific product is validated during a Telcordia reliability audit, which evaluates manufacturer's reliability programs against requirements in Telcordia reliability documents. Since optical attenuators are relatively new devices to be deployed in the fiber optic networks, there is virtually no public failure rate information existing today. Besides, there is no standard end-of-life definition for laboratory life tests. Based on very limited preliminary proprietary laboratory testing results, Telcordia estimates the failure rate for optical attenuators to be in the range around 5000 FITs. As technology makes progress and more data becomes available, Telcordia believes the failure rates will come down dramatically to the range where field installation will be practical. At that time, Telcordia will update the failure rates in this document. GR-910 O7-15 [94] To simplify review (by customers or their representatives) of failure rate predictions, the format in ... Table 2 is recommended for use by device manufacturers and/or equipment suppliers. ... Table 2 (O) Sample Format for Reporting Failure Rate Predictions Item Median Life (ML) @ 40C Value years Standard Deviation () Wear-Out Failure Rate ( WO) @ 40C Wear-Out Activation Energy (Ea) FITs* eV Telcordia Technologies, Inc. Confidential -- Restricted Access See confidentiality restrictions on title page. 502-1198 Rev A 7-15 Confidential -- Restricted Access DA-1543 Issue 1, Revision 4 February 3, 2005 Tyco Electronics 3-dB SC Singlemode Fiber Optic Buildout Attenuators Reliability and Quality Assurance Program ... Table 2 (O) Sample Format for Reporting Failure Rate Predictions Item Value Basis of Predictions (field data, life test, theory) Random Failure Rate ( R) @ 40C FITs* Random Failure Activation Energy (Ea) eV Basis of Predictions (field data, life test, theory) * A FIT is a failure unit equivalent to the number of failures per billion operating hours. GR-910 R7-16 [95] The testing data and supporting evidence for ... Table 2 shall be documented and available for review at the request of a LEC, service provider or its representative. ... Table 2 is most useful if there is only one dominant failure mechanism, which might not be valid for all component designs and technologies. In addition, the failure rate might vary over time according to the failure distribution, for which there is limited data and currently no consensus candidate. In any case, ... Table 2 still provides valuable information for a reliability analysis, and therefore, the information in ... Table 2 is recommended to be provided. GR-910 R7-17 [96] Unless otherwise specified, all failures observed in qualification testing must normally be counted and must be reported, regardless of the failure mode. Omission of any failure from test results must be clearly justified and must be reviewed with the LEC, service provider or its representative. Although reliability tests are usually designed to detect one type of failure mechanism, other unexpected failure mechanisms often occur as well, and should not be excluded from the test results. Exceptions are accidental damage or extraordinary circumstances, such as a fiber pigtail that is broken due to mishandling. GR-910 O7-18 [97] ... Table 3 provides the recommended format for reporting the status of all reliability tests. ... Table 3 (O) Sample Report Format for Reliability Test Status Test* Date Completed Sample Size Number of Failures Test Passed? Mechanical Shock Vibration Thermal Shock Telcordia Technologies, Inc. Confidential -- Restricted Access See confidentiality restrictions on title page. 7-16 502-1198 Rev A Confidential -- Restricted Access DA-1543 Issue 1, Revision 4 February 3, 2005 Tyco Electronics 3-dB SC Singlemode Fiber Optic Buildout Attenuators Reliability and Quality Assurance Program ... Table 3 (O) Sample Report Format for Reliability Test Status Date Completed Test* Sample Size Number of Failures Test Passed? High Temp. Storage (Dry) High Temp. Storage (Damp) Low Temp. Storage Temp. Cycle Endurance Temp./Humidity Cycling Salt Spray Water Immersion Airborne Contaminants Completing this summary table does not relieve the manufacturer or supplier of satisfying the respective requirements for each test nor of reporting the detailed results in a comprehensive report, as described elsewhere in this test plan. GR-910 R7-19 [98] The testing data and supporting evidence for ... Table 3 shall be documented and available for review at the request of a LEC, service provider or its representative. 7.3.3.2 Test Method (not from GR-910) 1. Verify time and temperature requirements are calculated using the Arrhenius relationship. Technical justification of the activation energy used for different conditions in temperature-dependent life tests is required. 2. Verify that acceleration models are demonstrated (theoretically if possible and empirically). Associated acceleration/deceleration factors must be clearly identified. 3. Verify that acceleration aging factors from humidity are assessed by the equation shown. Technical justification of the derivation is required. 4. Verify that wear-out and random failure rates and acceleration aging factors are provided. The sources and data shall also be provided. 5. Verify that to simplify review (by customers or their representatives) of failure rate predictions, the format in ... Table 2 is used by device manufacturers and/ or equipment suppliers Telcordia Technologies, Inc. Confidential -- Restricted Access See confidentiality restrictions on title page. 502-1198 Rev A 7-17 Confidential -- Restricted Access Tyco Electronics 3-dB SC Singlemode Fiber Optic Buildout Attenuators Reliability and Quality Assurance Program DA-1543 Issue 1, Revision 4 February 3, 2005 6. Verify that the testing data and supporting evidence for ... Table 2 is documented and available for review at the request of a LEC, service provider or its representative 7. Verify that ... Table 3 is used as the format for reporting the status of all reliability tests. 7.3.3.3 Test Flowchart (not from GR-910) Verify appropriate reliability tests are performed and optical parameters measured Use test results and analysis to validate any alternative methodologies used in reliability tests Does the product meet the applicable criteria to demonstrate conformance to Section 7.3.3.1 criteria? No Document nonconformances and address corrective actions with supplier Yes Document Results and go to next criteria section TP-910 Figure 7-3 Test Flowchart - Failure Rate Prediction Test (not from GR-910) Telcordia Technologies, Inc. Confidential -- Restricted Access See confidentiality restrictions on title page. 7-18 502-1198 Rev A DA-1543 Issue 1, Revision 4 February 3, 2005 Confidential -- Restricted Access Tyco Electronics 3-dB SC Singlemode Fiber Optic Buildout Attenuators Reliability and Quality Assurance Program 7.3.3.4 Test Configuration and Conditions (not from GR-910) Not Applicable - this section requires verifying that tests are performed such as those described in Section 4 of this document and making specified calculations. Section 4 contains the details on test configuration, conditions and apparatus appropriate to the specified tests needed to support these criteria. 7.3.3.5 Test Apparatus (not from GR-910) Not Applicable - this section requires verifying that tests are performed such as those described in Section 4 of this document. Section 4 contains the details on test configuration, conditions and apparatus appropriate to the specified tests. 7.3.3.6 Summary of Test Results (not from GR-910) Conformance/Nonconformance Conformance to the criteria in Section 7.3.3.1 of this document has not been met. The criteria for requirements GR-910 R7-12 [91], GR-910 O7-13 [92], GR-910 R7-14 [93], GR-910 O7-15 [94], GR-910 R7-16 [95], GR-910 R7-17 [96], GR-910 O7-18 [97] and GR-910 R7-19 [98] were not determined. Conformance is based on the verification that the time and temperature requirements are calculated using the Arrhenius relationship, verification that the acceleration models are demonstrated, verification that the acceleration aging factors from humidity are assessed by the equation shown in O7-13 [92], verification that wear-out and random failure rates and acceleration aging factors are provided, verification that the format in ... Table 2 is used by device manufacturers and/or equipment suppliers to simplify review of failure rate predictions, verification that the testing data and supporting evidence for ... Table 2 is documented and available for review at the request of a LEC, service provider or its representative, and verification that ... Table 3 is used as the format for reporting the status of all reliability tests. Failure History Not applicable. Disposition of Nonconformance Not applicable. Test Data Not applicable. 7.3.4 Optical Adhesives Qualification of optical adhesives is covered in Section 4.3 of GR-1221-CORE. Telcordia Technologies, Inc. Confidential -- Restricted Access See confidentiality restrictions on title page. 502-1198 Rev A 7-19 Confidential -- Restricted Access Tyco Electronics 3-dB SC Singlemode Fiber Optic Buildout Attenuators Reliability and Quality Assurance Program DA-1543 Issue 1, Revision 4 February 3, 2005 7.3.5 Quality Assurance and Lot Controls Functional criteria for optical attenuators are contained in Section 4. These same parametric criteria apply to quality assurance (i.e., incoming inspection). Not all devices have to be tested against all of these parameters, as described below. 7.3.5.1 Visual Inspection 7.3.5.1.1 Criteria (heading not from GR-910) GR-910 R7-20 [99] Incoming lots of optical attenuators shall be visually inspected on at least a sample basis (to be determined in accordance with a statistical sampling plan established by the equipment supplier). GR-910 O7-21 [100] Visual inspection (or another step in lot acceptance procedures) should check at least for the following: A. Package condition B. Required documentation C. Product appearance/condition D. Product identification/marking E. Inspection of connectors or fiber-pigtails. These inspection criteria are consistent with the items that would be addressed in a quality technology review, as described in Section 7.4. 7.3.5.1.2 Test Method (not from GR-910) 1. Verify the sampling plan/sample numbers in use for the test program 2. Visually inspect incoming lots of components for adherence to the supplier documented quality processes, which in some cases may have additional specifications in accordance with product type specific criteria documents 3. Inspect and assess the following conditions: package condition, inclusion of required documentation, product appearance/condition, product identification/ marking, and inspection of connectors or fiber-pigtails. 4. Document the observations and identify any deviations from expected conditions Telcordia Technologies, Inc. Confidential -- Restricted Access See confidentiality restrictions on title page. 7-20 502-1198 Rev A DA-1543 Issue 1, Revision 4 February 3, 2005 Confidential -- Restricted Access Tyco Electronics 3-dB SC Singlemode Fiber Optic Buildout Attenuators Reliability and Quality Assurance Program 7.3.5.1.3 Test Flowchart (not from GR-1221) Determine appropriate criteria for product and verify required quality parameters addressed Inspect incoming lots of the product to for condition in accordance with quality process Does the product meet the applicable criteria to demonstrate conformance to Section 7.3.5.1.1? No Document nonconformances and address corrective actions with supplier Yes Document Results and go to next criteria section TP-910 Figure 7-4 Test Flowchart - Visual Inspection Test (not from GR-910) 7.3.5.1.4 Test Configuration and Conditions (not from GR-1221) Not Applicable 7.3.5.1.5 Test Apparatus (not from GR-1221) Not Applicable Telcordia Technologies, Inc. Confidential -- Restricted Access See confidentiality restrictions on title page. 502-1198 Rev A 7-21 Confidential -- Restricted Access Tyco Electronics 3-dB SC Singlemode Fiber Optic Buildout Attenuators Reliability and Quality Assurance Program DA-1543 Issue 1, Revision 4 February 3, 2005 7.3.5.1.6 Summary of Test Results (not from GR-1221) Conformance/Nonconformance Conformance to the criteria in Section 7.3.5.1.1 of this document has not been met. The criteria for requirements GR-910 R7-20 [99] and GR-910 O7-21 [100] were not determined. Conformance is based on the verification of the sampling plan/ sample numbers in use for the test program, visual inspection of incoming lots of components for adherence to the supplier documented quality processes, and the inspection and assessment of: package condition, inclusion of required documentation, product appearance/condition, product identification/marking, and inspection of connectors or fiber-pigtails. Failure History Not applicable. Disposition of Nonconformance Not applicable. Test Data Not applicable. 7.3.5.2 Optical Testing The full set of optical characteristics need not be measured on each device, but may be extrapolated from a representative subset of data (the manufacturer must be able to justify the subset chosen). Criteria for ship-to-stock practices are given in Section 5.1.5 of TR-NWT-000357. 7.3.5.2.1 Criteria (heading not from GR-910) GR-910 R7-22 [101] Parameters specified in Section 4 form the minimum set of optical parameters which must be guaranteed. If 100% testing for this purpose is not performed, adequate data shall be collected and a statistically justified sampling plan must be established. This sampling test program must be approved in writing from the LEC, service provider or its representative. 7.3.5.2.2 Test Method (not from GR-910) 1. Determine the appropriate specification for component performance characterization and use the test procedures from Section 4 as defined for the specified parameters. Telcordia Technologies, Inc. Confidential -- Restricted Access See confidentiality restrictions on title page. 7-22 502-1198 Rev A DA-1543 Issue 1, Revision 4 February 3, 2005 Confidential -- Restricted Access Tyco Electronics 3-dB SC Singlemode Fiber Optic Buildout Attenuators Reliability and Quality Assurance Program 2. Verify that the test procedures address optical bandpass, change in attenuation, attenuation tolerance, attenuation increments and range, reflectance and PDL, and PMD. 3. Verify that the sample size for test is at least 11 devices (LTPD of 20%), unless otherwise specified by the end user (and if otherwise specified, fully document any such deviation) 4. Analyze the characterization data obtained in accordance with the requirements specific to the product under test and verify conformance, as well as documenting any deviation from the criteria 7.3.5.2.3 Test Flowchart (not from GR-910) Determine appropriate criteria for product and verify required optical parameters addressed Verify sampling size and measured data to assure parameters within specifications Does the product meet the applicable criteria to demonstrate conformance to Section 7.3.5.2.1? No Document nonconformances and address corrective actions with supplier Yes Document Results and go to next criteria section TP-910 Figure 7-5 Test Flowchart - Optical Test (not from GR-910) Telcordia Technologies, Inc. Confidential -- Restricted Access See confidentiality restrictions on title page. 502-1198 Rev A 7-23 Confidential -- Restricted Access DA-1543 Issue 1, Revision 4 February 3, 2005 Tyco Electronics 3-dB SC Singlemode Fiber Optic Buildout Attenuators Reliability and Quality Assurance Program 7.3.5.2.4 Test Configuration and Conditions (not from GR-910) Test configuration and conditions must be verified for the specific test and applicable parameters based on Section 4. 7.3.5.2.5 Test Apparatus (not from GR-910) Test apparatus must be verified for the specific test and applicable parameters based on Section 4. Some typical types of test apparatus for the performance of characterizing optical components are provided below. Description Supplier Model Calibration Cycle Calibration Due Date. Optical Tunable Light Source Agilent 8164A 12 months - Sensor for Tunable Multimeter Agilent 81640A 12 months - Broadband Stabilized Light Source Anritsu MG 922 A 12 months - Optical Spectrum Analyzer Anritsu MS 9710 B 12 months - 7.3.5.2.6 Summary of Test Results (not from GR-910) Conformance/Nonconformance Conformance to the criteria in Section 7.3.1.1 of this document has not been met. The criteria for requirement GR-910 R7-4 [83] was not determined. Conformance is based on the verification that the test procedures address optical bandpass, change in attenuation, attenuation tolerance, attenuation increments and range, reflectance and PDL, and PMD. Conformance is also based on the verification that the sample size for testing is at least 11 devices (LTPD of 20%). Failure History Not applicable. Disposition of Nonconformance Not applicable. Test Data Not applicable. Telcordia Technologies, Inc. Confidential -- Restricted Access See confidentiality restrictions on title page. 7-24 502-1198 Rev A DA-1543 Issue 1, Revision 4 February 3, 2005 Confidential -- Restricted Access Tyco Electronics 3-dB SC Singlemode Fiber Optic Buildout Attenuators Reliability and Quality Assurance Program 7.3.5.3 Stress Screening Stress screening helps eliminate components which have any instability in the optical alignment of the components or have built-in mechanical stresses due to improper assembly operations. 7.3.5.3.1 Criteria (heading not from GR-910) GR-910 R7-23 [102] All optical attenuators shall be subjected to a temperature cycle screen. The minimum requirements consist of 10 cycles between temperature limits of at least -40C and +75C; if these are outside the component's specifications, the minimum- and maximum-specified storage temperatures shall be used. GR-910 O7-24 [103] The demonstration of the effectiveness of alternate temperature cycle conditions for screening should include first characterizing devices after the proposed number of temperature cycles and again after 10 cycles, presumably showing that no significant degradation nor additional failures occurred. The demonstration should be proved on adequate samples over multiple lots. GR-910 O7-25 [104] All optical attenuators should be subjected to a temperature humidity screen. The minimum requirement is 72 hours at +75C and 90% RH. GR-910 R7-26 [105] Optical criteria shall be measured before and after screening. Any "major" changes (as defined and documented by the equipment supplier, in addition to pass/fail criteria) shall result in rejection of a device. GR-910 O7-27 [106] The pass/fail criteria should be no more than 20% changes on the specified parameters. GR-910 O7-28 [107] The manufacturer should record the optical criteria before and after screening on a sample of components as a production audit. 7.3.5.3.2 Test Method (not from GR-910) 1. Determine the appropriate specification for component performance characterization and use the test procedures from Section 4 as defined for the specified parameters. 2. Verify that the test procedures address optical bandpass, change in attenuation, attenuation tolerance, attenuation increments and range, reflectance and PDL, and PMD. 3. Verify that temperature cycling testing is performed in accordance with the test parameters as described above. Alternatively, the criteria and test method Telcordia Technologies, Inc. Confidential -- Restricted Access See confidentiality restrictions on title page. 502-1198 Rev A 7-25 Confidential -- Restricted Access Tyco Electronics 3-dB SC Singlemode Fiber Optic Buildout Attenuators Reliability and Quality Assurance Program DA-1543 Issue 1, Revision 4 February 3, 2005 described in GR-1221, Section 6.2.7 may be used with an additional parameter measurements added after completion of 10 cycles. 4. Analyze the characterization data obtained in accordance with the requirements specific to the product under test and verify conformance, as well as documenting any deviation from the criteria 7.3.5.3.3 Test Flowchart (not from GR-910) Determine appropriate criteria for product and verify required optical parameters addressed Verify sampling size and measured data to assure parameters within spec and with adequate margin Does the product meet the applicable criteria to demonstrate conformance to Section 7.3.5.3.1 No Document nonconformances and address corrective actions with supplier Yes Document Results and go to next criteria section TP-910 Figure 7-6 Test Flowchart - Stress Screening Test (not from GR-910) Telcordia Technologies, Inc. Confidential -- Restricted Access See confidentiality restrictions on title page. 7-26 502-1198 Rev A DA-1543 Issue 1, Revision 4 February 3, 2005 Confidential -- Restricted Access Tyco Electronics 3-dB SC Singlemode Fiber Optic Buildout Attenuators Reliability and Quality Assurance Program 7.3.5.3.4 Test Configuration and Conditions (not from GR-910) Test configuration and conditions must be verified for the specific test and applicable parameters based on Section 4. 7.3.5.3.5 Test Apparatus (not from GR-910) Test apparatus must be verified for the specific test and applicable parameters based on Section 4. Some typical types of test apparatus for the performance of characterizing optical components are provided below. Description Supplier Model Calibration Cycle Calibration Due Date. Optical Tunable Light Source Agilent 8164A 12 months - Sensor for Tunable Multimeter Agilent 81640A 12 months - Broadband Stabilized Light Source Anritsu MG 922 A 12 months - Optical Spectrum Analyzer Anritsu MS 9710 B 12 months - Thermal Chamber ESPEC 12 months 7.3.5.3.6 Summary of Test Results (not from GR-910) Conformance/Nonconformance Conformance to the criteria in Section 7.3.5.3.1 of this document has not been met. The criteria for requirements GR-910 R7-23 [102], GR-910 O7-24 [103], GR-910 O7-25 [104], GR-910 R7-26 [105], GR-910 O7-27 [106] and GR-910 O7-28 [107] were not determined. Conformance is based on the verification that the test procedures address optical bandpass, change in attenuation, attenuation tolerance, attenuation increments and range, reflectance and PDL, and PMD. Conformance is also based on the verification that temperature cycling testing is performed in accordance with the test parameters described in Section 7.3.5.3.1. Failure History Not applicable. Disposition of Nonconformance Not applicable. Test Data Not applicable. Telcordia Technologies, Inc. Confidential -- Restricted Access See confidentiality restrictions on title page. 502-1198 Rev A 7-27 Confidential -- Restricted Access Tyco Electronics 3-dB SC Singlemode Fiber Optic Buildout Attenuators Reliability and Quality Assurance Program DA-1543 Issue 1, Revision 4 February 3, 2005 7.3.6 Optical Adhesives Quality assurance and incoming inspection of optical adhesives are covered in Section 4.3 of GR-1221-CORE, Generic Reliability Assurance Requirements for Fiber Optic Branching Components. 7.3.7 Optical Connectors The requirements are described in GR-326-CORE, Generic Requirements for Single-Mode Optical Fiber Connectors. 7.3.8 Optical Fiber Fiber leads on the components must be compatible with fiber used in a LEC, or service provider network. Criteria are given in GR-20-CORE, Generic Requirements for Optical Fiber and Fiber Optic Cable and GR-409-CORE, Generic Requirements for Premises Fiber Optic Cable. 7.4 Quality and Reliability Criteria The generic criteria for this section apply if a quality and reliability audit is being performed. 7.4.0.1 Criteria (heading not from GR-910) GR-910 R7-29 [108] The supplier shall, on request, make documentation available that describes: 1. The quality program used in the manufacture of the product. This shall include but not be limited to controls, procedures and standards for component reliability assurance, incoming material inspection procedures, product manufacture, in-process testing, equipment calibration and maintenance, final product inspection and testing, initial and periodic qualification testing, and control of nonconforming materials/product. The component reliability assurance program shall address vendor selection/qualification, component qualification, and lot controls (incoming inspection, source inspection, and where appropriate, ship-to-stock practices). 2. The installation, operation and maintenance of the product. 3. Support procedures for the product once it is in use. This includes items such as repair, technical assistance, training and a means of notifying the customer of problems and/or changes in the product. Telcordia Technologies, Inc. Confidential -- Restricted Access See confidentiality restrictions on title page. 7-28 502-1198 Rev A DA-1543 Issue 1, Revision 4 February 3, 2005 Confidential -- Restricted Access Tyco Electronics 3-dB SC Singlemode Fiber Optic Buildout Attenuators Reliability and Quality Assurance Program 7.4.0.2 Test Method (not from GR-910) 1. Verify that upon request, the supplier can make documentation available that describes the quality program used in the manufacture of the product, including controls, procedures and standards for component reliability assurance, incoming material inspection procedures, product manufacture, in-process testing, equipment calibration and maintenance, final product inspection and testing, initial and periodic qualification testing, and control of nonconforming materials/product. 2. Verify that the component reliability assurance program addresses vendor selection/qualification, component qualification, and lot controls (incoming inspection, source inspection, and where appropriate, ship-to-stock practices). 3. Verify that the installation, operation and maintenance documentation for the product is available 4. Verify that support procedures for in use products are available, including items such as repair, technical assistance, training and a means of notifying the customer of problems and/or changes in the product. Telcordia Technologies, Inc. Confidential -- Restricted Access See confidentiality restrictions on title page. 502-1198 Rev A 7-29 Confidential -- Restricted Access Tyco Electronics 3-dB SC Singlemode Fiber Optic Buildout Attenuators Reliability and Quality Assurance Program DA-1543 Issue 1, Revision 4 February 3, 2005 7.4.0.3 Test Flowchart (not from GR-910) Quality and reliability assurance documentation is provided by supplier Review documentation to verify inclusion of the required information Does the product conform to the criteria listed in Section 7.4.0.1? No Document nonconformances and address corrective actions with supplier Yes Document Results and go to next criteria section TP-910 Figure 7-7 Test Flowchart - Quality and Reliability Test (not from GR-910) 7.4.0.4 Test Configuration and Conditions (not from GR-910) Not applicable. 7.4.0.5 Test Apparatus (not from GR-910) Not applicable. Telcordia Technologies, Inc. Confidential -- Restricted Access See confidentiality restrictions on title page. 7-30 502-1198 Rev A DA-1543 Issue 1, Revision 4 February 3, 2005 Confidential -- Restricted Access Tyco Electronics 3-dB SC Singlemode Fiber Optic Buildout Attenuators Reliability and Quality Assurance Program 7.4.0.6 Summary of Test Results (not from GR-910) Conformance/Nonconformance Conformance to the criteria in Section 7.4.0.1 of this document has not been met. The criteria for requirement GR-910 R7-4 [83] was not determined. Conformance is based on the verification that upon request, the supplier can make documentation available that describes the quality program used in the manufacture of the product, including controls, procedures and standards for component reliability assurance, incoming material inspection procedures, product manufacture, in-process testing, equipment calibration and maintenance, final product inspection and testing, initial and periodic qualification testing, and control of nonconforming materials/ products. Conformance is also based on the verification that the component reliability assurance program addresses vendor selection/qualification, component qualification, and lot controls. Conformance is also based on the verification that the installation, operation and maintenance documentation for the product is available, as well as verification that support procedures for in use products are available, including items such as repair, technical assistance, training and a means of notifying the customer of problems and/or changes in the product. Failure History Not applicable. Disposition of Nonconformance Not applicable. Test Data Not applicable. 7.4.1 Reliability Assurance Reliability assurance criteria for fiber optic optical attenuators are contained in Section 7. These include various component qualification practices (related primarily to design reliability issues) and lot-to-lot controls, such as screening requirements (which deal mostly with manufacturing reliability). 7.4.1.1 Criteria (heading not from GR-910) GR-910 R7-30 [109] The supplier shall allow the performance of a Reliability Audit at the production facilities where the product is manufactured and assembled. Performed in much the same way as work on a transport system,3 this Reliability Audit would look at (1) predicted reliability; (2) materials, including physical design and reliability assurance of any piece parts comprising the assembled optical attenuator; (3) manufacturing and assembly; and (4) testing, including initial Telcordia Technologies, Inc. Confidential -- Restricted Access See confidentiality restrictions on title page. 502-1198 Rev A 7-31 Confidential -- Restricted Access Tyco Electronics 3-dB SC Singlemode Fiber Optic Buildout Attenuators Reliability and Quality Assurance Program DA-1543 Issue 1, Revision 4 February 3, 2005 qualification tests and routine manufacturing tests. TR-NWT-000357 contains some additional fundamental reliability assurance requirements that may be applied to optical attenuators. Additional reliability assurance activities could be developed and included in a Reliability Audit to meet the needs of a LEC or service provider.4 GR-910 R7-31 [110] The supplier shall have a program in place to monitor both the earlylife and long-term reliability of the product. The program shall include documented procedures for analysis, testing, and measurement of reliability. The reliability data shall be made available on request. 7.4.1.2 Test Method (not from GR-910) 1. Verify that supplier has authorized an onsite audit of reliability assurance practices at the manufacturing/assembling site. 2. Verify that supplier has appropriate reliability monitoring programs in place as described above. 7.4.1.3 Test Flowchart (not from GR-910) Not applicable. 7.4.1.4 Test Configuration and Conditions (not from GR-910) Not applicable. 7.4.1.5 Test Apparatus (not from GR-910) Not applicable. 7.4.1.6 Summary of Test Results (not from GR-910) Conformance/Nonconformance Conformance to the criteria in Section 7.4.1.1 of this document has not been met. The criteria for requirements GR-910 R7-30 [109] and GR-910 R7-31 [110] were not determined. Conformance is based on the verification that the supplier has authorized an onsite audit of reliability assurance practice at the manufacturing/ 3. See Special Report SR-NWT-001907, Transport Reliability Analysis Generic Requirements (TRAGG), Issue 1, October 1991. 4. See GR-1252-CORE, Quality System Generic Requirements for Hardware. Telcordia Technologies, Inc. Confidential -- Restricted Access See confidentiality restrictions on title page. 7-32 502-1198 Rev A Confidential -- Restricted Access DA-1543 Issue 1, Revision 4 February 3, 2005 Tyco Electronics 3-dB SC Singlemode Fiber Optic Buildout Attenuators Reliability and Quality Assurance Program assembling site, and verification that the supplier has appropriate reliability monitoring programs in place as described in Section 7.4.1.1. Failure History Not applicable. Disposition of Nonconformance Not applicable. Test Data Not applicable. 7.4.2 Quality Technology Program In addition to the reliability assurance criteria in Section 7 and in TR-NWT-000357, a supplier of telecommunications systems or components is expected to have a comprehensive quality assurance program in place. Detailed criteria for such a program are given in GR-1252-CORE, Quality System Generic Requirements for Hardware. Conformance to those criteria can be ascertained through a Quality System Audit or (partially) through supplier-provided data. Quality can also be assessed by "audits" of actual product or various data. 7.4.2.1 Criteria (heading not from GR-910) GR-910 R7-32 [111] The supplier's manufacturing process and associated quality assurance systems, as they relate to products covered by this document, shall be subject to periodic quality process and finished product audits. These audits may include the following: 1. The supplier providing end product test/measurement results as mutually agreed upon prior to shipment. 2. An audit of the ongoing implementation of the supplier's documented quality program. 3. Auditing a product sample when it is ready for shipment (after all supplier quality checks have been completed) for at least the following: A. Appearance/condition B. Identification/marking C. Inspection of connector plugs or adaptors D. Any or all the performance criteria in Section 4 of this document E. Packaging F. Documentation Telcordia Technologies, Inc. Confidential -- Restricted Access See confidentiality restrictions on title page. 502-1198 Rev A 7-33 Confidential -- Restricted Access Tyco Electronics 3-dB SC Singlemode Fiber Optic Buildout Attenuators Reliability and Quality Assurance Program DA-1543 Issue 1, Revision 4 February 3, 2005 Periodic product quality conformance inspection (QCI) of product samples for all of the items 3a-f shown above. The test frequency shall be once per year unless otherwise specified. 7.4.2.2 Test Method (not from GR-910) 1. Verify that suppliers quality processes and programs are subject to periodic audits for conformance. 7.4.2.3 Test Flowchart (not from GR-910) Not applicable. 7.4.2.4 Test Configuration and Conditions (not from GR-910) Not applicable. 7.4.2.5 Test Apparatus (not from GR-910) Not applicable. 7.4.2.6 Summary of Test Results (not from GR-910) Conformance/Nonconformance Conformance to the criteria in Section 7.4.2.1 of this document has not been met. The criteria for requirement GR-910 R7-4 [83] was not determined. Conformance is based on the verification that the suppliers quality processes and programs are subject to periodic audits for conformance. Failure History Not applicable. Disposition of Nonconformance Not applicable. Test Data Not applicable. Telcordia Technologies, Inc. Confidential -- Restricted Access See confidentiality restrictions on title page. 7-34 502-1198 Rev A